IASEO.us

Sponsored Video

Cora SEO Software measures 520 on-page and off-page SEO factors for your keywords

New London IA SEO

Influencer Marketing: How to Work With Influential People

Influencer Marketing: How to Work With Influential People

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you reach out to influencers? Want to create good relationships to increase your visibility and get more customers? To learn how to work with influencers, I interview Doug Karr. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview conversion expert Doug Karr, the author of Corporate Blogging for Dummies and founder of the Marketing Technology blog. Doug also co-hosts the Edge of the Web podcast. Doug will explore influencer marketing and how to work with prominent people. You'll discover how to identify and reach out to influencers, as well as develop relationships and campaigns that lead to sales. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Influencer Marketing How Doug became interested in influencer marketing After Doug got out of the Navy in 1992, he started a newspaper and did direct and database marketing. Then about 12 years ago, he started a blog. From a database marketing standpoint, Doug shares he's always been intrigued by the pockets or the gaps, and not the averages. In the direct mail days, the motto was "go after a certain age group, gender and neighborhood, and get 100% saturation." Doug found, over time, it was the smaller pockets of people who had higher conversion rates. This is true in online marketing as well. People who do SEO optimize for huge keywords with massive search volumes. Maybe they rank, but they don't get any results (meaning business) out of it. Influencer marketing is the same, in that people go after influencers. They spend a lot of money without seeing results, because they make significant errors as they select and research influencers. Doug says he tells people who are transitioning from traditional to online media that he doesn't think a lot has changed. As marketers, it's all about building trust and satisfying clients. Blogging and social media are great for that, because customers can now talk to people at different companies and get insight into their business through these channels. You build relationships virtually, then get those people to convert. Listen to the show to hear what opportunities came to Doug from blogging. How Doug defines influencer marketing Doug believes influencers are people within our industry who already have established trust with an audience. Let's say someone has an amazing audience you want to reach. The best way to get to that person's audience is to create an influencer marketing campaign and work with that influencer to help you promote your products and services. The keys are audience (find an influencer whose audience matches what you need) and reach. Determine if the influencer's reach is wide enough to make your campaign sensible from a time and money standpoint. Listen to the show to hear examples of good influencers to reach out to in the marketing and social media space. The differences among reach, popularity and influence Doug says half of the time, a company fails because they focus on reach and popularity, but not necessarily on influence. Influence is not about retweets or shares. It's about conversions. If someone makes a purchase based on a person's advice, that person is an influencer. When Doug works with an influencer, he looks at that person's target audience to see whether he or she has captivated their trust and made sales to them. One of the telltale signs that influencers are doing well is they've had the same sponsor on their site for 3 years; they don't switch them out every month. Doug also cautions that before entering into a relationshi...

How to Make Better Facebook Video Ads

How to Make Better Facebook Video Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you tried Facebook video ads? Looking for better ways to connect with your Facebook audience? Small adjustments to the way you design and target your Facebook video ads can increase your engagement and conversions. In this article you'll discover seven tips to improve your Facebook video ads. Listen to this article: #1: Tailor to Audience Preferences Rather than create content that targets a wide audience, focus on creating videos that target a specific audience segment. These videos are more likely to get clicks to your website, shares, comments and likes. For example, if your website offers several services or products, create a video for one specific product or service rather than your business in general. General videos are good for branding but not for businesses focused on direct response. You can use Facebook Audience Insights to find out who your audience is, if you aren't sure already. To access Audience Insights, log into your Facebook Ads account, click Tools and select Audience Insights from the drop-down menu. Choose the audience you want to know more about (for example, people who like your page). Analyze people who like your page, people in a remarketing list and people who are in an email list you uploaded to Facebook. Based on the data you collect about your target group, you'll get a clearer idea of the type of video to create. In the bottom left, select your Facebook page to see information on that page. From here you can explore demographics, such as age, gender, lifestyle, relationship status, education level and job title. You'll also see page likes (what pages your audience likes), where your target audience is located, how active they are on Facebook, composition of their household and more. Combine the data on each tab, and you can create a full target audience profile. For example, households with an income of $250K+ are more likely to buy luxury items, and households with many family members are more likely to purchase in bulk. #2: Capture Attention Quickly Successful videos get to the point right away. You need to catch the attention of your audience in the first 5 seconds. Here are a few ways to achieve this goal: Grab attention with a catchy start, like in this Friskies "Dear Kitten" ad. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=G4Sn91t1V4g Tell people that you can solve their specific need. Hint at what you're going to talk about. Most videos are muted unless the user clicks on the audio button. This means that you need to complement the audio with a supporting visual so the first 5 seconds help you achieve good performance. Keep in mind, too, that Facebook is a social platform, so viewers are likely to skip videos that are too commercial. #3: Create Ads That Don't Look Like Ads When users visit Facebook, they're typically taking a break or finding out what their friends are up to. They're not surfing to buy. To attract the attention of Facebook users, your ad needs to deliver its message through something unusual such as insightful information, funny content or news. This isn't easy to do, but it's the best way to create videos that achieve your goals. Depending on where your ad appears, what customers consider valuable will differ. Always' #LikeAGirl Campaign does a great job of appealing to their target audience: women. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XjJQBjWYDTs #4: Keep Runtime and the Message in Mind Lengthy videos aren't as effective as shorter ones because people are more likely to stop watching them. Many online advertisers recommend that you create videos that are about 30 seconds long. If your video is particularly entertaining and builds value for users, you might be able to go up to 2 minutes long. There are a few cases where long videos might work. For example, users already know your brand and like your content. Also, if the video is useful or entertaining,

6 Instagram Tools to Improve Your Marketing

6 Instagram Tools to Improve Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to take your Instagram marketing to the next level? Have you considered using tools to support your efforts there? Adding the right Instagram tools into your marketing flow can help you project a more professional image and give you valuable analytic insights. In this article you'll discover six tools to improve your Instagram marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Filter Your Images for a Signature Look The first step to any successful Instagram account is to tell your company's story. Your images are a reflection of your business, and you want them to appeal to your target audience on an emotional level. It's important to have a cohesive look to your images that unifies your brand assets. One tool that can help with that is A Color Story. This app makes it easy to fine-tune your photos and give them a more professional look before posting them to Instagram. The app's filters will help enhance your images and make them pop; they won't overexpose them or make them look grainy. You can use the app's five basic filters for free or buy all of the filters for $7.99. It's best to stick to one (or two) filters to give your photos a consistent look. Choose an attractive filter that unifies all of the images you post to Instagram. Tip: Avoid posting images on Instagram that are unrelated to your business or the story you want it to tell. #2: Embed Your Instagram Feed for More Visibility You want your Instagram feed to get in front of your target audience as much as possible. One way to do that is to embed it on your website or blog with a tool like SnapWidget. Embedding your feed on your site gives you free advertising and social real estate. You can also use this opportunity to ask website visitors to follow your account on Instagram. With SnapWidget, you can opt for a grid layout, slideshow, or photo map that lets users explore the places you've Instagrammed. Once you add the code to your website or blog, SnapWidget will automatically pull the latest photos from your Instagram account, and it will continue to update on your site automatically. #3: Share Photos From Other Instagram Accounts If you want to have a successful Instagram feed, it's important to develop a supporting, sharing, and engaging community. This is one of the best things you can do for your business. If you interact with and support other Instagram users, they'll likely reciprocate your actions and become active and engaged followers. Sharing other users' photos is an excellent way to build relationships with your followers and within your industry. Repost for Instagram, available for iOS and Android, makes it easy to repost Instagram images from other accounts and share their stories while giving them credit on your feed. This lets you develop relationships and at the same time share relevant and interesting images with your followers. #4: Schedule Your Instagram Posts Even though Instagram is life on the go, sometimes life gets in the way. You can't always be glued to your phone and occasionally you need a few days off from the world of social posting. Maintain an active presence online with a tool like ScheduGram. This web-based tool lets you post immediately to your Instagram account or schedule posts for later. You can manage multiple Instagram accounts so you don't have to keep logging in and out of individual accounts. You can also grant access to multiple users so everyone on your team will have access to your Instagram posting schedule. #5: Track the Performance of Your Instagram Content You want to have a strategy behind every Instagram post. Are you trying to drive people to like your photo, leave a comment, or check out your website? Once you identify clear goals for your Instagram marketing, it's important to monitor your analytics to see if you're meeting those goals. Use an Instagram analytics tool like Iconosquare to track your stats so you can see if your marketing tactics...

Video Authenticity: How to Perform On-Camera

Video Authenticity: How to Perform On-Camera

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to connect with your audience via video? Looking for tips to convey confidence and authority? To explore how to improve your on-camera performance, I interview David H. Lawrence XVII. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview David H. Lawrence XVII, an actor and professional voice artist. You may recognize him as the Puppet Master from the TV show Heroes. He specializes in audio and video communication and his course is called Camera Ready U, where he helps actors and marketers with their on-camera performances. David explores ways to be yourself in front of the camera. You'll discover how to prepare for a video performance. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Video Authenticity David's Story David started as a voiceover talent and moved into on-camera work. In both cases, after David found success, people asked him how he achieved that success. At events such as Social Media Marketing World, David talked about simple things people can do on-camera to be authoritative or authentic. For instance, he talks about how to hold your hands, what to do with your eyes, or how to hold your posture. After speaking, David would be mobbed by people asking about his course, so he decided to create one. As David developed his course, he discovered he knew so much more than he realized about his area of expertise. David created an inventory of all of the things he knew and that became the Camera Ready U curriculum. The same thing happened with voiceovers. David started by teaching commercials and ultimately created 36 different classes for VO2GoGo, covering not just the art of voiceover, but also the business and technology aspects. Listen to the show to discover how long David has been in the entertainment industry. Least Important Factors for Video Videos don't have to be perfect. Comb your hair, brush your teeth, put on makeup, wear your cool outfit, and whatever else you need to establish your base. After you do that, the key is not to be a better version of yourself, but your most authentic self with all of your flaws. That's what makes you human. Don't kick yourself if you flub a word or don't remember to turn your shoulder. People will connect with you when you're simply being yourself. And you can't be yourself when you're constantly trying to be that better version of yourself. The notion of perfection gets in the way of being real. Also, your equipment doesn't matter. If you want to get very artsy, you might need a more expensive camera. But you don't even need to buy a camera. You can start vlogging immediately with your smartphone. You may need to add a light, but you can simply set up a table lamp. Plus, you might want to get a $20 lavaliere microphone from Amazon. And that's it. You can do whatever you want with that minimal setup. Listen to the show to hear David and me discuss how people can hold themselves back with an "I can't until I..." mentality. Authenticity On-Camera Have you ever watched a video and thought, "This guy's a bag of wind" or "She's fake"? It's because they've spent too much time trying to present and too little time being themselves. The people viewers connect with most often are those who seem down to earth and genuinely interested in the subject. When you stop worrying about how you look and sound, you can start thinking about the content. And when you can focus on your content, viewers feel you're speaking to them. You make a connection. When you're completely interested, immersed, and can't wait to help people with their needs, your authenticity meter goes through the roof.

4 Ways to Promote Your Event With Social Media

4 Ways to Promote Your Event With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have an upcoming event? Want to get the word out about dates and ticket sales? Promoting your event with social media lets you create awareness, visibility and community. In this article you'll discover four ways to promote your event on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Use Double-Side Referral Programs to Offer Discounts Companies like Uber, Dropbox and Airbnb use double-sided referral programs that connect to social media, turning their customers into promoters. You can harness the power of similar social referral programs to sell tickets for your event. To put this strategy to work, provide ticket buyers with a trackable link to share with their social media followers and email contacts. Event attendees know who is most likely to buy a ticket within their network of contacts, and can target those people organically through social media or via a direct channel like email or text. If someone they shared the link with ends up buying a ticket, both parties will receive a small discount. Double-sided referral programs are one of the best ways to incentivize attendees to promote your event, and in doing so, attendees will be expanding your event's social media reach as well. There are a few platforms that can make it easy to implement a double-sided referral program. For example, Genius Referrals is a great tool for constructing such a program. Bizzabo also offers a social media referral system tool called Ticket Boost that is specifically designed to help event organizers sell more tickets via a double-sided referral system. #2: Create Community on LinkedIn Create an industry-specific community for your event on LinkedIn. Not only does a community provide valuable insights for you, but it can also be a value-added resource for event attendees. LinkedIn is a great platform for creating powerful networking groups, since attendees likely already use the social network to expand business connections and learn work-related best practices. LinkedIn groups can also help you sell tickets. Consider making the group public and invite past event attendees along with qualified prospects to join your new group. By doing this, you can turn past event attendees into a marketing asset. They can discuss their experiences at previous events and help convert potential ticket buyers. To further promote an event-specific group, be sure to post an announcement to existing LinkedIn groups that are comprised of members who might benefit from joining. Consider inviting event attendees to the next year's LinkedIn group right after your event ends. Attendees who have your event fresh in their minds are more likely to join next year's community than if you were to wait a year to promote it. #3: Maintain a Industry-Specific Blog Good content has the power to keep past attendees engaged with your event, and at the same time, attract new attendees who discover your content via search engines or social media channels. Create an event blog with tips and tricks about topics in your industry. Providing valuable content will help increase your social media reach and bring qualified visitors to the event website. Sales Hacker hosts a series of conferences for salespeople. While operating these events throughout the year, the company also maintains an excellent blog with resources to benefit past or current attendees and attract new attendees. Sales Hacker's consistently helpful blog content motivates loyal readers to sign up for email updates. That makes it easier for the company to promote upcoming events, since they likely have a large number of engaged email subscribers to reach out to. As an added benefit, creating original content for a blog provides you with excellent resources to share on the social media platforms you're using to promote your event. By providing helpful resources, you'll build a base of loyal followers who will be receptive to learning more about ...

Ranger TX SEO | Search Engine Marketing in Texas

by Martin Hosner @ Search Engine Marketing Company

WE ARE Ranger SEO DOES YOUR Ranger TX BASED BUSINESS NEED MORE LEADS? Fill Out Our Discovery Form We are a leading search engine optimization in Ranger, Texas (ZIP: 76470). We have helped a lot of local businesses grow their revenue by ranking their website #1 in Google, Yahoo & Bing search engines. This is […]

GOING GLOBAL: SIX TIPS FOR MARKETING YOUR BUSINESS ON THE INTERNATIONAL STAGE

by Philip Walimaa @ Hawthorne | Brand Response TV + Digital + Media + Mobile + Social

Marketers are increasingly looking to the global landscape to open new revenue streams, expand access to talent, diversify, and gain exposure to global investments for the businesses they support. In fact, the latest World Bank data states a whopping 58 percent of global gross domestic product (GDP) is related to foreign trade. And while global commerce used to be about major multinational companies trading goods, e-commerce and digital globalization have broadened that reach to encompass developing countries and billions of individuals,

The post GOING GLOBAL: SIX TIPS FOR MARKETING YOUR BUSINESS ON THE INTERNATIONAL STAGE appeared first on Hawthorne | Brand Response TV + Digital + Media + Mobile + Social.

Facebook Groups: How to Nurture a Community on Facebook

Facebook Groups: How to Nurture a Community on Facebook

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a Facebook group for your community? Are you considering starting a Facebook group? To learn how to use a Facebook group to build a loyal community that helps your business, I interview Jared Easley. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jared Easley, host of the Starve the Doubts podcast and co-author of Podcasting Good to Great. He's also co-founder of the Podcast Movement, the industry-leading conference for podcasters. In this episode Jared will explore how he uses Facebook groups to cultivate an active community of podcasters. You'll discover the benefits of building a Facebook group, as well as tips for getting started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Groups How Jared's podcasting conference got started In January 2014 Jared and co-founders Dan Franks, Gary Leland and Mitch Todd were at New Media Expo when they overheard several attendees asking why there wasn't a podcast conference. The group realized if they didn't take a step to create something, someone else would. They decided to move forward, even though there were plenty of things that could have prevented them from even getting started. Jared explains how they reached out to a few people who had put on large events, and asked for their perspective and advice. One person who gave them a lot of feedback was Phillip Taylor, who does a conference for financial bloggers. Armed with information, they turned to Kickstarter to crowdfund the conference. They just needed a small amount ($11,000) to validate the idea, and they weren't sure if it would take 30 days to raise the money or if they'd even get it at all. They asked the podcast community if they would support the conference, speak at it and share it with their network. A lot of people said yes, Jared shares, "but it's one thing to say yes and it's another thing to vote with your wallet." When the campaign was published, they hit that $11,000 within 9 hours. At the end of the 30 days, they had over three times the amount needed, which was more than enough validation to sell tickets, pursue sponsors and follow through. Six hundred people came to the first Podcast Movement Conference. Listen to the show to hear more about the Podcast Movement Kickstarter campaign. Why Jared started a Facebook group The Podcast Movement created a Facebook page so they could do ads and other promotions leading up to the conference, but they didn't initially have a Facebook group. Although they went to other podcast-focused Facebook groups to spread the word, they had to be careful, because some of the groups had a smart but strict policy on self-promotion. As soon as the first event was over, there was so much excitement that they realized they needed to create a way for the attendees to continue conversations. That's when Jared and his co-founders started the Facebook group. Not even a year later, the group has 1,600 members and is growing every month. The group is called Podcast Movement - Past, Present, and Future Attendees, so it's open to all past and potential attendees. This way, anyone who is interested in podcasting can be involved in the community and the conversations. Listen to the show to learn the original intent of the group. How the two Facebook communities have helped Jared's business The Podcast Movement group and page have served two different purposes. The Facebook page has been essential for Facebook ads and for getting the word out to people who might not already know about the conference.

Santa Elena TX SEO | Online Marketing in Texas

by Martin Hosner @ Search Engine Marketing Company

WE ARE Santa Elena SEO DOES YOUR Santa Elena TX BASED BUSINESS NEED MORE LEADS? Fill Out Our Discovery Form We are a leading search engine optimization in Santa Elena, Texas (ZIP: 78591). We have helped a lot of local businesses grow their revenue by ranking their website #1 in Google, Yahoo & Bing search […]

Thought Leadership: How to Become Known to People Who Matter

Thought Leadership: How to Become Known to People Who Matter

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to be recognized as an expert in your field? Wondering how to make a name for yourself? To explore how to become known, I interview Mark Schaefer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Mark Schaefer, a prolific blogger, author, and speaker. He's written Social Media Explained, The Content Code, and The Tao of Twitter. He's also been a frequent guest on this podcast. His newest book is KNOWN: The Handbook for Building and Unleashing Your Personal Brand in the Digital Age. Mark shares how to position yourself as a thought leader. You'll discover the four things it takes to become known. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Thought Leadership How Mark Became Known Before Mark launched his business, he was a global director of ebusiness at a Fortune 100 company. He had won a bunch of awards and had seven patents, a big global team, stock options, and a company car. After he left that job to start his business, Mark realized everything that he was known for at his previous company no longer mattered. He thought he was known, but he wasn't. As Mark grappled with being the go-to guy for nothing, he learned the only thing that matters in terms of your online presence is to be known. Being known isn't about being famous, but having an appropriate digital presence to help you achieve your goals. Mark says that building expertise and becoming known is a process. Nine years ago, as Mark started to teach and write for his own business, he struggled. Like everyone else, he started at the bottom. For instance, when Mark started blogging, he didn't know anything about it. Later on, Mark wrote a book about blogging. When he started consulting, he knew very little about it, but now he consults for big companies. Mark emphasizes that to start, you don't have to be an expert. You only need to be open and willing to learn continuously. I ask Mark what helped him become known again in the second phase of his career as he was building his own business. Mark says his goals, one of which was speaking at Social Media Marketing World, helped, but enjoying the journey was also important because becoming known takes time. Mark says some people set milestones that unknowingly let other people validate their work. However, as he was interviewing known people for his recent book, they often mentioned the positive impact they have on others. Mark believes this sense of mission is important because it defines who they are from within and motivates them as they put in the time necessary to become known. Listen to the show to discover how many years it takes to become known. What Prompted the Book Mark explains the two seeds that led to him write KNOWN. As research for his last book, The Content Code, Mark interviewed Jay Baer. They debated whether just anybody can become known or if you need a certain "it" factor. For three and a half years, this question stayed with Mark and he began wondering whether becoming known involved a process that he could define. The other seed, Mark explains, came from his conversations with consulting clients. People from all over the world ask Mark questions like, "How do I get in a position where I can write a book someday?" "How do I get in a position where I can be a speaker someday?" "How do I get appointed to a board?" "How do I attract more clients in my industry?" "How do I become regarded as a voice of authority?" Mark found himself giving the same answer over and over again: "To do that, you have to be known.

3 Ways to Use Psychology in Your Social Media Marketing

3 Ways to Use Psychology in Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to connect with fans on a deeper level? Have you thought about using psychology in your marketing? Implementing basic psychological marketing principles in your social media activities can help you attract, engage, and form emotional bonds with your target audience. In this article, you'll discover three ways to use psychology in your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Give Gifts to Encourage Responses If you give people something they find valuable, they'll typically feel indebted to you. To incorporate this neuromarketing tactic in your social media marketing, you can offer a small gift like a discount, free trial, or free resource guide to your fans. Whatever you decide to offer, the goal is to answer the question: "What's in it for me?" On their Facebook page, Spanish soccer club Real Madrid recently offered free shorts with the purchase of a kid's shirt from the team's official store. In just an hour, the post received over 16,000 reactions and 63 shares. Although Real Madrid's massive Facebook following played a role in the success of their offer, this tactic can help drive engagement for businesses of all sizes. If you don't have the luxury of spending money on giveaways, you can drive engagement using free gifts. Anytime Fitness offered their Facebook followers a free downloadable calendar to plan their activity in and out of the gym and track progress toward their fitness goals. To use the reciprocity tactic on your social channels, take a closer look at your audience to better understand what they like and expect. Figure out what compels them to engage and come up with an offer that they're likely to share with friends. Offer something that's valuable to your audience while ensuring that they give you something in return. For example, give a 5% discount or a free trial of your product to anyone who shares and comments on your post. Or host a giveaway contest in which followers with the most shares and social media engagement receive a free product. In the tweet below, users are offered a free design course in exchange for being a beta tester and providing feedback on the course. Users can reciprocate by clicking on the link to apply. They might also want to share the good news with their Twitter followers, which is a form of engagement. The idea behind the reciprocity tactic is to compel the action of engaging with your brand by making people feel obligated to you. While you can't offer a giveaway every day, you can always post useful, shareworthy information related to your business. For example, if you're in the fitness industry, share articles and tips about exercise and healthy eating. #2: Use Emotional Triggers to Create Authentic Connections Connecting with your audience is one of the most basic ways to increase your social media engagement. This neuromarketing tactic makes use of the emotional reaction that's triggered when people feel connected to you. When people feel close to you and can relate to you, there's a great chance they'll engage with your company. To form an emotional connection, you need to start interacting with followers in a meaningful way. Laughter is one of the most effective tools for forming a strong emotional bond with people. Like Chipotle does here, you can use wit and humor to connect with your Twitter followers. The Mexican grill has a deep understanding of their target audience and the kind of humor they'll likely appreciate. This helps them avoid using humor that their followers might find offensive or lame. Chipotle also posts humorous replies to tweets from their fans. Your tweets can show enthusiasm toward your products with the right mix of humor. This works well for driving social media engagement. Here's how you can pull off this neuromarketing tactic to connect with your fans: Study your audience to see what kind of humor they like.

How to Win With Pinterest Contests

How to Win With Pinterest Contests

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you considered running a Pinterest contest? Looking for tools to help? Pinterest contests can increase your followers, boost engagement, and promote your brand and products. In this article, you'll discover how to easily host and manage a winning contest on Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Choose a Contest Management Tool Pinterest contests can be challenging to run, simply because they're hard to keep up with. Fortunately, Pinterest contest apps can make the process significantly easier. Some apps will even create landing pages to capture valuable lead information (like email addresses and phone numbers) that users otherwise wouldn't likely submit on a social media platform. If you're going to host a Pinterest contest, here are three apps you may want to try. Wishpond Wishpond has a user-friendly interface and features a lot of great tools for customizing your contest to fit your needs. Wishpond's contest app allows you to create "entry galleries" where other users can vote on their favorite pins or boards that have been entered into the contest. Users can do this by submitting their email addresses, providing an additional way to capture lead information. Other features allow you to choose customizable landing page templates, add a countdown to your landing page to increase urgency (and entries), and access analytics to see views, conversions, and conversion rates. You can also share entry forms on Facebook and Twitter. The landing page is designed to be both desktop- and mobile-friendly. You can preview the landing page and entry forms while creating them. The Wishpond contest app features the ability to have two different periods (or sections) of the contest: one period allows entries and another only allows voting on the entries. Wishpond offers a free trial, so you can see if the software is right for you. The basic plan, which includes social promotions, starts at $45 per month. PromoJam PromoJam's Pin-It-to-Win-It promotions app makes it easy to run a Pinterest contest. It can take as little as 10 minutes to get your contest up and running. With PromoJam's Pinterest contest app, you can create an SEO-optimized URL for your landing page. Choose from a variety of stunning and fully customizable landing page templates. This landing page converts into a confirmation page once users have submitted their entry. Other PromoJam features include the ability to share customized QR codes for your contest, view analytics and user entries as the contest progresses, add social plugin buttons (like a Facebook like option) to your campaign, and use a random winner selection tool. To use PromoJam's Pinterest contest app, you need to upgrade to the pro plan, which costs $249.99 a month, and allows you to collect up to 10,000 user submissions. Woobox Woobox is another amazing contest app that's used by brands like Fisher-Price, Crayola, and Shopify. Woobox's Pinterest contest features let you collect email addresses, allow unlimited entries or only one per user, create tabs for Facebook pages, create HTML entry forms, add an age restriction, and require users to follow you to enter (users must follow you on Pinterest for contest eligibility). Woobox has a free plan and trial, so you can get a feel for the interface before you purchase. To access all of the social promotion apps continually, including the Pin to Win app, you'll need to upgrade to a paid plan. The basic plan starts at $30 per month. #2: Pick a Contest Type At a first glance, it seems like the easiest way to host a Pinterest contest would be to ask users to repin a specific pin. That would be easy to track and easy for users to participate. However, it's not a valid option. You're not allowed to ask users to pin one specific pin. Here are some other options to consider. Require Pinners to Use a Specific Hashtag

Becoming a Media Company: How to Turn Your Business Into a Platform

Becoming a Media Company: How to Turn Your Business Into a Platform

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use content to capture the attention of consumers? Are you wondering how to reach out to a larger audience? To learn about how any business can become a media outlet, I interview Michael Brito for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Michael Brito, author of Smart Business, Social Business and his latest book, Your Brand: The Next Media Company. Michael shares the reasons why your business should become a media outlet. You'll learn the five characteristics behind a successful media company and how to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Becoming a Media Company Why you should become "the media" Historically the media has always captured the attention of consumers. Successful media companies produce great content and Michael says that brands need to think the same way. If you think about traditional media companies such as Condé Nast, it has a very diverse story and narrative. No matter what the subject is, a consistent story is shared across paid, earned and owned media. When you start to dissect what they do at Condé Nast, they are actually storytellers. As a brand, you need to figure out what story you want to tell and then figure out how to tell it. It's not just for social platforms, but across every form of the customer experience. This can include paid advertising. You have to think of every customer touch point for your business. Media companies are very good at having a consistent story across each touch point. You'll hear how brands have a lot of power within their own companies to tell a story. You just need to figure out the right operational framework to make it come to life. Listen to the show to find out what Forbes did that started to grab Michael's attention 3-4 years ago. Businesses that have become media via their content and platform Michael gives an example of a brand in the consumer space, B2B space and small business space. A company that's in the consumer space is Red Bull. Red Bull is definitely a media company that has a very diverse narrative, and it's not about energy drinks. It's more to do with epic events and empowerment. It's another brand that is consistent across all channels. Red Bull has its own in-house media agency that creates compelling content day in and day out, with the consistent message, "Red Bull Gives You Wings." When Red Bull helped Felix Baumgartner do a space dive, the brand was mentioned for months after the event. The story was told through visual content and long-form content, both paid and owned media. You'll hear why Michael believes that brands should capitalize on long-form content. Intel, a company in the B2B space, capitalized on its employees' passion for Intel's products. Today it's referred to as brand journalism. Consumers trust employees of a company, which especially helps when it comes to purchases. The small business example is a company based in San Francisco called Visage that does enterprise mobility software. Its Chief Mobility Officer blog talks about enterprise mobility and not about the company. Some of the writers are on staff and others are outside contributors. The story affects the way consumers view the brand. It's all value-added content to help non-consumers solve their problems. Michael says this is how brands need to think. Listen to the show to find out why long form is so powerful for any brand or company.

The London Film School

by Drew @ London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies

One of my New Year’s resolutions was to make this site less blatantly self promotional, but I just received this great feedback (sorry!): The London Film School attracts global customers and does so on a marketing shoestring. While looking for someone to support online campaigns, Drew’s personable and expert approach stood head and shoulders above... Continue reading

The post The London Film School appeared first on London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies.

23 Tools and Tips for Social Media Marketers

23 Tools and Tips for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you need to streamline your daily social media tasks? Looking for tools to increase visibility? The right apps can make a world of difference in the life of a busy social media marketer. In this article you’ll discover 23 of the top tools and tips shared on the Social Media Marketing podcast. Listen to this article: #1: BuzzSumo Chrome Extension The BuzzSumo Chrome extension shows you the share counts on any site you are on for all of the different social networks, including Twitter, which recently shut off the API that allowed third-party tools to collect Twitter counts on articles. If you want to track the number of shares a piece of content gets on Twitter, this plugin will reveal that data for you. There are a couple of other cool features that let you view which Twitter users shared a page you're tracking, the backlinks pointing to that page and other content from the page's author. You can also see some of the most shared content on that site and even analyze the website. The BuzzSumo Chrome extension is free but requires a free or paid BuzzSumo account. #2: Scannable by Evernote Scannable by Evernote lets you use your mobile device to take a picture of a document when you don't have a scanner. Pull up the app, hover the camera over anything (such as a piece of paper or a business card) and it automatically scans and crops it. Hold it over a business card, and like magic it scans the card without pushing any buttons. Afterward, it asks if you want to add the person as a contact. If your Evernote is connected with LinkedIn, it will create a contact and pull in their data from LinkedIn. Scannable is a free iOS app. #3: SumoRank SumoRank.com analyzes the rank and content of your Facebook page. For example, we tried it with the Social Media Examiner Facebook page. It told us our most popular post type, as well as our most popular day of the week and the most popular time to post. SumoRank shows monthly interactions and the average engagement per post type to give you a feel for whether video, link or image posts get more engagement. It even analyzes the engagement based on the number of characters inside the post, so you can determine whether short posts have higher engagement than longer posts. Plus, review your top posts over a period of time. SumoRank is a free tool. #4: Reverse Image Search on Google Have you ever seen an image on social media or on a blog and wonder where you've seen it before? Ever come across a saved image on your computer and want to know where you found it? Use Google's reverse image search to find out. Go to Images.Google.com, drag an image into the search box or paste in a URL for an image, and Google will show you other images that are exactly like or similar to that image. Easily find the origin of any image. Google reverse image search is a free resource. #5: Trello Trello is a project management system that integrates with Dropbox and Google Drive. The tool lets you create boards, cards with tasks on them to assign a deadline, lists and more. Plus, you can @tag people involved with the project. Each person assigned a particular task can leave comments, attach notes and drag in images. When Trello is open in your web browser or if you have the app on your mobile device, you immediately get an alert whenever you're tagged on something. Act on it immediately and you won't even receive an email. Trello is a free tool. #6: Reader View and Reader There are a few different ways to make it easier to read your favorite website on your desktop. Open Firefox's Reader View and click on what looks like an open book in the URL bar to remove graphics from a page's sidebar, and change the font size and the background color. Safari's Reader offers similar options. Either feature lets you quickly consume a long article without being distracted by things like animated ads and other chaos that you often see on ...

7 Year Freelancer Anniversary & Shout Outs

by Drew @ London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies

March 1st is my freelancing anniversary (seven years now), but as the saying goes – behind every great SEO, there’s usually some fantastic support. Mine comes mostly in the form of one Deborah Sutton, who has been providing me with amazing copy for over five years. Deb writes pitch-perfect outreach blog posts, and has worked on... Continue reading

The post 7 Year Freelancer Anniversary & Shout Outs appeared first on London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies.

New Digital Marketing Projects (Charity Edition)

by Drew @ London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies

A quick update  – it’s always great working with new charities, and I’ve started exciting projects recently with Breaking Barriers and The King’s Fund: And I also spoke at the Digital Charities SEO meetup last week, which was super fun.

The post New Digital Marketing Projects (Charity Edition) appeared first on London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies.

Launching Products: Lessons From Mistakes and Pushing Boundaries

Launching Products: Lessons From Mistakes and Pushing Boundaries

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Thinking of launching a product, service or even a company? Want ideas of what to do and what not to do? In this special episode, we're going to talk about how to push the boundaries when you launch. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. We're recording literally days prior to Social Media Marketing World 2015. I'm joined by Leslie Samuel, one of our senior managers who I've been working with since the fall. We're going to explore how to launch products and learn lessons from experience and a lot of mistakes. You'll get a behind-the-scenes look at what we do at Social Media Examiner to launch a product. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Launching Products My experience launching As an entrepreneur for the last 19 years, I'm constantly reinventing myself and launching new products. In the last five and a half years or so, I have launched the Social Media Success Summit, Social Media Examiner, the Facebook Success Summit, the Small Biz Success Summit, the Content Marketing Success Summit, our now defunct networking clubs, this podcast, Social Media Marketing World, the Social Media Examiner Show, My Kids' Adventures, the Parenting Adventures podcast, my book Launch and more. Every time we launch something, it’s a completely new experience. Listen to the show to hear what I learned when I worked at Sharper Image. Lessons from failed launches I'll share what happened with My Kids' Adventures. In July 2013 we launched a website designed to help busy parents do fun activities with their kids. I shut it down a year and a couple months later. I learned when you launch something in a space that you do not have a lot of experience in, you need to do more research than I did. My research process prior to launching My Kids' Adventures included going to the library and to book stores and identifying popular blogs. While we made assumptions based on what we saw everyone else doing, we didn’t test whether our target audience (busy, working professionals) had the time to read, consume, do and share our content, even though they may have had the desire to do so. Ways to test these assumptions would have been to go to trade shows attended by my target audience and talk to them or do a joint survey with a big website in that space to gather data. One thing I learned was sometimes it’s better to go deep in a space where you are already successful than to try to go wide into a space where you don’t know anything. There are so many niches where people have developed some success. They hear the word pivot and decide to dive into something new. Instead of doing that, the better thing to do is figure out something new that still fits with your existing audience. The hardest thing in the world is to create an audience. And you can’t launch a product if you do not have an audience. Listen to the show to learn the biggest mistake I made when I launched My Kids' Adventures.  The Phases of a Product Launch The research and definition phase Whenever I get a new idea for a product, it starts with a spark in my brain. One of the first things I do is talk through my idea with people I trust to see whether or not my vision is crazy. I have these crazy ideas about every two months, and the vast majority of them never turn into anything. After talking to a lot of people, and justifying why I thought this newest venture would be successful for busy marketers, I came up with a list of assumptions to test. Last fall, I put together a readers’ survey.

How to Use Social Media for Crowdfunding Campaigns

How to Use Social Media for Crowdfunding Campaigns

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you launching a crowdfunding campaign? Want to use social media to promote it? To reach your goals, you'll need to use social media before, during and after your campaign. In this article you'll discover how to use social media to achieve crowdfunding success. #1: Choose Social Channels for the Campaign When you plan a crowdfunding campaign, focus on the social channels that will provide the most impact. To pick the right channels, consider these questions: • On which channel do you have the most followers? • Where do your prospects converse and share? • What people have the greatest influence in your community? • Which platform are you most comfortable with? Listen to this article: For most crowdfunding campaigns, the right channels will typically be Facebook and Twitter, because they reach the most people and encourage the most interactivity. But also take into account where you're most active socially and on which platforms your community is talking. Instagram is becoming increasingly popular, and LinkedIn may be more appropriate if your campaign caters to a professional audience. #2: Select a Campaign Hashtag Create a unique hashtag for your crowdfunding campaign and use it in all of your social media posts. This allows you to organize the posts into one topic page. With all of the conversations in one place, people can easily find them and learn more about your crowdfunding campaign. Encourage your supporters and donors to use the hashtag as well. This helps you keep track of what people are saying about your campaign and draw in new people unfamiliar with it. Shower Strike, a crowdfunding campaign for clean water, includes the hashtag #showerstrike in their social media posts. In addition, Shower Strike supporters and followers use the hashtag in their posts, which helps drive easier discovery on social media and more brand awareness. Choose hashtags that are unique, short and catchy. If you get enough mentions of the hashtag, you might even start trending. #3: Leverage Community Through Facebook Your community is the most powerful asset for meeting your crowdfunding goals. Your followers help you reach new audiences, drive donations and create social proof. Rather than rely on only your existing Facebook network, amplify your reach by creating a Facebook page for the campaign. Create a Facebook Page A campaign-specific Facebook page is a central place to host the true believers in your community and post updates without diluting your existing brand or outreach. The Gauntlet, a crowdfunding campaign by Mox Boarding House, created a Facebook page to engage a core group of advocates within their community. Your Facebook page can be a place to deliver campaign news to advocates and backers so they can share it, comment on it and take action. You can also share content on this page (or from this page) with your existing brand page. If you're running a crowdfunding campaign for a personal project or you want to keep your community more private, you can use a Facebook group or event instead. A Facebook page is typically better suited for larger communities. Explore Facebook Page Insights Every Facebook page comes with page Insights. These analytics enable you to see the performance of your page based on likes, reach, engagement (comments, shares, etc.) and demographics. Use this data to determine what's working on your page and what you need to adjust. In addition, look at the composition of your campaign followers so that you can craft content that appeals to your demographic. Engage With Your Audience It's important to use a push-pull technique when creating your Facebook posts. Take the time to write engaging posts that entice your community to respond. In addition, keep pushing updates to your community. Your fans will appreciate your keeping them informed when the campaign hits important milestones,

9 Google Analytics Tips to Improve Your Marketing

9 Google Analytics Tips to Improve Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Google Analytics? Are you leveraging the many apps that work with Google Analytics? Integrating data from third-party tools, plugins and platforms with Google Analytics helps you gain insight about your online marketing efforts. In this article I'll share nine tips to help you get more out of Google Analytics. Listen to this article: You can also subscribe via RSS, Stitcher and iTunes. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. #1: Add Google Analytics to WordPress You can easily add Google Analytics to your self-hosted WordPress website using the Google Analytics by Yoast plugin. The plugin lets you configure advanced features such as tracking outbound clicks, downloads and internal links that redirect to external websites; for example, affiliate links you create using your own domain (yourdomain.com/affiliate/product). You can also use it to ignore traffic from admins and other users, track search results pages and 404 pages. Yoast's premium version offers more advanced features, such as tracking views per author, views per post type and other specific dimensions. #2: Integrate All Analytics Platforms If you want to combine Google Analytics data with additional analytics tools and platforms to gain insights about your traffic, try Segment. The platform allows you to manage data from over 100 different advertising, analytics, developer, marketing, sales, support and user testing platforms in one place. Simply install one piece of tracking code on your website, and the rest of the tracking codes from any platforms you choose are managed by Segment. Segment offers a free plan for using Google Analytics with 20 other specific platforms. Premium plans for more platform integrations start at $29 per month, based on the integrations you need. #3: Visualize Google Analytics Data It's possible to view and compare data from multiple websites at the same time in Google Analytics with a tool like Cyfe. Use Cyfe dashboards to show an overview of all of your websites' pageviews, sessions and users, then analyze the data to identify bigger trends in: Conversions, traffic sources, bounce rate and location of users Traffic from search engines and social networks Real-time traffic, including users, location of users, traffic sources and content they're currently viewing You can even use it to create dashboards with a detailed view of your websites' real-time traffic, including users, location of users, traffic sources and content they're currently viewing. With a premium upgrade, you can create unlimited dashboards and widgets from over 50 advertising, analytics, blogging, email, sales, SEO, social media and support platforms for only $19 per month. #4: Learn About Email Marketing Traffic Want to link your email marketing efforts to the traffic in Google Analytics? Email marketing platforms such as MailChimp, GetResponse, Constant Contact and Vertical Response allow you to track traffic from links in your emails to your email campaigns. For example, MailChimp lets you check one box to add UTM parameters to links when you create an email campaign so you can view traffic from those links inside Google Analytics. You can also set up Google Analytics tracking for your automation emails and campaign archive pages. #5: Link Social and Website Engagement If you use social media management tools like Buffer, Hootsuite and Oktopost to publish and schedule updates to your top social media networks, you'll benefit from linking them to Google Analytics. Link Hootsuite and you get an overview report with your Google Analytics data along with the social updates you published through Hootsuite. One custom report is included with the $9.99 per month pro plan. With Buffer, you can customize the UTM parameters you use to track custom campaigns within Google Analytics so they match the updates you publish through Buffer.

SEO Services Company in Marmaduke AR

by Lunarned45 @ Local seo tips

Best Seo Companies For Small Businesses Marmaduke Predictions For Future What some corporations do is to force ratings for some key phrases with a huge funding in ‘paid links. A a success optimization campaign can have, as part of the improvements, cautiously pick, applicable, keywords which the on-web page optimization can be designed to make… Continue reading SEO Services Company in Marmaduke AR

Artykuł SEO Services Company in Marmaduke AR pochodzi z serwisu Local seo tips.

Live Video: Tips and Techniques for Creating Great Content

Live Video: Tips and Techniques for Creating Great Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you broadcast live video? Want to learn how to create an engaged following? To discover what he's learned from broadcasting over 1,000 live streams over the last two years, I interview Alex Khan. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Alex Khan, the founder of Attractive Media, a German social media agency that helps businesses with live video. You can find him online at alexkhan.tv. Alex shares his formula for beginning and ending live video. You'll discover how Alex makes his live videos look more professional. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video Alex's Story Alex started his first website in the late 1990s, back when email open rates were incredibly high. In 2005, he became managing director of Attractive People, a social network. In that role, Alex discovered what builds trust and how people behave on social networks. In 2012, Alex founded Germany's first mobile marketplace for fashion, which another company later acquired. Alex continued working behind the scenes in social media until 2015, when Twitter acquired Periscope for $100 million. After a company acquired his own app, Alex says he was curious about what a $100 million app could do. In March 2015 on the first day Periscope became available, Alex downloaded it and it immediately blew him away. Alex knew that driving engagement builds trust and increased visibility; however, creating engaging content was (and is) a challenge. Periscope helped Alex solve the engagement challenge because he could start a one-to-many conversation from anywhere at any time. Alex says it's still fascinating that you can reach so many people for free. In the beginning, Alex directed his live videos with his employee as the Periscope star. They created fun content such as jumping in a pool, which had nothing to do with Alex's area of expertise. After a few weeks, Alex's business partners shared their concern that this fun content wasn't professional, especially because Alex was COO of the company. Alex agreed that their point was valid, so he decided to change his subject matter. With 10 years of experience in social media, Alex knew people would have questions about how to use this new platform. He decided to use his expertise to help people understand how to build their audience with live video. I ask Alex to share a snapshot of his audience today. Alex says that in only two years, he's built his audience from nothing to 230,000 followers and 55 million hearts on Periscope. Through cross-promotion, Alex has attracted a total of 400,000 followers on social media. To build that audience, Alex says his experience working in social media, building companies, and training people gave him the necessary expertise, but live video technology was also a critical gateway. Listen to the show to learn about Alex's first live broadcast on Periscope. Advice for Going Live Alex says that even after doing more than 1,000 Periscope broadcasts, he still gets nervous. For Alex, three questions spin around in his head when he thinks about going live: "Who are the people watching me? Will they like me? What will I tell them?" Alex has found that his viewers are regular people who are early live video adopters and curious about what he has to say. When you provide something that's valuable, Alex believes people will like you. He says the key is to educate, inspire, or entertain viewers. As far as what to tell viewers, Alex believes people watching live video are always interested in five topics:

Creating Persuasive Videos: How to Move Viewers to Action

Creating Persuasive Videos: How to Move Viewers to Action

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create marketing videos? Are you wondering how to get people to go from passive observers to active participants? To learn how to create videos that people want to watch and get them to take action, I interview James Wedmore for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview James Wedmore, author of The YouTube Marketing Book, founder of Video Traffic Academy and--in my opinion--one of the smartest video marketers on the planet. James shares his knowledge and experience on video creation and taking your viewers to the next level. You'll learn the 5 important elements of what goes into persuasive video. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Persuasive Video Creation Why video is so important for marketers James describes how he has always considered video as a communication tool. A video can be simple, quick and efficient and can be used in an unlimited number of ways. Coming from a film background, James realised he could plug in video to everything people teach  him. You'll learn the different uses for video on your website and the benefits to your audience. James says YouTube is the most shared website and form of content inside of Facebook. You'll learn about the full potential and power of video and discover why James encourages people to get in front of the camera. Listen to the show to find out how we use video at Social Media Examiner. A 5-part YouTube video guide designed to move people to take action James explains that although the equipment you use is important, it's strategy that comes first. It's about the way the video can be executed and make it original. You'll find out the real strategy behind his videos and why he tries to share content once a week with a video on YouTube. Every video James makes is based off his 5-part template below. The 5 parts of the YouTube video template are: Attention Grabber Intro Bumper The Content Outro Bumper Outtakes You'll learn why you need to keep your YouTube videos as succinct as possible. And you'll discover what James did with his videos to have more success, great results and higher audience attention rates. Below is James' YouTube Tutorial on How to Create a Video. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-ZKbSWjvE7M 1. Attention Grabber. You don't need to spend time introducing yourself. You need to say what you are going to talk about in the video or ask a question. By 8 seconds into the video, you should have a good idea of what you are going to be talking about for the next 5 minutes of the video. James describes why it's so important in the first few seconds to make sure you tell the person watching the video what they will gain. You have to provide value for your audience. YouTube is not a place for commercials. You'll get the views by answering the questions they will have. James calls it a mini transformation. You'll find out why being able to keep their attention, allows for stronger engagement. 2. Intro Bumper. This is the time when you can throw in a little commercial. It's the best way to brand your show. It adds a level of professionalism and legitimises you. For this part of the video, which needs to be less than 6 seconds long, James explains how he used software called VideoScribetv. It's a great place to put your logo, a picture of yourself, your tag line and a tune. These can be made at a low cost at Videohive. You can then hire someone on Fiverr,

YouTube Community Development: How to Build a Following With YouTube

YouTube Community Development: How to Build a Following With YouTube

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create YouTube videos? Want to increase your audience? To learn how to create an online community using YouTube, I interview Tim Schmoyer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Tim Schmoyer, the author of 30 Days to a Better YouTube Channel and The Secret to Building Your YouTube Audience. His site, videocreators.com helps people spread their message via video. Tim explores how to create a community with YouTube. You'll discover how to make videos that will engage your viewers and keep them watching. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: YouTube Community Development How Tim got involved with YouTube Tim explains how one night in grad school (March 2, 2006), he was bored at home, and decided to check out YouTube. After seeing what was on there, he decided to upload his first video. It was a quick, 30-second video of him talking to the camera. He had no idea where that first experience would lead. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0sbC_K0cCUI As this was pre-Facebook, Tim says he and his girlfriend at the time made videos to show their friends and family what they were up to. They made videos of their dates, engagement and wedding, as well as when they moved, had kids and so on. Tim believes they made about 1,000 videos just sharing their story. It started as a way to communicate with family and friends. Along the way, other people started watching. Around 2009, Tim reached out to Mark Robertson, ReelSEO, and YouTube personality Kevin Nalty, and asked them why certain things did and did not work on YouTube. When they didn't know the answers, Tim decided to figure it out himself. He said he'd report back to them what he learned. Tim began having conversations with people who were trying to figure out the same things about YouTube and audience growth. That was the start of him turning YouTube into his business. A while later, Tim reached out to Mark Robertson again with constructive feedback. Tim told Mark that while he had a great website about video, there was nothing being done with online video. Tim ended up taking over Mark's YouTube channel, and trained the site's viewers how to master YouTube as a platform for audience development. After a few years, Tim started working full time for an animation studio to do audience development for their web series. A year later, after he had grown it to almost 100,000 subscribers, Tim's job was eliminated. However, they paid him full-time for six months to get his own business started. In February 2013, Tim launched his YouTube channel, called Video Creators. By the end of six months, it was his full-time income. Video Creators has three series on it. Every Tuesday, Tim talks about news in the online video industry. Wednesdays, he shares a YouTube tip. Then, on Thursdays he answers a question from his audience. The channel revolves around using online video as a platform to change lives. Without spending any money on promotion, Tim has grown his YouTube channel to over 75,000 subscribers and more than four-million views. He gets tons of interaction and engagement, including about 15,000 comments a month. Listen to the show to learn what YouTube was like in the beginning. Common mistakes with video The biggest mistake Tim sees people make with video is that they treat it like it's the same as television. People new to video (who don't watch YouTube) don't have another frame of reference for how to craft video content. Therefore, they make the same content they would create for television,

How to Run a Successful Twitter Contest

How to Run a Successful Twitter Contest

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to boost engagement on Twitter? Have you thought about running a Twitter contest? Twitter contests are a creative, fun way to attract more followers, engagement and shares on the platform. In this post you'll discover how to run a Twitter contest for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Identify the Objective Successful marketing starts with clear goals, and this is true for Twitter contests, too. Think about what you hope to achieve with your contest. For example, you might want to increase traffic to your website or collect email signups from potential prospects. Or perhaps you're keen to increase the number of followers or generate more brand mentions on Twitter. Deciding on the goal of your campaign is key, as it will inform the type of contest you launch. #2: Choose a Prize The prize has an important bearing on the overall success of your contest. Choose something that is highly relevant to your brand or related to your company or services in some way. A free iPad is an impressive prize, but it's unlikely to generate long-term gains or brand engagement unless your company offers iPad-related products or services. A Twitter contest isn't an opportunity to offload that box of branded pens or last year's merchandise though. Do a brainstorming session with your team and discuss what types of prizes are likely to excite your loyal followers and inspire new ones. Opt for prizes that are useful, exclusive or seasonal to generate more interest. This is obviously easier for consumer-focused brands, such as those that offer retail, fashion, tech and edible products. However, service-based businesses can package a service or offer tangible prizes like ebooks, branded stationery, free memberships or access to exclusive training materials. You could also team up with other brands or companies and offer a prize bundle to make the reward even more substantial or compelling. #3: Select a Contest Type When selecting a contest type, it's important to consider the barrier to entry for the contest and how it will affect the number, quality and relevance of entries you receive. For example, a simple contest that requires only a retweet will have wider appeal than one that also requires people to upload a photo or answer a question. However, this additional level of effort will help to separate half-hearted followers from those who are really invested in your brand or product. There are a variety of different Twitter contests that work well. Here are three types to consider for your business. Sweepstakes A sweepstakes contest is perfect if your main objective is to drive followers to a landing page on your website. When you tweet about the contest, share the link to your landing page and include text that drives people to enter the competition on your website. Keep in mind that including a number in your tweet, as Rosetta Stone did in this example, increases retweets by 17%, according to Twitter. The level of success of this type of contest will be influenced by the number of followers your brand already has on Twitter. Without a request for retweets or replies, this contest is unlikely to increase brand reach or grow your followers. However, because the contest is hosted on your website, you can promote it on your other social media channels and in your email campaigns, too. Tool tip: Tools like Wishpond or Woobox make it easy to launch custom sweepstakes Twitter contests and manage entries. Retweet and Follow Reward loyal fans with an exclusive contest and encourage new followers with a retweet and follow contest. This is a good choice if you want to boost your reach on Twitter, encourage retweets, attract new followers and increase @mentions of your company's Twitter handle. To encourage more engagement on Twitter, ask followers to submit a photo or answer a quiz to qualify. For example,

5 Psychology Tips to Improve Your Social Media Posts

5 Psychology Tips to Improve Your Social Media Posts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to create social media engagement? Do you want tips to improve your posts? To get more social media engagement, you need to tailor your content to appeal to your audience on an emotional level. In this article you'll discover five psychology tips to improve engagement on your social media posts. Listen to this article: #1: Images Speak to Viewers Your image is your first call to action in your social posts. It's the front door to your content, so it needs to make an impact. It's important to choose an image that expresses what you're trying to say in your post. For example, Red Bull's Instagram images inspire their followers to enjoy life and seek new adventures. Good social images also stand out from the crowd and command attention in people's news feeds. The image in this Coca-Cola post draws the audience's attention with its use of vivid colors and an interesting pattern. Your images should also be relevant to your target audience. In this Facebook post, Zappos uses an image that appeals to their audience: women who are fashion-conscious and love to buy shoes. #2: Color Communicates Brands that make the best color choices are the brands that get the most engagement on social media. Before you start sharing your content on social media, you should choose a color that is synonymous with your brand. Your color choice not only represents your business but also impacts your followers on a psychological level. Rob Russo's visual branding stands out in his followers' news feeds and draws attention to what he's saying. That's the strategy you want to apply to your visual marketing. The Honest Company's signature color is used prominently on all of their social channels and in their posts. The color makes their posts instantly recognizable to their fans. Think about whether your brand color speaks to your target market. If you're using a consistent color for your brand but not getting the engagement you want, you may need to rethink your color choice. #3: Words Trigger Action After creating your first call to action with an image, it's time to focus on the description. The law of attraction states that "like attracts like," so start your description with words you know people want or like to hear. Six words that typically work well are who, what, when, where, why and how. These words spark an emotional response that grabs a person's attention. You can also try these trigger words to engage your audience. #4: Emotion Connects Connecting with readers on an emotional level, especially when it's something happy, can impact your social media posts. In this Facebook post, Adidas connects with their fans by sharing Flavia Pennetta's exhilaration at winning her first Grand Slam singles title. Whether you know it or not, you're prompting some sort of emotion with all of your social posts. Even if it's boredom, readers are feeling an emotion when they see your post. To make the most of this opportunity, share good things with your followers. Portray a friendly, happy brand that is helpful and generous, and people will be drawn to your posts. On Oreo's Facebook page, their posts project a fun and lighthearted personality. #5: Conversation Engages How you introduce conversation into the mix of your social media posts helps determine how much people will open up to you. The easiest, most effective way to spark communication is to ask for it. You might begin your post with a question or end with a question or a statement that prompts people to engage. In this post, Threadless engages their followers by asking them to submit a quip to use in one of their t-shirt designs. By establishing communication with your followers, you'll discover what they need and want and how you can give it to them. In the post below, Livescribe asks their followers to share stories about how the company's products have helped them in p...

How to Publish Content on Apple News: A Step-by-Step Guide

How to Publish Content on Apple News: A Step-by-Step Guide

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more exposure for your content? Have you considered publishing your content on Apple News? Apple News lets you deliver both visual and text-based content directly to a growing number of iOS mobile devices. In this article, you'll discover how to become an Apple News publisher. Listen to this article: What Is Apple News? Apple News is a preinstalled application on every iOS device (version iOS 9 or later). The app delivers traditional text-based content, videos, and photo galleries from a variety of sources, including magazines, websites, and newspapers. Anyone in the US, UK, and Australia can sign up as a publisher and produce content for Apple News. Once you publish an article, it's added to the Apple News app, and the content is automatically optimized for all iOS devices. This ensures that readers have a great experience, no matter which device they're using. Before you can publish content for Apple News, you need to sign up as a publisher. Here's how to get started. #1: Sign Into iCloud To start the sign-up process, go to http://www.icloud.com/newspublisher/ and then click Continue. Sign into your iCloud account with your Apple ID (which is your device's associated ID). You'll need to accept the end user license agreement to continue. #2: Provide Publisher and Channel Information On the next page, fill out your publisher information and then click Next. You'll also need to provide additional information to set up your channel. When you're finished, click Next. #3: Upload a Logo You now have the option to upload a channel logo. (Note: You can skip this step.) Make sure your logo is a PNG file with a minimum size of 256 pixels square. The file size limit is 2MB. Click here for more details about logo specifications. Note that after you complete your registration, Apple will review your logo, and if it doesn't satisfy the requirements, they won't accept your application, and you may have to start over again. #4: Choose a Publishing Format Next, you can choose from two different publishing methods: RSS feed (there's no change in user experience, which means you can't use Apple's article format) or the Apple News Format, which optimizes your content for iOS devices. Use the Apple News Format To use Apple's News Format for your content, all you have to do is to click Sign Up for Apple News Format. Once you click the button, your application will automatically be sent for review. Use the RSS Feed for Your Blog or Website To use the RSS feed for your website or blog, click on I'd Rather Use RSS for Now. This choice takes you to the next step where you have to provide the RSS feed of your website. It's easy to find your feed URL. Visit your website and right-click anywhere on the page. From the menu, select Inspect Element or Inspect. Once the window appears with the HTML code of your page, use the Find feature (press Ctrl+F on Windows, Command+F on a Mac) and search for "RSS." It will then be highlighted on the screen like this. Copy your feed link and then paste it into the form. When you're finished, click Next. After accepting the terms and conditions, you can submit your application. You're all set! Apple will review your application and get back to you within a few days. Note: Ads served by Apple are not available if you only present your content via RSS. #5: Submit Articles for Approval After you're approved as a publisher, you're required to submit some articles for review. To do that, you can either create an article in News Publisher or use your existing content management system (CMS). To create an article in News Publisher, sign in and select News Publisher from the menu. If you need further information about the features, check out the official guide. If you prefer to connect your CMS with News Publisher, you'll need to use a plugin or write the code yourself. Fortunately,

Second ISU presidential candidate talks about diversity, state funding

by Bob Fisher @ AM-1300 KGLO — Your Hometown News Station

AMES — The second finalist for the president’s job at Iowa State University visited campus Tuesday afternoon for an open forum. Pamela Whitten says ISU is already a very good school, but can become and exceptional one. She says one key is to improve the retention rate of students and also the graduation rate. She

LinkedIn Prospecting: How to Find Your Next Customer on LinkedIn

LinkedIn Prospecting: How to Find Your Next Customer on LinkedIn

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use LinkedIn for your business? Are you wondering how to use LinkedIn to find prospects and customers? To learn about how to build strategic relationships through LinkedIn, I interview Viveka von Rosen for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Viveka von Rosen, author of LinkedIn Marketing: An Hour a Day and founder of Linked Into Business. Viveka shares how she prospects on LinkedIn for her business. You'll learn about the tools available to make prospecting easy and what you need to do to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn Prospecting What is prospecting? Viveka explains that a prospect is someone whom you either find or attract to you who's in a company, business, industry or organization that has a need for your product or service. Before social media, prospecting was done through very expensive outbound sales. However, social media and LinkedIn in particular have changed this. You'll hear why Viveka loves prospecting. Social media has changed us from the age of the seller to the age of the consumer. Consumers now tell us want they want. A large part of prospecting is to know who your ideal clients are and know their needs. Facebook, Yelp, LinkedIn and Twitter make the research a lot easier. As a seller, it's also a lot easier and cheaper to get out there and position yourself as a thought leader. This engenders the feeling of "know, like and trust" in a client or prospect with whom you may not have had direct interaction. It makes it easier to close the sale. In Jill Konrath's book, Selling to BIG Companies, she talks about how you have to know whom to sell to. This is why LinkedIn is so important—it tells you who works at the companies, their positions and whom they interact with. It enables you to reach out to the right person. Listen to the show to find out why groups can be so powerful. LinkedIn for prospecting Viveka explains the two aspects of prospecting—inbound and outbound. Actively prospecting is just a matter of research. With a combination of keywords, titles, company name and location, you can use the Advanced Search on LinkedIn to discover the people you want to interact with. These are your prospects. You'll hear about some of the great benefits of LinkedIn and also some of its limitations. One of the most powerful search categories is Location. Not only can you see who lives in your town, but also when you attend trade shows or conferences, it's a great way to connect with people before the event. A really cool app that you can use for conferences is Bizzabo, which has a LinkedIn API interface. There are thousands of events in there and you can see who will be at the event. It shows you their LinkedIn profile. In the show, you'll also discover another app which can be used for prospecting. If you want to meet prospects face to face before an event, a cool new app called Trendr will set up a live meeting place. Listen to the show to find out how you can discover if a prospect is active in a particular LinkedIn group. Viveka's experience on LinkedIn Viveka is extremely active on LinkedIn, either prospecting or inbound. She says that 70-80% of her business comes through LinkedIn and the remainder through things that she markets on Twitter. When you own a LinkedIn group, it allows you to position yourself as a thought leader. Viveka owns quite a few groups.

9 Ways to Use Facebook Groups for Business

9 Ways to Use Facebook Groups for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you participating in Facebook groups? Want to start one to support your business? Facebook groups help businesses promote products, support customers and much more. In this article I'll share nine ways Facebook groups can benefit your business. Listen to this article: #1: Sell Products As an alternative or addition to selling products or digital goods on your website, you're now able to sell in Facebook groups. Once you create a For Sale group, you'll see an option to "sell something" in your Facebook update. If you don't yet see this option in your Facebook group, take the opportunity to learn how selling works. Also nominate your group for this feature. #2: Supplement Video Training Courses If your business sells a video training course, give customers who purchase it access to a private Facebook group as part of the package. They can ask questions and get supplementary material, as well as forge a bond with other customers. It's a win-win situation for everyone. The customer can get help and additional resources for the product they purchased. Plus, it gives your business the opportunity to forge deeper connections with their customers and promote other courses and services. #3: Promote Chats Those who run a regular Twitter or online chat, or even have a running discussion on their Facebook page, may want to separate it from their business. They can do so through a Facebook group. It's a great way to promote upcoming chats and guests. Plus, you can keep the conversations focused. MediaChat uses their public group to share more information about chat guests, offer member deals and give shout-outs. Remember to let participants know about your Facebook group and page (if applicable) during your chat. This way you can continue to build up your group and online presence. #4: Establish Expertise One of the easiest ways to use Facebook groups for business is to become a resource in your field. Create a group or contribute your knowledge to one that already exists. For example, members of the Internet Marketing Super Friends group, numbering more than 13,000, pride themselves on helping other Internet marketers. Members can ask questions about SEO, get recommendations for designers and tools and more. The key thing about this type of group is to be a resource without self-promotion. (Most groups like this do not tolerate promoting content of any kind.) Use Facebook groups to be helpful and give freely of yourself. You'll be rewarded in spades as the word gets out from other members. #5: Collect Feedback Want to test out new ideas on some of your existing customers? One way to do that is to start a Facebook group to use as a think-tank for your business. Create a secret Facebook group, invite some of your best customers and openly discuss new ideas you're thinking about implementing in your business. Then gather feedback from them. This type of group provides a way to build stronger relationships with customers, while helping business owners collect honest feedback on what their customers might like. #6: Provide Customer Service Every business needs to provide a way for customers to get help. While this could be through a contact form on your website or through your Facebook page, a secret Facebook group is another option. The reason to start a secret group, instead of a closed or public one, is because secret groups can't be located in search or accessed via URL. Instead, members have to be invited. This gives you better control over adding new members. Plus, it protects your business in case you have disgruntled customers. (They won't be able to access the group unless you've invited them.) If you want to make your customer service Facebook group easy to find, create a closed group. However, be sure to state whom this group is for in the description. This will give you better control over approving and rejecting new members.

6 Productivity Tools for Twitter

6 Productivity Tools for Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to keep up with your Twitter activities? Looking for a way to streamline your Twitter marketing? The right productivity tools will help you manage your Twitter marketing more effectively and free up your time for other tasks. In this article you'll discover six tools and techniques that will boost your productivity on Twitter. Listen to this article: #1: Manage Twitter Messages With AgoraPulse Keeping on top of your Twitter mentions and messages can take a huge amount of time each day. According to research from Brandwatch, retail brands receive an average of 821 mentions per day on Twitter, but only manage to respond to 40 of them. You can do better than that by using a social media management tool like AgoraPulse. It allows you to display your mentions, direct messages, and monitoring alerts in a social inbox so you can respond as you would with an email. When you review or reply to messages, they're archived, which makes it easy to see which messages you've dealt with. The social inbox for your Twitter account is split into an Inbox tab for your incoming mentions and messages and a Monitoring tab for retweets and search queries. Whenever you reply to or review a message, it's highlighted and archived. This feature is particularly useful to archive low-value or spammy direct messages. Have you ever received one of those automated “thank you for following me” direct messages or something similar? With the Direct Messages filter, you can quickly select all direct messages that don't need a reply and review them in one go, which is a huge time-saver. Once you review or reply to all of your mentions, you'll get that lovely inbox zero feeling. Go to the Monitoring tab to view all of your retweets and searches. This tab is for less urgent messages, while the Inbox focuses on the most actionable messages. Select the Type filter to show only your recent searches or retweets. You can then reply to or like them on an individual basis, or via a bulk review if no action needs to be taken. If you work with a team or have a virtual assistant, you can assign individual messages to team members. To do so, view the message, click the Assign button, and select the relevant team member. You can easily see which messages have been assigned to which team members. If you have a social media team, using a social media management tool is important from a security standpoint. With AgoraPulse, you'll get full control over your team members and avoid having to share your Twitter password. Set aside two or three fixed times every day to attend to your Twitter engagement. Make sure you cap the time for these sessions (for example 10-15 minutes) so you can spend the rest of your day focusing on other areas of your business. AgoraPulse also integrates with Facebook and Instagram and offers reports and publishing features. #2: Automate Blog Content Shares With missinglettr When you post an article to your blog, how many times do you share it on Twitter? It's unusual for people to send just one tweet out when they publish blog content. If you want to maximize the engagement potential for your blog posts, use a tool like missinglettr to set up a drip marketing campaign for them. It allows you to publicize each individual article regularly via Twitter over the course of a year. To get started, set up your free account and connect your blog's RSS feed. Once you do that, missinglettr will start checking for new blog posts. When it detects a new article, it analyzes the content and creates a Twitter marketing campaign for that article for the year. The campaign consists of a series of tweets linking to the article and can include summaries, quotes, images, and a call to action. missinglettr will notify you when the campaign is ready so you can review it. Click the Review link to review the campaign schedule for the article.

Relationship Marketing: How to Build Meaningful Connections that Lead to Business

Relationship Marketing: How to Build Meaningful Connections that Lead to Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to develop relationships that will lead to business? Are you wondering how you can use social media to build valuable connections? To learn about the importance of relationships in business, I interview Ted Rubin for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ted Rubin, co-author of Return on Relationship. He's also the former chief social marketing officer for Collective Bias and OpenSky. Prior to that, Ted was the CMO for e.l.f. Cosmetics. Ted shares the best ways to start to grow your online connections via social media. You'll learn what you need to include in your profile and why return on relationship is the most important thing for a business or brand. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Relationship Marketing Recently I attended New Media Expo (NMX) in Las Vegas, where I was not only embraced by fellow podcasters, I was overwhelmed by the number of people who came up to me to thank me for this show. I'd like to take this opportunity to thank each and every one of you. Since I had a mission for this conference, I didn't announce that I would be attending. My hope is that you will be inspired by the story of why I did this, and that you will try it for yourself. How to build relationships in person, that often start online In my second book, Launch, I talk about the power of other people. I coined the phrase "Elevation Principle," which consists of great content plus other people minus marketing messages equals growth. For podcasters, the "other people" include listeners—a segment of whom I call "power users," or people with extreme influence. Without them, it's really hard to grow your business. I went to NMX with two purposes. I wanted to build relationships with the podcasting community and the parenting community, since I'm a newbie in both of these spaces. You'll discover why I only attended a few sessions, and made it a priority to hang around at the end of each session. One of the best places to meet the speakers is out in the halls, or where the speakers gather to network with each other. They don't seem to attend any sessions other than their own. It's an opportunity to have amazing conversations with influential people. You'll hear the types of questions I asked to get people engaged, which can develop into real relationships. This is one of the secrets to the success of my business, and it can be for you too. My take-home lesson is to get involved in real life through face-to-face encounters. One of the best places to do this is at a conference. Our upcoming conference, Social Media Marketing World, is a great place to start. Are relationships still important AND achievable with social media? Ted Rubin likes to say that "relationships are the new currency." With all of the different social media channels available, you can reach the world 24/7, without ever leaving your home. It used to be that you had to wait until you were at a company meeting or an event to meet people. The problem today is that when people click your name or check a box to follow you, they immediately think they have a real relationship with you or your brand. A lot of brands believe that they need to get as many likes and followers as possible so they can broadcast to them. It's not about broadcasting, though—it's about building relationships. Listen to the show to find out why building a relationship online is no different to a regular relationship offline.

21 Ways to Improve Your Facebook Ads With Ad Targeting

21 Ways to Improve Your Facebook Ads With Ad Targeting

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Facebook ads? Are you aware of all of the targeting options Facebook offers? Facebook offers so many ways to target potential customers, there's a right advertising option for every business. In this article you'll find 21 ways to target specific audiences with Facebook advertising. Listen to this article: #1: Know Your Customers' Interests On Facebook, you can target people who have expressed an interest in or like pages related to another page or topic. This is interest-based targeting, although it is commonly confused with "likes" targeting. There are thousands of interests to target, and they're located in the Interests section of your ad set settings. Type literally anything into the search box and Facebook will suggest matching or related interests. Interest targeting usually means that you're targeting large audiences. So before you set up interest targeting, evaluate the size of your target group. Then consider combining an interest with at least one other targeting method. #2: Seek Out People in the Market for What You Sell Our online behavior tells platforms a lot about our buying intentions. By combining data from different sources, Facebook is able to tell who is in the process of buying a given product. Therefore, you can target people who are looking to buy something specific; for example, new vehicle shoppers in the market for a luxury SUV. This option is located in the Behavior section of the ad set settings. You'll see multiple categories in a scenario like this, because Facebook allows you to be that specific. In the case of the SUV, target people who are looking for a new SUV, a used SUV and so on. Experiment with this targeting option to determine which methods are most profitable. #3: Target People Based on Financial Resources If you want to sell a product or service that is tied to affordability, this method is extremely useful. Listed under Demographics, this targeting option allows you to select among Income, Net Worth and Liquid Assets. Liquid Assets is an option under Net Worth. Targeting people by income, net worth or liquid assets usually works well as a stand-alone option. When businesses combine it with a behavior that best matches their target group, the audiences are often too narrow. The trick is to choose a broader behavior than usual in case the audience turns out to be small (for example 10-20K). According to Facebook Power Editor, their data is "Modeled based on age, income, presence of children, occupation, property data, vehicle data, investment interest and census median data." #4: Combine Age and Gender With Where People Live Instead of simply targeting geographic areas, add age groups and gender to the mix. For example, target men ages 25-35 who live in New York City. This is based on the first information people share when they create a Facebook profile: age, gender and city they live in. Targeting people based on where they live can also be a great substitute for targeting certain income levels, because it presumes a certain quality of life. This method can be used right after setting up an ad set. Target virtually any state, region and city in the world (with a few exceptions). Another option is to exclude part of a region to optimize your ads even further. A few selected countries, such as the United States, also support zip code targeting. #5: Target People by Industry or Occupation For products or services that are ideal for people who work in a given industry or have a specific job, use industries or job title for the targeting method. For example, target "Employed in Arts, entertainment, sports and media." This is located under Work (below Demographics) on Facebook. The industry people work in can be a great alternative to simply targeting by office type. In fact, office type targeting actually allows you to target three more small office categories.

Visual Social Media: How Images Improve Your Social Media Marketing

Visual Social Media: How Images Improve Your Social Media Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use visuals in your social media marketing? Are you wondering how you can use images to take your marketing to a whole new level? To learn about visual social media, I interview Donna Moritz for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Donna Moritz, who is a social media and visual marketing expert. She's also the founder of Socially Sorted, a blog designed to help small businesses achieve more with visual social media. Donna shares the importance of visuals in your social media marketing. You'll discover the types of images that work best and the tools you can use to create them. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Visual Social Media What is visual social media marketing? Donna sees it as the use of some kind of imagery to communicate visually. You can use images or video to tell a story or share a message. This has been done in marketing for years. As humans, it's in our nature to communicate visually. Images process quickly and people are drawn to them. Listen to the show to find out why visual marketing has merged with social media. Why do visuals matter so much? Donna explains how most people started out with a blog, where they would write in long form and build a community around it. Then along came Facebook, where posts became shorter and then Twitter burst onto the scene with a 140-character limit. People have moved from blogs to microblogs and now to multimedia microblogs. The only direction to go is to communicate with pictures. With Instagram and Pinterest, you can communicate purely with images. Sometimes words aren't even necessary. Images have become even more popular with the ability to take photos and video with the camera on a smartphone. Detavio Samuels, who owns the marketing business Global Hue, said, "The only thing shorter than a tweet or a post is a picture." Listen to the show to find out why all platforms are becoming image-centric. Image options for marketers Donna explains how you can use images in different ways in your marketing. You can make a short, snappy video; use images and graphics; slides or a SlideShare presentation; infographics and text-based images. You'll find out which one from the list below Donna discovered gets the most shares and responses. Tips How-to Quotes Checklists Infographics Jay Baer talks about being inherently useful in his book Youtility. If you want your image to be shared a lot, then you have to make sure it's helpful to your target audience. You have to remember that as humans, we connect emotionally to images more than video, audio or text. People make decisions and take action quicker when prompted by images, rather than by reading a lot of text. You'll find out how you can use how-to images for your business and why it's easier than you think. Another great option is to tease people with a graphic. You don't have to provide the whole procedure; instead add a call to action to get people to click through to your blog, Facebook page or Pinterest page. On Facebook, you want to build engagement, so the image should be one that people will share, rather than click through to your blog. If you are clever, you can get some really great results. Listen to the show to learn why people feel compelled to click on an image, like it, share it, repost it or save it. The elements of good visuals and what makes them sharable Donna says that with any piece of content,

Breaking Barriers – Testimonial

by Drew @ London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies

Drew has been fantastic supporting us as we enter into the world of online marketing. He is clearly an expert in his field and is fantastic at articulating what is a complex world to a layman like me. I look forward to working with Drew many more times in the future. Matthew Powell CEO, Breaking... Continue reading

The post Breaking Barriers – Testimonial appeared first on London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies.

3 Tips to Use Affiliate Links on Pinterest

3 Tips to Use Affiliate Links on Pinterest

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Pinterest to generate revenue? Have you considered using affiliate links on Pinterest? Because Pinterest users are looking for useful and inspirational products, the platform is a natural place for marketers to share items and services they believe in. In this article, you'll discover how to prepare for and use affiliate links in your Pinterest marketing. Listen to this article: Affiliate Links on Pinterest Now that Pinterest has lifted the ban on using affiliate links, you're free to add as many pins with affiliate links to your Pinterest boards as you want. The key is to prepare your profile and add those pins strategically, so you make money and don't annoy or lose your followers. Here's how to optimize your Pinterest profile and boards to support affiliate pins, properly add your affiliate links, and boost visibility for the boards that have affiliate pins on them. #1: Optimize Pinterest Boards to Showcase Products Before you start adding pins with affiliate links, you need to make sure the boards on your Pinterest profile share a branded look that represents your business. You want the overall look of your Pinterest presence to tell people what you're about at a glance, without them having to do too much reading. For example, Courtney Whitmore of Pizzazzerie is an author, blogger, entertainer, and food stylist. When you visit her Pinterest presence, it's easy to see that she is all about parties, fun, and entertainment. In addition to being sure you use a clear description at the top of your Pinterest profile, you'll want to give each of your boards a title that relates to something your business or brand offers. Remember to use keywords in your board titles (and your pin descriptions) to show up in Pinterest search. Next, populate each board with pins that you know your target audience will be interested in. Beyond supporting a branded look, this approach will help you build a Pinterest profile that's ready to show off the best ideas and tips you have for your audience, making you a go-to resource. Now you're ready to think about which boards are a natural fit for pins of your own products or products for which you're an affiliate. #2: Add Affiliate Product Pins to Your Boards First, choose the product you want to share and decide which board you'll pin it to. For example, if you have an affiliate link for miniature piñatas, you can pin it to a board full of products and decorating ideas for Cinco de Mayo parties. After you pin the product, click the Edit button on the pin. Now you can replace the original link in the Website box with your affiliate link. Click Save and your pin is live with your affiliate link! Rinse and repeat these steps with other products. #3: Increase Exposure for Affiliate Link Pins and Boards After ensuring all of your affiliate links have been added correctly, you'll likely want to increase exposure for them. While you can take advantage of promoted pins to get more eyes on individual affiliate pins, a great option for driving traffic to boards that have affiliate pins is to share them on your other social platforms. Angela Davis from Frugal Living NW has a Pinterest profile that shares ways to save money. She created a fashion board to share her favorite items from the Nordstrom Half-Yearly sale. She added a personal note to each pin description, telling her readers what she loved about the product. Her notes added authenticity and value to the pin. When her board was complete, she hopped over to Facebook to let her readers know about the lookbook she created for the sale. They could find all of her favorite products plus her comments on her Pinterest board. Keep in mind that it's important to promote affiliate product links authentically. Refrain from being salesy and remember that your primary job is to help readers or customers find products that are useful, inspirational,

How to Increase Awareness, Generate Leads and Create Advocacy With Social Media

How to Increase Awareness, Generate Leads and Create Advocacy With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you been tasked with generating more awareness, more leads and more advocates? Need a plan to get you started? In this article you'll discover how your business can use social media to achieve three of the most common marketing goals. #1: Increase Brand Awareness Perhaps your brand isn't a household name and you'd like more prospective customers to know who you are. Social media can help you get there. Here are some ways to jumpstart your brand's presence through social media: Listen to this article: Establish fully fleshed-out profiles on the major social networks. Create company profiles on the big four social channels: LinkedIn, Facebook, Google+ and Twitter. Make sure your company logo and bio are consistent across all of your social sites. Decide which social network you'll spend the most time on. Depending on your market segmentation and customer research, it might make sense to spend more time on one network and less on others. For example, LinkedIn is consistently the best social outlet for B2B lead generation, and Google+ tends to attract professionals in the technology space. Consider advertising. When you first sign onto a social network, you don't have any connections because no one knows you're there. One way to make yourself known is through advertising. Each social network has intriguing ad options (like media-rich Twitter cards and Facebook sponsored posts) that help you target the prospects who will most likely click through and get to know you. Create a content schedule. Consistency is key in social media. Before you start posting, create a content schedule that allows you to develop your brand story one social post at a time. Give content creators access to the calendar so they know what to contribute and when. Make connections with others. Depending on the network, start following others in your industry who have important and insightful things to say. Obviously, you won't follow competitors, but think laterally. Bloggers, thought leaders, academics and companies in related industries might be putting out great content, and be open to socially engaging with you. And that comes with the bonus of a bigger presence for your company. Track important key performance indicators (KPIs). Only by tracking certain metrics can you know if your social efforts are paying off. Decide which metrics you'll evaluate on a regular basis, ranging from the number of likes and shares of your material, to more telling metrics like web traffic, social media conversion rates and reach. Make sure you have the right social media management tool on hand to walk you through your stats. Once you've set up a content calendar, perhaps done some advertising and are ready to track predefined KPIs, you'll have a solid foundation for spreading awareness of your brand. Your audience will then get a chance to see how your products and services can change their business practices. Perhaps they'll see the light through an interesting YouTube video or a report that speaks to a particular problem and your solution for addressing it. However you make your customers' lives better, social media puts you out there and brings your solutions to your prospects' doors. #2: Generate Leads and Engagement Now that people are starting to know you exist, it's time to turn people into leads. As in all content marketing, you'll want to develop social content that speaks to your audience. This is content that your followers will find informative, helpful and even exciting. When you've improved things just a little bit for people, they'll come back to you for more of the same, and that's your chance to qualify them as leads. Here's how to put together social content that turns followers into leads: Create content that inspires conversation. On social media, you can't depend on passive followers to convert themselves. You need to create as many opportunities to engage people as possi...

How to Optimize Landing Pages to Boost Social Media Conversions

How to Optimize Landing Pages to Boost Social Media Conversions

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more conversions from your social traffic? Are you using landing pages? Directing targeted social media traffic to relevant landing pages helps you convert visitors into leads. In this article you'll discover how to optimize landing pages to boost social media conversions. Why Landing Pages Rather than direct social media traffic to your home page, landing pages let you send visitors to a page that facilitates the conversions you're after. Landing pages are web pages that are built for a specific purpose, such as obtaining leads or getting signups for an event, and are accessible through a specific link. You use this link in social media posts and ads, thus making it easy to attribute the traffic that comes to the page from your social media channels. Listen to this article: You should create separate landing pages to target segments of your audience with different offers. You can also split test the copy, layout and more so you can see which version is most effective in earning and converting leads. Here's how you can get more social media conversions by using landing pages. #1: Tailor Landing Pages to Offers and Audiences Think about who your ideal target market is. Consider their demographics, geographic locations, likes and needs. Then target these people through social media. Facebook, Twitter and now Instagram offer amazing targeting capabilities. For example, say that you sell organic, easy-to-prepare dinners. You decide your target market consists of 35- to 45-year-old women with careers who live in metro areas, and are conscious about their diet choices. When targeting, talk to your audience in their language and show that you understand what they want and need. Mention that you know they're always short on time but want to make the right choices for their families. Include a call to action to learn more about how "fast" and "healthy" don't have to be mutually exclusive. Solidify your success with a landing page that further explains the benefits of your product, why they need it and how to get it. Include relevant images of happy, healthy families and a short video testimonial from a stylish happy mom who has two preteens. Include a special offer where people can receive a free dinner just for signing up for your newsletter. After you've crafted your targeting, messaging and offer, watch your conversion rates go up. #2: Split Test Landing Page Variations While you might know a lot about your target audience, there is always more you can learn. Suppose people aren't 100% sold on your business and don't want to receive your newsletter. Split test by creating another offer with a 20%-off coupon that they can use in any grocery store that carries your product. Or maybe you want to experiment with the length of the text. You might be wondering if you should go into detail about your product and its benefits or write brief copy that simply encourages people to try the product. Or instead of pictures of a happy family, you think your audience would be more inspired by images of stylish, successful businesswomen. You can gradually split test as many variables as you want and gain more insight into your buyers' psychology. It's best to test only one or two variables at a time to zero in on a cause-effect relationship and track the differences in data. Discover What Makes a Good Landing Page Effective landing pages consist of a brief punchy description, clear benefits, a few striking visual elements (such as images or a short video), a testimonial and a strong call to action. Most importantly, they tend to focus on one offer or one goal. Here are some tips for building a successful landing page: Keep your page crisp, clear and to the point. Focus on the benefits of a single offer. You can also tailor the page for visitors from a specific social network. For example, Pinterest is known for its inspirational, highly visual content,

International SEO Consulting Services: Global & Regional Strategy

International SEO Consulting Services: Global & Regional Strategy


Blast Analytics & Marketing

International SEO consulting services include Global & Regional strategy, tactics, implementation, governance, training, technical support & reporting

6 Tips to Clean Up Your Twitter Account

6 Tips to Clean Up Your Twitter Account

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Twitter account unmanageable? Do you want to clean up your followers and profile? A well-managed Twitter account improves your branding and helps you engage with your audience. In this article you'll find six tips to clean up and revitalize your Twitter account. Listen to this article: #1: Unfollow Inactive Accounts First, tend to the users you're following. Let's start with your family members. You know the ones. They started using Twitter in 2007 and haven't been back since. They're inactive users, along with potentially hundreds of other users you followed a long time ago, and never heard from again. It's possible to go through your Twitter profile, analyze each profile and unfollow them. If you're following hundreds or thousands of people, that's a waste of your time. You can use any one of numerous tools like UnTweeps. UnTweeps scans all accounts you follow and provides a list of the inactive ones. Decide what you consider inactive (how many days since their last tweet) and fill in the number. Then check the boxes next to the accounts you want to unfollow. The idea is simple. Weed out all of the people you're following who aren't tweeting. If you're following inactive users, then you're wasting your follows. The maximum number of Twitter users you can follow is 2,000. Once you hit 2,000, you can't follow anyone else unless you gain more followers. How many more followers? We don't know. It’s a ratio, and Twitter keeps it a secret. Other tools to use to clean up inactive accounts include Tweepi, ManageFlitter, Follower Filter, Crowdfire and iUnfollow. #2: Unfollow Irrelevant Accounts After you've deleted some inactive users, take another look. You're likely still following too many users who are irrelevant. There are some options. If you unfollow almost everyone, it seems rude and you may tick some people off. It takes time to unfollow only select people. But if you keep it the same, Twitter stays messy. For example, blogger Michael Hyatt chose to unfollow all of his followers. Hyatt used to follow back everyone who followed him: all 108,698 of them. Michael realized the volume of inbox messages and irrelevant tweets he was getting was out of hand, so he took drastic measures. Chris Brogan also went this route. He unfollowed 131,000 users. Another approach is to sift through the people you follow, identify the ones who are irrelevant and unfollow them. If you want to curate your follows in this way, here's what to do. Go to your profile page, and click Following. Look at each profile and decide if it's worth following. To stop following a user, hover over the Following button. It should turn into a red Unfollow button. Click it. Just remember, if you're following a lot of people, purging like this could take a long time. Some of the tools mentioned previously can assist with the process. #3: Organize With Twitter Lists Twitter lists help you organize the different purposes you have for Twitter: work, family, influential people, etc. Create as many kind of lists as you like. There's no limit. To create a list, go to your profile page, click Lists, then Create a New List. To add someone to a list, click on Following from your profile. Then, click the settings icon next to the user, and select Add or Remove From List. Then, check the box next to the list or lists to add the user, or create a new list. Lists are an excellent way to filter through the different types of people you follow. If you follow a lot of people, you'll never see everything. This way, you can get the information you need from certain people whenever you want it. Depending on how you use lists, you may wish to keep your list private (for example, a list of competitors). Once your account is clean, get back into the Twitter swing of things. #4: Spruce Up Your Profile Another point for cleaning up your account is your Twitter profile.

Storytelling: Why Stories Attract More Customers

Storytelling: Why Stories Attract More Customers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

What's the story of your business? Are you wondering how storytelling can help your marketing and sales? To learn about the power of storytelling, I interview Dave Kerpen for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Dave Kerpen, author of  Likeable Social Media. He's also the co-founder of Likeable, an INC 500 social media marketing firm. His newest book is Likeable Business: Why Today's Consumers Demand More and How Leaders Can Deliver. Dave shares his story of how a creative idea for his wedding turned into a successful business. You'll learn how your story can help your business connect with people, both prospects and customers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Business and Storytelling Dave's story Dave shares his story of how the creative idea he and his wife had for their wedding led them into starting a business. Both Dave and his wife have a traditional sales and marketing background and both were working in radio sales and sales management at the time. They decided to have their wedding at a baseball game. So they pitched their idea to a minor league baseball team, the Brooklyn Cyclones, an affiliate of the New York Mets. The deal was that they would take over the inventory from the game and do sponsorships in exchange for being able to get married at the end of the game and create the promotion. They created a promotion called Our Field of Dreams. Just from getting sponsors for the event, a total of $100,000 was raised in goods and services and $20,000 for charity. The advantage for the sponsors was they received a large amount of media attention. Not only did the sponsors get in front of 8,000 people at the game, they also were featured in CBS The Early Show, ABC World News Tonight and CNBC, plus thousands of blogs. One of the sponsors, 1-800-Flowers, was then featured on 86 television stations, all from a $6,000 trade sponsorship. Dave and his wife generated $20 million worth of earned media for their sponsors. It wasn't until 1-800-Flowers contacted Dave afterward and asked what he was doing next that he and his wife decided to start a company. Dave believes that telling their story showed their prospects that it's not just about understanding the tools, it's about understanding how to be creative and think outside of the box. Just because you understand the tools of social media, radio or television doesn't mean the idea isn't just as important. You still have to do marketing. By being able to tell a story, you're able to bring some real personality to what it is you do, and at the same time, convince people that you know what you are doing. Listen to the show to hear how they worked all their sponsors into the game so the wedding itself could be sponsor-free. Why should your businesses care about storytelling? Dave believes that storytelling is important because people don't care about you. It's really important to truly listen because people would rather talk about themselves. Storytelling is much more effective than going through data or any kind of sales pitch. It connects people, and gets people engaged and interested. The reason why people love going to the movies and reading books is because we love to be engaged by stories. Whether you are at a boardroom talking to your staff, or pitching to a prospect or putting content out there to the world, storytelling can bring your business alive. It can help you connect with your audience.

Content Creation Hacks: How to Quickly Produce Valuable Content

Content Creation Hacks: How to Quickly Produce Valuable Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create content for your business? Looking for an easier way to make your content work for you? Discover easy ways to create and repurpose your content, courtesy of Nick Westergaard. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Nick Westergaard, host of the On Brand Podcast and chief brand strategist at social and content agency Brand Driven Digital. Nick is also the author of Get Scrappy: Smart Digital Marketing for Businesses Big and Small. Nick explores easy ways to create quality content. You'll also discover how to repurpose recent and historical material. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Creation Hacks Nick's story Westergaard Advertising began 35 years ago in Iowa when Nick's father and now business partner started what was a small, general, traditional advertising agency. Nick had worked with brands in the early days of online marketing, specifically for educational publishing companies when digital really started to grow. About 10 years ago, Nick started moonlighting as a freelancer for the family business. Eventually he would come in as a partner. In addition to changing the kind of work Westergaard Advertising specialized in, they morphed into brand-driven digital to help organizations build better brands online through social media and content marketing. Nick's book, Get Scrappy, came from a phrase he found himself saying often. Nick does a lot of public speaking, and says it was one of those experiences where he quickly dashed off a title for a new speech. Then when it came time to write it, the topic took root and excited him. Plus, he was able to draw on work he did with clients of all shapes and sizes. "Get Scrappy" was a common thread. Whether it's an entrepreneurial startup, solo small business, medium-sized business, or a larger marketing team, everybody's looking to get scrappy – to do more with less. For instance, Nick talks about working with nostalgic brand Schwinn Bikes, and how it's easy to think of them as a big brand, but they're really a small, scrappy team at the headquarters in Madison, Wisconsin. Nick talked with them about this idea of getting scrappy. Schwinn's social media manager Samantha Hersil summed it up best. "We could all use a few people and a few dollars more," Hersil said. That's really at the heart of the book. Listen to the show to discover how Nick's business has changed over the last 10 years. Why marketers object to creating content Content is a tricky animal, Nick explains, so it takes a content marketing mindset. Some of the obstacles marketers encounter are from lack of a sound content strategy. The Content Marketing Institute reports that many people fly blind when it comes to content strategy. It's both an obstacle and an internal objection, because companies are just jumping on the content marketing bandwagon. Both in terms of social channels and content, Nick thinks it's easy to fall into the trap of what he calls "checklist marketing." Marketers do everything they hear about: they have a presence on every network, create every form of content, and so forth. Nick thinks if people instead develop a strategy with a business objective, their content will be better aligned with their business. Content used to be driven by the written word, Nick explains. As people scoot up to that podcasting microphone and hit the Record button with video, they get scared. There's a ripple effect, as well. Subject matter experts may feel like they're not interesting enough, or else they believe they have interesting stor...

prudential 072717

by c0c0nuT @ SEO Career

5 Ways to Use Fan Content to Improve Your ROI

5 Ways to Use Fan Content to Improve Your ROI

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to increase the ROI for your social media campaigns? Have you considered fan content? Using fan photos in your marketing is an effective way to highlight your brand, products and customers at the same time. In this article you'll discover five ways to drive ROI with user-generated content campaigns on social media. Listen to this article: Why User-Generated Content Campaigns? With the proliferation of online channels in addition to those of traditional marketing, you're in a constant battle for your audience's attention. Rather than rely solely on your creative team to produce content, consider turning to your customers. Putting in the time and effort to develop customer relationships typically means that your social media program will consume a large share of your marketing budget. For this reason, you may be asked to justify spending by providing concrete social media ROI. It's true that it's difficult to measure the business value of a like or a shared post, but you can successfully run social marketing campaigns and see real returns for your efforts. Take a look at how these five brands have launched and managed user-generated content campaigns across Facebook, Instagram and Twitter. #1: Turn Fans Into Product Models Charlotte Russe ran an exceptional social media marketing campaign to showcase the #CharlotteLook (how influencers were styling their clothes). Instagram users were asked to upload their favorite Charlotte look and use the campaign hashtag in their posts. The company selected the most on-brand user-generated content from the campaign and displayed it on their homepage. Charlotte Russe linked each winning photo to the product pages of the items that were featured in the photo. This tactic resulted in viewers who engaged with the customer photos being 28 times more likely to end up on a Charlotte Russe product page. #2: Reward Your Fans 6 Pack Fitness launched their #LeadThePack campaign with a weekly bag giveaway. They asked users to submit a photo for a chance be featured on the website and win a bag of their choice. 6 Pack Fitness's social media marketing strategy included displaying the best customer photos featuring their bags on the company's product pages. The company saw an immediate impact on their ecommerce performance. Customers who interacted with one of the customer photos on their product pages were 2.7 times more likely to make a purchase and had 12% larger order sizes. #3: Build on Local Pride The Breckenridge Colorado Tourism Office ran a successful social media campaign that asked: Why do you love Breckenridge? Fans were asked to share their thoughts on Twitter, Instagram and Facebook. Under the tagline #BreckBecause, fans formed an online community that showcased the authentic Breckenridge experience. As a result of this campaign, GoBreck.com increased web traffic from social media by 841% and increased Instagram followers by 93%. #4: Celebrate Customer Stories Ahnu has a customer base of active adventurers who wear their shoes. The brand launched its #Ahnu campaign to collect photos of cool things their fans were doing and interesting places they were visiting. The company displayed #Ahnu campaign submissions on their Facebook page, and viewers could vote on their favorite content. The users who engaged with these customer photos were 12 times more likely to end up on the Ahnu website. #5: Tap Into Customer Lifestyles California Natural Products wanted to increase brand awareness about their Svelte protein shakes on social media. Under the hashtag #DrinkSvelte, they asked fans to post photos of themselves and their Svelte drinks. The best photos were displayed on the Svelte website, and the photos generated more than 2 million impressions online. How to Leverage Your Own User-Generated Content The brands featured in this article went above and beyond just collecting content.

Social Sharing: How to Inspire Fans to Share Your Stories

Social Sharing: How to Inspire Fans to Share Your Stories

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use stories to market your business? Are you wondering how you can get people to share your content? To learn how to inspire your fans and followers to share your stories via social media, I interview Simon Mainwaring for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Simon Mainwaring, author of We First: How Brands and Consumers Use Social Media to Build a Better World. He's a consultant who's worked with brands like Nike and Motorola. Simon also hosts the upcoming We First Social Branding Seminar in West Hollywood in a few days. Simon shares the importance of tapping into the power of your fans to share your story. You'll learn how you can create a story and the kind of content you need to use to succeed. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Sharing Why is it important to tap the power of fans? Simon states that the power of social media is not in the ability of a brand to sell directly to a customer; it's more to inspire a customer who made a purchase to talk about your brand to others. With traditional media, it was "one to many." A television commercial would reach many people. Whereas with social media, it's about "one to one to many." Kevin Kelly, co-founder of Wired magazine, said, "One member of those thousand fans and those thousand fans will promote you to so many other people." Apple's marketing looks effortless, but they do very conscious things to build their rabid fan base. They celebrate the customer through the priority they give to the user experience. There is no other brand out there that spends so much time and attention to make sure their customer experience is so well-captured in the product itself. Apple really listens to their customers and the marketing is done in a very human way. The video below shows the campaign for the iPod, which was done in very simple language. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TaVFCdwT0hk You'll discover what else Apple does to tap into the human dynamics and how they have a raving fan base. Not everybody has the brilliance of what Apple has built and Simon says there is a fundamental shift that every brand needs to make. The shift is for companies to market themselves not as the celebrity of their customer community but rather as a celebrant. You have to stop talking about yourself. Instead talk about your customers. Now thanks to social media, there is real-time dialog between brands and consumers. If you want to inspire your fans to promote your brand and build your business, you need to reframe your marketing as a celebration of your customer community. You'll hear the questions you need to think about that get customers to share and what gives you the power of one to one to many. You can then use your marketing platform to celebrate your customers. There are many entrepreneurs and big brands that transform their experience with social media. Brands have changed their positioning and it's become a benefit to their customers. Coca-Cola's marketing used to be "The Real Thing." Now they've changed it to "Open Happiness." Pepsi was "The Joy of Pepsi," and now it's "Refresh Everything." You'll hear how Sharpie celebrates their customers and what Intel did to make it all about their customers with the launch of the Museum of Me. Listen to the show to find out how the direction of conversation has reversed between brand, company and customer. What's happening in the PR and advertising industry to bring about t...

Influencer Marketing: How to Scale Your Social Media Exposure

Influencer Marketing: How to Scale Your Social Media Exposure

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering how to increase your business's reach on social media? Have you considered partnering with an influencer? To explore how to develop business relationships with influencers, I interview Neal Schaffer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Neal Schaffer, author of three social media books including Maximize Your Social. He teaches social media strategy at Rutgers University and is the founder of PDCA Social, an agency that specializes in helping Japanese businesses leverage American social media platforms. Neal explores the difference between paid and earned influencers. You'll discover how to use influencer marketing to scale your social media results. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Influencer Marketing Why Influencer Marketing? Social media is a noisy place and the days of 100% organic success are over. Brands, companies, and practitioners need to use paid social to get noticed. In this environment, Neal believes other people can accelerate your social media marketing efforts. Put simply, you need to consider other users on social media who might be able to help spread the word about your brand and amplify your message. Neal identifies three different types of "others": your employees or partners (employee advocacy), your fans (brand advocacy), and influencers (also known as influencer marketing). Each type is powerful in its own way, and in 2017, influencer marketing is the most mainstream. It can help you cut through the noise in a different way than paid social. Plus, influencer marketing is ideally more authentic and leads to more engagement. I ask Neal to explain what influencer marketing is, for people who are new to the concept. Neal says influencer marketing involves partnering with people who have influence over others. In the old days, newspaper writers and television broadcasters had tremendous influence. Now, in certain online or social media communities, people on YouTube or Instagram are famous and influential in a way that's similar to big-name media celebrities. Some social media influencers focus on one network, such as Instagram or YouTube, whereas others have appeal across several platforms. With influencer marketing, you work with an influencer who talks about your brand, and those mentions of your product or service have a positive effect on your business. People become influencers on social media because they're creating their own valuable content. They have a regular audience that cares about the influencer's tips, recommendations, or other content. However, unlike a true celebrity, a person doesn't need a million followers or subscribers to be an influencer. They need to have relevance only in their community. For example, a YouTuber may have never heard of a podcasting influencer. That's okay. The podcaster needs to have influence only within their specific podcasting community. Listen to the show to hear more about how social influencers compare to big-name celebrities. How to Discover and Evaluate Potential Influencers To begin, use listening tools and do keyword searches to learn who in your industry is talking about topics or products relevant to your business. For instance, a consumer brand selling to moms needs to know which mommy bloggers are talking about products similar to theirs, or which Instagrammers are taking photos and using hashtags related to their products. A B2B company needs to seek out tech bloggers who carry a lot of weight. Remember, influence isn't only about the number of followers. Find people who are producing content that seems to have an effect.

3 Tips to Improve the Search Ranking for Your Blog Posts

3 Tips to Improve the Search Ranking for Your Blog Posts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your blog posts ranking lower in search than you'd like? Do you want to rank higher for specific keywords? In this article, you'll discover tools and tips to help you improve the search ranking of your blog posts. Listen to this article: How Ranking for Keywords Has Changed Optimizing your blog post to rank high in search engines used to be straightforward: pick your keyword and make sure you use it in the title and a few more times in the article. If you picked the right keyword (and if your blog was well-established and referenced), you were most likely to rank somewhere in top 10. Keyword research has quietly changed over the past few years. First, search engines like Google have become much more sophisticated when it comes to understanding what "high-quality content" is. It's not only about how well your article is optimized: it's also how in-depth, useful, and comprehensive it is. Moreover, as Neil Patel explains, keyword stuffing will get you penalized, not rewarded. Second, the competition is growing: most bloggers know the basics of search engine optimization these days. It's harder to stand out and get ranked. Here's how you can get ahead of your competitors. #1: Include More Keywords The days when you wrote one blog post per keyword are gone. Google (as well as your audience) now looks for more in-depth long-form content that features a varied vocabulary including synonyms, related phrases, and concepts. The following tools will help you expand your keyword lists: Seed Keywords helps you crowdsource your friends and followers into suggesting related keywords for you. The tool creates shareable mini-surveys for your followers to help you brainstorm more ways to search for your topic. Soovle will generate keyword suggestions from multiple sources (Wikipedia, Amazon, YouTube, Yahoo, Answers.com, and Bing), giving you a good overview of how people search for your keyword on different platforms. Another tool that does the same (but supports fewer sources) is the Google Keyword Suggest Tool. It generates suggestions from Google, Bing, YouTube, and Amazon and it digs very deep, so you'll get hundreds of phrases to work with. Reference.com and Synonym.com will help you expand your keyword list with synonyms. If you're looking to optimize your existing blog posts, use Serpstat to go through your site, pick the most powerful pages, and suggest a list of "missing keywords." Essentially, these are words your competitors are ranking high for, but you're not. Now all you need to do is go back to your articles and optimize them for those missing keywords to increase your ranking. An easy way to optimize existing content for new keywords is to add new sections (with subheadings) targeting those new words. This helps content get more comprehensive over time, which naturally results in more social media shares and backlinks. #2: Refer to Notable People, Places, and Brands One of the biggest changes in search engine optimization is Google's focus on understanding entities. "Entities" are related notable people, places, organizations, brands, etc., which associate in some way with your keyword. For the easiest way to demonstrate how entities help in ranking your content, read this awesome case study by Bill Slawski. Bill took a well-optimized piece and rewrote it the following way: first by making it much longer, and second by including notable events and people. The result was astounding. The article started to drive referral traffic from people linking to it, and return visits. And yes, better search rankings too! Google pays special attention to entities when trying to understand how concise and useful your content is. Google has had years to learn to understand entities, concepts, and their relationships. Google's Knowledge Graph is an entity graph. Search for any notable name you're aware of to see how Google structures and relates entities.

Social Media Science: How Behavior Impacts Social Media Marketing

Social Media Science: How Behavior Impacts Social Media Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to understand the psychology behind why people interact via social networks? During this fascinating interview I explore these very concepts. To learn about the science and psychology of social media marketing, I interview Ric Dragon for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ric Dragon, author of Social Marketology and CEO of DragonSearch. Ric shares tips on how businesses can build relationships on social media. You'll learn how relationships develop and why the concepts of gamification and gifting are important. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Science How to develop relationships via social networks People look for other people like themselves, which is called group affinity. People want to find like-minded souls. It is much easier in this age of social media than ever before. Ric shares insights into the importance of small-talk in building relationships. You'll learn how small-talk is an extension of social grooming and how sharing a little about yourself humanizes you and makes it easier to grow your social networks. Ric talks about how people bring common salad to social media. Listen to the show to learn more about building relationships on social media. What gamification and gifting bring to social media Ric explains what gamification and gifting are and the different types of elements within social media. Learn why the most powerful rewards are the unexpected ones. You'll hear about different ways you can gift someone. Ric explains why it's important to measure the depth of engagement and also how to measure the effectiveness of your company's social media activities. Listen to the show to learn why the need to reciprocate is very powerful and relevant to your social activities. How communities develop via social media  Strong communities can form very quickly on social media and sometimes there are micro-communities.  Ric talks about how strong communities can form spontaneously on social media. He also talks about how these communities form around hashtags. You'll learn why listening is important for both pre-existing communities and when communities are forming. Ric talks about online ethnography—the studying of people in an in-depth way online. Listen to the show to learn about how communities develop. How to craft the right brand voice on social media People project personality onto brands and Ric explains why this is important to remember when you shape your brand voice. Ric shares how brands can create the right voice. For example, you need to make sure that even though you want individuals to have their own voice when they speak for your company, you also want this voice to be consistent. Listen to the show to find out why it's important to be consistent. The different subcategories of social media marketing  As social media evolves, the word community is thought of in different ways by different people. The expression social media also has different definitions for different people. Ric explains how there are at least five different types of social media projects. You'll learn why Ric believes brand management will experience the biggest area of growth. He says people are thinking most about brand management and when the brand has a really strong sense of purpose, it becomes a valued member of the community. Listen to the show to discover more about brands using social media well.

Building Business Ideas That Succeed: How to Preflight Your Ideas

Building Business Ideas That Succeed: How to Preflight Your Ideas

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a great idea for a business? Is there a new product you want to create? To discover how to improve your chances for success, I interview Pat Flynn. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Pat Flynn, the host of the Smart Passive Income Podcast, who blogs at smartpassiveincome.com and helps hundreds of thousands of entrepreneurs and aspiring entrepreneurs build their dream businesses. His latest book is called Will it Fly? How to Test Your Next Business Idea So You Don't Waste Your Time and Money. Pat will explore how to increase the likelihood that your next product idea is successful. You'll discover ways to test and validate your ideas. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Building Business Ideas That Succeed How Pat's architect background has helped him in business When Pat started in online business, he taught architects how to take the lead exam. He shares that people reached out to him and thanked him for helping them in their careers, and he says that feeling was different from anything he experienced in the world of architecture. Pat talks about what he did and didn't like about working as an architect, and how the long-term process of breaking a giant project down into chunks helped him when he started in entrepreneurship. He says the process of working hard on a building, planning ahead, and not knowing what it will be like until people are actually using it all translate to building and launching product. Architects and entrepreneurs go through similar processes, Pat says. Each of them are building a solution for a client's problem. As you build it, you make changes, you pivot and you learn as you go. To be successful in any business you need to learn how to adapt and solve other people's problems. Listen to the show to learn what software skill Pat used in architecture that he still uses in business. Why Pat wrote a book about the pre-launch phase In addition to Pat's weekly Smart Passive Income podcast, he does a show called AskPat, during which he answers a voice mail question submitted from his audience via SpeakPipe. One of the most common questions asked is "How do I know if this idea I am working on is worth spending the time?" He tried to answer this question on both shows and found there wasn't enough time for him to cover the topic. The topic was validated through an audience survey (Pat uses SurveyMonkey) in early 2015, when he segmented the people who said they had yet to start a business. By far, their number one concern was not wanting to waste time on something that might not be successful. That's when Pat decided he needed to write a book to people with amazing ideas, that might be life-changing products or services, move forward. Listen to the show to hear the reason behind the title of Pat's new book. Making mistakes Assumptions are great because they are ideas, Pat explains. However, if you act on those assumptions without knowing whether it's something people would actually pay for, that's when you have an issue. Pat shares how a couple of WordPress plugin ideas he had turned into a $15,000 mistake. He didn't discuss the ideas with anybody because it was such a good idea, he didn't want to share it. Plus, he wanted to keep it a secret in order to have an awesome reveal on launch day. Had he simply discussed these ideas with his target audience and people in his mastermind groups, it would have been clear that the idea was merely a starting point. He could have gotten feedback and turned it into something that would actually wo...

How to Enhance Customer Experience With Social Media

How to Enhance Customer Experience With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have happy customers? Want to use social media to help keep them that way? Giving people an awesome experience on social media increases customer satisfaction and builds long-term loyalty. In this article you'll find five ways to improve your customers' experience with social media. Listen to this article: #1: Show Your Gratitude To keep your customers happy and gain a true edge over the competition, be sure your customers know they're seen and appreciated. Proactively reach out to fans and followers on a regular basis. Make your message truly resonate by keeping it personal. Innocent Drinks has more than 200,000 Twitter followers, and they take time to reply to and retweet fans who mention them. A treat is a great method to show your customers gratitude. Do customers regularly order from your web shop? Send them a thank-you note on social media. You can even offer them a small incentive, such as a personalized discount on their favorite items. While this will boost traffic to your website, your customers' happiness level will get an even greater lift. #2: Ask for Your Fans' Opinions Since the rise of social media, it's become a lot easier to reach out to customers and incorporate their preferences into your products and services. Your fans, especially your brand advocates, love to share their thoughts on their beloved products. So give them something to chime in about. #SamsoniteXLiberty - B-Lite or Cosmolite? pic.twitter.com/QV9CWTiMuW — Samsonite (@MySamsonite) June 26, 2015 One of the easiest, most straightforward means of asking for fan feedback is to create a short poll. While asking these kinds of questions on your website might be distracting for fans, social networks are the perfect arena for them. #3: Integrate Feedback When you stay in touch with your customers on social media, it's easy to see what does and doesn't resonate with them. General Mills learned through listening to their customers online and monitoring the right keywords on social media that families weren't just cooking with Pillsbury Dough. They also use it to make shapes and designs for fun as a family activity. By studying these insights, General Mills revitalized their brand and started focusing on the product's family activity value. This Pillsbury Dough holiday commercial is true to the brand. Gathering feedback is key, but it's meaningless if you don't do anything with it. Create a document or spreadsheet with all customer feedback, and then separate suggestions and complaints. Integrate the suggestions, deal with complaints (see #3), but also add them to your document so you can keep track of successful ways to handle them in the future. Review customer feedback regularly and integrate it into your brand activities. #4: Solve Issues Promptly Another way to keep customers happy and show them you care is to solve any issues promptly, whether it's a question or complaint. That means constantly monitoring social media accounts so you can see comments and reply as soon as possible. Set up a unique company policy with a step-by-step program to showcase how you want to handle complaints. Also, depending on the type of business you're in, decide how to rectify certain situations. For example, if someone is unhappy with your service, do you give a refund or a discount? Take it a step further and try to understand why your customer had an issue or question to begin with, and keep track of how frequently he or she contacts your business. When you make an unhappy customer into a happy one, you typically get a brand advocate as a result. Also, if your business finds itself in a social media crisis, no matter what the type or source, own up to it and address it immediately. Your customers' patience, and the customer experience in general, gets challenged the most during problem times. Identify keywords and set up alerts to stay on top of the situation.

Senator Grassley says ‘bump stocks’ were made legal in Obama administration

by Bob Fisher @ AM-1300 KGLO — Your Hometown News Station

DES MOINES — Senator Chuck Grassley is joining two of his colleagues in the Iowa Congressional delegation in calling for the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms to take another look at its rule allowing so-called “bump stocks.” Those devices were used by the sniper in last week’s mass shooting in Las Vegas. Grassley, a

SEO Services Company in Fedscreek KY

by Lunarned45 @ Local seo tips

Search Engine Optimization Seo Services Company Fedscreek KY – Get Some Advantages For Yourself It expenses quite a few money, however if it receives them to primary inside the seek ratings, they could then use that to impress potential clients. Optimization Fedscreek KY is broken down into fundamental areas: on-page, and stale-page optimization. On-page optimization… Continue reading SEO Services Company in Fedscreek KY

Artykuł SEO Services Company in Fedscreek KY pochodzi z serwisu Local seo tips.

Never run a content audit again

by Kieran Forde @ GatherContent Blog

This is the final post in our Content Audits Made Easy series. Over the past few weeks, we’ve looked at why you should audit your content, how to prepare and how to run the perfect content audit. All this has drawn from our experience researching and building Trim – a tool we’ve developed to make […]

The post Never run a content audit again appeared first on GatherContent Blog.

How to Use Promoted Pins on Pinterest

How to Use Promoted Pins on Pinterest

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to get your pins in front of customers? Have you considered using promoted pins? Pinterest promoted pins can help you drive referral traffic and increase sales. In this article you'll discover how to create promoted pins on Pinterest. Listen to this article: Why Promoted Pins? Pinterest's promoted pins, which are now available to all businesses, are designed to increase visibility to a targeted audience. They help you get your products or location in front of people who are far along in the buying process and ready to make a purchase. Promoted pins are searchable, so you can add keywords to connect with users who are searching for content like yours. With promoted pins, you're paying to have your pins placed where users are most likely to notice and interact with them. The promoted pins that users see are based on their interests and activity on the site. Users can't turn off promoted pins, but they can hide specific promoted pins that they don't like. Here's how to get started with promoted pins for your business. #1: Understand Campaign Objectives Just like with other types of social media ads, you can run promoted pin campaigns based on specific goals and objectives. There are three objectives you can choose from: Engagement: Get engagement on your pins, such as repins, clicks, and close-up views of your pins. You pay per action taken. Traffic: Send traffic to your website when users click through your pins. In this case, you pay per click to your site. Awareness: Use promoted pins to introduce and expose your brand to a relevant audience. Awareness pins are currently available only to Fortune 500 companies who have a minimum monthly ad spend, but that may change in the future. Promoted pins, like other social media ads, work on a bid system, so keep this in mind when setting your budget. #2: Create a Promoted Pin To create and use Pinterest's promoted pins, you need to have a business account. If you don't already have one, you can either create a new account or convert your current Pinterest profile to a business account. Once your account is set up and ready to go, hover over Ads at the top left of the Pinterest home page and select Overview. You see an ads dashboard similar to Facebook's Ads Manager, where you can review and create new Pinterest ad campaigns. This article walks you through how to create an engagement promoted pin, but traffic promoted pins work exactly the same way. From the Ads Manager, click on the Promote button next to Engagement Campaigns. Next, select Boost Engagement With Your Pins. If you want a traffic campaign, you'd choose Get Traffic to Your Website. On the next page, name your campaign, select a start and end date (the end date is optional), and choose a daily budget. I recommend setting an end date, since you can only have daily budgets instead of lifetime budgets. If you don't set an end date, make sure you keep an eye on the campaign so you don't spend more than you intended. After you click Pick a Pin, you'll see a list of your pins. Select the pin you want to use for your campaign. If you want, you can search for a pin using the search box, or view the pin that's been most clicked or the most repinned in the past 30 days. After you select your pin, enter a name for your promoted pin and set a destination URL. Make sure that the URL goes to the specific page where you want users to land, not a generic homepage. In the next section, select relevant topics that will help you reach your target audience in their home feeds. You want your pin to be placed in the right Pinterest categories so users come across it while browsing. Make sure to choose only relevant interests for your pin, not random interests your audience might have (as you might do on Facebook). This step is about pin placement, so it needs to be accurate. Next,

7 Ways to Stand Out With LinkedIn Visual Content

7 Ways to Stand Out With LinkedIn Visual Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to attract more attention on LinkedIn? Have you considered adding visuals to your profile? Consider using images to build out each section of your LinkedIn profile. In this article I'll share seven ways to improve your LinkedIn profile with visuals. Listen to this article: #1: Connect a Face to Your Name While it might seem obvious, many LinkedIn users fail to use the most powerful visual element: their profile photo. To upload a personal photo, go to your Edit Profile page (choose Profile > Edit Profile), hover your mouse over the existing photo in the upper-left corner and click the camera icon. In the window that pops up, you can add a new photo or crop the one you're currently using. Ideally, you should upload your profile photo at 400 x 400 pixels. Make sure your photo is consistent with the message you want to send as professional. #2: Complete Your First Impression When combined with your profile photo, your background photo creates a strong visual first impression for profile visitors. You can use this image to connect your personal presence with your brand, show love for your home city or promote the company you work for. To upload a background image, hover your mouse over the background area and click on the Edit Background button that pops up. From there, you can upload any photo you want at the recommended size of 1400 x 425 pixels, or if you have a premium account, you can choose an image from the LinkedIn image gallery. Your background photo is an excellent opportunity to make a statement to profile visitors. #3: Dress Up Your Publisher Articles Writing articles on LinkedIn's Publisher platform not only provides an opportunity to share your expertise, but also allows you to add more visual pop to your profile. Because the last three articles you posted on the Publisher platform appear on your personal profile, you'll want to select header images that reflect the topic of each article and visually represent your personal brand. To add a photo to your Publisher article, simply click on the header when writing your Publisher post. #4: Enhance Your Summary and Experience One of the easiest ways to add visual content to your profile is to embed multimedia directly into the Summary and Experience sections. You can add videos, PowerPoint presentations, PDF files and photos. To add multimedia content to your profile, go to your Summary or Experience section and click the Add Media option that corresponds to the media you want to add. Your options include Document, Photo, Link, Video or Presentation. In the pop-up box that appears, you can upload a file directly or type in the URL to content hosted elsewhere (YouTube or Vimeo, for example). If you've already added multimedia to your Summary or Experience section, you’ll be able to add more by clicking the small button with the screen and addition symbol. #5: Highlight Your Offline Expertise LinkedIn's acquisition of SlideShare gives users an easy way to create and upload attractive presentations. You can upload your presentations directly to SlideShare, or if you don't have a presentation to share, you can find one from an expert in your field. To add your own content to SlideShare, click the Interests tab at the top of the page and select SlideShare. To upload a presentation, click Share Your Insights and then Upload to This Page. On the next page, click Select Files to Upload, as shown here, and navigate to your file. Once you've uploaded your file, you can add that content directly to your LinkedIn profile. It's a simple way to transfer your offline expertise to your online brand. #6: Draw Attention to Your Professional Skills The Skills and Endorsements section is an underutilized tool to make your profile stand out on LinkedIn. The first 10 skills listed on your profile show small thumbnails of the first 12 endorsers.

Speaking at Integrated Live

by Drew @ London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies

The awesome Isabelle Andrews (Unicef UK) and I are speaking next month (16th November 2016) at Integrated Live. I used to do a lot of events when I was Head of Online Marketing at Chameleon, but I’m feeling a little bit rusty if I’m honest, so fortunately Isabelle and I have a really great case study to... Continue reading

The post Speaking at Integrated Live appeared first on London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies.

Thursday October 12th Local Sports

Thursday October 12th Local Sports

by Bob Fisher @ AM-1300 KGLO — Your Hometown News Station

AMES — Joel Lanning says it is time to turn the page to Kansas. The Iowa State senior has received national attention, including an appearance on Sportscenter, after playing on both sides of the ball in the Cyclones’ stunning upset at Oklahoma. He was named the Big-12 Defensive Player of the Week. Lanning says he

New Facebook Features: What Marketers Need to Know

New Facebook Features: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you using Facebook for your business? Are you wondering how Facebook's newest features can help your business? To learn about what these new Facebook features mean for marketers, I interview Mari Smith for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mari Smith, who is known as the Queen of Facebook. She's the world's leading authority on Facebook marketing and author of The New Relationship Marketing and co-author of Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day. Mari shares how the new Facebook features can work for your business and what you should pay attention to. You'll learn how to use the new hashtags and how to make the most of your cover image. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Features for Marketers Has Facebook rolled out a lot of changes recently in response to Twitter and Google? Mari states that there are many reasons for these new changes, although not necessarily in response to Twitter and Google+. However, Mark Zuckerberg and his entire team do keep a very close eye on the competition. When it comes to features that have been around for a while, Facebook tends to be late with their release simply because they are a much bigger machine. They have a lot more complexity to deal with. With Facebook being a public company, they have to make money for their shareholders. They've made a lot of changes to their ad product and it seems like they move things around to try and get the marketers attention. Listen to the show to find out why most of the features are there to predominantly improve the monetization aspect. What Facebook hashtags are and why marketers should care Mari explains that the simple definition of a hashtag is that it's a way to group conversations together, around the same topic. This makes it easy to discover and follow conversations. Just like you see on Twitter, Instagram, Pinterest, Google+ and LinkedIn. If you think about TV ads 2-3 years ago, the call to action would be an invite to join the brand, where they would give out their Facebook Fanpage. Now the call to action is a hashtag. You'll hear Mari talk about the reason behind why some TV shows have niche hashtags appear throughout their broadcast, instead of one main hashtag. As a business owner you need to start to experiment with hashtags. Find one or two hashtags that can help you ride a wave. There's a term called newsjacking. It doesn't sound very nice but it's a very popular way to get your business in front of people who are talking about something anyway. The great thing about Facebook's hashtags, is that they are clickable. So if you click on any, whether it's on a Post or a Comment, it opens up into what is called the Hashtag Feed. This feed displays other posts with the same hashtag. However, recently they have introduced related searches into this feature. So not only will you see the exact verbatim hashtag but also similar ones. As a strategic marketer, Mari highly recommends every business owner make good use of hashtags. Even if you don't have them personally, they are active for other people. Listen to the show to find out how clickable hashtags can get you in front of new people. Tips and creative uses for Facebook hashtags Mari uses two generic Facebook hashtags which are #facebookmarketing and #facebooktips. You'll hear what hashtag Mari uses to separate herself away from her peers. It's where you'll find all of her posts.

3 Ways to Analyze Facebook Video Performance

3 Ways to Analyze Facebook Video Performance

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is video part of your Facebook marketing strategy? Wondering how video is working for you on Facebook? To make informed decisions about using video on Facebook, you need to have a good understanding of how your fans consume it. In this article you’ll discover three ways to analyze video posts on Facebook. Listen to this article: #1: Compare Native Facebook Video Posts to YouTube Video Posts Let's start by comparing how videos posted natively to Facebook compare with YouTube videos shared on Facebook. You want to see if you get a performance boost by posting natively to Facebook, and if so, how much. To do this analysis, look at sample data provided by the Santa Fe tourism office for posts from October 1, 2015 through January 3, 2016. They posted a total of 23 videos on their Facebook page during that time. Eight of the videos were uploaded to Facebook natively, and 15 were shared from YouTube. You'll want to compare Post Stories, Post Consumptions, Post Reach, and % of Fans Reached. You can download these metrics from Facebook Insights, and you'll look at the averages of the Facebook and YouTube video posts. In the chart below, you can see the performance metrics for both the Facebook and YouTube videos. There's a clear, sizable difference in performance between the two video formats. Native Facebook videos performed much better than videos shared from YouTube. While there was some variance in the data for each platform, the Facebook posts beat the average about 50% of the time, while the YouTube posts beat the average only 10% of the time. There are several possible explanations for performance difference: Facebook videos autoplay by default, so they grab viewers' attention in the news feed and result in better performance. The videos may rank higher in the Facebook algorithm, and therefore get more impressions and better reach. Facebook gives preference to its own videos in the news feed algorithm. Indeed, Facebook videos include view data while YouTube videos don't. If views are a key metric in Facebook's news feed algorithm, it would be an obvious advantage for the platform. Facebook shows the view count for its native videos, which may motivate users to view the video. Video plays are a big indicator on YouTube, and have always been a big part of the user experience. Facebook native videos have larger and more impactful thumbnail images than YouTube videos. That can make a big difference in grabbing viewers' attention and convincing them to play the video. Note the high number of Consumptions (video plays, primarily) for Facebook native videos, which suggests more eye-catching images encourage more people to play the videos. From these metrics, you can conclude that sharing a YouTube video rather than uploading native video to Facebook would cost the organization some engagement and reach. To see if your business should upload videos natively to Facebook instead of YouTube to maximize their performance, compare your own numbers. #2: Look at Video Posts vs. Photo Posts Videos are generally more time-consuming and expensive to produce than photos, so are they worth the investment? To find out, look at the same video posts you used in the analysis above. Along with those video posts, I also included data for 71 photos posted during the same time period (excluding photos posted to galleries, because the engagement metrics are heavily skewed on those). This comparison analyzes the performance of video versus photo content. You'll evaluate the same performance metrics you looked at previously: Stories, Reach, and Fan Reach. These metrics are as relevant for photos as they are for video content. Again, the rows represent the averages for each post type. If you look at the Post Stories engagement metric, photos performed similarly to Facebook native videos. However, when you get to the reach metrics,

Facebook Advertising 101: How to Get Started With Facebook Ads

Facebook Advertising 101: How to Get Started With Facebook Ads

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you considering running Facebook ads? Have you tried Facebook ads but have had little success? To discover how to run successful Facebook ad campaigns, I interview Amy Porterfield. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Amy Porterfield, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies and host of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast. She's also the former Facebook community manager for Social Media Examiner. Amy will explore what you need to know to get started with Facebook ads, plus you'll discover the benefits of running Facebook ad campaigns. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Advertising 101 How Amy got started in social media and Facebook Amy became interested in social media when she was still in the corporate world. She worked for Tony Robbins for about six and a half years as director of content development. In that last year Tony got heavily into social media (he did his own Twitter), and Amy worked on Tony's Facebook page. Amy got the entrepreneurial bug, and knew she wanted to go out on her own. She fell in love with social media and she knew that was the area to pursue. While still in the corporate sphere, Amy started educating herself. She asked to be involved with anything related to online marketing and social media. About a year later, she took the leap and left the corporate world. Amy started by doing social media consulting, but eventually built a business around online training courses related to social media marketing. Listen to the show to discover how Amy and I first connected, and our first experience at Blog World. Why use Facebook ads? Facebook does a lot to help marketers find their ideal audience online. Amy believes the targeting capabilities on Facebook are far more advanced than any other social media platform. Facebook allows people to get in front of their perfect audience on a regular basis. Amy breaks down the Facebook targeting options. If you've built up a Facebook business page and have a few thousand fans, start with targeting them. It's the cheapest way to target on Facebook, since you don't pay as much when you target your own fans versus a cold audience. The next thing to do is create a lookalike audience of your own fan base. You tell Facebook that you have these fans, and you want to target people who are similar in likes, interests, activities and behavior. Facebook will give you an audience that's very similar to the one you've already attracted. Then upload your email list to Facebook. Facebook will compare it to their database, and when they find a match, they put the contact in a bucket. This allows you to target people who are already on your email list with a new opportunity. Also, take that email list and ask Facebook to find a lookalike audience. Amy adds a couple of other targeting options to the mix. Target fans of other Facebook pages, such as your competitors or people who are aligned with your business. Amy says the reason she mentioned the other options first is that sometimes when people are first starting out and go to look for similar interests, they struggle to find Facebook pages to pop up. For example, when you put together your ad, if you type "Amy Porterfield" in interests, her page will likely pop up, and you can target her fans. But a lot of pages won't populate, Amy explains. Facebook says it has to do with trending, activity, engagement and how many fans you have. Amy suggests trying to find five pages and target their fans. Another one of Amy's favorite techniques is to re...

8 Ways to Optimize Facebook Ad Targeting

8 Ways to Optimize Facebook Ad Targeting

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Could your Facebook ad targeting use some refinement? Looking for new ways to reach your ideal audience with Facebook ads? Facebook's new targeting options help you improve the conversion rate of your Facebook ads. In this article you'll discover eight ways to optimize your Facebook ad targeting. Listen to this article: #1: Narrow Lookalike Audiences With Interests If you enjoy a high amount of traffic to your blog or have a wide list of existing customers, using lookalike audiences is a great tactic. Unfortunately, in many cases, lookalike audiences are too large. The minimum lookalike audience in the U.S., for example, is around 1 million users. To find a smaller and more focused audience for your ad, test your ads using different interests. When you find the right combination of lookalike audience and interest, you'll have a more targeted audience and reduce the cost per click/conversion. Here's how to combine interests with a lookalike audience. First, choose the lookalike audience you want to use. For example, in the image below I chose Lookalike (US, 1%) with 1.9M people. Then scroll down to Detailed Targeting and add interests one by one. Test the option above versus the traditional solo-flying lookalike audience, which is much broader. See if you're managing to hit the sweet spot inside what's already a well-defined audience. Refining Interests With Companies and Blogs Your options for defining an audience by their interests have changed significantly in the last year. In the early days of interests targeting, the interests you could choose were limited and usually on a high level (for example, Running, Marathons, Ironman Triathlon). Now you can define companies, blogs and even influencers as interests. Rather than use broad terms, you can choose interests like RunKeeper, Nike+ Fuelband, Jeff Galloway and Runner's World Blog. These kinds of interests typically perform much better than broad terms. If your audience is too small, try choosing dozens of companies, apps, influencers and blogs. Here's an example of an old high-level audience combination. Here's a recommended mix of smaller audiences. You can start out broad and work your way to more niche interests, or start small and expand. Whatever tactic you choose, make sure to give each method a chance to gain enough impressions to measure it accurately. #2: Expand the Age Range One common practice for defining your target audience is to choose the right ages based on your product definitions or Facebook Insights. For example, when building an ad campaign for college students, most advertisers will pick an age range of 18-22. A great way to lower your cost per conversion is to expand your age range. To test a wider age range, try one of these options: Choose an age range of 10 years (for example, 18-28) Choose an age range of 30-40 years (for example, 18-58) You may be surprised to see that Facebook still shows your ad mainly to your target audience while the cost goes down. #3: Use the Must Also Match Feature Last October, Facebook launched a new feature called Detailed Targeting. This allows you to choose "must also match" interests rather than just a group of interests. Several experiments in different categories and industries have shown that adding "must also match" interests leads to a more engaged audience and reduces click/conversion costs by up to 25%. For example, if you choose Twitter as an interest and Social Media Marketing as a "must also match" interest, it will work better than choosing both interests as usual or just one interest. To test what works for you, change the interest in the Must Also Match at Least One of the Following box. Try adding two or three interests, and keep close tabs to see if your conversion rates improve. If not, you went one interest too far. #4: Exclude Website Visitors

SEO Services in Luck WI

by JAROSLAW CHROBOT @ Small Business Marketing

As a small business owner, building a web site is just part of the process of getting your business noticed online. SEOin Luck WI 54853is undoubtedly a key part of the puzzle, and websites that get the best rankings from search engines, naturally tend to get the most organic traffic as well. Often however, small […]

The post SEO Services in Luck WI appeared first on Small Business Marketing.

How to Use Social Media Insights to Improve Your Marketing

How to Use Social Media Insights to Improve Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you marketing on Twitter, Facebook or Pinterest? Do you know which type of posts your followers prefer? Social media analytics let you see who your followers are and what they like. In this article you'll discover how to use your audience insights from Twitter, Facebook and Pinterest to improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Track Follower Preferences on Twitter Twitter provides a free analytics dashboard with key statistics about your account. You can measure your success in a variety of ways, ranging from the number of new followers to your most popular tweets. You can access the Twitter analytics dashboard here. After you log into your account, you'll see a 28-day summary of your profile. The summary shows the number of times you've tweeted, tweet impressions, followers and profile visits. Next to each number is an up or down arrow, representing the change over the previous period. The right side of the screen shows a summary of your analytics for the current month. If you scroll down, you can see summaries from previous months so you can compare and track your progress. What do you do with this information? Start tracking it from month to month. Create a table and list the number of followers you have at the end of the month. Then measure the monthly and overall percentage increases or decreases from the first column or month you started. If you want to see more detailed analytics for your profile, click on View All Tweet Activity. The page that appears shows a helpful and informative graph that lets you see the number of impressions that your tweets have earned over the last 28 days. On the right side of the page is an overview of your engagement rate, link clicks, retweets, favorites and replies. The 28-day range is the default setting, but you can change it to a more specific or broader range of dates. Make your selection from the drop-down menu on the right side of the page. Below the main graph on this page is a breakdown of all of your tweets within the selected date range. From here, you can see the number of impressions and engagements and the engagement rate for each tweet. Click on View Tweet Activity to see more information for a specific tweet. The report details how many people engaged with the tweet and the number of impressions. It also shows how many people clicked on your profile, favorited the tweet or retweeted it. Why is this information beneficial? Because it lets you see what content is working (what your audience likes) and what isn't. This helps you refine your content strategy to post about topics that your followers care about. #2: Discover Fan Insights on Facebook Facebook offers its own version of analytics called Facebook Insights (available after your page has received 30 likes). Use this information to make improvements to your content and determine the best times to post. To access these metrics, click Insights at the top of the page. From here, you can click these tabs to view a variety of analytics. Overview The Overview section provides the most important analytics. It lists page likes, post reach (the number of people who have seen impressions of a post) and engagement (the percentage of people who saw a post and liked, clicked, commented on or shared it). Scroll down the page to see your five most recent posts. For each post, view metrics on reach, engagement (broken down into post clicks, likes, comments and shares) and if applicable, how much money you spent promoting the post. Likes In the Likes section, you'll see a graph showcasing your page's growth in terms of audience. You can change the date range to see the total page likes for a certain range of dates or a particular date. For the time period you selected, you can also see net likes, which is the number of new likes minus unlikes and paid likes.

How to Use Video Storytelling in Your Social Media Marketing

How to Use Video Storytelling in Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use video on your social channels? Looking for ways to connect with your audience? Telling stories with video increases engagement, triggers social sharing and gives people a reason to talk about you online and offline. In this article I'll highlight eight ways to combine storytelling, video and social media. Listen to this article: #1: Post Stories From Your Customers On Airbnb's Facebook page, the company posts video stories about places around the world, as told by Airbnb hosts. This is a great way to produce engaging and interesting content, and create an emotional connection between your customers and prospects and your company. Post video stories from your customers to create a personal connection with other viewers. #2: Create a Fictional Series Creating a fictional video series is another way to integrate your brand with a story that entertains your audience. Kate Spade New York created a video series called #missadventure, which it hosts on Facebook, Instagram and on its own website. The series, which stars actress Anna Kendrick, combines the company's products with an engaging storyline that follows the character's misadventures in and around a ritzy hotel. And of course, her handbags and accessories are from Kate Spade. Create a fictional series to promote your brand while you entertain your audience at the same time. You don't have to hire a professional actor to produce a fictional video series, but decent acting and a compelling story definitely go a long way. #3: Tell Personal Stories Gary Vaynerchuk is known for stories and video from his Wine Library TV days, and he's always innovating in the online video space (including his recent experiments with Meerkat). On Facebook, he regularly posts videos that include personal stories as a way to connect with his audience. His videos motivate viewers and teach important, hard-won lessons about entrepreneurship and marketing. #4: Shoot Documentary-Style Video Another way to tell stories with video is to shoot in a documentary style. This can be a short documentary video or a series of true stories about something that would interest your audience. Chipotle created a documentary-style video series around Major League Soccer, featuring Harry Shipp of the Chicago Fire. Shoot a documentary-style video to tell a story that will interest your viewers. Documentary-style video can be very intriguing, and it doesn't have to involve a star. It can feature anyone who is involved in something of interest to your audience. #5: Interview Guests An interview or video podcast is a great way to draw out stories from industry thought leaders, customers or partners. Michael Hyatt posts portions of his video podcast interviews on his Facebook page as teasers. Video interviews don't require a big budget. Just make sure you have good questions and an engaging guest. #6: Take Viewers Behind the Scenes People love to see "how the sausage is made." Behind-the-scenes videos work for businesses that sell services (for example, show how your company creates a social media strategy) and products (see the example below). Ed Sbragia, an internationally recognized winemaker, tells the story of a wine set in the barrel room. The video is short and inexpensively made, but this is the kind of content that engages viewers. If you're interested in giving viewers a peek at your business, look for natural storytellers on your team who can get in front of the camera and tell stories. #7: Create Animated Stories Another option for social videos is to develop an animated story, similar to what Chipotle has been doing with its video series Back to the Start and The Scarecrow. You could hire a video production company that specializes in animation, but there are also a number of tools you can use to create animated videos, including GoAnimate, Powtoon and MakeWebVideo. Tell a compelling story through animation.

Twitter for Business: How to Use Twitter to Grow Your Influence

Twitter for Business: How to Use Twitter to Grow Your Influence

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for your business? Are you wondering how to use Twitter to grow your online influence? To learn how to best use Twitter for your business, I interview Joel Comm for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Joel Comm, author of numerous books including Twitter Power 2.0 and So, What Do You Do? He's also the host of The Joel Comm Show, a business podcast. Joel shares how he uses Twitter to grow his platform. You'll learn how to grow a quality Twitter following, and which types of content work best. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter for Business So, "What do you do?" Joel explains how he asks questions and helps people discover what their core is. This can include passions, talents, skills, abilities and personality, which are used to bring value to the world around them. This is how you find ultimate fulfillment. Listen to the show to find out the importance of starting a conversation. Why marketers should pay close attention to Twitter Joel explains how Twitter is still relevant. They have 200 million active users every day, which is really impressive when up against Facebook's 1 billion–plus accounts. The thing that made Twitter cool in the first place is its simplicity. It remains relevant because it's where people gather. Joel calls it the virtual water cooler. Twitter is a place for short conversations, which can be extremely powerful and relevant. Joel says that the water cooler strategy is to engage. You'll find out the two different ways that Joel engages on Twitter and why significance is so important. The most essential part is to be authentic. You can connect in the moment, which can be greater than you might imagine. Joel describes how pictures are an excellent use of Twitter. He likes to tweet from Instagram and can post from his Instagram account to Facebook, Twitter, Tumblr and Foursquare, all at the same time. Twitter only allows 140 characters, so when you use pictures, it can be a lot of bonus words. Even mundane pictures can get a lot of interaction. Listen to the show to hear an example of a picture that Joel used that made him realize there's a lot of power in mundane tweets. How Joel uses Twitter today to grow his platform  Joel has started to check out more of what people on his stream have to say and then reshares their content. He does this more than tweeting his own original content. It's the giver mentality. A couple of Twitter's strengths are the retweet and the favorite. They're great opportunities to focus on the value that others bring. There are days when Joel doesn't tweet at all. Other days, he can get 5 or 6 tweets in. It all depends on what's happening that particular day. You should never just tweet for the sake of tweeting. When it comes to a tweeting strategy, you'll discover why it's important to be true to yourself and be aware of the types of businesses Twitter works best for. Listen to the show to find out why Joel generally uses the standard retweet over a customized retweet. How to grow a quality Twitter following Joel advises starting with absolutely nothing. If you are new on Twitter and don't know where to begin, Joel recommends you start with a hashtag that is in an area of interest. The next step is to discover people who are talking about your personal or business interests. As entrepreneurs, there is typically an overlap of the two. Once you start to follow people,

8 Collaboration Tools to Improve Your Content

8 Collaboration Tools to Improve Your Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you part of a team that collaborates on content? Want tools to make the collaboration process more efficient? Whether you're working on blog post or creating social media updates, the more people involved, the richer the results can be. Using collaboration tools makes the process smooth and seamless. In this article I'll share eight collaboration tools to improve your productivity. Listen to this article: #1: Map Out Content Using MindMeister MindMeister is an effective brain-mapping tool that allows you to visually break down complex concepts and show how each idea flows into another. It's perhaps the fastest, easiest way to get a point across effectively. MindMeister is browser-based and available on mobile apps. There are a variety of templates and numerous additional features for brainstorming, project plans and more. Map out your content strategy with your team, no matter where they're located. Price: Free plan gives you access to three maps. Note: MindMeister collaboration features are included in the free plan. There are multiple premium plan options, starting at $36 for 6 months with a 30-day free trial. #2: Brainstorm in Real Time With Scribblar Scribblar is an educational tool that can also be used for collaborative brainstorming sessions. Primarily an educational tool, Scribblar is a favorite among students and teachers for its ability to create multiple "rooms" that allow you to collaborate in real time. Plus, you can text and audio chat during the process. While there is an obvious academic tone, Scribblar is a great tool for creative people who excel when they let their ideas flow in a free-form conversation. When working on your content plan, eliminate endless emails and conference calls. Just jump onto Scribblar and work on the same dashboard together. Price: A very limited free plan (2 users, 1 room) and a variety of premium plans that start at $9 a month are available. Note: Chatwoo can be a good free alternative. It's online chat room software which is completely free. You can use it to collaborate with your team (on a private corporate site) or with your site visitors. #3: Compile Research on Cyfe Cyfe is a multi-purpose research and productivity dashboard that lets you collect data, create to-do lists, archive search results and more. It helps you monitor social media mentions and activity too. For companies that need a bit more oomph in their collaborative tools, Cyfe provides a long feature list to help users work together in the cloud. Price: There's a free plan with the option to upgrade to premium ($19 per month; $14 a month if paid annually). #4: Plan Editorial on GatherContent Specifically designed for collaborating, GatherContent is every social media manager's and blog editor's dream. It allows you to create an effective project or editorial calendar that has everything in the same place, and is organized through the same dashboard. This ultra-organized information keeps everyone on the team on the same page. GatherContent is easy to use and minimizes the task of managing workflow, no matter how many people you invite to be a part of the process. Never cross wires or miss deadlines again. Price: $79 per month with a 30-day free trial. Note: Check out CoSchedule as another option. #5: Manage Projects on Trello If you need a simple way to set tasks for everyone on your team, Trello is probably the best project management tool for this purpose. Once you have a plan, create boards and then pin cards with tasks to each one. Then, write either checklists or standard text instructions for what each task entails, and assign those cards to different team members. When the work is done, attach documents to the completed card if you like and list it as complete. Also, @tag team members to quickly get their attention and connect with them. Price: Free. Note: Also check out Wrike for easy project management.

SEO Services in Delbarton WV

by JAROSLAW CHROBOT @ Small Business Marketing

As a small business owner, building a web site is just part of the process of getting your business noticed online. SEOin Delbarton WV 25670is undoubtedly a key part of the puzzle, and websites that get the best rankings from search engines, naturally tend to get the most organic traffic as well. Often however, small […]

The post SEO Services in Delbarton WV appeared first on Small Business Marketing.

4 Tools to Build a Social Media Content Calendar

4 Tools to Build a Social Media Content Calendar

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you struggle to keep track of your social media content? Are you looking for tools to help? Creating a social media content calendar doesn't need to be complicated or require a whole new platform. In this article you'll find four ways to build a social media content calendar with tools you may already use. Why Use a Social Media Calendar Individuals and businesses use social media for community engagement, content promotion, customer support, promoting the latest offers and more. Managing many moving parts involves multiple people, multiple strategies, and if not handled correctly, multiple problems. Listen to this article: When you keep all of your social media content plans in a central location, you let everyone know what everyone else is doing, they can see the latest changes and updates and can plan their own content accordingly. Use your calendar to track a variety of items, including publish date and time, post text, attached link, image or images, post type (image, link, text, etc.), campaign and post category or goal (engagement, content promotion, etc.). Once you've determined what to add to your calendar, it's time to create it. Here's how. #1: List It in Google Sheets Since Google Drive is a staple for many businesses, calendars managed in Google Sheets are familiar and accessible. It's easy for anyone comfortable with spreadsheets to use. Plus, when you implement such a familiar tool, you can dive right into planning. The collaboration features prevent confusion over outdated versions. Furthermore, the spreadsheet can be even more useful if your scheduling tool allows bulk uploading via CSV. To set up your calendar, either start with a "blank page" or search for social media calendar templates online. If you want, add a tab for each social network to keep everything separate. Even when you use a template, you still want to customize it a bit. Add all of the info your team needs to know, and leave out whatever they don't. For instance, if it's important to track who's responsible for each update, add a column for that. If most of your posts don't have links, delete that column. Keep in mind, not all information needs to be written out in the spreadsheet. Use color-coding, team member initials and other shortcuts to further organize the calendar. #2: Map It in Google Calendar Google Calendar, which a lot of people use already, has a slightly more rigid structure. However, nothing beats an actual calendar for keeping track of due dates and responsibilities. Keep all of your social content laid out in an actual calendar view. Those who prefer a list format are able to switch to agenda view. Create different calendars for each team member, client or social network to make it easy to segment your content. That way you'll get a calendar view of not just what's being posted, but who's responsible for it or what content category it falls under. Decide how you want to set up your calendar system (I color-code them either by network or content type), and create your multiple calendars. Then create an event for each post. Organize the details as you'd like. For example, use the location field to note who's writing which post. Then use the description for compiling additional details such as post link once it's published. #3: Visualize It in Trello Trello, which is organized by boards, lists and cards, is a tool a lot of people already use for brainstorming and collaboration. Like spreadsheets, Trello is flexible enough for anything. However, it looks and feels the opposite of a spreadsheet. If you're a visual person, or if you like organizing your content by progress stage, try Trello. When you first set up your Trello social media calendar, decide how to organize it. Make lists for different progress stages, social networks or marketing campaigns. Trello also has a calendar view for due dates, which makes it possible to build a plan with t...

Responsive websites a must for maximum online reach

by veetoo @ Belfast based web site design company, Northern Ireland

As Google now give priority to mobile friendly web sites, for maximum online reach it is essential that your web site is responsive and formatted to display correctly on multiple portable devices such as smart phones and tablets. With over 50 percent of users worldwide now surfing on portable devices, it’s important that you up your […]

The post Responsive websites a must for maximum online reach appeared first on Belfast based web site design company, Northern Ireland.

Instagram Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

Instagram Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you active on Instagram? Have you considered experimenting with ads? To find out how Instagram ads work, I interview Jenn Herman. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jenn Herman, a social media consultant and Instagram expert. Her blog, JennsTrends.com, has placed in our top social media blogs three years in a row. She also wrote an ebook called, How to Run a Successful Instagram Ad. Jenn explores the differences and similarities between Facebook and Instagram ads. You'll discover how you can succeed with Instagram ads. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Instagram Ads How Jenn Got Into Instagram Jenn admits she was a late adopter of Instagram and started on the platform just a few years ago. She held off because, like many people, she felt she didn't have time for another social media platform. Eventually, Jenn decided she needed to understand Instagram marketing for her blog, so she set up an account, tried it out, and fell in love with the community engagement on Instagram. People are active on it and you can instantly create relationships. That's when she decided to make Instagram a focus. Jenn uses Instagram primarily to build the brand around her blog. Every time she has a new blog post, she shares it on Instagram. People who follow her see a new blog post, and then click through to read it. You can find her on Instagram under @Jenns_Trends. Listen to the show to discover the other reason why Jenn loves Instagram. Facebook Ads Versus Instagram Ads Facebook ads and Instagram ads are very similar, Jenn explains. In fact, Instagram ads are run through Facebook's Business Manager. Therefore, you can't run an ad on Instagram unless you're connected to your Facebook Ads account. It's easy to get started with Instagram ads if you've done Facebook ads because both ad types use the same dashboard. There are some differences, however. For example, Instagram doesn't feature the total number of targeting options that Facebook offers. There are also differences in terms of ad image design. For instance, while graphic-type images with bright colors, contrast, and certain text features perform well on Facebook, people on Instagram prefer natural, organic-looking photos. For that reason, Jenn cautions against running identical ads on Facebook and Instagram. She says that a properly designed and targeted Instagram ad blends in with organic posts, and shouldn't stand out as an ad. Because the average Instagram user likes photos that place him or her into an environment, Jenn cautions against creating an ad that features your product on a shelf, in a box, or on a flat white background. Instead, place your product in the hands of a model or in a scenario that's relevant to the brand or your target audience. Do you offer a service? Don't say, "Here, get this today." Instead, create something relatable to the person who would purchase it. Although there's no limit to text on Instagram (like the 20% rule on Facebook, which is going away), it doesn't mean you want to include a lot of big, bright text. You want your ad to be very photo-centric. You want to promote a high-quality, well-lit, properly focused and formatted image that stands out and represents your brand. Listen to the show to hear what will happen if you run the same ad on both Facebook and Instagram. Instagram Ad Features Instagram ads are distinguished from organic posts with text that says "Sponsored" in the top-right corner. In the top-left corner of the ad,

26 Ways to Use Video for Your Social Media Marketing

26 Ways to Use Video for Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to add video to your social media marketing? Looking for ways to increase video views and engagement? In this article, you'll discover 26 ways to use video to improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Experiment With Video Lengths When it comes to the ideal video duration, a lot depends on the type of video you want to share with your audience. Testing different video lengths will give you an idea of what works best for you. Before you get started shooting or editing your video, you should know the maximum video lengths per platform. These include: Facebook: 120 minutes Twitter recommends keeping videos under 30 seconds Instagram: 60 seconds Snapchat: 10 seconds Vine: 6 seconds Note: While you don't have to reach the maximum time length, you're not allowed to go over it. If you really want to get around the maximum video duration on social media platforms, you can post a link to a YouTube video, which will allow you to share longer content. Unfortunately, this doesn't work on Instagram, where you can't share links except in ad campaigns. #2: Optimize for Autoplay Twitter, Facebook, and Instagram offer Autoplay as a feature. When users scroll through their news feeds, your video automatically plays as it passes over their screen. This encourages users to watch your video, because it's already playing. Feature movement within the first few frames to enhance the Autoplay feature and grab attention quickly. There is a caveat, however. Users are more likely to turn off Autoplay on their mobile devices to reign in unwanted data charges. Alternatively, you can target longer video campaigns to desktop users and see if that increases your views and engagement overall. Though Autoplay helps increase views when Facebook and Twitter users have it enabled, be careful not to count on it too much. #3: Add Subtitles Social media connects us with users whom we may not interact with otherwise, and brands that are as inclusive as possible will have the best results. Adding subtitles to your videos lets users watch them on their mobile devices even if they're in a place where they can't or don't want to play the accompanying sound (like a waiting room or a plane). More importantly, adding video subtitles will allow those who are hearing-impaired to watch and get all of the information. It's easy to add subtitles to your video from your computer with any video editing tools. You can also add subtitles to Facebook videos by uploading SRT files with your video. #4: Broadcast Live Facebook Live video lets businesses and users broadcast videos to their audiences in real time from their smartphones. You can see the number of users watching and users can comment on the video in real time. You can also address comments directly as the video plays. One study found that viewers spend 3x more time watching live videos than videos that aren't broadcasting in real time. Users automatically opt in to get notifications when someone they follow is "going live," which increases visibility. Once your live video is complete, you can save your live video to your timeline so users who missed it live can watch it later. Periscope and Blab also provide platforms for live video sharing. #5: Grab Attention Early It's vital to grab your audience's attention within the first few seconds of your video. You need to capture viewers' interest within the first 10 seconds (or less) or they'll stop watching and move on to something else. This forces you to be concise and get right to the point. Vine's success with six-second videos proves it's possible to catch a user's interest in 10 seconds or less. Within the first few seconds, the following video tells viewers what it'll be about, and offers a solution to a problem. Hooks are an important part of capturing interest, because they explain why viewers should care or be interested.

Facebook Marketing: Why It Is Time to Rethink Everything

Facebook Marketing: Why It Is Time to Rethink Everything

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook to market your business? Wondering how marketing on Facebook is evolving? To explore how marketers should adjust to Facebook's recent and future changes, I interview Mari Smith. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Mari Smith, the world's leading Facebook marketing expert. She co-authored Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day and is author of The New Relationship Marketing. Mari shares why it's time for marketers to rethink how they use Facebook. You'll discover where Mari believes Facebook is headed. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing The Facebook Algorithm Mari explains that the Facebook algorithm pre-filters content that users see in their news feeds. The algorithm manages the vast amount of content posted to Facebook and thus helps advertisers, while hopefully showing Facebook users the most relevant content among the thousands of posts they could see. Users can have as many as 5,000 friends, join up to 6,000 groups, and follow up to 5,000 pages. With posts coming from all of these sources, users might see as many as 15,000 posts. Mari says that the Facebook algorithm narrows down what users actually see to about 1,500 posts, and from that pool of content, narrows what users might see even further to about 300 posts. Mari says the algorithm is complex with about 100,000 weights, of which only about a half-dozen are known. For instance, Facebook favors stories from users' friends, video content, and so on. Also, when the algorithm came out in 2008, along with Facebook business pages, it made the news feed non-chronological. Mari explains that the algorithm exists because Facebook needs to keep users coming back and also offer value to advertisers. Each day, the average user logs on about 14 times (more for marketers), and is on Facebook an average of 50 cumulative minutes. That creates a huge captive audience, which is a massive amount of potential to offer advertisers. To maintain that value, the algorithm encourages user engagement. Mari notices how she loves keeping up with her friends and community via Facebook and sees an advertisement about every third post. The better the targeted ad, the more likely she is to respond. Mari also notes that by encouraging user engagement, the algorithm also encourages users to share information with Facebook. This information helps Facebook keep the users and advertisers happy. I ask what marketers should do so users see more of their content in the news feed. Mari recommends not only sharing video, but also slightly increasing the length of videos. For uploaded videos, Mari has discovered a minimum of 90 seconds makes content more visible. For a live video, Mari recommends broadcasting for at least 5 minutes. Mari says Facebook favors slightly longer video because it enables Facebook to insert mid-roll ads. These ads break in and run for about 20 seconds. At the moment, mid-roll ads are in beta and you have to sign up before they'll appear in your video. Also, Mari says these ads appear only if you have at least 2,000 followers of your profile or page and 300 concurrent viewers. Mari explains that the decline in Facebook user posts and the algorithm's preference for camera-based content are related. Facebook is moving more into the camera mode because over the past three or four years, users have been sharing fewer status updates. Typing a post is harder than snapping a picture and adding sticker or filter. Mari stresses that real-time signals are also important to the visibility of your co...

How Snapchat and Periscope Can Grow a Business

How Snapchat and Periscope Can Grow a Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to use Snapchat for business? Wondering how to incorporate your brand into live stories? To explore how to use Periscope and Snapchat for business, I interview John Kapos. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview John Kapos, part of a long family line of chocolatiers who have run Perfection Chocolates in Australia since 1939. Online he's known as Chocolate Johnny. He's very active on Snapchat, Instagram, and Periscope. John shares how marketing on Snapchat has affected his business. You'll discover creative ideas to help your own business succeed with Periscope, Snapchat, and Instagram Stories. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How Snapchat and Periscope Can Grow a Business How John Got Started With Snapchat John shares that his store in Sydney, Australia gets bombarded with kids at the end of the school day, and he had begun to notice his sons and their friends using Snapchat. Even though he was told he's "too old" for Snapchat, he decided to take a chance. John, a self-described early adopter, started on Facebook and then got involved with Instagram. While he felt Instagram was cleaner, nicer, and crisper, he loved the functionality of Snapchat. For example, it let him do a video and include titles, add music, and so on. In the beginning, John posted photos of customers and chocolate, as well as videos of him introducing himself and making treats. In one of those early promos, he posted a picture and told his followers to screenshot it and then come in for a free hot chocolate. Two people did just that, and John shares that he's had as many as 60 people come to the store in response to a similar promotion. Now, John explains, his Snapchat stories all have a beginning, a middle, and an end, and all have a tie to chocolate. Each story also has a call to action such as Come to Perfection Chocolates, Come to the website, Come to meet me, or Be part of the party. For example, a Snapchat promotion of his Star Wars chocolate products began with an image of Han Solo and the text, "I'm in a dilemma. Help Me." The middle was an explanation of what John was making. The story ended with a call to action: "Please screenshot and tell me which one is better: milk chocolate or dark chocolate." A total of 63 people responded. Listen to the show to discover how using Snapchat has turned John's store into a global brand. Working Your Brand Into Snapchat Stories Everyone has a story, John believes, and he says it's all about getting out of your comfort zone and telling your story. People tell John he's got an advantage because he's promoting chocolate, and everybody loves chocolate. However, John doesn't think that should make a difference, and shares that he's helped a dentist create funny stories that make children want to come and see him, and a mechanic in New Zealand build a story around how to change a tire. John reiterates that anyone can create stories with any product, they just have to step out of the box. For example, he explains, spotting a large chocolate Easter egg in his store inspired a Snapchat video about two chocolate rabbits that mated to produce a 10-pound chocolate egg, out of which came a white chocolate elephant. John also creates stories about his characters, Johnny Chocolate, a chocolate 'dealer'; Johnny's bodyguard, Frankie; and Johnny's drag-queen girlfriend, Vanilla Chocolate. Listen to the show to hear what happened when John set out to prove he could go a week without using chocolate in his snaps.

How to Use Pinterest for Local Businesses

How to Use Pinterest for Local Businesses

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to connect with local customers on Pinterest? Wondering how to drive foot traffic with Pinterest? Pinterest offers local businesses a way to cultivate relationships with prospects and customers who are primed to walk through your door. In this article you'll discover how to use Pinterest to market a local business. Listen to this article: #1: Find Out What Likely Customers Are Interested In Before you do anything on Pinterest, spend some time on the platform studying the people you want to reach. You likely have an idea of who your target audience is. Are they the same people you're hoping to reach on Pinterest? Find out what your target audience is doing on Pinterest, who they follow, and what kinds of things they're pinning. Start by browsing the categories on Pinterest. Click to the right of the search box to open the drop-down category list. Click through the categories that are most relevant to your business and check out related topics. From here, you can start to see where your content and business might fit in on Pinterest. Try searching for related words in the Pinterest search bar. Pinterest's Guided Search will show you the most commonly searched words and phrases with your search term. You can also click through to the most popular pinners and pins and boards from that search term. This is a great place to find your target customers, and learn what kind of content your target customers value and how they share it. #2: Create Keyword-Friendly Boards and Profiles Now that you've identified popular topics and keywords for your target audience, you can begin building your profile. You've likely discovered some popular topics that are related to your industry. Use the interest topics you've identified for your boards. For example, if you're a hair salon, "Hair styles DIY," "Curly hair tips," and "Prom styles" might be good boards for your business. Your Pinterest profile is a perfect place to embed your keywords. This will help you get discovered on Pinterest and also on Google. Add keywords to your profile name, profile description, board titles, and board descriptions. #3: Fill Your Boards With Informative Content People come to Pinterest looking for things to learn and to buy. Now that you know what your audience finds interesting, consider what informative content you can share on your boards. This is the type of content that will get more repins and help you reach more people. Create some boards that are related to your local community. For example, if you're a restaurant, create a board to share events that are taking place in your area. If you're a vet, you could share educational content related to health and care for animals, popular pet products, and favorite places to take pets in the surrounding area. Informative content will help you extend your reach. In addition to curating that content from others, you should also create your own content. Think about what customers need to know in order to value the service you provide. What kind of customer education is needed in your industry? Create simple graphics to explain a point or a new regulation. Even for non-designers, it's easy to create informative and engaging infographics with online tools. You might also write an explainer article or create a video to show how something gets done. Share your content on Pinterest as a vertical pin. Pins perform best at 600 x 1200 (or more) pixels. Remember to write an information-rich caption to get more engagement. #4: Drive Foot Traffic and Click-throughs With Rich Pins Pinterest rich pins allow you to embed information from your website that is updated dynamically to encourage customer conversions. Here are some rich pins that might be helpful for your local business: Use article pins if you have a blog or create blog content. When you create article pins, the headline, author, and story description will automatically be pul...

Creating Short, Snackable Videos for Instagram and Beyond

Creating Short, Snackable Videos for Instagram and Beyond

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering how to film and edit compelling 60-second videos? Want your videos to boost social media engagement? To explore how to create short videos for Instagram and Facebook, I interview Lindsay Ostrom. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers, business owners, and creators discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Lindsay Ostrom, founder of PinchofYum.com and author of the Tasty Food Photography ebook. She also co-founded Food Blogger Pro, a membership site for developing and monetizing food content. Lindsay explains why short videos work and how to create a hook that captures viewers' attention. You'll discover tips for lighting and editing your videos. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Creating Short, Snackable Videos on Instagram and Beyond Lindsay's Story Lindsay began her career as an elementary school teacher. She taught fourth grade and loved it. After school, Lindsay liked trying different things in the kitchen and started a food blog as a hobby. Lindsay enjoyed creating the recipes, and the game of seeing how many followers and comments she could get. Even in the early stages, she liked digging into the analytics. The blog started in 2010, and after a year, traffic continued to pick up. Then Jane Wang, the mother of one of the founders of Pinterest, pinned one of Lindsay's recipes. At the time, Jane Wang had one of the most followed accounts and her pin was a lucky break that led to a spike in the blog's growth and led Lindsay on the path toward blogging full-time. Eventually, Lindsay and her husband both left their day jobs to work on Pinch of Yum. They now also have a team of five people. The majority of the content is, always has been, and probably always will be food and recipes. The blog posts include several pictures, the recipes in text, and videos. The blog has a lifestyle side too. Once or twice a month, if something significant happens in their lives, Lindsay talks about it on the blog, although not in a recipe post. The rest of the content is food with personal stories woven into them. Pinch of Yum has about 124,000 followers on Pinterest; 270,000 on Facebook; and 466,000 on Instagram. Listen to the show to hear what Lindsay calls the "funny/embarrassing" part of her blog's growth story. What Are Short, Snackable Videos? Short, snackable videos are around 60 seconds long and typically show only someone's hands as they create a recipe. These videos are like a bridge between a photo of a recipe and a full-blown cooking show. Tasty, which most people are familiar with, deserves a lot of the credit for popularizing this style of food video. Meatball Sub Boats Enjoy a meatball sub without all the mess with this easy meatball sub recipe ! FULL RECIPE: http://bzfd.it/2gd3OQl FIND IT IN OUR APP: http://tstyapp.com/m/isOMiDheUF Posted by Tasty on Friday, August 25, 2017 These videos are frequently shot from an overhead angle. When Lindsay creates her videos, she wants to make people feel like they could be in the shoes of the person cooking. The videos provide an intimate but quick look at how a recipe works and why certain ingredients work together. A snackable video differs from a longer type of food video in both the way the info is given and the way people consume it. For example, a YouTube-style video about how to grill a steak might be five minutes long, and someone might talk about how to choose the best cuts of steak, what temperatures to use, and other specifics characteristic of a deep dive. Snackable videos, like the ones Pinch of Yum produces, are short and have a narrower focus such as a good idea for dinner or some tips and tricks.

Live Video Strategy: How to Create a Show That Engages

Live Video Strategy: How to Create a Show That Engages

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Interested in broadcasting live video? Have you considered starting a live video show? To explore how to create a successful live video show, I interview Luria Petrucci. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Luria Petrucci, a live video expert. She's the host of Live Streaming Pros, a live show dedicated to helping businesses produce professional live streams. She's helped big brands such as AT&T and Panasonic, and influencers such as Michael Hyatt, Amy Porterfield, and Pat Flynn. Luria explores four levels of broadcasting equipment. You'll discover how to create an engaging flow for your live show. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video Strategy Luria's Story Luria got started with video in 2005. She was one of the first video podcasters to create content for the video iPod. (This was before the iPhone and long before YouTube "became a thing.") Shortly thereafter, Luria started doing live video, too. By 2007, she was live-streaming from a professional studio and from mobile devices and began learning how live video creates a connection with her audience. Ever since, she's been doing a weekly or daily show. Before Periscope and Facebook Live, Luria's live-streaming tech included a NewTek TriCaster and Ustream. She also did some YouTube. Justin.tv (which is now Twitch) and Livestream were the other early platforms, although they focused more on business. Although Ustream focuses more on businesses now, it concentrated on creators back then. Luria enjoys seeing other people getting excited about going live, because she's believed in live video for so long. She says live video creates a strong relationship with her audience and is the reason her audience has stuck with her for 11 years through massive business changes, partnership changes, and all of the hard stuff that goes on in business. People tell her they've been watching her since day one. (Note: Back then, Luria was known as Cali Lewis.) Listen to the show to discover what tech Luria used in the early days, as well as what live video was like at the beginning. Why Consider Live Video Live video is the best marketing conversion tool Luria has ever seen because of its impact. When people are watching you on live video, they know you're not faking it. When you're selling something or trying to lead people into a funnel, live video is easy because of what Luria calls the "conversational call to action." Like most people, Luria has a hard time selling. People don't like to sell because they don't like to be sold to. The conversational call to action is really about helping people. You're letting them know you're there for them and will take care of them. When you offer something in a live video, it's easier to sell it because you're not really selling. When somebody asks a question, your answer proves the value of your products or services. Also, although the excitement for and accessibility of live video is new, its formulas and structure are proven. Listen to the show to hear what I love about live video. The Four Levels of Live Video Gear Luria explains what gear you need for live video in four levels. She calls level 1 the "selfie stream." You hold your mobile phone in your hand and the live video is raw, up-close, and personal. For level 2, add some gear to your mobile phone such as a microphone, video stabilizer, and a light. This gear adds a little polish to your video and removes the shakiness. Level 3 is going live from a computer with software like Wirecast. Finally, level 4 is for TV-quality video.

Facebook Freebooting: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Freebooting: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use video in your marketing? Want to make sure your copyright is protected? There are simple steps you can take to brand your videos so you're protected if people upload them to Facebook as their own. In this article you'll discover how to protect your video content from freebooting on Facebook. Listen to this article: What Is Freebooting? Freebooting (also known as video piracy) is the act of downloading someone else's copyrighted video (usually from YouTube) and uploading it to Facebook as your own. You need to protect your content and make sure you don't unknowingly propagate the work of pirates. Joe Hanson of It’s Okay to Be Smart explains that freebooting "is not the same as sharing or linking or embedding [online media] from its original source. Freebooting means downloading it without permission from the creator or copyright holder and redistributing it for your own use, often for your own monetary gain. When it comes to video piracy in 2015, Facebook is ground zero." http://i.imgur.com/oqvxxMB.jpg Of the videos on Facebook, 72.5% are pirated. "According to a recent report from Ogilvy and Tubular Labs, of the 1,000 most popular Facebook videos of Q1 2015, 725 were stolen reuploads," says Hank Green. "Just these 725 'freebooted' videos were responsible for around 17 BILLION views last quarter." A recent trend I'm seeing on Facebook is scraped YouTube videos that have been lightly edited and compiled into a montage with large captions or subtitles on the video itself. Given that Facebook has the Autoplay feature on both desktop and mobile, users are more likely to feel drawn in to watch a video and click/tap for the audio if they read the caption. Freebooting hurts people who work hard to create their video identity. For instance, if you're monetizing your YouTube channel, you'll miss out on ad revenues if someone is scraping and reusing your videos. Facebook is just starting to dig into revenue sharing for their ads, but it's only available to a select few advertisers so far. Granted, if there's a call to action or watermark on an illegally uploaded video, it could potentially help increase the visibility of the original creator. But still… Here's how to protect your content, deal with piracy when it happens and avoid sharing pirated videos. #1: Understand Facebook and YouTube Video Piracy Policies YouTube is stringent with their copyright links, so they'll take infringed content down immediately if a complaint is filed. Unlike YouTube, Facebook won't automatically take down pirated content. Facebook is clearly on a mission to ramp up their own video consumption. Native Facebook video posts have the most organic reach, which is probably what has spawned this trend among users. Under pressure to do something about freebooting, Facebook came up with video matching technology to make life a lot harder for pirates. It lets the creator know when a duplicate video is being shared on Facebook. "Videos uploaded to Facebook are run through the Audible Magic system, which uses audio fingerprinting technology to help identify and prevent unauthorized videos from making their way onto the platform," Facebook states. #2: Report Freebooted Videos Destin Sandlin of Smarter Every Day created the following video (which you can share on Facebook) to simplify what freebooting is and the impact it has for content creators. He talks about a German DJ who created a YouTube video that got over 5 million views in four years. A verified Facebook page then downloaded the video from YouTube, uploaded it as a native Facebook video and got 5 million views in four days. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=L6A1Lt0kvMA Destin shares three tips for what to do when you come across freebooted videos anywhere on the Internet. He says to capture the freebooted content (with a screenshot or video screen capture), comment (state that it's stolen and direct people back to the original vid...

Marketing You: How to Play to Your Unique Strengths

Marketing You: How to Play to Your Unique Strengths

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you struggle when it comes to marketing yourself? Are you wondering what your unique strengths are? To learn how to promote yourself based on these strengths, I interview Sally Hogshead for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. Keep reading to discover more. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Sally Hogshead, author of Fascinate and How the World Sees You. She was an award-winning copywriter at the age of 23 and worked with brands such as Nike, Target and BMW. She's one of the few women in the Speaker Hall of Fame and a popular keynote speaker (Sally keynoted Social Media Marketing World) and a simply fascinating woman. Sally shares how you can be successful and fascinating in your work and your life. You'll discover how fascination can increase your value, put you at an advantage and enable you to get more satisfaction out of your work. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Marketing You The journey from Fascinate to How the World Sees You Sally explains that the hardest part for her when writing a book is when it goes into the print stage. When her last book Fascinate was ready to be shipped to stores, she felt at a loss and didn't know what to do with herself. She started to think about doing a personality assessment, which was based on the same system that she had created for brands. So instead of it being about how consumers see a brand, it's about how the world sees you. Once the test was ready, it was put out on social media for free and it became a huge part of her business. It surpassed Fascinate. Sally soon realized that people really wanted to know how to make themselves—not their brand—fascinating. She pivoted her entire company and started to study more about it and go deep into what makes one person perceived as valuable, and someone else perceived as a commodity. Once you have done the assessment, it becomes clear why certain people like, respect and admire you, and why you turn others off. The key here is that you don't have to change who you are; you have to become more of who you are. Listen to the show to find out why it helps to see the patterns among your work colleagues, and how it can help you communicate more effectively with them. How social media has played a part in the development of this entire concept Before the days of social media, our average attention span used to be 20 minutes. Now with social media, it's around 9 seconds. People can now form an opinion of you instantly on social media. With that in mind, you now have to find a way to front-load your value. It's your opportunity to make the most accurate and authentic first impression. You'll hear what Sally and her team discovered when they ran a one-year free beta test for about 30,000 people, and why it led them to turn it into a paid model. At present, the Fascination Advantage Assessment costs $37. However, you can get free access to an in-depth, custom report, which identifies your personality advantages. Check out the key takeaways at the end of this article to find out how to enter. Listen to the show to hear the two main things that people who took the initial assessment wanted to know. Fascination and the research behind it  Sally states that fascination is a state of intense focus. When you're fascinated by something, you are totally focused on that one particular thing. It can be a person, an idea, a movie, a book or a product. As part of the initial market research that Sally carried...

Mobile Marketing: Are You Ready for the Revolution?

Mobile Marketing: Are You Ready for the Revolution?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a mobile strategy for your business? Are you interested in discovering what the future of mobile marketing has in store? To learn how to market your business with mobile, I interview Tom Webster. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Tom Webster, the Vice President of Strategy and Marketing at Edison Research. He's authored studies such as The Social Habit and Twitter Users in America. He's co-authored a new book with Tim Hayden called The Mobile Commerce Revolution: Business Success in a Wireless World. Tom explores how mobile marketing impacts your business. You'll discover why successfully mobile marketing goes beyond technology, how consumer behavior is already being shaped by mobile, and how to respond to the mobile commerce revolution. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobile Marketing Why Tom wrote his new book  Working in consumer behavior and market research, Tom has tracked human behavior for decades. He helps brands figure out why humans do what they do. His particular area of interest is to capture the opinions and study the behavior of people out of their homes and on the go. For Tom, understanding mobile marketing goes beyond the technology. It's about being able to understand people's needs, wants, and desires while they are in transition, out and about, and away from home. This idea was the impetus behind his new book, The Mobile Commerce Revolution: Business Success in a Wireless World Listen to the show to learn how it's been possible for Tom's company, Edison Research, to study mobile behavior for decades.  What is the mobile commerce revolution Every year, experts in various trades are asked if this is going to be the year of mobile when, in fact, the year of mobile has already happened. According to Tom, the mobile commerce revolution is already upon us. You'll hear Tom describe the Starbucks mobile app as an example of how much consumer behavior has already been shaped by mobile. There's no special technology to the Starbucks mobile app. It's nothing more than a bar code on your phone that's tied to a method of payment. Yet it's eliminated the need for a wallet and made it simpler to purchase items using something Starbucks customers already have in hand: their smartphones. The use of this smartphone app has become such default behavior that it’s prompted customers to make a purchase at Starbucks when they otherwise might not have. If you base your mobile strategy on the technology, then you will not make it. Mobile isn't about technology. It's about being able to understand and enable human behavior. Listen to the show to hear what companies with successful mobile strategies are doing that others aren't. How marketers should respond to the mobile explosion  It's easy to be lulled into thinking that big data and clickstream analytics will give you everything you need to know to develop your mobile strategy. However, the first step when you develop a successful mobile strategy is to examine human behavior. Tom describes the mobile web as having three distinct eras. We've moved past the first two eras of optimizing for mobile and responsive design. We are now moving towards a new era of contextually relevant experiences based on a customer's unique needs and wants in the context of their specific location. Mobility enables this capability to happen. There is a serious measurement gap between the online and the offline interactions because our focus has either been on search or on purely technology solutions.

Google Analytics: How to Make Smart Marketing Decisions

Google Analytics: How to Make Smart Marketing Decisions

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to know if your content and social activities are supporting your business? Are you wondering how you can use Google Analytics to track your progress? To learn how to use Google Analytics to help make smart marketing decisions, I interview Andy Crestodina for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Andy Crestodina, author of Content Chemistry and co-founder of Orbit Media (a Chicago-based web design agency). Andy has also written for Social Media Examiner and he's a Google Analytics expert. Andy shares how to use Google Analytics to help you make informed marketing choices. You'll discover why analytics are so important to your business success and step-by-step instructions on how to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Analytics Why go beyond the basic metrics of blog comments, social share numbers and page views? Andy explains that these basic metrics will not give you return on investment (ROI) information. The formula he uses is traffic × your conversion rate = success, which can be leads, subscribers or ecommerce customers. The more you're aware of how things are connected and the deeper you look down the funnel, the more equipped you'll be to make better decisions. It's just like the dashboard of a car. You'll hear what happened when I looked a lot deeper into the analytics of a Social Media Examiner article that ranks number one in Google search, and why it made me realize that it wasn't doing as well as I thought. As a marketer, you need to reprogram your mind to what really matters, and it's not what immediately meets the eye. Listen to the show to find out why it's so important to pay attention to the conversion rate. Do you need to be a data nerd to benefit from all of this? Andy says that you don't have to be a data nerd. The only math you need to know is that anything times zero equals zero. Andy relates it to a Magic 8 Ball. You can ask a question, shake up the analytics and find the answer. As a marketer, you need to know how to look at these numbers. It gets easier over time. For every action you take, you can measure it and see if it works, and then make improvements. Listen to the show to find out why Google Analytics is similar to using Photoshop. Common mistakes marketers make with Google Analytics According to Andy, it always comes down to the setup of Google Analytics. There are two or three basic steps you need to take in the Admin section of Google Analytics that make your data much more meaningful. One of the first things you need to do is filter out the traffic from your own IP address. Until you do this, your analytics will be polluted by your own activity. Within the Admin section, you can create an IP address filter. To find out what your IP address is, just type "What is my IP?" into Google search, and it will give you the number. You'll discover what to do with this number in the dashboard to ensure your results are more meaningful. The next step (which is important) is goals. Until you set up your goals, you'll only have half of the picture. Listen to the show to find out what's important if you are a relatively low-traffic site or you're into content or social media marketing. The definitions of goals and conversions A conversion is when a visitor takes an action on a website. There are different types of conversions and analytics that you can set up,

Court of Appeals affirms Hampton man’s murder conviction

by Bob Fisher @ AM-1300 KGLO — Your Hometown News Station

HAMPTON — The Iowa Court of Appeals has turned down the appeal of a Hampton man convicted of murder. 62-year-old Ronald Rand was convicted of first-degree murder in the shotgun death of 51-year-old Michelle Key in Rand’s home on December 13th of 2015. Authorities had said Rand told police he and Key were arguing before

Blog Growth: How to Build a Mega-Following

Blog Growth: How to Build a Mega-Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to attract a bigger audience to your blog? Are you wondering how you can write content that will generate more comments, shares and subscribers? To learn how to grow a successful blog, I interview Syed Balkhi for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Syed Balkhi, founder of multiple popular websites, including WPBeginner and List25. He's also the founder of OptinMonster. Syed shares how he grew his very popular sites and provides actionable tips that you can employ to grow your own blog traffic. You'll learn about the different types of content that work best and some profitable choices for monetization. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog Growth The idea for WPBeginner Back in 2009, Syed did consulting work for small businesses, with a lot of the work retainer-based. To free up some time, he decided to switch his clients to WordPress, which would give them the ability to change their own text and not have to contact him directly. Once this change happened, Syed was still approached with the same questions about WordPress. At the time there was no other WordPress resource site out there for beginners. So WPBeginner was formed on July 4, 2009. Syed explains how his goal in the beginning was to produce multiple posts a day and answer all of the questions that he was asked. The idea was to put the answers on the website so he could link back to them, rather than send an email. When he noticed that other people were using the site, he knew there was definitely a market for it. You'll hear how Syed used Twitter to help with content creation and why he used Digg and StumbleUpon to push articles. Listen to the show to find out why it was Syed's goal to help individuals, rather than have hugely popular articles. WPBeginner's site metrics Syed states that WPBeginner gets an average of 1.5 million page views a month and they have just over 70,000 followers on Twitter. Listen to the show to find out how these figures are similar to Social Media Examiner's. The lessons learned about content creation From the very beginning, Syed built an email list, but he didn't engage with it. At first, he didn't realize the value of asking people to ask you questions. Now when you subscribe to WPBeginner, it asks you one question: "What is the one thing we can help you with right now?" You'll discover why there is huge value in this one question and how this has changed the way WPBeginner creates content. Syed used to be the only person who wrote articles, but the site now has multiple writers with a very good editorial workflow. Listen to the show to hear how the interaction and response to email has developed the WPBeginner community. WPBeginner's business model Syed explains that his business is monetized through building WordPress applications and plugins. A lot of the time, it's conversion marketing for clients. The WPBeginner brand allows them to position themselves as experts. Whenever somebody wants a WordPress company to work with, they automatically think of WPBeginner. You'll hear how they use affiliate links for paid plugins. In the beginning, Syed tried display advertising. He had ads through AdSense, BuySellAds and private ad sales. You'll find out why these ads didn't work for the WPBeginner audience and how affiliate deals make more sense. Listen to the show to find out why we use DoubleClick for Publishers at Social Media Exam...

Growing Your Audience: How to Increase Your Social Following

Growing Your Audience: How to Increase Your Social Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media to build an audience for your business? Are you wondering how you can convert your audience into customers? To learn how to grow an audience that wants more and more of what you have to offer, I interview Jeffrey Rohrs for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jeffrey Rohrs, co-host of the Social Pros Podcast and author of the new book, Audience: Marketing in the Age of Subscribers, Fans and Followers. He's also the vice president of marketing insights at Exact Target. Jeff shares why an audience is so important for marketers. You'll learn about seekers, amplifiers and joiners and how these audience types relate to your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Growing Your Audience Why an audience is so important for marketers Jeff explains that in his book Audience, he homes in on the concept of proprietary audience development. It's what people in social media, email marketing and even mobile have been doing, but he approaches it from a different angle. When Jeff talked to marketers about their audiences, which included Facebook fans, Twitter followers, YouTube subscribers and email subscribers, they didn't seem to have a strategy. In most cases, strategy was an afterthought or the outcome of a momentary campaign. Marketing was traditionally organized around a campaign. Jeff refers to it as a beginning, a middle and an end, then a cake to celebrate the results and then repeat it. You'll discover why audience development is a responsibility, primary to marketing. Originally marketers delivered the promise via email, but now you have to take that style of thinking into the social and mobile channels. Proprietary audiences will only be there if you build them. If not, you'll have to pay in the form of advertising. Jeff's message is to take a look at everything you do in marketing and try to optimize it to build a proprietary audience, because it gives you a huge competitive advantage. Before the Internet, creative thinkers only had to worry about great creative. They didn't have to assemble an audience because mass media did that for them. The difference today is not only coming up with the creative, but also thinking about distribution and building an audience that belongs to you—one that nobody else has access to. So when you have that great piece of content, you are able to push the button and reach your audience. You'll hear Jeff explain why it's important for businesses to have people in charge of audience development across all channels. Listen to the show to find out why proprietary audience development is the flipside of the content marketing coin. The definition of seekers, amplifiers and joiners Jeff explains that these are the three top-level audiences that marketers have exclusive access to. 1. Seekers Seekers are people who look for information or for entertainment. For example, you're a seeker when you turn on your TV and flip through the channels to find something to entertain you. You're also a seeker when you use Google or Google Maps. Search engine optimization is all about the process of delivering seekers to your website. Seekers are momentary. Once they have their fill of entertainment or find the information they need, they go away without a trace. You'll find out what you need to do with this audience type. 2. Amplifiers Amplifiers are what social media is built upon.

SEO Wilson WY

by @

SEO Wilson WY

The post SEO Wilson WY appeared first on .

The Social Media Examiner Story: From Blog to Conference

The Social Media Examiner Story: From Blog to Conference

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wonder how the Social Media Examiner blog got started? Interested in how we grew a live conference from an online publication? To share the evolution of Social Media Examiner and Social Media Marketing World, Ray Edwards will interview me. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, Ray Edwards of The Ray Edwards Show takes the mic to get the backstory on how Social Media Examiner went from publishing a blog to hosting a live conference. You'll discover the behind-the-scenes story of how I founded Social Media Examiner more than seven years ago and how we decided to start our own conference. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Social Media Examiner Story The Beginning of Everything Prior to launching Social Media Examiner, I was writing white papers for clients and I also authored a book called Writing White Papers. Somewhere along the way, I started a weekly newsletter, which included interviews with experts, pieces written by experts, and tips and techniques. I started covering social media and how it could be used to generate more leads for white papers. Subsequently, I reached out to Copyblogger and MarketingProfs, and wrote some articles for them. The turning point came after I sent a LinkedIn request to Ann Handley, chief content officer for MarketingProfs, and she asked if I was on Facebook. After opening a Facebook account, I was immersed in a different world. Then, I went to a small conference in San Diego and met Paul Colligan, Warren Whitlock (co-author of Twitter Revolution), and Mari Smith. As a result, I decided to do an online conference under my white paper business. (Up to that point I did teleclasses, where people would pay $39/month to hear me interview people like Bob Bly, Peter Bowerman, and others in the copywriting world.) I sold a couple of hundred tickets for the Copywriting Success Summit, more than I ever had for my teleclasses, and the conference was all done via webinars. This led to doing the Social Media Success Summit, for which we sold around 700 tickets. I felt I was onto something, so I searched domain names at GoDaddy, found SocialMediaExaminer.com, and immediately registered a trademark. I had the opportunity to speak at BlogWorld and MarketingProf's B2B Summit in October 2009. Deciding that would be the time to launch, I hustled to build Social Media Examiner and reached out to all of my friends, asking if they would write one article a month until it didn't work for them anymore. I officially launched Social Media Examiner on October 12, 2009. Listen to the show to learn which connections Ray and I share from the early days of social media. A Focus on Quality Content When we launched, blogs were opinion outlets and I wanted to be a resource. That's why we're known for how-to content and why our tagline is still "Your guide to the social media jungle." I knew if we could create content with a certain level of depth or richness to it, it would be smart in the long run; each of our articles is at least 1,000 words long. And we've invested heavily in the quality of our content. We've always had at least two or three, and sometimes up to five, editors working on all of the articles and we put at least $1,000 into development for each article. Our vision statement is, "All we serve is quality and we serve all with excellence." I've been in this business for seven years, and almost everyone who started in this space has moved on. It just goes to show you can win in the long run if you consistently deliver excellent value.

5 Ways to Find More Time to Blog

5 Ways to Find More Time to Blog

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is there a blogger inside you, waiting to emerge? Need tips for producing more content? Writing quality content will help you attract more customers and increase your visibility. In this article, you'll discover five ways to find more time to blog. #1: Commit to a Niche When you're committed to a particular niche, it's easier to write for the audience you want to attract because you've already conducted extensive research on most of the topics they're interested in. An added bonus is to use their evolving interests to point you toward topics you haven't considered. If you notice that your target buyers are looking for advice you know nothing about, you know where to start expanding your knowledge. Listen to this article: For example, say you're selling artistic pieces for home decoration. You don't necessarily know everything about interior design, but your audience would appreciate advice in that area. In that case, you can research it. And if you can base the tips and arguments you share on your actual experience, the articles will be much more believable and your readers will trust you more. #2: Limit Your Time on Distracting Sites If you blog for business, you spend a lot of time online. You need to be aware of all of the emerging trends in your niche, and monitor the behavior and interests of your target audience. You also likely frequent Reddit, Facebook, and other sites to get inspiration for new blog articles. How often do you plan to spend only five minutes on these sites, only to lose track of the time? That's why you need the Chrome plugin StayFocusd. You can use StayFocusd to prevent you from spending too much time on distracting websites. It's easy to install and you can customize the settings for your own preferences. First, set the days you want StayFocusd to monitor. Then, decide how much time to give yourself for browsing. Finally, set a list of the sites you want the tool to block for you. When you reach your time limit, you'll get an eye-opening message that prompts you to get back to work. #3: Plan Your Articles With Mind Maps When you find inspiration for an article, your first instinct is to sit down and write that piece as soon as possible. Wait! Once you get the initial idea for the post, you should plan the structure of your article. If you take the time to develop an outline, you'll significantly speed up the writing stage. You can use an online mind mapping tool such as MindMup to create your outlines. Start with a unique and captivating headline, and then make notes for your intro. Finally, consider the main points you'll cover and create subheads for each of the different paragraphs you're going to write. Use the outline as a guide, and remember that it's flexible. You can make adjustments to the outline as you work as long as you maintain a focused thread in your article. #4: Use Tools to Curate Inspiring Content Inspiration is everywhere online, and it can be difficult to keep track of and remember it all. That's where a tool such as Evernote or Pinterest comes in. For example, you can pin all of the interesting online sources you encounter to themed inspiration boards. As your boards are populated with pins, look for a way to connect those pieces of inspiration into a complete article. #5: Source Quotes From Industry Research and Influencers When you support your tips and arguments with quotes from respected research resources and industry experts, you not only increase the value of your content, but also add depth and reliability. Begin your article with a great quote to drive attention to the problems and solutions you're writing about. Then, in each paragraph, use a few short quotes to corroborate your points. Remember, you'll need to credit each author and source you quote. Make sure you include proper attribution within the article. In Conclusion Many social media marketers and business owners get focused...

How To Create a Brand Ambassador Program for Employees Using Social Media

How To Create a Brand Ambassador Program for Employees Using Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for brand ambassadors? Have you considered recruiting your employees to help? When you empower your employees to talk about your company on social media, they’ll share a human perspective people naturally gravitate to. In this article you’ll discover how to set up a successful employee brand ambassador program to enhance your social media marketing. #1: Assign a Community Leader The first step is to designate a captain, someone who is able to take the reins. However, don't think of this person as someone who will bark orders. Instead, choose a person who can guide a group of people who already know the ropes. Listen to this article: Your community leader will: Provide a common voice and/or vision for the team Coach employees on responsible social media strategies Oversee and approve social media content Collaborate with co-workers to come up with new methods, stories and ideas for campaigns Lead the measurement and analysis of social media efforts You'll want to be sure your community leader is also capable of handling crisis situations. Your company will undoubtedly stumble into a social media mistake at some point, and you'll need a leader who can think fast on his or her feet. We're all aware how small things become magnified online – no matter how silly they seem to be. Starbucks' latest controversy about their holiday cups is a great example. The coffee chain didn't withdraw their original design. Rather, they made a statement in their official blog and stuck by it. #2: Communicate Your Vision The second step is to impart a single vision to everyone based on your company's mission – why your business exists. Starbucks' vision is to "inspire and nurture the human spirit – one person, one cup and one neighborhood at a time." The coffee chain embodies this concept in everything they do, including how they encourage employees to showcase inspiring ideas through social media. Thanks to their official pages on Facebook and Instagram, which are open to public view, Starbucks employees can quickly exchange ideas even if they're oceans apart. Adapting the tactic for your business will make your employees feel empowered, and at the same time encourage them to promote your company in their own circles. #3: Share Your Expectations No campaign can be successful without guidelines. Although you encourage active participation and uniqueness, your employees still need a set of rules so content remains consistent. Adobe does a great job of educating employees to act as brand ambassadors through their Social Shift program. Here's an image from a short presentation, which shows how they divide their strategy into different courses. During their training, employees are made aware of certain rules of engagement and protocols so their social media posts are consistent with the company's vision. To get a good example of how these guidelines work, take a look at the Adobe stream on Twitter. You can make your rules as detailed or as simple as you want, but you should ensure everyone agrees to them before they post. Here's a glimpse of how #AdobeLife tweets reflect a productive, fun and enriching work experience. https://twitter.com/bossjones/status/675107939921887232 According to Talent Cove, 78% of workers who feel recognized are more motivated to perform their tasks. Head of Adobe Employment Branding Natalie Kessler and her team like to reward employees with the best social media posts using #AdobeLife. Every week, they choose from compiled photos and messages online and then highlight them in Adobe offices. This shows employees how important their efforts are to the company. If you want to boost productivity and amp up your social media presence, make sure you're providing the right rewards for your brand ambassadors. You can arrange a small party or even offer giveaways or exclusive items.

Snapchat Content Strategy: How Marketers Can Win With Snapchat

Snapchat Content Strategy: How Marketers Can Win With Snapchat

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you on Snapchat? Want to know how to use it for marketing? To discover how to create a content strategy on Snapchat, I interview Carlos Gil. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Carlos Gil, the head of social media marketing at BMC Software and co-host of the Social 545 podcast. He's also an avid Snapchat user. Carlos will explore Snapchat, and specifically, how marketers can benefit from it. You'll discover why Snapchat isn't just for Millennials. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Snapchat Content Strategy How Carlos got started on Snapchat In 2013, Carlos had been working in social media for about eight years and was leading social media for a supermarket chain, when a teenager told him Facebook was essentially for older people. He decided as a marketer, he needed to get on Snapchat, because the Millennials who were using it would soon be adults. He says he spent most of 2014 getting to know the platform and creating content. Over the course of a solid year, Snapchat became his go-to social network. Carlos began seeing more of his friends within the social media marketing community on the platform. What sold him on Snapchat over other networks like Twitter, Facebook, and Instagram, was the engagement. Snapchat essentially forces your audience to come back and watch your content within a 24-hour period, because if they don't see it, it goes away. Listen to the show to learn about Snapchat's previous reputation. Why marketers and entrepreneurs should be on Snapchat Last February, we had Gary Vaynerchuk and Shaun McBride (aka Shonduras) on the podcast to discuss Snapchat. A year later, it looks like Snapchat is about to explode. Snapchat has more than 200 million monthly active users and its audience continues to grow and mature. Snapchat is very transparent when it comes to their demographics, and reports that 77% of their user base is above the age of 18. Carlos thinks people are consuming so much content on Snapchat because it puts what you love about Twitter (the micro-content aspect) and what you love about YouTube (pressing a Play button to sit back and watch content) into a single app. You can go in and press a button to see what anyone you're following has done in the last day. He explains that when you publish content on Snapchat, it's available for 24 hours, which forces your network to come back and watch it. The messaging feature on Snapchat, which works almost like a text message, allows you to send content directly to your friends. Then, you can specify how long you want that content to be seen, and see when someone views your content . Listen to the show to discover why Snapchat is amazing at getting their users' attention. Types of Snapchat content Carlos shares that there are two different kinds of snaps: one is a photo and the other is a video of up to 10 seconds. For images, he says there are a couple of different filters you can use to change the contrast and color of your photo. There are also geofilters, which are graphic overlays for your photos, based on your location. For example there are geofilters exclusive to cities and other locations such as Disneyland. Videos have the same geofilters, but also have features like fast-forward, rewind, and slow motion. There are a couple of additional tricks to spruce up your snaps so they look better than average video content on your smartphone. Listen to the show to hear what else you can add to your Snapchat photos. Snapchat Content Strategy

February Dogs of the Month

by admin @ Dog Guard of Iowa

Missy and JD Hartung from Johnston just built a beautiful a new home.  They had an Invisible Fence brand fence at their previous home for Alex, their seven-year-old Havapoo. They just added Rizzo, a 10 week old, Old English Sheepdog to their family. We met them a couple of years ago at the Des Moines […]

9 Social Media Tools Recommended by Marketing Pros

9 Social Media Tools Recommended by Marketing Pros

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for new social media tools? Want to know what the experts are using? We asked top social media professionals which social tools they’re using right now. In this article you’ll discover nine social media tools to save you time and improve your marketing efforts. Listen to this article: #1: Schedule Repins Using BoardBooster I use BoardBooster to schedule Pinterest. There are several features I use daily within BoardBooster, but my favorite is the "looping" ability. This feature lets you set a board to repin an older pin from that board, and then delete the original pin or the new pin based on which one performed better. This allows me to keep each of my boards active daily while repinning great stuff. I pinned it the first time, so I know it's good! Holly Homer created Kids Activities Blog and Business 2 Blogger, a company that matches bloggers with businesses that need them. #2: Create Weekly Reports With Rival IQ Over the last 6 months, I've started using Rival IQ to track competitors and analyze the results of social media marketing. It's become a vital tool for weekly reporting. Every week, Rival IQ emails you a PowerPoint to show how your social media accounts are performing, how this compares to your competitors, any changes competitors are making and "breakout posts." For example, I get notified if a competitor changes their profile information on their accounts or if one of their posts gets a lot more likes, shares and comments than other posts. Ian Cleary is the founder of RazorSocial, one of the world’s leading marketing technology sites focused on social media and content marketing. #3: Automate Evergreen Updates Using Revive Old Post Hands-down my new favorite tool is the WordPress plugin Revive Old Post. Install it and the plugin will pull from all of your existing blog posts and post them randomly to your Twitter, Facebook and LinkedIn accounts automatically. Use it and you don't have to worry about scheduling any of your latest or evergreen blog posts on social media at all anymore. Set it up and watch the traffic flow on automation. Nathan Chan is the publisher and editor of Foundr Magazine, a digital magazine for young entrepreneurs. #4: Access Images Everywhere With Google Photos Install Google Photos on every computer and device that you own, then select the free option (up to 16 megabyte file size), and Google Photos will upload every picture it finds on your devices. It even works some magic and uploads a version of any RAW images it finds! It took more than a week, but Google Photos uploaded more than 50,000 of my pictures. Some fantastic consequences include: Automatically back up all of your pictures to the Cloud. I now have at least three copies of my photos: local Lightroom, Dropbox and Google Photos, so lots of things have to go wrong for me to lose a photo. Move photos from one device to another. For example, if you have a photo taken with a camera, you can now easily download it to your phone from Google Photos, so that you can post it to Instagram. The opposite direction works well, too; a picture from your phone is available on your computer, so you can edit it easily. Google Photos takes its best shot to make animations, stories and collages. It helps you “rediscover this day” from years ago and helps you view pictures you probably would never have seen again. Think of all of those baby pictures! The results are delightful. Search through your photos by faces and topics. For example, if I search “track,” I don't have to add other keywords for the results to show images from railroads and track meets. And remember, it's all free. The only reason not to do this is if you’ve lost your mind. Guy Kawasaki is the chief evangelist of Canva, an online graphic design tool. #5: Broadcast Live Calls to Action on Periscope Periscope is my new favorite social media marketing too...

How to Use Trello to Manage Your Facebook Group Posts

How to Use Trello to Manage Your Facebook Group Posts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you active in Facebook groups? Looking for a better way to organize the content you share in those groups? Managing your content in Trello lets you spend less time figuring out what to share in Facebook groups and more time engaging with fellow members. In this article you'll discover how to use Trello to manage the content you share in Facebook groups. Listen to this article: #1: Prioritize and Organize Your Facebook Groups No matter what tool you use, trying to manage 25 or more Facebook groups is going to be overwhelming. The trick is to know which groups best serve your goals and which groups you can best serve. If you're considering a new Facebook group, give it a 14-30 day trial. During that time, you'll get a feel for the types of content shared in the group. Also pay attention to the other members, so you can decide whether the audience aligns with your ideal prospects. #2: Create a Trello Board After you've made a decision about which groups you want to manage in Trello, the next step is to create and name a Trello board (maybe something like "Facebook Group Management"). You'll want to organize your Facebook groups by making a label for each one. I suggest you use a color-coded system to help you remember what types of content you can share in each group. For example, some groups have specific promotion or engagement rules and others simply have a niche focus. Perhaps you could use red hues to denote groups that prohibit promotion and green hues to denote groups that allow promotion. Whatever system you choose, knowing the slant you want to give your content will be easier if you know where you're sharing it at a glance. Using these labels will also make it easy to see where you've shared a piece of content in the past. This goes a long way toward helping you avoid duplicating content in the same group, and making sure you don't accidentally copy and paste the same content, with no alterations, into several different groups. #3: Make Lists for Your Content Topics Now it's time to add a list for each type of content you'll share in your groups; later on, in step 4, you'll add cards for specific pieces of content. For example, you might create lists for promotions of a membership site, a podcast, freebies you offer, and webinars you host. You should also have lists for Q&A prompts, tips and tricks, inspiration, and funny off-topic stuff. I even keep a column for introductions with a few variations that I can use (and tweak if necessary) as I join new groups. Create as many lists as you need and make sure every content topic has its own list on your Trello board. #4: Fill Your Lists With Pre-written Posts Spend time creating the text for 8 to 10 posts for each of your content lists. This step takes the longest, but doing the work up front means you'll have more time for engaging in groups later. Remember, you'll likely share each of these posts in a number of Facebook groups on different days and at different times, so don't worry if they sound similar. A great way to find inspiration for these post cards is to look at your past blog content and craft Facebook posts around that content. Use some of your posts to link back to that content on your blog, but in others simply provide value with a tip from the original blog post. You'll also want to have any images or graphics on hand so you can easily attach them to the appropriate card. When you have all of your copy and graphics ready to go, it's time to fill each list with cards of your posts. Start with your first list and click on the Add a card link at the bottom of the list. Title the card with the full copy of the post so you can see exactly which posts are available in each list. When you've added the title, click the green Add button. If you prefer a cleaner layout that allows you to see more cards at one time, you can title the card and add the full text of your post in the card...

KPMG – SEO Training

by Drew @ London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies

It’s been fantastic working with Drew. He has the rare ability to demystify complex subject matter for the uninitiated, yet still engage the more advanced members of the group. His workshops are interesting, practical and fun and after four training sessions we now have a team who really understand SEO, know why it’s important and... Continue reading

The post KPMG – SEO Training appeared first on London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies.

SEO Services Company in Somerville IN

by Lunarned45 @ Local seo tips

Best Online Seo Company Somerville in Indiana Explained Here It fees a variety of cash, but if it receives them to number one in the seek rankings, they could then use that to affect prospective clients. What a few organizations do is to force ratings for some keywords with a tremendous investment in ‘paid hyperlinks.… Continue reading SEO Services Company in Somerville IN

Artykuł SEO Services Company in Somerville IN pochodzi z serwisu Local seo tips.

4 Tools to Improve Your Social Media Marketing

4 Tools to Improve Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Does social media marketing contribute to your bottom line? Are you looking for tools to boost your ROI? As social media changes from an engagement-driven environment to a conversion-driven one, new tools are emerging to help you market more effectively. In this article you'll discover four tools to improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Connect Locally With Pointro When we think of local marketing, a narrow set of marketing choices comes to mind, such as offline marketing in local communities through events, sampling at stores, posters and fliers handed out by high-schoolers and the like. Alternately, local marketing also refers to local SEO and how to get visitors who are searching for what you offer online to walk into your store. Pointro is a relatively new social media tool that allows local business owners to connect with patrons in real time and offer them excellent service at the point where it matters most. You get a notification each time a customer checks into your restaurant or store. You can then listen to the conversation and chime in where you're needed. You also get instant access to photos taken by customers at your location and shared with their networks on social channels. Use this user-generated content to showcase customer loyalty to your brand and to enhance your credibility with future customers. Keep in mind that according to a HubSpot survey, 73% of users are likely to buy from a brand that responds to them on social media. Using Pointro to tap into that preference will build a relationship that leads to a conversion. #2: Focus on Loyal Advocates With ManageFlitter Managing relationships with social media brand advocates is a huge part of a successful social media program. Brand advocates are satisfied customers who directly impact the perceptions of other followers towards your business on social media. They also help spread a good word about your business far beyond your immediate network. In other words, cultivating brand advocates can be a huge win for converting undecided users. To be able to focus your energies on brand advocates, you need to know who matters and who doesn't. ManageFlitter is a tool that allows you to pare down your Twitter follower lists to only those users who truly like and engage with your brand on social media. By weeding out accounts that are dormant or have unfollowed you, you're freeing up your time and not wasting your marketing budget on fans that exist in name only. ManageFlitter also gives you the best times of day to publish posts for the best response, which is particularly helpful if you have a business or brand that operates across multiple time zones. #3: Reward Purchase Sharing With AddShoppers As previously discussed, brand advocates hold immense power in convincing other users to convert to your brand. A few years ago, Nielsen’s Global Trust in Advertising study revealed that 92% of customers trust recommendations from friends and family when making a purchase decision. This means the friends and families of your existing customers have the potential to turn into easy conversion targets. All you need to do is reach them at the right time with the right message. AddShoppers is a suite of tools that allows you to do that. One of AddShoppers' key features is the purchase-sharing auto-prompt that appears as soon as users complete their purchase. This feature allows users to share the details of their purchase (product descriptions, website URL, pricing and more) on social media. The tool also allows you to offer rewards (future purchase discounts, free shipping, etc.) to customers for sharing their purchases on social media. AddShoppers works well with ecommerce sites built on nearly every platform, including (but not limited to) WordPress, Shopify, Magento and PrestaShop. #4: Deliver Relevant Content With Tweet Jukebox Social media automation is a lot more than just sc...

How to Cultivate Loyal Customers With Social Media

How to Cultivate Loyal Customers With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want long-term customers for your business? Have you used social media to increase customer loyalty? To build customer loyalty, you need to show your customers you care. In this article I'll share how to use social media to embrace and cultivate loyal customers for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Personalize the Fan Experience The key to encouraging more customer loyalty on social media is to make your fans feel like they matter. Whether you have 1,000 or 10,000 fans, each one should feel special. A simple way to take a personal approach on a daily basis is to sign off on posts and comments with your name. Another method is to literally personalize your product or service for fans. Coca-Cola fans can personalize and share a virtual bottle of Coke and Heinz ran a promotion that gave their fans and customers the opportunity to add a friend's name to a soup can and send it to him or her. When you personalize your fans' experience, it boosts their trust and loyalty. It also gives them a chance to take full ownership of and share the experience with their network. #2: Offer Rewards Show your fans and customers you appreciate their input on your social channels by offering a reward. A lot of companies miss out on the opportunity to create more loyal customers, because they only reward customers who engage the most. While there's nothing wrong with rewarding regular engagement from fans, the key to appreciating your social media community as a whole is to reward fans based on the quality of the interaction, not the quantity. Remember, a fan who comments once, but leaves very detailed feedback (for example, a testimonial, suggestions or visual post), is just as valuable as someone who comments 40 times on posts. Involve and reward your entire social media community with offers, such as unique discounts, contests and bonus or sneak previews. GoEnnounce gave away exclusive "Welcome to College" gifts to the first 50 high school seniors who posted a photo with their college acceptance letters. When you reward all fans and customers, it gives everyone a reason to keep coming back to your page. It also shows your company appreciates both new and existing customers. #3: Surprise Fans and Customers Add to your customers' experience on social media by finding ways to create surprise and intrigue. One option is to surprise fans with a random act of kindness. For example, reward your community with a discount code when you reach 20,000 fans. Also, send fans who go above and beyond in adding value to your company, product or service a handwritten note and gift. When a young fan submitted a dragon drawing to Samsung to impress the brand, the company not only replied back with a great drawing of a kangaroo on a unicycle, but also took things one step further. Samsung sent the fan a Samsung phone, which included a case customized with the dragon drawing. Now that's what you call a surprise! Companies can also send fans a surprise on special occasions, such as after their first purchase, the one-year anniversary of their first purchase, their birthday or on seasonal holidays. Surprises are a great way to build word-of-mouth marketing. They also encourage brand advocacy, because fans who get a treat are likely to share the experience with their network. Remember, since social media conversations happen in real time, when you decide to surprise your fans, be sure to deliver the treat within a reasonable time frame. #4: Listen to Your Customers Build loyalty with your fans and customers and increase engagement by listening. Monitor daily what your customers and fans are saying about your company, whether it's a question, concern or problem, and then engage with your fans, respond and take action. Snapchat listened to their users, and as a result they created an update to make the app even easier to use. Listening is so important on social media because ...

Instagram Ad Rollout Will Make It the Top Media Buy: New Research

Instagram Ad Rollout Will Make It the Top Media Buy: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram for your business? Have you thought about advertising on the platform? Instagram just began offering paid advertising opportunities through select developer partners. In the coming months the platform is expected to create a Facebook-like self-serve option for any budget. In this article you'll discover findings from studies about Instagram's current reach, and the potential to reach targeted audiences with ads. Evolution of Instagram Ads In December 2014, Instagram reported its user base hit 300 million, 64.2 million from the U.S. alone. More exciting to brands and marketers than strict user numbers, however, was the engagement rate. Instagram users like, comment and re-gram at a rate of between 3.1% (Socialbakers research) to 4.2% (Forrester research). Comparably, Twitter and Facebook posts have engagement rates of .07% and below. Listen to this article: With population and engagement numbers like these, of course brands wanted to get access to Instagram audiences. For three years now, Facebook has been working on the correct advertising mix for Instagram. Until June 2015, businesses could only reach Instagram audiences by posting content, commenting, sharing and liking consumer posts. Instagram's few brand partners could place sponsored posts, much like Facebook's boosted posts. Strict ads, however, were not available. In June 2015, Instagram rolled out the call-to-action buttons Shop Now, Learn More and Install Now, which take users to mini-apps within Instagram, rather than brand websites. That way, users stay on Instagram once they've shopped, learned and installed. Now Instagram has provided advertising opportunities for all brands… provided you enter via one of their developer partners. These partners include Ampush, Brand Networks, 4C, Kenshoo, Nanigans, Salesforce Marketing Cloud, SocialCode and Unified. They require a minimum spend, so if you're a small business, you won't be able to take advantage of Instagram's new advertising opportunities until later in the year. Facebook's advertising followed the same path: It offered advertising to certain brands and then eventually made ads user-friendly enough that a developer intermediary was not needed. If you don't have the budget to utilize developer intermediaries, now is a good time to familiarize yourself with Instagram so that when the ads roll out to everyone, including small businesses, creating and posting an ad will be a simple task. On its blog, Instagram explains: Instagram ads will be available to advertisers of all types later this year. We are currently testing self-serve buying interfaces and APIs with a small group of partners, and we expect to make them more widely available over the coming months. With the context understood, small- and medium-sized businesses must evaluate whether Instagram is the right place for them. The following research will help with these decisions. #1: Instagram's Access to Facebook Data Offers a Significant Opportunity Lighting a fire under many marketers, Instagram currently doesn't have the pay-to-play platform that Facebook instituted in spring 2013. Before that point, companies that had built Facebook audiences had the luxury of getting each post to nearly every earned follower. Facebook then dropped organic reach to 6% and lower, forcing companies to pay to boost posts for as little as $1 per day if they wanted to reach more of their earned audience. Conversely, on Instagram, for the foreseeable future, each post will reach close to 100% of its earned audience… free! Well, free except for the time costs and any costs involved with Instagram's partners or other outside consulting. When Instagram will go to the Facebook-style pay-to-play platform is unclear. Until that time, you'll save significant marketing dollars experimenting with which content wins the most attention, engagement and likes. This said,

4 Tips to Improve Your YouTube Marketing

4 Tips to Improve Your YouTube Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you marketing on YouTube? Could you use some new ideas to improve your YouTube results? Perhaps you should reconsider your YouTube approach. In this article you'll discover four tips to make your YouTube marketing more effective. Listen to this article: #1: Pique Curiosity With Unconventional Video People aren't going to click on your video to see a boring infomercial. They may be willing to tolerate a dry tutorial if it offers unique advice that they won't find elsewhere. The most successful YouTube videos, though, tell an original and interesting story. This ad from Android is a good example. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vnVuqfXohxc&feature=youtu.be It may be easier to come up with great content ideas if you don't limit yourself to videos that relate directly to your product or business. This is particularly important if you're in an industry that's hard to get people excited about (such as asphalt contracting). Consider this video of a young girl dancing, which was used to promote the Samsung Galaxy 580 phone. The video is seemingly unrelated to the product, yet still reflects positively on the company. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lK7IzfLmyco The video conveys the excitement that Samsung wants its customers to feel about its phone. It helps set the mood for people to take the next step, which is to visit the URL at the end to learn more about the product. Your goal is to keep viewers engaged long enough to soften them up for your call to action. Don't go overboard with this type of content, though. You've probably seen some commercials and had no idea what the message was until the very end, which left you confused about the company. Make sure that your videos evoke the emotions you want customers to feel about your company, even if there isn't a direct connection between your video content and the product you're ultimately promoting. #2: Support Customer Research With Keywords When marketing on YouTube, it's important to recognize and consider your audience's stage in the buying process. Some marketers try to cold-sell to customers and prospects who might be interested in their products. The problem is that people who find your videos on YouTube are usually in the discovery stage and aren't ready to commit to a purchase. For this reason, it's important to choose keywords that are relevant to people who are looking for new information and to provide video content that educates based on those keywords. You can use the AdWords Display Planner tool to research keywords for your video descriptions and ad targeting. What types of keywords should you look for? Consider words and phrases that are relevant to both your industry and products. For example, if you have a car repair shop, you could target keywords such as "how to change oil" and "auto mechanic." Testing Keyword Performance in YouTube Ads Your keywords need to receive enough exposure for you to properly test them. Choose keywords with at least 1,000 monthly impressions, and you should be able to gather enough data to gauge their effectiveness. During the initial keyword testing phase, you want to collect data on the performance of keywords in your ads in a cost-effective way. Some of the keywords you're bidding on may generate more volume than you expect, especially if you're bidding competitively. YouTube is a massive site, so it's easy to quickly blow your ad budget, especially if you choose high-volume targeting options. Unless you're working with a big budget to start with, set your budget low enough to ensure you don't spend too much on a single keyword target. You can always raise your budget after you've had a chance to optimize your campaign and know which keywords offer the best ROI. #3: Qualify Leads With YouTube Video The goal of your video should be to prequalify viewers and send fully interested prospects on to your website to learn more about your products and services.

Visual Content: How to Create Shareable Images People Love

Visual Content: How to Create Shareable Images People Love

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use images in your social media marketing? Are you interested in finding ways to create more shareable visual content quickly and easily? To learn how to create shareable images that enhance your social media marketing, I interview Kim Garst. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Kim Garst, CEO of Boom Social, a social media marketing consultancy. Kim's also an expert in using visuals for social media marketing. She's the author of a new book, Will the Real You Please Stand Up: Show Up, Be Authentic, and Prosper in Social Media. Kim explores visual content and how it can enhance your social media marketing. You'll discover the importance of using visual content in your social media marketing; the different types of visual content you can create for your brand or business; and the best tools, apps and resources for creating visual content at your desktop or on the go. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Visual Content Marketing What is visual content marketing? Visual content marketing is a way to use images, rather than words, to communicate a message about your business, product or service. Visuals are a snackable way to express ideas. Visuals are a huge part of social media and they continue to evolve. People are so busy today. Images catch their attention and are quicker and easier to process than text as they scroll through a social media feed. Beyond leveraging social media platforms typically known to be visual (Pinterest and Instagram), Kim also looks for ways to implement visuals and eye-popping graphics in her Twitter content strategy and on her blog. Listen to the show to discover more ways to leverage visual content in your social media marketing.  The importance of visuals for social media marketing  From a social media marketing standpoint, the old saying that "a picture's worth a thousand words" holds so much value today. As marketers, we all need to be or become storytellers. A great photo or graphic tells a story in one hot second. We live in such an information-overloaded space right now and attention spans are so short. Text-based marketing alone has become less and less effective. The brain processes visuals 60,000 times faster than text. A good image can connect an idea or message much quicker and stronger than text-only content. Listen to the show to find out other amazing stats for the effectiveness of visual content on what your audience will process, learn and retain.  Different types of visuals you can create  There are five primary types of visual content you can create for social media: videos, photos, creative images, infographics and slide shows. Kim explains that comics, memes and infographics tend to be hugely popular on social media. Comics and memes are a way to showcase humor. They're fun and relatable, so people are eager to share them with their friends and family. According to Kim, businesses that use infographics probably have a 12% higher growth rate than companies that don't. Infographics offer a visual way to share a lot of interesting content in one image. People love them too. The most popular place to get more bang from your infographics is on Pinterest. People share them there like mad. Another great place to leverage infographics is on blogs. An infographic doesn't necessarily have to be complex to be appealing and effective. For example, if you have a blog post that's about 10 ways to do something, then you could repurpose your blog content and very easily make an infographic on those 10 ways.

155A0731.JPG

155A0731.JPG

by Chris Jorgensen/Iowa State Daily @ www.iowastatedaily.com - RSS Results

Pulitzer Prize winning photojournalist Lynsey Addario gave a talk Thursday night in the Memorial Union. Addario has spent over 25 years documenting war in the Middle East. The upcoming feature film 'It's What I Do' starring Jennifer Lawrence is based…

Facebook Marketing Mistakes: What to Avoid and Why

Facebook Marketing Mistakes: What to Avoid and Why

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you struggling to make Facebook marketing work for your business? Many marketers don't know how to connect with their audience on Facebook in a meaningful way for their business. To learn how to get Facebook marketing right, I interview Brian Carter for our new Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This New Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a brand-new show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Brian Carter, author of The Like Economy and LinkedIn for Business. Brian shares insights into the common struggles and misconceptions marketers have with Facebook marketing today. You'll learn what to focus your efforts on and a few simple tactics that work. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing for Business The misconceptions marketers have about Facebook. Brian explains why constant promotion is boring and what marketers should do instead. He describes how marketers should be using Facebook, and if you are not already on Facebook how to check it out and interact. You'll learn why it's all about selling the dream and bridging the gap. One thing to do is to have a vision of the life that your customer is trying to live and portray that through photos and maybe even videos. Brian shares some examples of businesses doing this well.  One of these businesses creates their own someecards. Discover how you can test this kind of tactic in your Facebook marketing. Listen to the show to find out how you can create cool stuff to get people to start sharing more of your content. The biggest mistakes marketers repeatedly make on Facebook. Brian describes the 5 things you need to do to sell on Facebook as shown on his Facebook Diagram below and outlines the mistakes marketers make at each one of these steps. Once you have your fans and you have reached them, you still need to persuade them. Listen to the show to find out how to make Facebook marketing work for your business. The Facebook metrics you need to pay attention to and why Consider the possibility that your business might be having trouble because people may not be aware of you or they're not engaging. You might not be showing up in their news feed or maybe you're showing but they're not buying for some reason. Look at the metrics to figure out which part you're having trouble with. You'll learn how to balance the number of fans on your Facebook page with the effective reach of your Facebook marketing and what Brian considers "trash-can metrics." Listen to the show to learn how to determine the metrics that matter most to your business. How B2B businesses can approach Facebook marketing Brian discusses the different options to target B2B customers on Facebook and feed people into your sales funnel. When it comes to ads, you need to have passionate fans. Your fans have to be passionate, affordable and they need to be buyers.  Discover how to get to know your customers in Facebook terms. Ask "What other things do your customers like?" There are a couple of tools for finding out your fans' likes: Optim.al and Infinigraph. Listen to the show to find out more about qualifying your audience on Facebook. Brian shares his best Facebook marketing tip: Share a photo and give a call to action such as "Click Like if..." To find out more about Facebook, check out our first podcast episode with Mari Smith, who shares insights on Facebook mobile. Survival Tip: Use Images on Facebook Recently Mari Smith and I experimented with this and it really does work. If you want to get maximum exposure for what you share on Facebook, use images to dominate Facebook news feeds.

Twitter Cards for Blogs: How to Set Them Up

Twitter Cards for Blogs: How to Set Them Up

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you heard of Twitter cards? Are you wondering how you can use them for your business? To learn about how Twitter cards can be beneficial to your blog, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast goes deep on the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode you'll discover the different types of Twitter cards available, how to set them up and what to tweak in order to have more customization. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Cards for Blogs What is a Twitter card? A Twitter card is a way for you to add more text and images to your tweets. Twitter cards give you a lot more options than you get with an ordinary tweet. With a normal tweet, you can upload an image that has to be rectangular. If it isn't, Twitter crops the top and bottom for it to fit. When you create a tweet with an image, the default is displayed on Twitter.com and on mobile apps. Tweets with images do not support Twitter cards. They are completely separate. Twitter cards work similarly to how Facebook pulls in default information from a post when you paste a URL into Facebook. It pulls in an image, a headline and some text. Listen to the show to hear why I believe Twitter cards only work on Twitter.com and their own mobile app right now. How a Twitter card works If you go to Twitter.com and go to a Twitter account that has Twitter cards enabled, you'll see the option to View Summary in the bottom right of the tweet. With Twitter's mobile app, you have to click on the tweet to see the Summary card. You'll hear the advantages and disadvantages of this one-click process. One of the benefits you get with a Twitter card is the amount of content you can add. You get 70 additional characters for the title, and 200 additional characters for your description. When you click on View Summary in a tweet, you'll notice that below the tweet is where your additional content appears. There's also the ability to include images. You can even include tall images. For example, I was able to display an image that was 480 x 580 pixels within a Twitter card. Listen to the show to find out what information you can include and what is powerful if you have a multi-author blog. Twitter card benefits for bloggers There are three types of Twitter cards that work well for bloggers. These are the Summary card, the Summary card with large image and the Photo card. 1. The Summary card is the default that most bloggers will likely choose. It shows a small image that's offset to the right, and all text is below it. This is very similar to how Facebook works. 2. The Summary card with large image is a better option if you have nice big images on your blog. The difference here is that the large image is above the content. When someone hits View Summary, they will see the large image before the additional information you have included. 3. The Photo card is essentially the same as the Summary card with large image, except it doesn't have the summary. Instead you just see the photo with a headline. To see a Photo card in use, you can check out Mashable on Twitter. At Social Media Examiner, we use the Summary card and we use the Summary card with large image for My Kids' Adventures. Listen to the show to discover how the images you create for Facebook Open Graph on your blog can also be used for Summary cards. How to set up a WordPress blog to work with Summary cards First of all, you need to install the WordPress SEO by Yoast plugin.

8 LinkedIn Marketing Tips From the Experts

8 LinkedIn Marketing Tips From the Experts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to improve your LinkedIn marketing? Are you interested in the latest tips and tools? LinkedIn is one of the most effective platforms for expanding your reach and improving your business results. We asked social media experts for their hottest LinkedIn tips. Here’s what they had to say. Listen to this article: #1: Learn Valuable Info From LinkedIn Publisher Stats The new LinkedIn Publisher stats offer amazing insight into not only how many people are viewing each post, but the length of life of each post, reader demographics and the people who engage with your posts. To see your stats, go to the Who’s Viewed Your Posts tab, which is located under Profile in the main navigation under Who’s Viewed Your Profile. Click on any post to see a graph that shows the number of views by the last 7 days, 15 days, 30 days, 6 months or 1 year. This gives you incredible perspective to see the shelf life of each post. Review these numbers, as well as the elements of the posts themselves, to see patterns that will tell you what topics, format and length your readers are most interested in. LinkedIn also provides you with the demographics of the readers for each post. View the top four industries, job titles, locations and traffic sources that showed interest in your posts. Based on this information, you can see if your content is reaching your intended audience. You can also determine if there is a need for your products or services with a niche market you had not previously considered. Finally, see who engaged with your posts by liking or commenting on them. Since this includes people you are not directly connected to, it makes it an excellent opportunity to find potential prospects or partners. This only scratches the surface of what you can learn and how you can use LinkedIn’s new invaluable feature Who’s Viewed Your Posts. Melonie Dodaro is author of The LinkedIn Code and founder of Top Dog Social Media. #2: Invest in LinkedIn Sales Navigator LinkedIn is steadily restricting functionality from the free version that business owners and sales and marketing leaders need, which includes a limited view of prospects inside targeted companies. It’s time to consider investing in Sales Navigator. (This is something I didn’t advise in the past.) Sales Navigator assists with buyer identification and prospect research. Plus, it helps you engage with decision-makers more effectively, as it provides real insights into what your prospects care about. This is important because reach without engagement means nothing. You even get news about the company, so you can create messaging around trigger events. For example, for one of our clients, we took advantage of a major airliner’s IT outage. We engaged in sales conversation with tech leaders who wanted to learn about a new approach and a rising technology that would keep it from happening again. Even though LinkedIn Sales Navigator is a great platform that’s worth the investment, it’s still just one piece of the puzzle. All the lead suggestions and insights won’t help if you don’t have the right messages, content and approach to enable sales using LinkedIn. You also need a strategy your tools can support. Kristina Jaramillo is founder of GetLinkedInHelp.com. #3: Network On The Go Instead of surfing Facebook during downtime between appointments, increase brand exposure by using LinkedIn on your mobile device. Use LinkedIn itself or companion apps. If you only spend 10 minutes per day sharing great content with your connections on LinkedIn, it will keep your brand on their radar. Plus, it’s simple to do on the go. Be strategic about connecting with new folks or start conversations with recent contacts. When making a connection request, always personalize your message by clicking Customize Invite. A generic message is bad connecting etiquette. Plus, it’s not something you would ever do in person.

Betcartpartners Relaunches Affiliate Programme with Income Access

by The Income Access Team @ Income Access

Income Access technology to power expanded programme covering online sportsbook and casino Betcart and suite of iLottery and online poker […]

The post Betcartpartners Relaunches Affiliate Programme with Income Access appeared first on Income Access.

6 Tips for Writing Headlines That Drive Traffic

6 Tips for Writing Headlines That Drive Traffic

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your headlines performing as well as you'd like? Do you want to write more effective headlines? Using a few simple techniques, you can craft headlines that capture attention and convince people to click through to your content. In this article you’ll discover six tips for writing effective headlines that drive traffic. Listen to this article: #1: Begin With Numbers Headlines containing numbers typically perform better than other types of headlines. A list-type post promises to be quick and easy to read, and that's important in today's busy world. You can use a low number to illustrate how concise your article is, or a high number to illustrate how comprehensive it is. But don't use too high a number or you'll lose the benefit of the content appearing easy to consume. Odd numbers generally perform better than even numbers, as they appear less conveniently packaged than even numbers, and the number seven works well in headlines. Make sure you use a numeral rather than spell out the number. Numerals stand out better in headlines and take up less space. #2: Highlight Value Why should people read your post? What's in it for them? The benefit should be clear, simple and direct in the headline. How-to headlines always work well, in part because they're so clear. The reader can see instantly the benefit to be gained by reading the article. Your headline should promise something. And the more specific you can make that promise, the better. It's an added bonus if you can incorporate drama, excitement or humor in the headline, but don't lose credibility. People distrust outrageous or unlikely claims, so make sure your benefit is genuine and believable. #3: Pique Curiosity Headlines with questions can be effective, provided you compose them the right way. The golden rule is never to ask a question that your reader can answer "no" to. Likewise, if you answer the question in the headline, there is no need for people to read the article. They already know the answer. The question in the following headline creates tension. Readers will want to know the answer, so they'll read the article to find out. Questions arouse curiosity, which is a powerful emotion. #4: Stay Away From Positive Superlatives We're conditioned to always be positive in our communications. But is that tactic effective in headlines? A study by Outbrain found that the average click-through rate on headlines containing negative superlatives ("never" or "worst," for example) performed 63% better than those containing positives (like "always" or "best"). In fact, headlines containing positive superlatives performed 29% worse than those without any superlatives. One reason is that the overuse of superlatives (such as best, fastest or cheapest) in marketing has led to them being ignored, or worse still, disbelieved. Negative terms are more likely to be viewed as authentic and genuine. #5: Add Adjectives and Power Words Unlike superlatives, which can turn readers off, adjectives (if used correctly) can create interest. Incorporate adjectives like beautiful, brilliant, effortless, essential, fun, horrifying, incredible, strange, useful and valuable in your headlines. These words grab your readers' attention and intrigue them sufficiently to read on. To write more persuasive headlines, try these five power words: you, free, because, instantly and new. Beloved by copywriters, these words have been used in headlines for decades. If you use these words in your headlines, you're pretty much guaranteed a boost in your click-through rates. #6: Use Punctuation The Outbrain study mentioned above also found that simply adding a hyphen or a colon to a headline increases click-through rates by 9%. It's a simple technique to use. Place your main keyword before the colon or hyphen, and add your clickbait headline after it. Note Optimal Headline Lengths

SEO Services in Siler City NC

by JAROSLAW CHROBOT @ Small Business Marketing

When choosing an SEO services company in Siler City NC 27344, you should consider a few things to be able to make the right choice. It is important to note that good search engine optimization (SEO) for your website means more business for you. This is because it will lead to more visibility of your […]

The post SEO Services in Siler City NC appeared first on Small Business Marketing.

How Content Can Help You Build a Loyal Following

How Content Can Help You Build a Loyal Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you trying to build an engaged loyal following that loves you and your business? Have you tried to use video, podcasting or social media to build engagement? I explore these questions with Pat Flynn for our new Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This New Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a brand-new show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Pat Flynn, founder of Smart Passive Income. Pat shares insights into his tactics and strategies and how social media content contributes to the success of his business. You'll learn how to create content to publish on different social media platforms to connect to a large audience. And you'll discover the techniques to use to build a loyal fan base. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Content for Business The business strategy behind Smart Passive Income  Pat explains how content plays a key role in his business. You'll learn why his focus is to provide valuable content for those looking for information. You'll hear how you can do this when you share content based on your own experiences. Pat shares the results his business has had from his different content platforms: blog, video and podcast. Listen to the show to discover Pat's personal stories behind his successful business. How to make a personal connection with your audience Pat talks about the different ways he shares personal information about himself to connect with his audience and how he incorporates this into his business content. Pat shares the reason why he gives his audience strategic insights into his personal story. Pat shares how he connects with his audience on Facebook. You'll find out the strategy behind the different components of Pat's Facebook page photo and how this strategy helps him connect with his audience. People like to connect with people. You'll pick up some useful tips on how to build affinity online. Listen to the show to discover why Pat leverages his "trifecta" content creation strategy (blogging, video and podcasting) to connect with a wide audience. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bJIJ_6G9Z84 Pat's video strategy YouTube is the #2 search engine in the world. Pat explains how he uses videos to respond to questions from his audience. Pat explains how this strategy works well for his business and drives traffic back to his website. Listen to the show to find out how Pat intentionally uses keywords in his videos for great results. Pat's blogging strategy Pat blogs three times a week. He publishes content based on his own experiences and explains what he does wrong, what he does right and the results he gets. He's very transparent with all of the different processes. Pat talks about the Niche Site Duel, where he was challenged to build a website from scratch. Pat publicly displayed the process and how it reached #1 in Google. Pat explains the role email marketing plays in his business model and why it's crucial for business. You'll discover why email is still the best tool to use to connect with people in a direct and personal way. Listen to the show to discover insights into the business strategies behind Pat's successful blog. Pat's podcasting strategy You'll discover how Pat was surprised by the extent that podcasting helps his brand. Learn how Pat discovered that 20% of his readers find his website through his podcasts. Find out how to train your podcast audience to get to your blog with calls to action in your podcast. Pat uses the Pretty Link Pro plugin and domain names for easy redirect URLs to get podcast listeners to come to his site.

Live Video and Marketing: Where the Industry Is Heading

Live Video and Marketing: Where the Industry Is Heading

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Interested in using live video for business? Have you considered creating a live video show? To find out what live video can do for your business, I interview Brian Fanzo. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Brian Fanzo, a tech evangelist who specializes in live video. He's the founder of iSocialFanz and host of the FOMOFanz podcast. Brian explores live video, where it's headed, and how it can help your business. You'll discover whether to use Facebook Live or Periscope if you're just getting started. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video and Marketing What Live Video Means for Business Whether yours is a small business, a brick-and-mortar store, or an ecommerce company, you need to shrink the distance between yourself and your customer, Brian explains. Live video is much more than a marketing play because it shrinks that distance by humanizing your brand and business. Live video is also the gateway to technologies such as augmented reality (AR) and virtual reality (VR), which Brian believes will be huge by 2020. To embrace AR and VR, he says, companies and brands will need to have a live video strategy already in place. He says today's consumers want you to convince them that you can be trusted, that you're a resource, are invested in them, and can understand them. They don't want to be marketed or sold to; they want to engage and have a conversation with you. Businesses need to spend time building rapport, a relationship, and trust with their audience, and live video is a great vehicle for that. With regard to building trust, Brian believes the most valuable statement anyone can make on live video is, "I don't know." If a brand admits they don't know something on live video, it adds validity to what they do know. (When you're stumped, you can also ask audience members to send you a message on Twitter or Facebook, and say you'll have your product manager get back to them.) Listen to the show to hear more about the strategy behind using live video to break down barriers with your audience. Getting Started With Live Video Brian says that according to Cisco, 79% of Internet traffic in 2020 will be video. Nowhere did anyone say that's going to be great video, good video, or live video, Brian continues. However, he believes most brands are thinking about video. Many people think live video is scary because they picture themselves on the video. Brian has to remind them that the best live videos are often made when you're celebrating customers and employees. And if your live video brings people access they can't get anywhere else, the camera doesn't even need to be on you. For example, say you use live video to interview a client, a customer, or a celebrity while they're in the office. As the person behind the camera, you can watch the comments for questions and decide which are important enough to ask the guest. With these kinds of live videos, all of the scary elements of being on air are taken away. Listen to the show to discover my process for doing live videos. Innovative Examples of Live Video Brian says Cisco has done an amazing job with their We Are Cisco campaign. Employees in different offices are trusted to take over the company's social media accounts, including Snapchat and Instagram, to share their point of view. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oMjEzVH1d0k Not only does the campaign celebrate Cisco's employees, it's also a great recruiting tool. The company doesn't have to convince job applicants that they trust their employees; the proof is v...

Purpose: How Facebook Built an Empire

Purpose: How Facebook Built an Empire

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business have a purpose? Are you wondering how having a purpose can help drive the success of your business? To learn how Mark Zuckerburg has grown his empire, I interview Ekaterina Walter for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ekaterina Walter, a global social innovation strategist at Intel and member of the board of directors for Word of Mouth Marketing Association. She is also the author of the new book, Think Like Zuck: The Five Business Secrets of Facebook's Improbably Brilliant CEO Mark Zuckerburg. Ekaterina shares her knowledge about Facebook's purpose and how it helped them build an empire. You'll learn why Facebook has been so successful and what it means to have a purpose. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Facebook Empire Ekaterina's Facebook story. Ekaterina shares her story of when she started using Facebook for personal reasons and found what it could do for her. She discovered connections she was able to make with people who have shared interests, whether she knew them or not. She talks about how she uncovered interesting stories that she may not have found through other channels. Facebook helped her understand her connections better and by following them, she could see what was important to them. From a business perspective, about 4 years ago, Intel looked at engaging with its customers on Facebook. They first started with a Facebook Page and shared messages there like other brands, without thinking about creating a two-way dialogue. They quickly realized this wasn't the right way to approach relationships with customers. But they also understood that this was a goldmine: the ability to build relationships right there on the digital platform. Twenty to thirty years ago, Intel used to go into computer clubs to find tech-savvy people and trendsetters in user technology, because these people would then go on to tell the mainstream audience and their friends or relatives. Back then, if you talked to 50 people at a time, either face-to-face or over the phone, you were lucky. Today the Facebook platform allows Intel to connect with almost 15 million fans on their global Page and over 2o million across multinational Pages on a daily basis. It's a place where they can truly engage with their fans and understand them. Before Facebook, this would never have happened. This is the biggest community Intel was ever able to build globally. Over the past 4 years, Intel has been building their communities and engaging in the conversations. Listen to the show to find out why Facebook is exciting for a brand person or marketer. Ekaterina's role within Intel. Ekaterina's role within Intel is to figure out what social means to Intel. She felt lucky that she was able to paint a blank canvas for a number of years and help lead Intel in the right direction. Back then, they tried to figure out the basics: Should they do it internally or outsource, what should they do, how should they build the strategies and what networks should they use? Back in 2009, her role was about looking at the community Intel had built. Since then, it's been about trying to dig deeper and engage in conversations. Ekaterina was managing Intel's community and engaging with fans. She spent a lot of time having conversations with fans, finding out who they were and what kind of content they wanted from Intel as a company. Over a number of years,

Storden MN SEO | Online Marketing in Minnesota

by Martin Hosner @ Search Engine Marketing Company

WE ARE Storden SEO DOES YOUR Storden MN BASED BUSINESS NEED MORE LEADS? Fill Out Our Discovery Form We are a leading search engine optimization in Storden, Minnesota (ZIP: 56174). We have helped a lot of local businesses grow their revenue by ranking their website #1 in Google, Yahoo & Bing search engines. This is […]

Statistics that make your content more findable – GatherContent Blog

Statistics that make your content more findable – GatherContent Blog


GatherContent Blog

Having audited over 3,000 sites using machine learning, we’ve found that consumer search behaviours and ranking factors vary across different industries and countries. So much so, that there are fewer general rules of SEO and content strategy that are hard and fast. However, the basics never change and in this article, we share some interesting …

How to Develop a Social Media Reporting System

How to Develop a Social Media Reporting System

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you responsible for reporting your social media results? Do you need to develop a reporting system? Knowing who you report to and what metrics they need will help you streamline the process and ensure you're delivering reports on time. In this article you'll discover how to develop a social media reporting system for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Stakeholders and Goals The first step is to do a quick audit of your current reporting process and find out which stakeholders receive your reports. If you know whom you're reporting to and why, you can ensure your reports will be useful to everyone involved. Find out who receives the social media data in your organization. You may send reports to one person, but that person may then forward them on to others. Also, different teams have different needs. For example, a PR team may have different expectations than a community management team. Next, discover what actions your reports support so you don't waste time reporting on metrics no one uses. Talk to the people you report to, find out their needs (and wants) and see what you can learn about the current state of your social media reporting. You'll likely find some overlapping goals and be able to identify areas of commonality. If you're the sole owner and consumer of social media reporting in your company, identify what you need to know about your performance and what you'll do with this information. Try to distill it to a few clear goals, which will make everything easier in later steps. #2: Decide What Metrics to Track When deciding what to include in your reports, find metrics you can use in multiple situations and have some business benefit for your stakeholders. Just because you can report on something doesn't mean you should. And the more metrics you include in your reports now, the more metrics you'll have to keep supporting in the future. Here's an overview of the metrics that really matter: Reach or exposure: Measure the size of your potential audience. Volume: Track the conversation size and number of brand mentions. Engagement: Analyze the quantity and type of engagement your accounts and posts get. Audience: Learn who participates in a conversation, along with the most active users and influencers. Content: Monitor your top-performing (and worst-performing) posts. The metrics you use will depend on your needs and the social networks you're measuring, but these core concepts are a great start. In addition to the general metrics above, you'll probably have a few specific needs or requests from stakeholders you need to support. That's great, because the more relevant and targeted your reports, the more useful they'll be for your business. However, avoid creating custom metrics or anything you'll need to calculate manually, unless they're really important. You'll likely regret this later. It can take a long time to handcraft special calculations, especially if you're not entirely sure how you did it the last time. Above all, be consistent. Make sure you're reporting the same metrics in the same way each time. Add in percentage changes and other benchmarks to make it easy for your audience to interpret the results. #3: Choose the Right Tools There are many social media measurement and analytics tools you can choose from. However, only a few tools will help you get the precise information you need. Keep in mind that no tool is going to be exactly what you're looking for. There are so many ways to analyze social media that every tool has a different perspective. Plus, social data is far from perfect and the kind of information that you can pull from a particular social media channel will vary depending on the channel. However, there is a product out there for you. Ask these questions when you're researching a new tool: Where does it get its social data? What kind of relationship does it have with the social ne...

How to Get Your Videos to Perform in Search

How to Get Your Videos to Perform in Search

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create YouTube videos? Want to get them seen? Amy Schmittauer is here to help you discover how to get your videos to rank in search. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Amy Schmittauer, a video marketing expert, public speaker, and host of the Savvy Sexy Social YouTube video series. Amy helps marketers with YouTube and social media tips and explores how to get your videos to perform better in search. You'll discover what goes into creating the headline, description, tags, and thumbnail for your videos. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Get Your Videos to Perform in Search Centralizing video Amy recommends to always consider the platform before uploading a video. Don't plan to create an awesome Snapchat story with the intent to upload it to YouTube. That derails your focus. The most important thing is to recognize the platform and deliver a product that will be welcomed in the context of that situation, whether it's Snapchat, Instagram, Vine, or YouTube. How you would present a video on YouTube is very different than how you would present a video on Facebook, especially since you want to create something successful for a specific environment. There's one exception to keep in mind. An influencer who wants to build a Snapchat portfolio needs to find a way to retain that material (a place to put it to be rewatched), since it will expire in 24 hours. If you create content on YouTube, it may make sense to edit in footage from Instagram, Snapchat, a live stream, or something else to give a little context. However, a Snapchat story, uploaded in its original form to YouTube, will not do as well as it would on the original platform. Someone took a bunch of Zach King's Vine videos, strung them together, and put them on Facebook and YouTube, which caused him to explode. So I asked Amy if material from Facebook Live could easily go up on YouTube. She said it could, but the platforms are still different environments. Facebook Lives aren't always as fun on playback, she explains. Also keep in mind that if you get on Live and are just sitting there, going through some sort of programming or curriculum, and talking to comments, it's going to drag on. It doesn't matter if it's 10 or 30 minutes, it won't be fun for anyone on YouTube to watch in a replay. If you broadcast with more intention (for example, mention big news that just happened) and possibly reference a couple of comments here and there (but stay focused), that may be a good repurposing opportunity for YouTube. You want the audience to feel like they're having a similar experience to when it was live. Amy says Facebook and YouTube are about the same in terms of uploading. You take a produced piece of content, upload it, and put it out to the audience subscribing to that channel, whether it's a YouTube page or Facebook page or profile. However, when people watch a video on YouTube, it's an intentional move. They have to go to a video and click Play. Then the audio and video immediately begin. On Facebook, and now on Instagram, posted videos are put in the viewers' faces. When people scroll though their feed, they may or may not see it and they may or may not click the Play or Audio buttons to watch and listen. Plus, the audio on Facebook goes on when the viewer clicks it, so they could start listening at any point in the video. Viewers go through a different thought process before they decide to watch a video on either one of these platforms. Listen to the show to learn why you want to put videos of similar le...

6 Publishing Tools From Facebook for Marketers

6 Publishing Tools From Facebook for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you explored the Publishing Tools section of your Facebook page lately? Wondering how the new features make marketing easier? Your page's Publishing Tools section contains a lot of important features including video management, lead generation, and product sales. In this article, you'll discover how to better manage your Facebook marketing with six Facebook publishing tools. Listen to this article: Note: Your page's Publishing Tools may or may not include all six of these features based on what features your page has access to at this time. #1: Collect and Download Leads Do you want to collect leads directly from Facebook using the Facebook Ads Lead Generation marketing objective? If so, you'll need a lead form. You can design lead forms within Publishing Tools. When you first get access to this feature, you'll find a sample lead form to test. You can preview the sample lead form and submit your own information. You can then download the information to see what your leads would look like. To create your own lead form, click the Create button. You'll get the option to create a new form from scratch or duplicate an existing form. Once you click Next, add a name to your form and select the advanced options applicable to you. You can learn more about whether you need to edit your field IDs in this Facebook help document, which has specific instructions for users of Driftrock, InfusionSoft, Marketo, Maropost, Sailthru, and Sparkroom. You can also retrieve leads via the API or use third-party tools like LeadsBridge, which connects to most email marketing and marketing automation platforms. Next, choose what to ask for on your lead form. Note that the more information you ask for, the longer your form will be. Next, add a link to your website's policies and disclaimers, or add a custom disclaimer for your form. Then you'll add a link to your website where you would like your visitors to go after they complete your form. This may be a custom thank-you page, an offer page, or your home page. Note: If you're tracking lead conversions in Google Analytics, you might want to have a custom thank-you page that lets you know that this was a lead conversion from a Facebook lead form to separate it from a lead conversion on your website or other source. Next, you have the option to encourage people to give you their information. For example, add information and custom graphics if you're offering a free ebook or report. Next you'll get to preview your form. If you want to add questions, click the Edit button at the top. You can also click the Next button to see how long your form will be, based on the number of questions you chose to ask your potential lead. You can go back and edit different aspects of your form, or if you're satisfied, click the Create Form button. Note: Any questions you ask will be prefilled if potential leads have entered that information into their Facebook profile. If not, they'll have to enter it into the form manually. Also note that once you've created a form, you can't edit it. You can, however, create a new form based on an existing form and modify the parts you want to change. When you're ready to collect leads, go to your Facebook Ads Manager and choose the Collect Leads for Your Business objective. Once you configure your audience, budget, placements, and ad creative, select the form you created at the very end of the process. Next go back to your Publishing Tools to download your leads, or follow the directions provided based on your CRM or LeadsBridge. #2: Manage Recorded and Live Video Do you post a lot of video to your Facebook page? You can manage all of your videos easily using your Publishing Tools Video Library section. Here you'll find a listing of your current videos, with indicators of whether they were live videos (noted by the person icon) or recorded videos uploaded to your pa...

Online Reviews for Local Businesses: What Marketers Need to Know

Online Reviews for Local Businesses: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you own or manage a local business? Are you leveraging the full power of online reviews? To discover how to leverage online review services, I interview Martin Shervington. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Martin Shervington, one of the world's leading experts on Google+ and Google for Business. As a trainer, speaker and consultant, he helps marketers understand how to best utilize Google's services. Martin will explore online reviews for local businesses. You'll discover how to get reviews for your business, as well as how to respond to negative reviews. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Online Reviews for Local Businesses Google for business In June 2014 Google launched Google My Business, which simplifies how people set up pages. Part of this is for local businesses, so they can appear on a map, get reviews and so on. Martin has been doing research on this and says businesses are not quite connecting the dots on Google+ marketing and using this powerful tool. He says as of last year, only 37% of businesses had claimed their Google listing, 63% have not. Listen to the show to discover more about Google My Business. The impact of reviews Martin has spoken to hundreds of businesses (owners and staff) about reviews. People use reviews as a socialized way to judge the businesses around them, which get more customers as a result of reviews. For example, Martin shares, Tasty Thai in San Mateo can attribute thousands of dollars of revenue to one single positive Yelp review from a guy who had been to Thailand and loves their Thai food. At the moment Yelp has a lot of people's attention, and Martin hopes Google reviews will get to that level as well. Reviews can bring tourists, new people and new business. The downside is there's the potential for negative reviews. "[Businesses have to have] good service, good product and sometimes be willing to say when you haven't got it 100% right," Martin says. Listen to the show to hear about an amazing experience I had while traveling, based on a Yelp review. Google listings Martin explains how Google sometimes auto-generates a business listing, and a lot of people's businesses are listed without them knowing about it. To determine if your business has an auto-generated listing, Google your location to see if anything comes up. If it doesn't, go to Google.com/business to set one up. If it is already set up, click where it says "claim this listing," so you can control uploading photos, reply to posted reviews and more. When you set up a page on Google they verify it by phone or by mail. There are two different types of local pages, Martin continues, a storefront and a service area. If you run your business from home, say you are a service area to hide your address. Once you've claimed your property or set up your page from scratch, there are several things you can do: change the profile image (which is the icon people see when you make comments or reply to reviews), change your cover photo, manage your photos, add what you do to the description area, post on that Google page, reply to reviews, share reviews and more. You can even embed the best reviews on your website. This is how you take the social proof you get from reviews and spread it onto your website. The Google My Business dashboard provides a higher-level frame-of-reference around the things that are connected to your business, such as analytics, your YouTube channel, the page insights and the Google+ page itself.

Our New Podcast: Social Media Marketing Talk Show

Our New Podcast: Social Media Marketing Talk Show

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you noticed that social networks seem to change every week? How can anyone possibly keep up, right? We have a great new (and free) solution for you--the busy marketer. I'm excited to announce the new Social Media Marketing Talk Show audio podcast. Each week your friends at Social Media Examiner bring you: #1 News: Our news team breaks down the critical social updates of the week. #2 Commentary: We bring on industry experts to talk about what the news means. #3 Tips: You'll discover actionable insight that could give you an advantage. Social Media Marketing Talk Show In each episode, we cover the top 10 to 20 major announcements from Facebook, Instagram, LinkedIn, Twitter, Pinterest, YouTube, and Snapchat for the last week. On this week's Social Media Marketing Talk Show with Michael Stelzner, we explore Facebook's latest growth with Mari Smith; Amazon's social network, Spark, with Jeff Sieh; LinkedIn's new Web Demographics tool with Viveka von Rosen; and other breaking social media marketing news of the week! Your Action Plan Step 1: Click here now to SUBSCRIBE in iTunes/Apple Podcasts app (scroll down for other options). Step 2: Click the Subscribe button. Step 3: Download the episodes. Step 4: Sit back and enjoy the content, knowing you'll never miss important social media marketing news. Step 5: If you like Social Media Examiner, we'd love a review. Confused? Watch this video to discover how to subscribe on your iPhone. Here are some quick links to the new show on all major platforms: iTunes/Apple Podcast | Android | Google Play | Stitcher | RSS Hear More About the New Show To learn more about this new show, listen to this special episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast below...

Affordable SEO Services New London IA 52645

Affordable SEO Services New London IA 52645


Small Business Marketing

Affordable SEO Services New London Iowa. Our SEO experts specialize in getting your business noticed in New London IA 52645

6 Ways to Use Advanced Twitter Search for Increased Influence

6 Ways to Use Advanced Twitter Search for Increased Influence

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to be a recognized expert in your industry? Looking for relevant conversations to weigh in on? Using Twitter's Advanced Search to monitor keywords and conversations can help you connect with influencers and uncover opportunities for thought leadership. In this article you'll discover six ways to use Twitter's Advanced Search to increase your influence in your industry. Listen to this article: #1: Find Conversations to Participate In Doing a keyword search on Twitter is a quick and easy way to find out what people in your industry are talking about, identify accounts to follow, and discover new business opportunities. With Twitter's Advanced Search, you can create complex searches with keywords that are relevant to your industry. To start, choose three or four keywords that are relevant to your industry and use the Boolean search operator "OR" to create a single search for all of your terms. For example, search for "digital marketing" OR "digital marketing advice." Look at the search results to find conversations in your niche. Then join relevant discussions to offer expert advice and build meaningful connections with people in your industry. Use the OR operator to ensure that every key phrase or search term is relevant to your mission. Keep this list updated and weed out the keywords that aren't helping you find the best results. Soon you'll have a filtered list of conversations to review on a daily basis. You can also add keywords like "recommend" to find prospects looking for services you offer. You can also use a keyword search to optimize your own Twitter profile. Add keywords to your bio to help other users find you. Including key phrases (such as "public speaker" and "charity worker") may help you uncover new opportunities. #2: Monitor Hashtags for Media Opportunities You can follow specific hashtags and keywords to discover people who are looking for thoughtful comments or quotes. For example, the hashtag #journorequest is popular among journalists and industry writers. You can create an advanced search that pairs both #journorequest and your key industry terms ("skincare expert" or "facial expert," for example) to find opportunities for free coverage in print and online. Once you've uncovered opportunities through hashtag monitoring, reach out to users to share your expert insights. This helps you get media coverage for your business and create meaningful connections. #3: Connect and Converse With Industry Peers Your influence is often measured by the network you keep. Use Twitter's Advanced Search filters to find key contacts and people to follow in your industry. Filter Results by Account In Twitter's search box, search for a keyword (or group of keywords). Then to filter your results, click More Options and select Accounts to see only those accounts that contain your keywords. Once you create a tailored list of key industry contacts, follow those users, add them to a list, or use a monitoring tool like TweetDeck to track what they're saying. Filter Results by People You Follow You can also limit your search to only the users you follow. To do this, enter your search term (for example, "social media data"). Then filter your results by clicking More Options and selecting From People I Follow. Your search results will only include tweets that match your search query and are from the accounts you follow. Filter Results by Date You can add a date range to find conversations relevant to your topics of interest and occurring within the last few weeks from users you follow. This gives you the opportunity to add comments, share your insights, and show thought leadership within your online peer group. Filter Results by People You can also use Twitter search to find previous conversations you've had with your contacts. This is a great way to revive relationships and build camaraderie.

Haters: How to Deal With Haters and Trolls of Your Business

Haters: How to Deal With Haters and Trolls of Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you ever been publicly criticized or mocked for something that you did? Are you wondering how you can deal with this type of negativity when it happens on social media? To learn about haters and how to deal with them, I interview Marcus Sheridan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Marcus Sheridan, who blogs at The Sales Lion, is host of The Mad Marketing Podcast and is a partner at River Pools & Spas. Marcus is a consultant and keynote speaker. In fact, he was the closing keynote at Social Media Marketing World and he simply killed it! Marcus shares the various types of critics you might attract and how you can deal with them. You'll discover the differences among haters, trolls and critics and what to do when you are under attack. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Haters in Business Haters are the type of people who seem to get great joy out of saying nasty things about you or your company online. If you haven't dealt with haters yet, the chance of dealing with one in the future is pretty good. I'm going to share a story with you that happened recently to us, and my hope is that it will prepare you for these types of people. If you let them have their way, then they succeed and you fail. This will impede your progress. The story is about an entertainment piece that was made for Social Media Marketing World 2014. Phil Mershon, who is my event director, created an original jingle called "Let's Get Social," which was sung by Mary McCoy from Continuum Marketing Services. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=itvvFfeLh84 The song was performed just before Jay Baer took the stage with a panel, which included Ted Rubin, Nichole Kelly and Jeffrey Rohrs. The panel discussion was entitled "Have We Lost The Social in Social Media?" This particular piece of entertainment was designed to be funny, and was to set the stage for the panel discussion. Even though it was corny, attendees got into it. Although on the video, you can't grasp the audience's reaction. The video was originally released on the event page for Social Media Examiner, on my personal Facebook profile and on Social Media Examiner's Facebook page. It was never intended to be released to the public. The day after it was uploaded, it started to go crazy viral. The first day alone it received 75,000 views on YouTube. The number of negative and nasty comments on YouTube was unbelievable. Phil and I had a discussion as to whether to close off the comments, but I didn't feel that was appropriate. You'll hear the reasons why I kept the comments open, and what I hoped would happen. An article was then published by Gawker called The Devil Is Real, and He Made a Song About Social Media Marketing. Gawker is a gossip blog that has a section called Valley Wag, which covers the social space. This very negative post spurred a lot of the video's views and negative comments on YouTube. Following this blog post, Mashable, Huffington Post, Slate and CNET also covered the story. By the Friday of that week, VH1 created this 90-second comedy piece of the video: httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Sv6byr_JKuk To date, our video has been viewed nearly 500,000 times, with just over a 1,000 comments. At one point it ranked #15 worldwide. Someone has even made an acoustic version of it, which is quite good. Now the plus side of it all is that Social Media Marketing World was referenced or linked back to within all...

Blog Comments Revisited: Why Major Bloggers Are Turning Comments Back On

Blog Comments Revisited: Why Major Bloggers Are Turning Comments Back On

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have comments enabled on your blog? Have you ever turned them off? To discover why big bloggers turned their comment systems back on, I interview Michael Hyatt and Brian Clark. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Michael Hyatt and Brian Clark. Michael is author of Platform and co-author of the new book, Living Forward: A Proven Plan to Stop Drifting and Get the Life You Want. He's also an avid blogger at MichaelHyatt.com and host of the This Is Your Life podcast. Brian is CEO of Rainmaker Digital, founder of Copyblogger, host of the Unemployable podcast, and evangelist for the Rainmaker Platform. Back in May 2014, I had Mark Schaefer and Tim McDonald (who was with Huffington Post) on the show to talk about the trend of big blogs shutting down their comments. This was spurred by a controversial post from Copyblogger entitled, "Why We’re Removing Comments on Copyblogger" from March 2014. In January 2015, Michael Hyatt published, "I’ve Pulled Comments from My Blog-Here’s Why." Michael and Brian will explore why the initial decision to remove comments was made and why those comments are now back. You'll also discover tips for how to grow your email list. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog Comments Revisited Why Brian shut down comments Brian starts by saying he is not the one who made the decision to shut down or bring back blog comments. He left that up to his editorial team. On Copyblogger, a lot of the article feedback shifted to social media, while the product development feedback had moved over to their customer base. As you mature as a company, you really start listening to your existing customers, as opposed to those "out in the wild," Brian explains. At the time, they had 150,000 customers and their strategy was to pay more attention to them. Part of the decision to remove comments (not discussed in the post by Sonia Simone, who ultimately made the decision with input from the editorial team) was a situation Brian calls the six-month class of current commenters. When you publish a marketing blog, other marketers use commenting as a traffic strategy. You'd have six months of the same people showing up, leaving comments: some stupid, some thoughtful. Then they'd move on and a new group of people would come into the comments. The practical reasons for removing comments were the shift to social and to eliminate spam. It's a big deal to moderate comments and have the editorial team spend a significant amount of time trying to figure out whether something is spam or legitimate. Copyblogger's experiment to remove comments lasted for over a year. Listen to the show to learn why Brian left comments on their podcast network, Rainmaker.fm. Why Michael shut down comments Michael says his reasons for shutting down comments on his blog were similar to Brian's. Additionally, Michael noticed the number of comments per post had been going down for some time, so he decided to do a little research. He discovered that in 2011, he averaged about 195 comments per blog post. Then in 2012, while his traffic went up, his comments dropped to an average of 179. Traffic went up again in 2013, and the average number of comments went down to 114. In 2014 blog traffic was up 74% over the previous year, but the average number of comments had dropped down to about 62 per post. Michael adds he read Greg McKeown's book, Essentialism, and thought he had to pare stuff back. The final straw for Michael, who was and is using Disqus as his commenting platform,

Instagram Contests: Tools and Tips for Marketers

Instagram Contests: Tools and Tips for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to increase engagement on Instagram? Have you thought about Instagram contests? Instagram contests are a great way to get people talking about your business and increase your followers. In this article you'll discover tools and tips to help marketers run a successful Instagram contest. #1: Follow Contest Rules When you're hosting or promoting any kind of contest, you have to follow certain rules. Here are the guidelines for running an Instagram contest: Listen to this article: Don't inaccurately tag content or users, and don't encourage participants to inaccurately tag content or other users. For example, don't ask users to tag themselves in photos if they aren't actually in the photos. Acknowledge that your contest isn't associated with or supported by Instagram. You don't need a neon sign stating this. Just be sure you're not inadvertently making it seem like Instagram is endorsing your promotion. Follow proper eligibility requirements. Some businesses feature products or offer prizes that have age or residency restrictions. If you're a winery, for example, clarify that users must be 21 and older to participate. While most of these guidelines fall under the umbrella of common sense, it's important to make note of them. It's easy to forget about audience restrictions or forget to state them. #2: Pick a Contest Type If you're planning to run a promotion or contest on Instagram, you'll have to decide what type of contest to run, how it will operate and how users can participate. Here are some different types of Instagram contests to consider. Comment on the Post Contests This is a popular type of Instagram contest where you ask users to comment on your post. For example, you might ask fans what their favorite flavor of ice cream is. Asking a question generates engagement because users have to engage beyond simply liking the post. Beauty by Earth asked fans to like and comment on their Instagram post for a chance to win a free exfoliating sponge set. To follow up with contest winners, the company tagged the winners in an Instagram post with a request to privately send their contact information. Like the Post Contests Another type of Instagram contest is to ask fans to like the post that's advertising the contest. While this tactic can generate some engagement, and fans are likely to participate because it's easy to do, many businesses would rather see a more deliberate interaction like commenting. Post Your Own Photo Contests For this type of contest, you ask fans to post their own Instagram images along with the contest hashtag. Make it clear to fans which hashtag they should use to participate. That makes it easy for you to find them and lets you know who's entering the contest. Starbucks' Red Cup Contest generates a ton of engagement and attention each year. Fans are asked to post photos of their red cup moments with the hashtag #redcupcontest. Combine Contests You can also combine several of these contest types. For example, you might ask users to like your post and comment, or follow your brand and upload their own posts with a certain hashtag. Keep in mind that you don't want to ask users only to follow you, because you can't track this action effectively or reliably. #3: Choose a Tool to Manage Your Contest You'll find a number of great tools to set up, run and manage your Instagram contests. Because Instagram has made it clear that they won't be associated with or help support any contests on the platform, all of the tools available for managing contests are from third-party companies. Here are three to consider: Gleam Gleam's contest platform makes it easy to host a contest on Instagram, and comes with a slew of helpful features. The company boasts an average of four actions per user in their competitions. The interface is easy to use and straightforward, featuring a dashboard with current and scheduled competitio...

Affiliate Marketing, CRM, SEO, PPC & BI | Income Access

Affiliate Marketing, CRM, SEO, PPC & BI | Income Access


Income Access

Income Access is an affiliate marketing, business intelligence and SEO service provider, with over 22,000 affiliates in the regulated gaming industry.

How Top Brands Improve Customer Retention on Facebook

How Top Brands Improve Customer Retention on Facebook

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you nurture relationships with customers on social media? Want to decrease customer acquisition costs? When you cultivate relationships with social media, you improve customer retention and ultimately boost your bottom line. In this article I'll share how top brands use Facebook to improve customer retention, and how you can apply their tactics to your social media marketing. Listen to this article: The Value of Customer Retention It's easier to keep a customer than to acquire a new one. Gartner, Inc. statistics show that 80% of a company's future revenue will come from just 20% of its existing customers. Furthermore, according to Bain & Company (working with Earl Sasser of Harvard Business School), a 5% increase in customer retention can increase a company's profitability by 75%. With social media, the door is wide open for companies to build relationships 24/7 with the customers who influence referral rates and keep their businesses alive and thriving. #1: Embrace Your Brand Advocates Give your customers a place to share their voice and their stories, and you'll develop a kinship that will lead to brand loyalty. The Walt Disney Company, which has been the go-to source for brand and relationship marketing inspiration for more than 50 years, has truly embraced social media. The Father's Day post below personifies that commitment to fans. Disney took a story that applies to a substantial segment of its audience, and put it into video form using recognizable characters. This Facebook post does three things: promotes Disney's core values, celebrates its brand advocates and invites participation. Through brand experience storytelling, among other campaigns, Disney celebrates the fan experience and endears itself to customers in the process. #2: Provide Exceptional Customer Service Fans who turn to Facebook for answers can quickly become loyal customers, especially if you respond to them immediately and with accurate information. JetBlue has perfected the art of customer service with their remarkable ability to respond to their more than one million Facebook fans within mere minutes of a comment or post to the page. JetBlue sees each social media conversation as an opportunity to cultivate an enduring relationship with specific individuals. They empowered their team members to do what it takes to improve the customer experience and repair potentially broken relationships. Although most businesses may not have the resources to monitor their social media accounts 24/7, they can provide the tools and encourage their team to do whatever is necessary to enhance their customers' experiences online, as well as in-store. #3: Show Additional Uses for Your Product If there are other uses for your products, let your customers know. If there aren't, see what you can come up with and share those uses with your fans. Oreo, which has been very active with social media marketing, has taken relationship building to an entirely new level by sharing recipes via video to promote their product. These 10- to 30-second videos directly resonate with existing customers, who also happen to be their target audience. Through these videos, Oreo gives customers (who ideally have a package of Oreos sitting in their pantry) additional uses for their product. The result is customers keep eating and purchasing their cookies. Brainstorm to determine how your business can provide additional value to the products or services your existing customers already have. When you consider how your product can be utilized creatively and share those uses, you encourage additional purchases, while you cultivate customer relationships. #4: Address Customer Concerns Publicly Business owners and marketers aim to develop strategies with precision and avoid mistakes. However, no brand is immune to mishandled incidents, mismanaged campaigns or a full-blown social media crisis.

How to Use Facebook Ads to Boost Your Best Content

How to Use Facebook Ads to Boost Your Best Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook ads? Have you considered creating Facebook ads from your top-performing organic posts? To explore how to identify and boost your best Facebook content, I interview Larry Kim. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Larry Kim, the founder and chief technology officer for WordStream. He's a frequent blogger, pay-per-click expert, and social advertising ninja. Larry explains how to improve the performance of your best content with Facebook advertising. You'll discover how to budget for Facebook ads. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Use Facebook Ads to Boost Your Best Content Larry's Backstory Larry's company, WordStream, does search engine and social media advertising, and Larry believes that it's important for businesses to do both types. For instance, B2B software companies build new features, functions, and solutions that nobody is searching for yet. However, with social ads, these businesses can target people who are likely to buy their software based on demographics, interests, or behaviors. Unlike an individual advertiser who has data about only one business, Larry is able to spot trends and patterns in online advertising because WordStream manages approximately $1 billion of ad spending across Facebook, Bing, and Google and runs thousands of campaigns for different clients. WordStream analyzes all of these campaigns to figure out data such as the typical cost per click and typical engagement rates. Listen to the show to discover the percentage of WordStream's clients using Facebook advertising. How Algorithms Work To understand the algorithms, Larry says it's important to think about the context in which your ad appears. (Our conversation focuses on Facebook, but Larry says the same is true for ads on Twitter and other social media platforms.) When you sponsor or promote a post, you're one of thousands or even millions of companies going after the same audience. Larry explains that the Facebook algorithm is designed to handle that volume in a way that keeps Facebook engaging for users so they come back. To determine which posts to show users and how much to charge the advertiser, Larry believes that the algorithm looks at many different factors, but the main one is engagement (clicks, likes, comments, or shares). A post with low engagement has an engagement rate of 1% to 2%. (Only 1 or 2 people out of 100 engage with the post.) A high-engagement post has a rate of 10% to 15%, and the average is around 2.5% to 3%. Larry emphasizes that Facebook doesn't want users' news feeds filled with ridiculous updates that no one cares about. A company trying to promote garbage content with low engagement rates will be dinged with very few ad impressions. The ad might not even be shown. If the ad does show, the click-through rate will be expensive (a few dollars per click versus a few cents). The reverse is also true. Facebook rewards companies that promote interesting content by showing their ads and charging only pennies per click. Listen to the show to hear Larry's thoughts about how engaging ad content needs to be compared to organic content. Unicorns Because algorithms reward engaging content, Larry believes that the winning advertising strategy is simple: promote your unicorns. These outlier posts do spectacularly well. They get three to five times more traffic than the average post and are among the top 1% to 3% of your most engaging content. For instance, a unicorn post might have a 20% engagement rate,

5 New Facebook Live Video Features for Marketers

5 New Facebook Live Video Features for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you interested in live video? Want to learn more about Facebook Live? Facebook Live has expanded its features, providing you with new Facebook marketing opportunities. In this article you'll discover what Facebook marketers need to know about the newest Facebook Live video features. Listen to this article: #1: Post Live Video to Your Profile, Pages, Groups, and Event Pages The first of the new features with Facebook Live video relates to where you can broadcast. For starters, everyone should be able to broadcast live video to a personal profile, which is visible based on the settings you choose (public, friends, etc.). Second, you should be able to broadcast live video to your Facebook pages, which will automatically have public visibility. You need to navigate to your Facebook page within the main Facebook app and tap on the Publish button. There, you'll see the option to post live video as your page if it's available to you. Third, you should be able to broadcast live video to most of the Facebook groups you belong to. It will be visible to anyone who can see posts within that group. The visibility of your live video in groups is based on the privacy settings of the group itself. Also refer to each group's rules as to whether it allows live video posts. The group mentioned in the following example does not. Finally, you should be able to broadcast live video to most event pages if you've been invited to the event and have responded as interested or going, which is visible to anyone who can see the event. This visibility is determined by whether the event was created as public or private. Considerations for Group and Event Admins For Facebook group and event admins who want to create live events for their group members and event subscribers, live video is going to be a great tactic to use. This will be especially beneficial for private mastermind and membership groups that want to go the extra mile with private Q&A sessions, special guests, and other value-add bonuses. As far as moderation goes, however, there are no controls to limit who can post live video to Facebook group and event pages. If members can post a status update to your group or event page, they can post live video. As CEO of Social Chefs and Facebook group admin Christian Karasiewicz noted, "The core principle is you need to build a manageable but engaged group. Kind of like Cheers, where everyone knows your name." If you haven't done this, moderating the live video content posted to your groups and events could be a tricky issue. It's much simpler to scan a text post or click through to a link to see if the content is self-promotional or questionable. Watching a lengthy live video, or one that's currently being streamed, is a completely different matter. This has forced some admins to implement a no live video rule, deleting live video posts as soon as they appear. While there are no current settings for admins to specifically stop people from posting live video, there are general settings that would allow all posts to require moderation before going live in a group. General moderation settings for events will usually look like this. #2: Go Live There aren't many new features for going live yet, but filters and the ability to draw on your screen are on the way, according to screenshots like the one below from Facebook's live video media assets. Until then, your experience will look like more like this. When you're ready to go live to any of the above-mentioned areas, start by entering your status update and tapping the live video icon. Then, enter a description for your live video. When you tap the Go Live button, you'll see a simple countdown timer to get you prepared to be live. You can tap on the icon at the top right to switch from your front-facing to rear-facing camera throughout your broadcast. Once you go live,

Facebook Growth: How to Create Huge Facebook Communities Without Advertising

Facebook Growth: How to Create Huge Facebook Communities Without Advertising

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering how to grow your Facebook following without resorting to paid advertising? Want to discover the secrets to getting more fans and driving them to your blog? To learn how one marketer has built several massive Facebook communities, all through organic growth, I interview Collin Cottrell. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Collin Cottrell, the founder of WhitetailOverload.com, a website dedicated to deer hunting. He's quickly built a massive following of more than 800,000 fans on his Facebook page, all without advertising. Collin also founded OutdoorOverload.com. In this episode Collin will explore how he built his Facebook pages rapidly, without using paid advertising. You’ll discover how to cross-promote your Facebook pages to grow your following and what types of posts get the most attention. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Growth Collin's background Collin, who grew up in the Midwest, started hunting with his dad at an early age. He would go to hunting camps with his father and uncles, and they would sit around the campfire, tell stories about hunting and talk about life. Collin found he had a passion for hunting, and wanted to figure out how to make a living from it. In high school Collin started building websites, doing graphic design and using social media (at the time it was MySpace and the beginning of Twitter) to build his way into the hunting outdoor industry. For example, he worked on Bowhunting.net (which was on AOL in 1994 and then launched fully in 1996). Collin also attended hunting and outdoor trade shows, such as the Archery Trade Show, where he would interview the different dealers and put the videos on their websites. The hunting industry needed a new way to market to their growing customer base with social media, Collin says, and that’s how he found his niche. At the same time Collin was going to trade shows, he was building his own marketing company on the side. Developing relationships with major players in the hunting industry was a huge boost to his business. Listen to the show to discover the similarity between how Collin and I got started, even though we're in very different niches. Collin's start on Facebook Around 2007, Collin launched a graphics/web design/marketing agency with a focus on the hunting and outdoor industry. Facebook pages were just being introduced, so Collin decided to create hunting-related pages to build communities. In addition to the bowhunting page, he started pages for shed hunting, turkey hunting and more. Facebook was different at the time, Collin recalls. If you put out good content, and you had a good following, you could reach a lot of people. He put interesting, informative, value-driven content on the page, such as questions, pictures and videos. A short time later, Collin decided to create a whitetail deer hunting page, since it’s the top tier in the hunting industry in America. He did crossovers from the other pages to get fans to the new one. This Facebook page grew organically very quickly through contests, content and posting several times a day. A year and a half ago, when they were at 500,000 fans, they were able to reach 25 to 50 million people a month. Whitetail Overload launched August 1, 2014. Since Collin is a web and graphic designer, he was able to build landing pages and apps for his giveaways right in Facebook, which drove people to his pages, as well as other large hunting-related niche pages. Giveaways, Collin shares,

How to Create a Content Management Process With Trello

How to Create a Content Management Process With Trello

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you develop multiple pieces of content at one time? Looking for a better way to organize and manage your content? Whether you’re working solo or with a team that manages content for clients, it's essential to have a system in place to ensure that everything you publish is managed properly from ideation through promotion. In this article, you'll discover how to manage your content with Trello. Listen to this article: #1: Create a Trello Account To get started, you need to create a free Trello account. Fortunately, the free account offers all of the features you’ll need for content management. #2: Understand How to Structure Your Trello Once you log in, you can create the following as a free account holder. You can create an unlimited number of teams to keep specific groups of projects organized. For example, in terms of content management, you may want the following: If you have a large company, create multiple teams so that each team has its own set of boards to manage its own blogs, such as the sales team blog, the marketing team blog, the development team blog, the support team blog, etc. If you have an agency, create multiple teams so that one team represents your agency’s blog, and the rest of the teams represent your clients’ blogs. If it’s just you as a small business owner, create one team for your own personal blog and one team for your business blog. You can add an unlimited number of members to your account under the teams you’ve created. You can also create an unlimited number of boards. Boards can be visible to specific members, specific teams, or publicly to anyone with a link. Members with access to a board can subscribe to that board and get notified about any changes to the board. Within each board, you can have an unlimited number of lists. Members with access to the board can subscribe to specific lists to get notified when anything in the list has been updated. Within each list, you can have an unlimited number of cards and assign them to members. Cards can have due dates, multiple labels, and a main description. They can also contain a discussion thread in which you can mention specific members, include multiple attachments and checklists with task items that can be dated, and be linked to specific members. As you can see, Trello has a lot of options for organizing a content management system, from simple to highly complex. The last two screenshots come from example content management boards for Trello’s own Editorial Calendar. You can also peruse public examples of ReadWrite’s Editorial Calendar, The Changelog Weekly Newsletter, WP Curve’s Guest Writer Management, and Buffer’s Blog Post Ideas. Now, here are some ways to use Trello for your own content management. #3: Create a Simple Idea and Process Board If it’s just you or a team of people who need to manage ideas, use Trello to create an idea management board. To do this, click on the + icon next to your profile photo to add a new board. Then name your board and (optionally) link it to a team. Inside your board, you can add as many lists as you want based on how you plan to organize your content. For example, if you have content ideas for blog posts, ebooks, videos, and podcasts, create a list for each type of content. Then have one list for In Progress, one list for In Review, and one list for Published. You can use your lists to represent where content is in the process and use color labels. For example, use green for blog posts, yellow for ebooks, orange for videos, and red for podcasts. Or you can use your lists as topic categories and your cards as specific ideas. Then have one list for In Progress, one list for In Review, and one list for Published. The point is there are no rules. It’s just a matter of what setup is easiest for you and your team to understand and manage. Remember that as your cards and lists grow,

Is Blogging Dead? Building Your Content Home on Rented Land

Is Blogging Dead? Building Your Content Home on Rented Land

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering what the future is for blogs? Is blogging dead? To discover what the future holds for blogging, I interview Mitch Joel and Mark Schaefer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Mitch Joel and Mark Schaefer. Mitch is the president of Mirum, author of CTRL ALT Delete, host of the Six Pixels of Separation podcast and a blogger at TwistImage.com. Mark Schaefer is a marketing consultant, author of The Content Code, co-host of The Marketing Companion podcast and a blogger at businessesGROW.com. Mitch and Mark discuss the premise that blogging as we know it is dead. You'll explore the future of publishing your content on social networks and beyond. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Future of Blogging Blogging's evolution Mitch recalls that when blogging first came to be, there wasn't much else. Technology didn't empower us to do things like shoot and post videos immediately, stream online or do podcasts. Back then, even sharing images was pretty difficult. He shares that for him, blogging started to evolve when social media platforms for smaller forms of text-based publishing turned up, like Twitter. Then images and video became easier to publish and share. Mitch says things became very different with Twitter and Facebook status updates. The updates gave people who were writing long-form articles the ability to publish stream of consciousness–style instead. He talks about how this change created a space for platforms like Huffington Post to progress and become more popular with people who wanted to write. While Mitch still looks at his blog as a place for a writer to write, he says it's no longer the primary place for his content. He talks about putting content in places such as Medium, LinkedIn Publisher, Facebook Notes and Harvard Business Review where it might find different audiences. He explains why he'd rather publish directly on these other sites and use them as his distribution platform. Mark thinks blogging will be dead when reading is dead and that there will always be a place for long-form content. He explains why things like podcasts and streaming video are taking some readership away and how smartphones play into that. Mark says that Mitch is onto something in saying what's changing most drastically is not what we're doing, but where. He points out that there are cataclysmic changes in how content is published and consumed and offers the example of Facebook Notes, which encourages people to blog on Facebook. Mark talks about the difference in publishing on Facebook, LinkedIn or other platforms and says the magnet for inbound leads isn't on your website anymore. When discussing the question of what is and isn't a blog, Mitch shares why he's moving away from using that terminology and using words such as article, writer or journalist instead. It's semantics, Mark says, and shares an insight from Tom Webster, his partner on the Marketing Companion podcast. Tom works for Edison Research where they study podcasting a lot. One of the things they found was that people don't know what the word podcast means. Listen to the show to discover what Mark says will happen with storytelling and content marketing in a few years. Building on "rented" land Mitch says it used to be that publishing on social networks was like building your house on rented land, and explains why he doesn't believe it's that way anymore. He shares that it's no longer a sense of rented versus owned; it's a combination that creates a holistic platform.

Jessica Hawthorne-Castro Named to DMA ECHO Board of Governors

by Philip Walimaa @ Hawthorne | Brand Response TV + Digital + Media + Mobile + Social

Jessica Hawthorne-Castro, CEO/owner of Hawthorne, announced to

day that she has joined the DMA ECHO Board ofGovernors, the elite group behind one of the most coveted prizes in marketing. The vote was unanimous and Hawthorne-Castro’s first meeting with the board will be at the DMA’s annual ECHO Awards Gala, held Sunday, October 8th in New Orleans.

Hawthorne-Castro is a noted leader in the marketing and advertising industry. As CEO/owner of Hawthorne,

The post Jessica Hawthorne-Castro Named to DMA ECHO Board of Governors appeared first on Hawthorne | Brand Response TV + Digital + Media + Mobile + Social.

Search to Social Ads: How to Use Google With Facebook to Build Niche Audiences

Search to Social Ads: How to Use Google With Facebook to Build Niche Audiences

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business serve a specialized customer base? Wondering how to reach specific niche audiences with Facebook ads? To explore a strategy for retargeting specialized audiences using Google ads in combination with Facebook ads, I interview Shane Sams. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Shane Sams, the co-host of the Flipped Lifestyle podcast, a show focused on helping families make money online. He describes himself as a normal guy from Kentucky who loves helping others. He's also the founder of the Flip Your Life Community. Shane explains how to use website traffic generated by Google ads to retarget Facebook users. You'll discover how highly focused keywords help manage your marketing costs. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Search to Social Ads Shane's Story Shane and his wife Jocelyn met at the University of Kentucky. After graduation, Jocelyn initially worked a corporate job and Shane coached football. They then decided to become schoolteachers, which they did for about 10 years. Shane taught social studies and continued to coach, while Jocelyn was an elementary school librarian. After some bad experiences at work, Shane realized he had traded control of his life for job security. He started looking for other things to do because he knew there had to be a better way. This was in 2012. One day, as Shane and his wife were driving around town, Shane said, "I wonder if I can get 100 people to send me $50." She asked what he was talking about and Shane said that out of the 7 billion people on the planet, surely 100 would give him $50. If they all did that in a month, it would be $5,000, and for 12 months in a row, it would be $60,000. If they could do that every month, they could quit teaching. Shane didn't know how he was going to make this money but he was determined to figure it out. He began seeking information about business. One day while mowing the grass, Shane decided to look up business podcasts. An image of a guy looking at the podcast art with his eyeballs caught Shane's attention. It was Smart Passive Income with Pat Flynn. In the podcast, Pat talked about how he sold a study guide and would email it to people. Shane decided he and Jocelyn could sell PDFs of information. After trying different things online, they were finally able to figure it out. They sold lesson plans to teachers and football playbooks to coaches. A year later, Shane and Jocelyn replaced their income. As soon as they quit their jobs (which they did on September 27, 2013), people started asking questions. For example, Lindsay, a friend of Jocelyn's, quit her job to be a stay-at-home mom and wanted advice on making money online. They helped Lindsay create digital products and she made $1,000 on the Internet in a month. This money enabled Lindsay to be at home with her daughter every day. After Shane and Jocelyn realized their experience and knowledge could change the lives of others, they started Flipped Lifestyle. It has helped a lot of people. People ask why it's called Flipped Lifestyle. Shane explains that everybody flipped out after Jocelyn and he left their jobs, where they had tenure and insurance. Shane recalls how his mom cornered him and said, "Shane Sams, you have babies. You have lost your mind. You have flipped out. And I do not approve of this decision." Hence, Flipped Lifestyle. Listen to the show to hear Shane recall how much sharing online business skills meant to his friends. Why Combine Google Ads With Facebook? Early on, Shane and Jocelyn discovered a lot of the marketing advice available online didn't work for ...

Pinterest: How to Drive More Traffic to Your Site With Pinterest

Pinterest: How to Drive More Traffic to Your Site With Pinterest

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Pinterest for business? Are you wondering how Pinterest can help your business drive more traffic to your website or blog? To learn about Pinterest marketing, I interview Melanie Duncan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Melanie Duncan, owner of Luxury Monograms and CustomGreekThreads. She also does online training for business owners and spends a lot of time focusing on Pinterest marketing. Melanie shares how Pinterest is a different social media platform and why marketers should use it. You'll learn how to create clickable images and calls to action that will lead to increased visibility and sales. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest Marketing How has Pinterest helped your business? Melanie describes how she stumbled across Pinterest marketing in January of this year, when she started to receive a high volume of traffic and orders to her site. It wasn't until she logged into Google Analytics that she realized Pinterest's potential in terms of bringing new customers and traffic to her site. You'll discover how Melanie formed a Pinterest strategy and how it helped her business get more exposure and sales. Melanie explains how she first saw Pinterest traffic come from Luxury Monograms. People were pinning things from her site, even before she had a Pin It button. You'll learn how people can pin from your blog or website. Melanie explains that it wasn't just the high-quality product photography that was being repinned, but also the basic product photos. You'll discover why it's not all about the quality of the photos and why calls to action are so important. Listen to the show to find out what calls to action work best and how they can increase engagement by 80%. Some of the biggest mistakes marketers make on Pinterest Melanie explains how Pinterest is a very different type of social media platform and that many marketers or small business owners don't really understand how to use it for their business. A lot of us start with a personal Pinterest profile. Research shows that 80% of pins on Pinterest are repins. People log onto Pinterest, they look at their newsfeed and repin. They don't really go out across the Internet and try to find new forms of information to put on the platform. One of the biggest mistakes marketers make is that they don't create enough original content. You'll hear what you need to do to make a real difference and get the results you want. Listen to the show to find out where the opportunity is for marketers. How to determine if Pinterest is worth focusing on Melanie shares how a lot of service business owners believe that they can't be on Pinterest, as it's only for physical products. You'll learn why this isn't true. Pinterest has a free analytics tool that is available to all business pages now. You'll discover 3 steps you need to take to have access. Once you have access, Pinterest hooks up the analytics to your sites. You can now track your pin activity, such as: How many people are pinning from your website Whether your pins are being repinned and how often How much traffic is being sent to your site What your impressions are like It's a very easy tool to help track how quickly people respond and engage with your content. You'll discover the only way to get traffic from Pinterest to your blog or website and why it doesn't have to be something pretty.

6 Location-based Social Media Monitoring Tools

6 Location-based Social Media Monitoring Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach local customers on social media? Are you monitoring the online conversations near your business? Geo-specific social media monitoring tools help businesses engage with customers who are close to their brick-and-mortar stores. In this article I'll share six location-based monitoring tools to use for local social media marketing. Why Use Location-Based Monitoring Tools? Geo-specific social media monitoring tools are different from the conventional keyword-based monitoring tools in many respects. For one thing, these tools offer a clear picture of what's happening at a particular location, which helps you reach out to local audiences. Plus, they allow you to connect better with your community by engaging with local social media influencers and leveraging local hashtags. Listen to this article: If you do social media for a company with multiple locations, here are some excellent tools to explore. #1: Search Real-time Feeds With Geofeedia Geofeedia allows you to search real-time social feeds by location to discover geolocation social media posts from anywhere worldwide. You also have the ability to monitor multiple locations to archive, curate and share your content. Simply draw a custom perimeter or enter an address on Geofeedia's digital map. It will then display all social content posted by users in that particular area. While the tool searches by location first, you also have the ability to filter your search by keywords, date, time, users and more, across various social media channels including Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, Flickr and YouTube. Discover what's trending in an area. Then leverage those trends by including the right keywords and hashtags into your social conversations. Geofeedia offers custom social media monitoring solutions for different industries. The pricing depends on the features you require, as well as the number of locations you want to monitor. #2: Engage and Target Customers With WeLink If you're looking for a cutting-edge social monitoring tool for geo-specificity, WeLink is an excellent option. It lets you engage your potential customers with targeted ads and instant offers on their preferred social media channels. This easy-to-use tool combines keyword-based monitoring with geo-specific listening to offer enterprise-grade location-based social monitoring solutions. The result is a hybrid solution, which uses cellular data mining and WiFi to help you discover and collect all social chatter within your selected area. Gather feeds from all popular social channels using this tool. Use WeLink across various verticals including event management, retail, malls, airlines, hospitality, sports teams and stadiums, schools, security and law enforcement, etc. WeLink offers custom pricing, depending on the features you require. #3: Listen to Trends With Sysomos Sysomos enables you to listen to what's trending locally and understand what your customers are talking about. Use this location-based tool to discover and dig into social content posted by local influencers. Sysomos will gather digital content from popular social media platforms like Facebook, Twitter, Google+ and LinkedIn, as well as posts on blogs and forums. It then collects and displays insightful actionable data in a single platform. Filter digital conversations by both keywords and demographic information. This makes Sysomos particularly beneficial if you're targeting customers within a specific age group or gender, for instance. Discover which topics, trends and brands particularly interest your target audience, and then create marketing campaigns based around these areas. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=N2DpsHXh5rY Sysomos differs from other location-based social media tools in many ways. For one thing, it collects both real-time and previously posted content on any topic across social networks. Plus, you have the ability to capture the conversations most r...

Selling With Social Media: A New Direction for Businesses

Selling With Social Media: A New Direction for Businesses

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media to grow your business? Are you wondering how social media can help you sell more products and services? To learn about why you need to rethink the sales process in this social age, I interview Tom Martin for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Tom Martin, author of The Invisible Sale: How to Build a Digitally Powered Marketing and Sales System to Better Prospect, Qualify and Close Leads. His agency is Converse Digital. Tom shares the concept of painless prospecting and propinquity. You'll learn how to succeed in the changing social media sales landscape, and how your business can embrace these new strategies. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Selling With Social Media How the online world has changed the way businesses sell Tom believes it's more about how buyers buy than the way businesses sell. With the Internet, people can hide behind the anonymity of Google search. You can do all your pre-purchase research without having to talk to a salesperson. You only have to talk to a person once you've made a short list of companies you are interested in and want to close the deal. Today's buyer prefers this process, as it's easier and more efficient. With this in mind, companies have to adjust. In the early days, the power was with the salesperson, but with the knowledge available online today, the power is in the hands of the consumer. Tom says as a business, you have to stop thinking about how you sell because you don't really sell anymore. Instead you help buyers make a buying decision. When they make their decision, hopefully it will be in your favor. Although it won't always be the case. You'll discover how your system needs to be set up properly and the approach you need to consider. If you have a really good product or service, more often than not, you will win the conversion. Most people are turned off by people selling to them. The best way is to show them that you're willing to help and that you always have their best interests at heart. Listen to the show to find out more about how the approach to sales has changed. An example of a business that has embraced new ways to sell Tom talks about a camera store called Adorama based in New York that he used as a case study in his book, The Invisible Sale. Adorama only has one store, but does business in all 50 US states and 5 countries. Adorama has two sides to their business, B2C and B2B. Regardless of which side you look at, they approach it the same way. Their philosophy is to sell by sharing original educational content. Even though it's a photography store, they sell more than just cameras. They've built a Learning Center that includes Adorama TV, which is one of their huge content pieces. The Learning Center is a treasure trove of educational content. Although their approach is to educate, when you watch one of their videos, you'll notice easy-to-follow links to products below the video. You'll find out how they used YouTube to allow people to reach that product. In 2010, they saw a general growth curve, mainly due to the educational content they provide. The moral of the lesson is that if you can make your buyer smarter and better because they are doing business with you, then Tom believes you will succeed in selling more to that buyer. Listen to the show to hear why Tom relates it to fly-fishing and how it's the same with modern content marketing.

Facebook Messenger Marketing: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Messenger Marketing: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to communicate with your customers via Facebook Messenger? Wondering how Facebook Messenger bots and Messenger ads can help? To explore this topic, I interview Molly Pittman. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Molly Pittman, the vice president of marketing at DigitalMarketer. She specializes in customer acquisition and teaches regularly for DigitalMarketer Engage, which is the company's membership community. You'll discover how businesses can benefit from integrating Facebook Messenger features into their marketing. Molly shares use cases for Facebook Messenger marketing. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Messenger Marketing Why Consider Messenger Ads? As soon as Facebook Messenger ads became available in November 2016, Molly started experimenting with them. Molly says she's excited about Facebook Messenger ads because they're not just a new interface element or feature. Facebook Messenger ads are a whole new channel. Molly believes the value of Facebook Messenger ads lies in the app's popularity and convenience. More than one billion people communicate via Facebook Messenger. Because that's where people are having conversations with friends, family, colleagues, or whomever, Molly believes businesses should be connecting with their customers via Facebook Messenger, too. The app's popularity makes Facebook Messenger a good place to buy ads, connect with prospects, and talk to customers. Molly says that DigitalMarketer's initial tests have shown good results. The open rate and consumption are really high. Molly has seen the benefit from the consumer's standpoint, too. A few months ago, as Molly was driving in Austin, she saw a new apartment complex being built. Molly was interested, so she went to the company's Facebook page and contacted them through their Message Us button. They responded almost instantaneously. Every step of her communication with the company was done through Facebook Messenger. I ask Molly if she believes Facebook Messenger will replace email. Molly responds that email will likely always be a powerful tool for marketers, certainly for the next five years. However, she says Facebook Messenger isn't necessarily a replacement but is the mode of communication most similar to email. In some aspects, Messenger is better than email, she continues, because people tend to respond instantaneously on Messenger, whereas people don't feel compelled to respond to emails right away. Listen to the show to hear Molly and I discuss our predictions for the future of Facebook Messenger. The Types of Messenger Ads Molly explains the two types of Facebook Messenger ads. The first one is called a destination ad because when you set it up, you choose Facebook Messenger as the destination (as opposed to your website). Like a regular ad, a destination ad appears in the news feed and can display a video, carousel, or image. When someone clicks the ad, a message to your Facebook page opens in Facebook Messenger and you can begin a conversation. For example, the first test Molly ran was a simple destination ad that said, "Do you have questions about how DigitalMarketer can help grow your business? We'd love to chat." When someone clicked the ad, a Facebook Messenger window opened where the person could type his or her message to DigitalMarketer. Molly says you can target anyone with destination ads, such as your custom audiences and interests. The opportunities are endless. The other type is a sponsored message, which is more like an email.

Marketing Day: Live from Oculus Connect, Twitter’s ‘Happening Now’ and the new CMO role

by Michelle Robbins @ Marketing Day – Marketing Land

Here's our recap of what happened in online marketing today, as reported on Marketing Land and other places across the web.

Freak Success: A Dialog With Chris Brogan

Freak Success: A Dialog With Chris Brogan

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you feel like you don't fit in? Are you wondering how you can succeed in business by being different? To learn about how your unique qualities can help you achieve success in the business world, I interview Chris Brogan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Chris Brogan, publisher and CEO of Owner Magazine, co-author of The Impact Equation and host of The Owner's Mind podcast. His latest book is called The Freaks Shall Inherit the Earth. Chris shares why some freaks are successful in business and how you can follow their lead. You'll discover how to face your fears, run with your ideas and put them into practice. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Freak Success The motivation behind the book and who the freaks are Chris says that it was his children who were the motivation behind his new book, The Freaks Shall Inherit the Earth. He explains the reasons why he believes that neither of them is suitable for real employment, and therefore wrote the book for them. During the process, he realized that it doesn't only include his story of how he was a freak who never fit in, but there are a lot of people out there exactly like him. Chris believes that there is an economic shift that's close to happening, and that cottage industries are coming back in a world of Dollar Shave Club. A lot of people aren't necessarily saying "I hope IBM hires me," they want to forge their own path. An example is Jake Thompson who has an apparel brand called Compete Everyday, which is a similar premise to Life Is Good. You'll hear Chris' definition of the word freak, and why they choose their own adventure. Listen to the show to hear Chris' story about the original Choose Your Own Adventure books. Why some freaks are successful in business and others are not Chris explains why Richard Branson is successful for being a freak. One of his very first businesses was a company that sold records in the UK. When he told people he would distribute records overseas, he discovered that he could get them for a lot less money. So he went on to resell them in the UK and undercut all of the other retailers. He has since gone on to own 400 successful companies, lives on an island of his own creation and has been knighted. You'll discover why Richard Branson is Chris' biggest business idol. A true freak is someone who stays true to what they are passionate about, even if they don't fit within the box. Then you have people who are weird for weird's sake. This is the type of person who looks for attention, but it's not really who they are. Chris gives an example of violinist Lindsey Stirling, who is doing extremely well. She has 2.3 million likes on Facebook and has a huge group that follows and connects with her. Although what she does has no part in modern pop culture, she has stuck with her love of the violin and brought her own energy to it. It's a way for her to put her own story out there. The freaks who are successful actually stay pretty close to who they are. They have something to offer and help others at the same time. One way to find out if you're a freak is to consider the quote by Ralph Waldo Emerson, "Do not go where the road may lead, but go where there is no road and leave a trail." You'll find that people react differently to it. Some people find it too scary to think about. Listen to the show to find out why most people want instructions and feel fear if they hav...

How to Create Facebook Image Posts That Engage

How to Create Facebook Image Posts That Engage

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use images in your Facebook marketing? Are your image posts performing as well as you’d like? While targeting, relevancy and timing play significant roles in the success of Facebook campaigns, the right image is key to improving engagement. In this article, you’ll discover how to improve the performance of your Facebook image posts. Listen to this article: #1: Start With Quality Images People respond to outstanding images. These are pictures that inspire likes, comments and shares, and encourage people to engage. The importance of images (as well as video) has skyrocketed in recent years, so images that were good enough in the past may not be anymore. While most brands think they share captivating images, unfortunately most are missing the mark. You not only need to use pictures that are high-quality and unique, you need to make sure those pictures relate to your brand and stimulate engagement. For example, even though TripAdvisor has access to some of the most captivating imagery in the world, some of their images work better than others. After reviewing their 20 most recent posts on Facebook, I discovered that TripAdvisor receives an average 251 likes and 30 shares per post. Many of those posts display user-generated content like this beautiful landscape above with the text, "Caption this …" An image like this used to be "enough" for fans to get excited about and engage with. (And 376 likes would make many fan pages stand up and cheer.) However, the text is very basic and it's just one view of a setting. Alternatively, but still in line with their brand, TripAdvisor recently posted 12 beautiful images of natural pools in an album with a clever title ("Natural Swimming Pools You Wish Were in Your Backyard") and a caption ("We like our pools au naturel."), designed for a reaction. The result? Nearly 2,700 likes and almost 300 shares. In this case quantity and quality paid off. There's no question about it. It's harder to compose Facebook posts like this. However, if you want to increase engagement on your images in a big way, it may be worth the time to put in the extra work. #2: Test for Performance To find what will inspire your audience to engage, you need an image that makes them stop in their tracks, followed by irresistible content. Trial and error with split testing is a surefire way to determine what your fans do and do not respond to. It just takes time. Study your image performance to see which ones fall flat, and which images trigger a response, whether it's in the form of a like, share, click, sign-up, purchase, etc. When you find what works, replicate and scale it. You should also review images that don't lead to a response, so you can try to understand why they weren't successful. Keep in mind that the image itself is not the only thing that makes a post successful. Pay attention to the title, body content, call to action and any additional text (such as percentage off in an ad or expiration date for a deal) as well. After testing images to see what resonates with your audience, gather images that are in alignment with your brand. Then, write out your messaging in the form of titles, text and calls to action. Don't go with just the first few things that come to mind. Get creative and take the time to do this right. Now, mix and match to create a massive library of image and text combinations. Some of the combinations should be completely different and others just slightly different. The goal is to make sure that every post people see for your brand is different than the one before. #3: Pay for Visibility Facebook has changed quite a bit in recent years. Organic reach is not what it used to be. So unless you already have thousands of highly engaged fans, the odds of an organic photo post performing well are slim. The answer? Facebook advertising. If you're going to put in the time to develop amazing photo posts,

Make the Most of Your Summer with Carla Harris’s 10-Week Plan

by c0c0nuT @ SEO Career

During in-person training, the SEO Career Class of 2017 learned how to make the most of their summers and all that SEO has to offer. Carla Harris, SEO Career Class of ’82, laid out her expert tips in a 10-week plan, starting with week one and following all the way through to getting the offer. [...]

How to Launch Your Product Using Facebook

How to Launch Your Product Using Facebook

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you launching a new product or service? Want to create buzz and get the word out to the right people? Facebook is a great way to promote the launch of a product or service and generate excitement. To be successful, you need to plan your content, write your posts and make good use of the tools Facebook has to offer. In this article you'll discover how to launch a product or service using Facebook. #1: Before Pre-launch: Start Planning Early You'll want to map out your launch strategy at least two months ahead, and most likely even earlier than that. Plan what types of launch material you'll have available to share on social media to get the buzz going. You may also need to start designing some of these materials. Listen to this article: If you have an online product, you can use some great freebies to help get people onto your list. Some examples of great freebies or launch materials include: Images and infographics: Think about designing several versions of your images so they're size-optimized for each social site. Also, if you'll be using them in a Facebook ad, make sure the images are 1200 x 628 pixels and comply with the 20% text rule. Free ebooks, reports or white papers: These freebies could be part of your final product or something valuable that will promote the final product. Free webinar or other educational content: If you're launching an online product, you may want to host a webinar, telesummit or some other type of live event. Plan when that event will occur and when you'll start promoting it. Sale or discount period: If you're offering an introductory price, figure out how long that will last and how many posts you might have around that promotion. Facebook contests: If you're having a contest to promote the launch or new product, plan the timing and determine what type of contest will work best for you. When launching a course, for example, you might plan all of the content and decide when you'll communicate about it to people on your email list and in your social media posts. If affiliates or promotion partners will be helping you get the word out about your product or service, start assembling that team and putting together resources for the team to use. Be sure to make it easy for affiliates to build buzz on Facebook and other social media channels. Write a variety of Facebook posts and tweets so they can either cut and paste them or have a great starting place to add their own wording. Social Media Examiner provided a variety of images to their affiliates to help promote Social Media Marketing World. Some of the images were appropriate for Facebook ads, while others were useful for tweets or blog posts. They also provided a variety of tweets and Facebook updates that were ready to use, and people just had to add their affiliate link. #2: Pre-launch: Build Buzz To start building buzz and generating excitement around your product or service, post teasers about it. If appropriate, use both your Facebook page and profile to let your Facebook fans and personal friends know that something is coming. Using video on Facebook to promote your launch will go further in the news feed. Make sure you're creating a variety of content. You can see that this video post reached nearly 39,000 people and had over 8,000 views. You can also give people a sneak peek into your process. Bathers Beach House in Australia started posting about their restaurant months before it opened. They shared the building process, gained the interest of potential diners and grew to over 4,000 fans before they even opened their doors. This led to a successful opening of their restaurant, and they continue to have high engagement and interaction. If you have affiliates or promotional partners, consider co-creating material to launch the product, such as a webinar or live Q&A session. Gena Shingle Jaffe launched a legal course for entrepreneurs,

Should You Work for the Family Business to Gain Experience?

by Philip Walimaa @ Hawthorne | Brand Response TV + Digital + Media + Mobile + Social

For college students looking for experience, working for the family business might seem like a no brainer. But, is it a good idea? Can family members be objective enough to provide honest feedback? And will recruiters or hiring managers view working for your family as “real” experience?

Less than half of college seniors feel very prepared for a career, and if you’re considering this type of work arrangement to bolster your resume,

The post Should You Work for the Family Business to Gain Experience? appeared first on Hawthorne | Brand Response TV + Digital + Media + Mobile + Social.

How to Easily Analyze the Social Activities of Your Competitors

How to Easily Analyze the Social Activities of Your Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to freshen up your social media marketing? Have you thought about looking at other accounts for inspiration? Checking out what other companies are doing on social media can help you brainstorm your own content tactics. In this article you'll discover how to analyze your competitors' social accounts to inspire new marketing ideas. Listen to this article: Why Look at the Competition? Researching your competitors on social media not only provides an overview of your industry, but it also gives you insight into the current habits of the audiences you're targeting. By answering a few key questions, you'll see what kinds of posts are effective for the people you want to reach. #1: Analyze Facebook Pages If you want to gain insight into a company's Facebook page, here are some questions to consider: How many followers do they have? What are they posting about? Are their posts mostly internal (company-based) news, blog posts and articles; mostly external news, blog posts and articles; or a mix of both? What's their brand voice? How often do they post? How many likes/comments/shares do they get per post? Do they run any polls, contests or fun games with their brand? The Facebook page for Powell’s Books, a famous independent bookstore, is worth checking out as inspiration if you're a local business hoping to make a national footprint. One of the first things you'll notice is that Powell's takes the time to create their own graphics, which often include quotes from authors. It's a great twist on a sharable meme for a bookstore. They post photos of customers at individual stores and events, so you can assume their staff participates in social sharing (a great idea for local businesses). They also share interactive posts and comment on national conversation topics to keep the feed relevant to non-local fans. Interestingly, one of the biggest buzz-generators for Powell's Facebook page is when they share posts on books and publishing from other media, such as The New Yorker. Remember that sometimes social media successes can come from other sources. Key takeaway: A brick-and-mortar brand can serve both local and national audiences with the right mix of photos and interactive content. #2: Look at Twitter Accounts If you're analyzing a company's Twitter account, here are some questions to answer to gain insight into their activities: How many followers do they have? How many accounts are they following? A good rule of thumb: An account with 50,000 followers that's following 500 users probably has more influence than an account with 50,000 followers that's following 49,000 users, unless they bought followers. What do they tweet about? Are they mostly mirroring their Facebook content, or is their content unique to the channel? Are their posts mostly internal, external or a mix of both? How many favorites/replies/retweets do they average per post? Does one engagement stand out over the others? Have they created lists? What hashtags do they use? Do they run any Twitter chats? Do they use Twitter cards for lead generation, email signups, etc.? If you look at the Twitter account for Moz, you'll notice that they use a photo in almost every Twitter post. Their photos all follow the brand's style and color scheme, and they've created a template for their Twitter images to accompany guest posts. Brand-wise, it's interesting that the "owner" of the Moz account is a robot named Roger. Choosing an on-brand character to run social accounts is a way the Moz brand stands out as playful in the generally more serious SEO industry. Key takeaway: Templates and a social media character can help a large brand stay consistent in social, even if multiple people are behind the account. #3: Examine Instagram Accounts Answer these questions to evaluate a company's Instagram account: How many followers do they have?

How to Build a Better Target Audience for Your Facebook Ads

How to Build a Better Target Audience for Your Facebook Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach the right people with your Facebook Ads? Want to learn more about targeted audiences? Facebook's demographic and segmentation tools let you serve your Facebook ads to people who match your ideal customer persona. In this article you'll discover how to build a target audience for your Facebook ads. Listen to this article: #1: Explore Facebook Ad Targeting Options There are four primary sets of attributes to consider when targeting your audience with Facebook ads. Understanding what each one represents will give you the building blocks to construct your target audience. Locations Location targeting allows you to focus on an audience in a specific geographic area like a country, city, state or zip code. With advanced options, you can choose people who actually reside in the area or are just physically located in the area. This type of targeting is critical if you're focusing on an area around a retail store and want to offer a coupon to nearby shoppers. Demographics Demographic filters give you the option to target people based on criteria like education, profession, relationship status, life events and other cultural and social affiliations. Interests Interests data is based on Facebook's gathering of specific information when you use the platform. For instance, if you like a page about pop music, you won't be flagged as having an interest in rock and roll. Use Interests to filter people based on their interactions with pages, events and apps inside of Facebook. Behaviors Base behavior targeting on online and offline habits like mobile device use, travel patterns and digital activities like online gaming. For instance, you could segment your audience by those who are planning to travel or those who have just returned from travel. With proper use of these segmentation methods, you can narrow your audience and match your message or offer to a specific audience niche. Now you might be thinking, "That's great if I know the details about my audience demographics, but I don't." Don't worry; Facebook gives you the tools you need to gain valuable insight into your customers and your competition. #2: Gather Audience Details With Insights With Facebook's Audience Insights, you can get detailed information about your target audience. If you have a large enough customer base, you can import your customers' email addresses or phone numbers into Facebook as a custom audience. Once the process is complete, you then use Audience Insights to see the information about your customers' age and gender, location, lifestyle types, education, marital status, job titles, top interests and more. With this tool, you can also run insight reports on competitors, top brands or interests. The trick is to make sure you have a similar topic or brand to offer. For instance, say you own an appliance store and want to sell more Whirlpool appliances. By choosing that brand in Audience Insights, you can see that there are 400K+ active monthly Facebook members interested in Whirlpool. Of that group, 59% are married, over 50% have households of three or more and 32% are in the healthcare industry. Do you think a sponsored story about the health benefits of Whirlpool appliances for families with kids, citing healthcare professionals, would resonate with that audience? Yes, it would. #3: Build Your Audience Now that you understand the basic concepts of audience targeting and the tools, it's time to take a look at some real-world examples. These examples show how you can target customers using techniques for a variety of industries. Remember that these are just examples. The goal is to create your own interpretations to fit your business. Realtor Suppose you're a realtor and you want to target homebuyers. There isn't a segment on Facebook for active homebuyers, so how do you do this? Think about your customers and what motivates them to...

How to Craft Instagram Posts That Drive Sales

How to Craft Instagram Posts That Drive Sales

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Instagram to promote your products and services? Interested in ways to drive sales with your posts? A good Instagram post is not as simple as just snapping a photo, applying a filter and posting it to your news feed. To have a real impact, your posts need to be carefully crafted and shared with purpose and intent. In this article you'll discover how to create Instagram posts that increase engagement and drive sales. Listen to this article: #1: Design Images to Capture Attention If you're posting a photo of a product on Instagram, be creative with the shot and make sure it reflects well on the product. Find an Interesting Angle Think about whether you should show the entire product, frame the shot a certain way or include another item to accompany the product. Warby Parker posts creative photos of their eyewear on Instagram, often garnering more than 2,000 likes per post. Even with a simple pair of glasses, there are hundreds of ways to capture it in a photo. Once you find the most effective angle for your products, stick with that approach and be consistent. Don't forget that your Instagram posts are also part of your brand. Focus on Lighting Whether photos are taken indoors or outdoors, good lighting is crucial. This may seem like Photography 101, but lighting also tells a story about your product. Even with careful tweaking and tuning, Instagram's editing tools often can't fix a photo taken with poor lighting. Think about whether your photo should be shown in color or in black and white, and how to portray it best. Prada posts a variety of photos taken in unique lighting. Their exceptional professional shots speak specifically to their brand. Use a Filter Instagram realized early on that much of the app's value and appeal was in its filters. Each filter has a unique story that it communicates. While there is some evidence that photos with no filters perform best, filters may be necessary to achieve a coherent look for your brand. The novelty of the #nofilter hashtag excites some users, but artistically edited photos contribute to the purpose of your posts. Does the X-Pro II filter or Valencia filter present your product in a refreshing or edgy way? There is an array of filters at your disposal to communicate a particular mood for your brand and products. #2: Tell a Story With the Caption You can give life to a photo with the caption. Nike's caption here is evocative and tells a story instead of merely describing the product. It's important to identify what type of description resonates best with your audience. In Nike's case, this photo represents the culmination of training for the Chicago Marathon. #3: Add Relevant Hashtags Hashtags make your photos discoverable. Use popular hashtags when they apply to your photo or your brand. It's best to stick with three to five hashtags at a time. You don't want to overload your photo with too many hashtags because that can be viewed as desperation. Also be cautious about piggybacking on current trending hashtags. Some brands create their own relevant hashtags, such as Tiffany & Co.’s #TiffanyLeather or #TiffanyAtlas, strategically crossed with more purpose-driven popular tags. Create a Hashtag Campaign Regramming user-generated content is one of the best ways to promote your community and products. Create a brand-centric hashtag campaign for your followers to use. Stitch Fix asks their fashion-forward followers to showcase their styling choices with the hashtag #StitchFixFriday. This hashtag not only fosters a sense of community, but also reaffirms who your audience is. Remember that engagement is a two-way street. Follow and pay attention to your followers, and like the posts that are strategically and aesthetically aligned with your brand. #4: Use a Call to Action Consider adding a call to action to your post, which prompts customers or shoppers to do something.

April Dogs of the Month

by admin @ Dog Guard of Iowa

Leslie & Jeremy Hill recently purchased a new home in Osceola. Their previous home had a traditional fence to contain the dogs. Dazey is a 6 year old Lab/Golden Retriever mix and Diesel is a nine year old Teacup Yorkie. Both dogs have adjusted well to their new home, new fence, new surroundings and best […]

SEO Services Company in Golden IL

by Lunarned45 @ Local seo tips

Search Engine Optimization Company Reviews Golden Illinois Creates Experts It prices a number of cash, however if it receives them to number one in the search ratings, they are able to then use that to impress potential clients. What a few organizations do is to drive rankings for some key phrases with a large investment… Continue reading SEO Services Company in Golden IL

Artykuł SEO Services Company in Golden IL pochodzi z serwisu Local seo tips.

How to Use Facebook Mobile Apps for Marketing

How to Use Facebook Mobile Apps for Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to make your Facebook marketing more mobile? Curious about what you can and can’t do from your phone with Facebook apps? Facebook has a variety of mobile apps, from pages, to groups, to ads, that keep you connected while marketing on the go. In this article you’ll learn about the different capabilities of each of the mobile Facebook apps that are available today. Listen to this article: Facebook Mobile App First, install the basic Facebook mobile app on your phone. There are plenty of things you can do from this app, like access your personal information and pages and groups (just click on the three horizontal bars in the upper-right corner). Post to your page from there or comment on other posts as your page. When you click on the activity or insights tab on your phone, you can also see the recent activity and scheduled posts, as well as limited stats. Although the Facebook mobile app is primarily used for personal activity, there is so much more you can do with it. Facebook Pages App To maximize your connection to your page on your mobile device, install the Facebook Pages app. There are a few things that you can do with the Facebook Pages app that you can't do with the regular app, such as access the home feed of your Facebook page. Pages Feed shows the posts of the pages you've liked as your page, and you can comment as your page. Also, view and respond to messages to your page through the app, if you have messages capability enabled in general settings. To access your page's messages, click the speech bubble. Then reply to messages that have been sent to your page. Facebook Messenger App The Facebook Messenger app originally sparked a lot of controversy about the required permissions. People have since discovered that because of the way Android's app permissions are worded, the app is forced to ask for a lot of permissions (and they're not any different than other messaging apps on Android devices). Many people don't realize how powerful the Facebook Messenger app can be. You can make international calls for free to anyone else who has the app installed (data rates apply), leave a voice message for anyone with the app or make a free video call. Plus, send money for free to a contact (this feature is only available in some areas). Go into the Messenger app to see what features are available. Start a conversation with someone or access previous conversations. You can also install additional features to the app by clicking on the icon at the bottom of the screen with three dots. Currently most of the bonus features involve things like additional images, GIFs, etc. However, there are some practical apps, such as a photo editor and sketch pad. Facebook Group App While you can access your groups within the regular Facebook app, one of the biggest benefits to the Facebook Group app is the ability to easily manage your groups and watch for updates. If you're an admin of a Facebook group, this app is a must. Install the Groups app, and you can easily see which groups have new activity, indicated by the number in blue next to each group icon. Move the Facebook groups you use the most to the top of the screen. Just hold down the icon of that group and move it with your finger to the top of the screen. Decide which Facebook groups need what notifications, and set them up the way you want them, so you don't get overwhelmed with notifications you don't need. The Groups app is essential for admins or moderators to keep tabs on the activity of your groups. Manage Facebook Ads From Your Phone If you run Facebook ads for yourself or for a client, watching them while you're away from your desk is a must. Luckily the Ads Manager in the Facebook mobile app has improved over the last year. You can easily switch between accounts, turn ads on and off and adjust the schedules. Once you select the Ads Manager,

How to Get Started on Blab: Group Video Broadcasting for Marketers

How to Get Started on Blab: Group Video Broadcasting for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a fan of live-streaming video for business? Have you tried Blab? Blab, the newest platform in streaming video, lets you build a personal and business presence while creating community. In this article I'll explore Blab and share ways you can use it for business. Listen to this article: About Blab Blab.im, which is currently available on desktop and iOS (Android is coming soon), is a live-streaming video platform that lets you host your own live video show or conference with up to four people engaging at the same time. The moderator has control over who is in the three additional video seats, but anyone who wants to tune in can use the right panel to chat and the left panel to tweet. Blab's ease of use, simplicity and functionality give it the edge over other live-streaming platforms. For instance, Meerkat, Periscope and Facebook Mentions are mobile-only and are mostly just you talking to your audience. Plus, if you want to interview someone, he or she needs to be right next to you. And while you can include up to 10 people on a Google hangout, the session feels more like an interview and doesn't provide the same sense of engagement as a blab. Another plus is that Blab's time length is open-ended and most blabs last about an hour. According to Shaan Puri, CEO of Blab, most people using the platform spend at least an hour "blabbing" each day. Blab is more than just a new toy. It's a substantial method of connecting, and others are getting as excited about it as I am! #1: Get Started on Blab Use the same account for Blab as you do for Twitter. Just log in and you're ready to go. If you want to change your bio or notifications, click on your photo and select Settings. Once on the platform, follow people to receive notifications about their blabs. Finding people to follow is simple: do a search by name or look anyone up by adding their Twitter handle after blab.im/. To start a new blab, click the purple button next to your profile picture. Then give your blab a title and choose up to three tags (keywords). Next, set up your blab to go live immediately or schedule it for the future. Record Your Blab If you're the moderator, you can choose to record the blab. Within a minute of the end of the show, you'll receive two links to an mp3 or mp4 with the recording. After you receive those links, you can upload your recorded blab as a video to YouTube or as a podcast on Libsyn, iTunes or your preferred host. Additionally, all of the blabs you record are archived for access on your profile under Replay. While archived blabs can be replayed at any time, viewers cannot chat, send feels or follow people during a replay. Promote Your Blab If you go live, you can tweet a link to let people know about your blab. Promote your scheduled blabs the same way you would promote any event. Create a custom graphic, email your network, schedule a Facebook event, tweet it out and share on all of your social networks. Moderate Your Blab When there's an empty seat, someone can request to join in. When the moderator approves, the new person enters the video chat. Blab is similar to a late-night talk show format. There's a host and a primary special guest. When another guest comes on, the previous guest can slide over a seat and stick around. #2: Use Blab Chat Commands There are a few unique commands enabled in the chat column on the right of Blab's layout. To ask a question, type "/Q", and the word Question appears in a grey box so it stands out. To change the topic of the blab, the moderator can type "/Topic". For a bit of fun, you can add interest to your chat comments by typing "/shrug" or "/tableflip" in the chat box. I'm not aware of other commands, but it wouldn't surprise me if the Blab development team has more Easter eggs hidden. #3: Give Kudos to Blabbers Instead of hearts, like those used on Periscope,

Subscription Businesses Are Exploding with Growth

by Lauren Machi @ Hawthorne | Brand Response TV + Digital + Media + Mobile + Social

  • Over the past three years, the number of visitors to subscription company websites has surged by over 800%. Such visits in April 2017 alone hit 37 million. A subscription business is a company that selects items that it believes you might like, and sends you a curated package, typically once a month. Some of the top subscription companies (ranked by April 2017 visits) include: Ipsy (5.2M visits), Blue Apron (4.2M), Dollar Shave Club (33M),

The post Subscription Businesses Are Exploding with Growth appeared first on Hawthorne | Brand Response TV + Digital + Media + Mobile + Social.

Google Analytics and Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

Google Analytics and Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you track the return on your social media activity in Google Analytics? Want to discover some valuable shortcuts? To explore cool hacks for Google Analytics, I interview Annie Cushing. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Annie Cushing, Google Analytics expert and chief data officer at Outspoken Media digital marketing agency. She's a total analytics geek who loves teaching other marketers how to make the most of their analytics data. Annie explores Google Analytics, social reporting, dashboards, and more. You'll discover how to customize Google Analytics reports for yourself. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Analytics and Social Media What's New in Google Analytics Starting May 15, 2017, Google Analytics will allow people to do remarketing across multiple devices. Annie explains that if someone visits your site on their mobile device and then comes back to it on their laptop, as long as they're logged into Google in both places, you'll be able to target them across their devices. This new capability is a huge step forward for remarketing audiences because few people shop only on their computer, tablet, or phone. Annie explains that Google previously relied on user IDs to offer remarketing features, but most businesses couldn't implement the technology very easily. Only advanced analysts could set it up for sites where users were highly incentivized to log in. Because most businesses don't have sites like that, this new ability is groundbreaking. Annie says one issue she regularly sees with clients is they seldom use Google Analytics for retargeting. Instead, they use AdWords and DoubleClick. However, Google Analytics enables marketers to get much more granular with targeting. For instance, you can serve an ad to someone who visited a certain page but didn't convert or to someone who put something in a cart but didn't check out. Hopefully, multiple-device retargeting will incentivize more people to take advantage of Google Analytics. Listen to the show to discover how a retargeting ad saved Annie last Christmas. Google Optimize Google recently announced they were releasing Google Optimize, a free tool for A/B testing. For example, say you want to experiment with product page design, such as the placement of the price or Buy button or different font colors or text. In an A/B test, you run two versions of your page and compare how each version performs. Up until this point, Optimizely has been the industry standard. At Social Media Examiner, we use Visual Website Optimizer. Annie believes Google Optimize is perfect for small- to mid-sized or even large businesses. (Google Optimize 360 is the enterprise-level version.) Annie recommends that businesses get what they can from the free version first. Then as your organization develops more sophisticated testing needs (for instance, reducing the bounce rate or increasing the conversion rate), consider paying for more advanced features. Annie also notes that Google Optimize is user-friendly. To move things around, you simply drag and drop. You don't have to ask a developer to customize the page for you. Listen to the show to hear my description of how optimizing tools work. Ad Blockers and Do-not-track Technology Annie explains how ad blockers and do-not-track tools impact your analytics data differently. If you run display ads on AdWords, then ad blockers will impact your overall effectiveness. As people choose to block ads, impressions and conversions will decrease. A lot of publishers,

Walton OR SEO | Reliable Marketing in Oregon

by Martin Hosner @ Search Engine Marketing Company

WE ARE Walton SEO DOES YOUR Walton OR BASED BUSINESS NEED MORE LEADS? Fill Out Our Discovery Form We are a leading search engine optimization in Walton, Oregon (ZIP: 97490). We have helped a lot of local businesses grow their revenue by ranking their website #1 in Google, Yahoo & Bing search engines. This is […]

LinkedIn Publishing Platform: What Marketers Need to Know

LinkedIn Publishing Platform: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you publish long-form content? Are you wondering if the new LinkedIn publishing platform can help your business? To learn about the LinkedIn publishing platform and why you may want to consider it, I interview Stephanie Sammons for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Stephanie Sammons, who is a LinkedIn marketing expert and CEO of Wired Advisor, a digital marketing platform that helps financial advisors create and publish content. She blogs at Build Online Influence. Stephanie shares how marketers can make the most out of the LinkedIn publishing platform. You'll discover what type of content works best, when to schedule posts and how you can use the platform to grow a following. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn Publishing Platform What is the LinkedIn publishing platform? Stephanie explains that the LinkedIn publishing platform was first made available to around 500 LinkedIn influencers. These individuals were chosen by LinkedIn to be a part of the initial rollout. More recently LinkedIn has opened up the publishing platform to all 277 million+ members. It will be rolled out over time, allowing every single person the opportunity to publish his or her own content on the LinkedIn platform. Listen to the show to find out why this new addition is great for publishing long-form content. Does the LinkedIn platform support images and multimedia? Stephanie says that you can embed content from SlideShare, which is owned by LinkedIn. It's a network where you can publish PowerPoint presentations, Keynote presentations, PDFs, white papers, infographics and embed videos from YouTube. In addition, you can embed images in the posts that you publish to LinkedIn. The formatting capabilities are very similar to a basic blogging platform. It's a little bit easier to use than WordPress, although you don't have the ability within the editor to categorize or tag your posts. You can use headers, bullets, numbered lists, bold, italics and hyperlink text as well. Listen to the show to find out why it's really important to double-check your post before you hit Publish. Marketers and business owners should consider posting content on LinkedIn You have to remember that LinkedIn is your professional identity online and this not only gives you an opportunity to demonstrate and illustrate your expertise, but also to get in front of a very active and engaged audience. You'll discover why you now have the ability to grow a following on LinkedIn—even with people who aren't in your LinkedIn network—and how this can be a huge benefit to your business. It's still important to have your own platform that's away from all of the other social networks. One of the real advantages of when you use the LinkedIn publishing platform is that you can grow an audience very fast. My friend Dave Kerpen, the founder of Likeable Media, is a great example. Although he has mostly written for traditional print and didn't really have a huge platform online, he was able join the original LinkedIn influencer network. Since then, he has seen amazing growth as a result of the articles he has published on the platform. You'll hear about an article that Dave wrote on the LinkedIn publishing platform about 10 Marketing Podcasts That You Ought to Listen to and how this affected the podcasts mentioned in a phenomenal way. When you put your content together,

Facebook Ads and Beyond: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Ads and Beyond: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook ads? Are you wondering how paid Facebook marketing can work for your business? To learn about Facebook EdgeRank and paid Facebook marketing, I interview Jon Loomer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jon Loomer, who blogs about advanced Facebook marketing at Jon Loomer.com. Jon used to do social media work for the the NBA and American Cancer Society before going out on his own in 2011. Jon shares what efficient targeting means for marketers and the metrics involved. You'll learn creative ways to generate more business on a minimal budget. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Advertising EdgeRank and why it's important Jon explains how EdgeRank is the unofficial term for Facebook's sorting algorithm. You don't see everything that's published in your news feed. It depends on your affinity, your connection with specific people and pages, how you interacted with a specific content type in the past and the 'weight' given to posts. The EdgeRank algorithm as described by WhatIsEdgeRank.com. Over time, the older something is, the less likely that you'll see it in the news feed. And in a perfect world, EdgeRank helps you see what you want to see. You'll discover as a marketer what you need to do to make sure your fans see your content and how EdgeRank can help you rise to the top. Listen to the show to find out what you need to do to encourage your fans to act on your Facebook updates. Facebook metrics marketers should pay attention to As a marketer, it depends what your goals are on Facebook. Jon explains that he is a publisher, and when people visit his website, he makes money. So for him, the more traffic the better. You'll find out why Jon focuses on consumption and a stat called link clicks. Jon explains that consumption is any type of click, whether it resulted in a story or not. It could be a comment, like or share, but it could also be a photo click, video play, link click or any other click. Remember Facebook records them all. You'll hear an example of the post-level export lists for all reposts over a given time period. You can look at it post by post, posts that had the most consumption and quantity of clicks. With a time decay on Facebook updates, Jon shares what you need to do to make sure you reach people in completely different time zones with your most popular links to help you reach a new audience. Listen to the show to find out the best time to reshare a post, with time decay in mind. Facebook targeting for marketers Over the last few months Facebook has made it easy for you to target your updates to different audiences. Jon explains there are two different forms of targeting. You can target your posts or you can target your ads. You'll hear why Jon is not a big fan of post targeting. Where Facebook targeting really comes alive is within advertising. Facebook constantly releases something new to make it incredibly powerful. On the Facebook advertising side, Jon reveals some of the newer things that Facebook has done with targeting. Last year when the Custom Audiences feature was first rolled out, it allowed you to target your offline customer list with email addresses you'd collected, phone numbers or Facebook UIDs. These are people who have proven to subscribe to your content or bought something from you in the past. Whether or not they are your fans,

SEO Services Company in Basom NY

by Lunarned45 @ Affordable Seo Services For Small Business Basom NY – Local seo tips

Seo Optimization Services Prices Basom New York Conferences It fees a lot of money, but if it receives them to primary within the seek scores, they could then use that to affect prospective customers. What a few agencies do is to pressure ratings for some key phrases with a massive investment in ‘paid hyperlinks. Optimization… Continue reading SEO Services Company in Basom NY

Artykuł SEO Services Company in Basom NY pochodzi z serwisu Local seo tips.

Which Digital Channels Deliver the Best ROI?

by Lauren Machi @ Hawthorne | Brand Response TV + Digital + Media + Mobile + Social

 

    • GetResponse surveyed 2,510 digital marketers from around the world. 42% worked at a B2C company, 19% at a B2B firm, and 39% in either one or the other. They found that email and social media ranked as the top two digital channels for delivering an excellent ROI.

18% of marketers across all industries indicated that email marketing produced a superior return on investment, social media ranked second (17%),

The post Which Digital Channels Deliver the Best ROI? appeared first on Hawthorne | Brand Response TV + Digital + Media + Mobile + Social.

Lottoland Relaunches Affiliate Programme with Income Access

by The Income Access Team @ Income Access

Revamped affiliate programme for global online lottery betting brand is powered by Income Access affiliate platform Montreal, QC  23rd August […]

The post Lottoland Relaunches Affiliate Programme with Income Access appeared first on Income Access.

155A0735.JPG

155A0735.JPG

by Chris Jorgensen/Iowa State Daily @ www.iowastatedaily.com - RSS Results

Pulitzer Prize winning photojournalist Lynsey Addario gave a talk Thursday night in the Memorial Union. Addario has spent over 25 years documenting war in the Middle East. The upcoming feature film 'It's What I Do' starring Jennifer Lawrence is based…

Social Customer Care: Apps and Processes for Success

Social Customer Care: Apps and Processes for Success

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

How does your business respond to customer concerns and inquiries? Do you have a social customer care plan in place? To explore how to improve customer care for your business, I interview Dan Gingiss. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Dan Gingiss, author of Winning at Social Customer Care, head of global social media at McDonald's, and host of the Focus on Customer Service podcast. Dan explores the most important qualities of social care representatives. You'll discover tools to make providing social customer care easier. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Customer Care Why Social Customer Care Is Important Offline experiences don't stay offline for long, Dan explains, particularly when they're bad. They get discussed online and things can get out of control. (Just watch the news!) Marketers need to care because they're the ones at the helm of social media handles. Plus, whenever you do social media marketing (organic or paid, but especially paid), people ask customer service questions. When people see your brand in their feeds, they remember their questions or problems. Your marketing is their reminder. More marketing leads to more people talking back. And that can be a good thing. Listen to the show to discover what marketers should never say. Who Should Do Social Customer Care The ideal people for social customer service are those who are naturally empathetic, want to talk to customers and solve their problems, and can remain calm when an angry customer is yelling at them. You don't need to involve everyone, and the people who are involved should like talking to people. These days, social customer care agents are doing work that blurs the line with community management. Which role deals with someone commenting on your really cool sponsorship with the NFL versus someone asking a question about your product or service versus a customer who is really angry because you screwed up? That line may not always be clear. When the marketing department owned all of social media, they were okay with the first two. They loved talking about football and could answer questions. However, when they started getting complaints or complicated questions, they had to call customer service for backup. Customer service's job was to know about the products and services, how to fix things when they went wrong, and most importantly, how to talk to other people. A social customer care agent could be a phone rep, an email rep, or a chat rep. Depending on the size of your organization, the social person may need to have phone skills as well as writing skills. In a large company, people in customer service may work only on the phone, chat, or social. But in a smaller business, one person might handle phone calls and Twitter. However your organization divides up the work of customer service, Dan emphasizes that everyone involved should have the same customer service training. Customers should have a consistent experience, no matter which customer service channel they choose. You've probably seen examples of people calling a company, talking to an agent, and not liking the answer. So they go to Twitter to get a different answer. The biggest mistake the company can make is to give a different answer on Twitter because then you teach everybody to just go to Twitter. Listen to the show to hear Dan discuss what skills customer care agents might need in the near future. Customer Support Bots Although bots have a role in customer support, they still have a ways to go. For instance, Dan tried using a bot to buy flowers and when he needed...

5 Ways to Improve Your Social Media Results

5 Ways to Improve Your Social Media Results

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your social media audience losing interest? Do you want to tap into your followers' emotions? Using psychology to connect with your target audience is a powerful way to engage and motivate them to take action. In this article you'll discover five psychology principles you can use to improve your social media marketing results. Listen to this article: #1: People Prefer Stories to Stats In Made to Stick: Why Some Ideas Survive and Others Die, authors Chip and Dan Heath share research that reveals we're more likely to donate when we hear the story of an individual in need rather than data about an entire impoverished area. Even though a region's suffering has a larger impact than that of an individual, the individual's story is appealing because we have an emotional response when hearing the experiences of others, not statistics and abstract information. To apply this principle to your social media marketing, tell a story to reach your audience emotionally. Guinness does this well through their marketing campaigns. Rather than spout information or simply show a scene, this ad takes the viewer through a complicated situation that gradually unfolds to reveal the outcome. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rx0MRawkrj4 Ads like this one follow the "show, don't tell" principle. They lead audience members through a story they need to interpret for themselves based on the actions of the characters. Your social media content can impress your audience and be more memorable if you share a personal experience; whether it's your own or someone else's. By creating a journey with a resolution, you can make an emotional impact on your viewers. #2: Personal Benefits Generate Interest Expressing how people can benefit from your product or service will help you increase engagement on social media. Taco Bell's Twitter account socially engages its audience with its witty and interactive tweets. Most importantly, the people behind the account understand what makes people tick. Take a look at this popular tweet. Who wouldn't like a free meal? Imagine what people are thinking as they watch the World Series. They're likely hoping someone steals a base with the promise of free breakfast from Taco Bell. This keeps the brand at the top of its audience members' minds. Of course, you don't have to give everyone in the country a free breakfast to garner attention. There are other effective methods to let people know what you or your product can do for them. Taco Bell's strategy shows that captivating the audience begins with thinking about what they want, first and foremost. Apple famously focused on the consumer when Steve Jobs described the iPod as "1,000 songs in your pocket." Now imagine if he had described the features instead: high storage and smooth texture. People would probably be thinking, "So what? How does this apply to me?" httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6SUJNspeux8 The next time you share something about your brand on social media, explain or show why it will make a difference in people's lives. #3: Social Proof From Peers Increases Trust These days, reviews and testimonials on products and services are available at the click of a button. Consider a 2008 study that involved hanging public-service messages on residents' doors, asking them to use fans instead of air conditioning. Results found that telling a group that 77% of their neighbors were using fans was more effective than mentioning residents could save $54 a month. What our peers do, impacts our decision-making. Crate and Barrel's website invites customers to leave reviews for products and gives them the option of uploading a picture. Pictures help other potential customers visualize how the product would look in a home setting. There are a number of ways to create social proof; show Facebook likes and post testimonials to tell your audience about how popular your product is.

Updated: President Leath damaged Iowa State plane while flying in 2015

Updated: President Leath damaged Iowa State plane while flying in 2015


Iowa State Daily

Iowa State President Steven Leath damaged a plane owned by the school while flying in July 2015 from an 11-day trip to North Carolina for both personal and university business,

How the Facebook News Feed Works: Changes Marketers Need to Know

How the Facebook News Feed Works: Changes Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to remain visible in Facebook's news feed? Wondering how Facebook decides what to show in the news feed? In this article you'll discover how the Facebook news feed algorithm works, what's been updated, and how marketers can respond to create more visibility on Facebook. Listen to this article: #1: Facebook Prioritizes Content Topics in the News Feed Based on the Time a User Spends on Similar Content Previously, Facebook said it wouldn't give higher organic reach to instant articles in the news feed. However, that didn't mean instant articles would not be part of its algorithm to determine what posts should get more organic reach in the news feed. According to Facebook's first post on the change, Facebook will now use time spent reading or watching content as a signal that a particular story was important to the user. Content includes video, instant articles, and articles loaded in the mobile browser from the Facebook app. The time spent viewing signal will be used to predict what other content users might find interesting, and will show users similar content in their news feed. Here's how you can use time spent viewing to your advantage: If you want more people to see your content in the news feed, make sure that people stick around long enough to consume your content. Whether it's video, instant articles, or content that people load in the mobile browser from the Facebook app, the key is to create content that keeps people engaged. You can do this a couple of different ways. For starters, be sure that your content delivers what the headline promises. You need to craft a headline that's irresistible enough to click, and include a video or article introduction to show you'll deliver on that headline. You can create longer videos and articles; however, not too long. Facebook looks at the time spent on a piece of content within a maximum threshold. The goal is to make sure that people don't click through to your content and immediately click away from it. #2: Facebook Plans to Add Diversity to News Feed Sources While researching its Feed Quality program, Facebook learned that users want to see wide-ranging content from different publishers, as opposed to back-to-back articles from the same source. Hence, Facebook will reduce how often users see several posts in a row from the same source in their news feed. Here's how you can use diversity to your advantage: This is a tricky one, especially for content publishers that publish 5+ posts per day. Authors who write on a variety of publications are the real winners. Essentially, those authors could end up being seen in the news feed multiple times per day because their content would come from different sources. Businesses using quality guest blogging as a tactic for gaining exposure in their industry should consider spreading content to multiple sites for better organic exposure in the Facebook news feed. Another way to be more diverse and still appear multiple times in the news feed is to repurpose content. Effectively, you could share multiple pieces of content per day from different sources (your blog, your Medium blog, Facebook notes, your LinkedIn Publisher blog, etc.), along with different Facebook accounts (your page, employee profiles with public followers, your groups, etc.). #3: Facebook Wants to Connect Users With the Stories That Matter Most to Them Facebook's second post about the news feed algorithm updates was a video from the F8 conference about how the news feed works with Adam Mosseri, VP of product management for news feed. He states that Facebook's mission is to connect users with the stories that matter most to them. Here's how you can use Facebook's news feed mission to your advantage: Ultimately, Facebook's news feed mission should also be your mission each time you create content, whether it's on Facebook, your blog, or any other social network.

How to Find Local Customers With Twitter

How to Find Local Customers With Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Twitter for your business? Looking for ways to connect with local customers? There are tactics you can use to improve the visibility of your local business and identify potential leads. In this post you'll discover three ways to connect with local customers on Twitter. Listen to this article: #1: Add Location Data to Your Tweets Enabling location data on your tweets lets Twitter users recognize when they're in close proximity to your business. They may be ready to buy from you at that point, after all, and turning it on will let users click on the location marker icon on your tweet to find out where your business is located. That's one step closer to a sale. The tweeting with your location feature is disabled by default. To turn it on, compose a tweet and then click on Location Disabled. In the pop-up box that appears, click Turn Location On. Twitter will then suggest a location. If you want to choose something different, click the location marker, and then choose a location from the menu or enter a location in the search field at the top of the menu. Your Turn Location On settings are saved, so the next time you compose a tweet, your location information will be added automatically to the tweet. After you publish your tweet, your location will be displayed when it appears in users' timelines. #2: Find Leads With a Local Hashtag Search One way to find local customers on Twitter is to use a tool like Hashtagify to search for people using specific hashtags. Then after you've compiled a list of potential leads, add them to a private Twitter list and start engaging with them. Here's how to get started. Search for Hashtags First, use Hashtagify to find out which Twitter users are using local hashtags, whether they're in your local area or intending to travel to it in the near future. For example, people tweeting the hashtag #lovedublin may be planning to visit the city, so they would represent potential leads for businesses in Dublin, Ireland. To search for Twitter users tweeting that hashtag, open Hashtagify and enter your local hashtag in the search field. Click on the gear icon to deselect Instagram from the dialog box so that only Twitter results are returned. Hashtagify then returns a list of users tweeting that hashtag, which you can view on the right side of the page. Click on Show More at the bottom of the Top Recent Media list to view a full screen of tweets where the hashtag has been used. Now go back to your original search results and click Table Mode at the bottom of the screen. This will let you see trending hashtags related to your hashtag. Look through the table for related hashtags and find relevant ones for your business. Then do a search for those hashtags to find even more prospects and compile a list of leads from the users. Create a Twitter Lead List After you've compiled a list of leads, you can then segment your leads from the hashtag search into Twitter lists and start monitoring their conversations. To add leads to a private Twitter list, go to each user's Twitter profile, click on the gear icon on the right side of the page and select Add or Remove From Lists. You can then add them to an existing list or create a new one. If you're creating a new list, add a title for it and a brief description (up to 100 characters). This will help you to distinguish it from other lists on your Twitter profile. By default, Twitter lists are public, meaning anyone on Twitter can access them. Since this is a client list, select the Private option button so no one will be able to access the list but you. When you're finished, click Save List. To access your lists, click on the gear icon on your profile and select Lists from the drop-down menu. Engage With Your Leads After you've segmented your leads into a Twitter list, start engaging with them to share useful tips,

Blogs, Books and Social: How the World Has Changed

Blogs, Books and Social: How the World Has Changed

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you think the world of publishing is evolving? Have you ever thought of self-publishing? To learn more about how blogs, books and social content have evolved, I interview Guy Kawasaki for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Guy Kawasaki, former chief evangelist for Apple and author of many books including Enchantment and What the Plus! Google+ for the Rest of Us. Guy shares his experience of publishing his first book in 1987 and how publishing has changed since then. You'll also learn tips and techniques to use on Google+. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Changes in Publication How the process of publishing books has changed Guy talks about what the book publishing process was like back in 1987 when he published The Macintosh Way and how it has changed since then. He explains the difference between a traditional publishing and self-publishing. With a traditional publisher, there's a lot of going back and forth and not a lot of control for the author. The timeline from finishing a book to it being on a shelf is around 6-9 months. Self-publishing today is a completely different world. You'll discover  how Guy's last book What the Plus was on sale on Kindle six days after he finished writing it.  Guy also shares the story of going from an electronic book to a print book. Listen to the show to hear the story of how What the Plus made it to paperback. How the publishing world is changing Guy explains why publishing is an industry in transition, where he feels this industry will go and the opportunities for publishers today. Guy shares how times have changed with desktop publishing and how anybody with InDesign or an Apple Mac and a laser printer can become a publisher. In addition, people with blogs and websites are publishers. With the variety of tablet computers available today, anyone with Microsoft Word can become a publisher. You'll find out why Guy believes in the theory of "infinite monkeys working on keyboards are going to produce a lot of masterpieces." Listen to the show to find out why now is a great time to self-publish. How Guy's publishing journey has changed and why Guy shares his story of how he ran out of ideas to publish on his own blog, which led him to guest writing for the American Express Open Forum, and how he ran out of ideas for that too. You'll learn why Guy considers his biggest challenges in blogging are to have enough topics to write about over time and to have the time to write. Now with Twitter, Google+ and Facebook, he finds himself more of a curator than a blogger. It's one thing to generate content; it's another to curate and find content. Guy says he has evolved from a blogger to a curator, and when he does write, he writes books. Social networks allow him to express himself spontaneously and the deeper ideas go into book format. He explains why a blog is the logical place to start and why he considers blogging good practice before writing a book. You'll discover the benefits of writing a blog-type post on Google+, compared to a stand-alone blog. Listen to the show to find out why Guy would use Google+ or a Facebook Fan Page today as a platform. How Twitter fits into the social ecosystem today Guy explains why his personal approach to Twitter now is unusual. You'll find out how Guy uses Twitter to curate great content from his website Alltop and a section there called Holy Kaw!

6 steps to using experiments to create more valuable content

by Jamie Griffiths @ GatherContent Blog

Anyone who’s been tasked with devising or executing a content strategy for a new brand, product or campaign knows the problem well: how do we come up with something that we know will resonate with our audience and speed them towards their goals? In this post, I’ll outline an experimental approach to content production which […]

The post 6 steps to using experiments to create more valuable content appeared first on GatherContent Blog.

Betin Launches New Affiliate Programme with Income Access

by The Income Access Team @ Income Access

African sportsbook and casino operator chooses Income Access platform for new affiliate offering MONTREAL, QC. 7th August 2017 – Betin, the […]

The post Betin Launches New Affiliate Programme with Income Access appeared first on Income Access.

Paradise Valley NV SEO | Internet Marketing in Nevada

by Martin Hosner @ Search Engine Marketing Company

WE ARE Paradise Valley SEO DOES YOUR Paradise Valley NV BASED BUSINESS NEED MORE LEADS? Fill Out Our Discovery Form We are a leading search engine optimization in Paradise Valley, Nevada (ZIP: 89426). We have helped a lot of local businesses grow their revenue by ranking their website #1 in Google, Yahoo & Bing search […]

How to Create Custom Instagram Feeds

How to Create Custom Instagram Feeds

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want an efficient way to stay in touch with your peers, customers and colleagues on Instagram? Have you considered creating custom feeds of their updates? There are tools that make it easy to organize your favorite Instagram accounts into feeds so you never miss an update again. In this article you'll discover how to use Mashfeed and Iconosquare to create customized Instagram feeds. Listen to this article: #1: Create Instagram Feeds With Mashfeed Mashfeed allows you to create your own custom feeds from Instagram, as well as from Twitter, YouTube and Facebook (even from accounts you don't follow). The app makes it easy to categorize your favorite accounts. Mashfeed is available for iPhone and you can download it from the App Store for free. Set Up a Feed When you first open the app, you need to create an account. Pick a username, enter a password and type in your email address. You're then prompted to add a photo, invite friends and follow suggested feeds, but you can skip these steps if you want. To create an Instagram feed, tap the + button in the top-right corner of the screen. In the field at the top, enter a name for your new feed. By default, the feed is public, but you can make it private by tapping Change. Then tap Add Ingredients. Now you're ready to add Instagram users or hashtags you'd like to follow. To do that, tap the Add User button. The first time you use the app, you'll be prompted to connect it to your Instagram account. Tap the Connect to Instagram button and then type in your username and password. After logging into your Instagram account, tap Authorize to allow Mashfeed to access it. Once you've successfully connected your Instagram account, you can start adding users and hashtags to your Instagram feed. To add a user, tap Add User and then tap on the username of the account you'd like to add. You can use the search box at the top of the screen to find specific users. If you want to view a user's profile before adding the account to your Instagram feed, tap the eye icon to the right of the username. When you're finished adding users to your feed, tap Done in the top-right corner of the screen. View Your Feeds To view all of the Instagram feeds you've created, tap the Home button at the bottom of the screen. Then tap on the Instagram feed you want to view. You'll then see the most recent content from the accounts within that Instagram feed. Like Iconosquare, you can heart Instagram posts within the app. If you tap a username within your feed, here are some additional tasks you can do: Unfollow the account. Add the account to another Instagram feed you've created. View all of the posts from that Instagram account. Unlike Iconosquare, Mashfeed doesn't allow you to comment directly through your Instagram feeds, which is a frustrating limitation of the app. That said, many other third-party apps (including Iconosquare) use Instagram's API to allow users to post comments outside of Instagram's native environment. So hopefully this functionality will make its way into a future update of the Mashfeed app. #2: Create Instagram Feeds With Iconosquare Iconosquare is an online tool that provides metrics about your Instagram followers for free. You can also use it to create Instagram feeds you can view through your desktop or smartphone browser. Here's how to get started. Set Up a Group First, you need to create an Iconosquare account. In the top-right corner of the home page, click the Sign in With Instagram button. Once you've signed into your Instagram account, you'll be redirected to the Iconosquare dashboard. Next, you need to create groups to organize the accounts you follow. To do this, click the My Followings tab at the top of the dashboard. Now hover over the circle below any accounts you're following and on the pop-up menu, click New Group.

6 Tips for Pinterest Marketing in Just Minutes a Day

6 Tips for Pinterest Marketing in Just Minutes a Day

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Pinterest marketing taking too much time? Are you ready for a better Pinterest marketing plan? Time-saving Pinterest marketing tactics can deliver more results with less effort. In this article you'll discover six tactics to help you market on Pinterest in minutes a day. Listen to this article: Get Started on Pinterest If you haven't already done so, set up your business on Pinterest. It's easy to get started. First, sign up for a Pinterest business account and complete your profile. Be sure to upload the proper profile image. Then verify your website with your Pinterest account. Next, add Pin It and Follow buttons, as well as widgets, to your website. Plus, enable rich pins, depending on your content type. Once this is done, you're ready to get moving on your Pinterest marketing. Here are six tactics to manage your time and be more productive on Pinterest. #1: Repin for a Few Minutes Each Day Take around three minutes each day to curate and repin to your Pinterest boards. Enter keywords for your niche or industry in Pinterest search. Based on your initial search, Pinterest will offer additional search term suggestions. Just click on any of the words under the search bar to add them. This will refresh the search, giving you new possible content, associated with the extra keyword, to repin. You'll easily find the best content to share. To get noticed on Pinterest, you need to pin and repin regularly. Just check the links on any pins to make sure they're active and relevant before you share them. If you spend 3 minutes a day (15 minutes a week) repinning, you will increase the number of repins on your boards significantly. Let's say you have 10 boards. Target 3 boards and repin 2 pins on each one every weekday. That's 6 pins a day and 30 pins a week. Time investment: 15 minutes a week. #2: Schedule Pins to Publish on Weekends To keep your Pinterest account active on the weekend, schedule pins. I recommend you do this for five minutes on Fridays, after you post your daily pins. Choose a scheduling tool for Pinterest such as Viralwoot, Tailwind or Buffer to post images at any time. I use Tailwind, which allows me to schedule pins on the platform or through a browser extension. Schedule at least six pins over two or three different boards to post throughout the weekend. #3: Follow Relevant Pinners For successful Pinterest marketing, you must follow pinners in your niche. You can find them with Pinterest search. Follow three to five new pinners every day. However, don't just follow anyone. Once you find potential pinners to follow, review their profiles and check their Pinterest activities to see if they'll add value to your Pinterest marketing. Spend 5 minutes a day searching for new pinners to follow, which totals 25 minutes a week. #4: Comment on a Pin a Day Keep your eyes open for relevant pins on which you can offer input. Sure, you can like as many pins as you want. However, if a pin inspires you, add something to the conversation. Aim for one comment a day. Your comments can be as short or as long as you'd like. Just make sure your comment is pertinent and not self-promotional. If you have newfound data to support your comment, that's great thing to add. I often comment on others' pins and leave a link to other content. This way, I add value to the pin by providing extra resources. Take 3 minutes a day to post one value-added comment, which is 15 minutes a week devoted to commenting. #5: Create Pinterest Images in Batches Create images of your own to pin to your Pinterest boards. These can be images to go along with blog posts or stand-alone graphics. Pinterest layout supports taller images than any other formats. Ideal size for a pin is 735 x 1102 pixels. There are tools such as Canva to help you create pins quickly and easily. For example, on Canva select the default Pinterest graphics layout and create your design.

Gmail Tabs: A Game Plan for Marketers

Gmail Tabs: A Game Plan for Marketers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business rely on email? Are you wondering how Gmail tabs will impact your marketing? If email is a part of your business, you’ll want to pay close attention. In this article I’ll provide a simple 5-step plan that any marketer can use in response to Gmail tabs. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll learn what the new Gmail tabs mean for your business. You'll also pick up some tips on what you can do and I'll talk about my concerns for the future. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Why should marketers pay attention? Chances are that email plays some role in your marketing. Maybe you email your subscribers when you have a new blog post or newsletter. Perhaps you have some sort of online form (for lead generation or just a simple contact form). Email indeed plays an important role for most businesses. Gmail is auto-filtering all emails for all users. This means your marketing newsletters and emails will get stuck in a slightly hidden folder, no matter what you do. In that very same folder, Gmail is posting unsolicited ads that look like emails. The bottom line with regards to these new Gmail tabs is that you will likely see a drop in your email marketing effectiveness unless you take action. In 2012, there were 425 million Gmail users. That's a huge number! Social Media Examiner has 75,000+ Gmail users. Yes, 34% of our readers subscribe through a Gmail account! There's a pretty good likelihood you have more Gmail users than you realize. What are Gmail tabs? Gmail is rolling out tabs that organize your mail. There are three default tabs: Primary, Social and Promotions (shown below). If you haven't already received this update on Gmail, it will likely come soon. Your emails are likely going into the Promotions tab. Tabs default "on" for all Gmail users unless your subscribers change this setting. If your subscribers don't know how to change it, this is how they will be finding your emails. At the time of this post, not all subscribers have tabs, but it is rolling out very quickly. What are the marketing implications? Gmail is becoming like Facebook. If you use it, you use it by their rules. I'm also concerned by the possibility that other email providers may follow Google's lead. This may be the beginning of the end of email as the one platform you can at least get delivery into. With social media platforms such as Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn, you can never be sure that your messages get in front of your audience. Email has always been the one way that you could be certain of getting in front of your audience, assuming subscribers gave you permission to send them emails. Will this change with Gmail tabs? I think so. The updates in the Promotions tab reset each time you visit Gmail, meaning it is very easy for a Gmail user to never realize there is mail waiting in the Promotions tab. Other email providers may follow suit. There could come a time when marketers will have to pay to play. Your 5-step plan for dealing with Gmail tabs Here are tips you can move on right now to help educate your Gmail readers. These are all proactive steps we have taken at Social Media Examiner. 1. Make a video educating your Gmail users. First, educate your subscribers by making a video like the one below I made for our audience. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5Elz_1KQnmA In this video, you'll learn how your readers can make sure your emails show up in their Primary box.

How to Host a Blab From Your Smartphone

How to Host a Blab From Your Smartphone

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to broadcast live video from Blab with your mobile phone? Looking for tips to improve your mobile Blab broadcasts? Business owners and marketers can use Blab to interact with customers and prospects in real time, from anywhere. In this article you'll discover how to successfully broadcast on Blab from your smartphone. Listen to this article: What Is Blab? Blab allows anyone (businesses included) to have their own "show," where two to four people will be "on air." The show is a live broadcast that viewers can tune in to, participate in the conversation, and potentially join the discussion via video if there's an open seat. Using Blab feels similar to Google Hangouts and Facebook Live Video, with a little bit of Reddit thrown in. Blab emphasizes user engagement and is a platform that lets anyone chime in. As a live video discussion happens among multiple users, people can comment on the content right as it's happening. The average active user spends 65 minutes a day watching different blabs. Businesses and marketers currently use Blab to host after-shows, hold interviews, facilitate discussions, offer coaching and teaching (think webinar), and record podcasts. You can record blabs so users can view them whenever they want, giving marketers the ability to create permanent, valuable content. Blab From Your Smartphone To use Blab, you'll need an account. It's recommended that you log in with your Twitter account so it's easy to share your blab to your Twitter followers. Once you log in, you'll see some live blabs, a tab to see whom you're following, and the option to create your own blab. To start your own blab, click the grey and black "+" button in the center of the top navigation bar. When you create your own blab, you'll be asked to name your blab. You can also add tags. Tagging is one of the best things you can do for your blab, because it attracts a relevant audience not already connected to you. This helps a new audience find your blab as well as your business. Once you're hosting a blab, you can call in. You can also choose to lock the other seats to prevent anyone else from calling in or you can keep them open. To spread the word about your blab, click on the arrow in the options between the video and text. From here, choose any or all of the options to share your blab link on social media, in a message, or in an email. You'll be able to see who's joined the blab, as well as any conversations happening. To show their approval, viewers can give "high fives" to speakers by clicking on the hand symbols in the corner of the speaker's video. Get More Out of Blab Here are some tips to help your on-the-go broadcast go smoothly, get the most audience interaction, and increase viewership. Be Prepared Remember that Blab is live, which means there's no stopping, restarting, or editing things out. If discussions veer away, that's fine in many cases. If things fall stagnant, though, it's good to have a list of topics to get the conversation back on track. Keep an agenda in front of you with topics you want to cover during your blab. Add Value Being entertaining is always good when you want users to tune in, but providing high-value content will keep users both engaged and waiting for (or subscribing to) your next blab. One way to do this is to invite industry leaders to chime in on relevant topics. Another way to add value is to share a list of applicable resources in the comments during each blab. Be Ready to Respond to Users Anything that's live and allows for viewer participation has the risk of something going wrong. An angry customer may chime in, or chaos could break out in the comments among users. Keep an eye on the discussion as much as possible and watch out for discord from guests who video call-in with you. Finally, answer questions from people, and comment on the discussion. Promote Your Blab

9 Visual Tools to Create Awesome Social Media Images

9 Visual Tools to Create Awesome Social Media Images

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to create professional-grade social media visuals? Are you looking for budget-friendly tools to help? Visual content can increase your visibility on social media and support your branding. In this article, you'll discover nine free tools to help you create beautiful visual content for your social media profiles. Listen to this article: #1: Start With a High-Quality, Royalty-Free Image There are now dozens of free image resources out there. Pexels and Unsplash both offer thousands of high-resolution images for free and without the need for attribution. Unsplash focuses more on landscapes, while Pexels focuses on business and technology collections. With Pexels, you get access to a massive library of high-resolution images, which are perfect for a blog article, header, slide deck, or social media post. You can download and post any Pexels image for free. Pexels is also a compilation site, so they collect free images from other free image providers. This makes it a great one-stop resource. #2: Discover the Perfect Color Scheme Adobe Color CC (formerly Adobe Kuler) is Adobe's free color-scheme finder, which helps you determine complementary colors for your visual content. In other words, Adobe Color CC takes the guesswork out of picking colors. To start, paste the hex code of a desired color into one of the five color boxes below the color wheel. Next, select Complementary or Triad from the Color Rule drop-down menu at the upper left to quickly find the colors that will look best with that color. Adobe Color CC also allows you to drop in an image and it will automatically identify its four primary colors. This helps with choosing font colors, contrasting overlays, and icons within your post. #3: Take Advantage of Pre-made Icons With Flaticon, you get free access to over 144,130 (and counting) PNG icons. Looking for an email icon for a Facebook ad or Twitter image? You can choose from over 1,300 email icons and customize both color and size. Looking to create an infographic, cartoony advertisement, or Twitter image? Choose from over 1,800 "Avatar" icons. Flaticon's library is most useful when you need to create a visual post dedicated to an upcoming webinar, podcast, conference, and so on. #4: Reveal Optimal Contrasting Color ColorZilla is a Google Chrome plugin that allows you to see the hex, RGB code, official name, and gradients for any color within a browser window. Use the Color Picker function to find the best contrasting color for a call-to-action button or to emulate a peer's designs. The tool automatically copies the hex code of any "picked" color to your clipboard, making your visual design more efficient. Used in conjunction with Flaticon, you can quickly grab your "Brand Blue" and drop it into the color selector, ensuring you're downloading an icon that's the same color as your website logo. #5: Find Perfect Font Combinations Luckily, you don't have to be an expert in fonts. With Femmebot, you can access 25 of the top font combinations from font experts and see how these combinations look with graphics and images, as well as formatting. Femmebot's font recommendations are a great place to start with visual content. Once you get rolling, you'll quickly find the font combinations that appeal to you (and your audience) the most. #6: Put It All Together in a Visual Content Tool Now that you have your visual tools, you need a platform to actually create the content; one that helps you create something that looks like it came from a professional graphic designer. Below is a simple example of a great-looking social media post from Buffer. Let's see if we can't recreate it using free visual content creation platforms: Canva, Google Drawings, and PicMonkey. Get All of the Help You Need With Canva Canva was built for creating visual social media content. As such, it's a tool that gives you a great result fast.

How to Use LinkedIn to Connect With Prospects

How to Use LinkedIn to Connect With Prospects

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use LinkedIn to find business opportunities? Are you looking for tips to reach new leads? LinkedIn has a number of features that make it easy to develop relationships with the right prospects for your business. In this article, you'll discover four ways to use LinkedIn for business. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Warm Prospects With over 420 million global members, LinkedIn is the best social media platform for businesses to find and connect with potential prospects. It provides an effective way to bypass gatekeepers and directly access your ideal clients. Finding and connecting directly with these decision-makers will not only save you time and energy, but will also make you more successful in your prospecting activities. The best place to start is with warm prospects, and here's where to look for them. Who's Viewed Your Posts If you post on LinkedIn Publisher, you can find warm prospects on the Who's Viewed Your Posts page. Look below the graph and demographics for each post, and you'll see a list of every person who has interacted with the post. You can view them by Likes, Comments, and Shares, and you can even see what they said in their comment or share. Not only are these people familiar with you, but they've also had a positive interaction with your content. If you find someone who matches your target client, send a personalized connection request mentioning their comment or share. Followers Look at the top of your followers list to see the people you're not connected to. These people like your content and posts so much they've chosen to follow you and receive notifications about you, even though you're not connected to them. Be sure to do a little research and look for a good reason to connect when you send a personalized connection request to them. Updates On your Updates page, you'll find every piece of content you've interacted with, whether you posted it or just engaged with it. Scroll through your most recent interactions. In each post, look at the people who posted or commented. If you hover over their name, you'll be able to see if you're connected with them. If you aren't connected and would like to be, go to their profile page and send a connection request that references the post. Who's Viewed Your Profile The people listed on the Who's Viewed Your Profile page are people who have visited your profile. If you have a free account, you can look below the graph at the top to see the last five people who've viewed your profile. If you have a premium account, you'll have access to the entire list for the last 90 days. If you see anyone you're not connected to and connecting would be a benefit, consider sending a connection request. When personalizing it, find another reason he or she would find value from connecting; not just saying, "I saw you viewed my profile." If seeing your profile was a good enough reason to connect, that person would have already sent you a connection request. #2: Create Trust It doesn't help you to simply "collect connections." Once you've found and connected with potential prospects or partners, it's important to build a relationship with your connections. There are a number of ways that you can strengthen your relationships and stay top of mind. Comment and Share An easy way to interact and get on the radar of your connections is to comment on or share their status updates and Publisher posts. Ensure that you tag them when appropriate, as this both alerts them to your share or comment and also gives them exposure to your network. In the case of both comments and sharing, always make sure that your engagement with your connection makes sense and doesn't come across as spammy or unprofessional, and that you only post content that will be of real benefit or interest to your network. Make Introductions Few things leave as strong an impression as when someone gives witho...

Content Curation: How to Easily Find Great Content to Share

Content Curation: How to Easily Find Great Content to Share

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you curate content for your blog and social media sites? Want to discover how to find remarkable content to share? To learn how to explore content curation, I interview Ian Cleary. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Ian Cleary, the founder of RazorSocial, a marketing tech blog focused on social media tools. His blog has been awarded a top 10 social media blog by Social Media Examiner in 2013 and 2014. Ian is also a very popular speaker. Ian explores content curation, why it's valuable and tools that make the discovery of new content easy. You'll discover what content curation is, why it's important and how to find and share relevant content. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Curation Ian's journey After more than 15 years in technology, Ian started doing social media consultancy and training. He wanted an international business that combined his knowledge of tools, technology and social media, which led him to RazorSocial. Ian explains when he started the blog just over two years ago, he initially focused on guest blogging. Ian developed relationships with other people in the industry, seeking out opportunities to guest post on similar sites. It got his name out there and drove traffic to his site, which was the intent. He then had to make sure his site had really good content. Ian now has more than 100,000 visitors to the site every month. They run webinars and sell online training. Ian's primary focus is to still build relationships and provide quality content. "People are prepared to buy our premium content because they know we deliver good content all the time," he says. Listen to the show to hear more about Ian's networking strategy and the story of how we first met. What is content curation? Ian believes that content curation is about finding relevant content and sharing it in a meaningful way. For example, if you do a weekly roundup post, don't just list article titles and links, instead add the reason why each post is interesting. Curated content can be your own articles, as well as posts from others. When Ian compiles his email newsletter, he'll put in his latest posts, but he also picks out some of his popular older articles, and points out why he thinks they would be valuable for his readers. Listen to the show to discover how Ian curates his own content.  Why marketers should care about curating content Ian explains how content curation builds up a marketer's authority. If your audience trusts you because you consistently share good content, when you share your own material, they're more likely to engage. On the flip side, if you share consistently bad or irrelevant content from other sources, people won't be as interested when you share your own articles. Listen to the show to find out how Social Media Examiner curates other people's content. Ian's content sharing strategy When Ian shares other people's content on Facebook and other social media platforms, he puts a line before the article link explaining what the article's about and why it's interesting. Ian also explains how he curates content for posts on his blog. For example, he recently did an article on podcast tools. He reached out to podcasters, and asked for their three favorite podcast tools. He compiled the response and wrote a summary. This type of post is both valuable and shareable. The influential people in the article share the post. Plus, Ian created a custom image with a picture of everyone in the article.

Pinterest Marketing: What Marketers Need to Know to Succeed

Pinterest Marketing: What Marketers Need to Know to Succeed

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering if Pinterest can help your business? Do you want to get more traffic from your Pinterest account? To learn more about the power of Pinterest for marketers, I interview Beth Hayden for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Beth Hayden, author of the new book Pinfluence: The Complete Guide to Marketing Your Business on Pinterest.  Beth shares her insights into how Pinterest can drive more traffic to your website or blog. You'll learn tips and techniques on what images work best on Pinterest and why content behind the image matters. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest for Marketers Beth talks about the demographics of Pinterest users. The latest number of Pinterest users is about 11 million. Up to 80% of Pinterest users are women between the ages of 25 and 55. Beth says that the demographic is shifting and there are more men joining. Pinterest users are fairly affluent, with a salary of $50,000+. Discover Beth's theory behind the success of Pinterest and why there's something addictive about it. Listen to the show to find out more about Pinterest and how it draws you in. What Pinterest offers marketers. Beth shares how Pinterest is a great source of referral traffic for websites and blogs, even when compared to other social media sites.  At present, Pinterest is driving more referral traffic than LinkedIn, Google+ and YouTube combined. And the only social media site driving more traffic than Pinterest is Facebook. You'll learn how Pinterest can drive referral traffic back to your blog or website as Beth goes through all of the steps involved. You'll discover what makes Pinterest different from Twitter, Instagram and Facebook. The secret is in Pinterest's simple model of videos and images on boards that are linked back elsewhere. Listen to the show to understand how this visual billboard platform can work for you. What social actions happen on Pinterest. On Pinterest there are three action buttons: Repin, Like and Comment. Beth explains the importance of repinning—how every time something is repinned, it's shared with the person's followers—and how this becomes exponential. You'll also discover what works best on Pinterest between liking, repinning and commenting on pins and the reasons why they are different. Beth shares why she believes that people should take more advantage of commenting on pins. It's an opportunity for marketers to create more engagement. Listen to the show to learn how to get more out of your Pinterest marketing. How pinboards work. Beth explains how pinboards are collections of images and videos. Beth describes the process as creating a collage out of images that you cut from magazines. Beth suggests making your boards as specific as you can. For example, instead of having a generic recipe board, you need to be more specific and maybe break it out into entrée recipes or dessert recipes. The more specific you are, the easier it is for people to see your interests. Listen to the show to hear why the pinboard is the heart of Pinterest and what the two key pieces are. How to build a following.  Beth believes that a following on Pinterest is as important as a following on any other social media site. Building a following on Pinterest can take more time than on other social media sites, even if you are fairly active. You should consider quality over quantity because you want to have an engaged audien...

Twitter Marketing: How Smart Marketers Are Succeeding

Twitter Marketing: How Smart Marketers Are Succeeding

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for your business? Want to discover how to use the latest Twitter updates? To learn more about Twitter marketing, I interview Joel Comm. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joel Comm, a serial entrepreneur and the author of 12 books. His latest project is an apparel brand you can find at DoGoodStuff.com. Joel's latest book is Twitter Power 3.0: How to Dominate Your Market One Tweet at a Time. In this episode Joel will explore new updates to Twitter, along with video, his favorite apps and more. You'll discover how to use Twitter more effectively. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Marketing How Joel got involved with Twitter Joel, who has been building businesses online since 1995, likes to explore different technology and new ways to communicate. Twitter and microblogging interested Joel, since he had already been blogging for several years. In May 2007 Joel posted his first tweet. "In true, first-tweet form, it was utterly forgettable," Joel recalls. "I think it was something like 'Trying to figure out what this Twitter thing is.'" That was about it, until six months later, when Joel gave Twitter another try. He looked more closely, and decided Twitter was a cool platform for engagement. Sometime in 2008, after Joel accumulated about 5,000 followers, a friend told him John Wiley & Sons was looking for somebody to write a book on how to use Twitter for business. They connected and hit it off. The first edition of Twitter Power came out in February 2009. At the time, many were still trying to figure out Twitter, which posed the question, "What are you doing?" "We began to realize the heart of social media is about sharing life, relationships, the journey that we are on together," Joel says. "It's the points of commonality that we have in many of these mundane activities ... that bring us closer together. Therein lies the power of Twitter to connect people." An organic tweeter, Joel uses Twitter.com and the Twitter app on his phone. For those who like to consolidate and schedule tweets, he recommends tools like SocialOomph and Hootsuite. Listen to the show to hear both of our initial thoughts on Twitter. How the retweeting process has changed In the past if people wanted to retweet something, they would have to take all of the original tweet's text, copy it and put "RT" in front of it. They could only comment if there was any space left in the 140 characters. Joel believes Twitter finally realized that when people want to retweet, they have something they want to say about it. So now, if you want to retweet, you can quote that tweet and still have 116 additional characters left to add to it. This change makes these retweets feel like more of a conversation, because it puts all related tweets together. The way it works is simple. If you are in the app, you can retweet and share as is or quote the tweet. If you are on the site and you click Retweet, it opens up a window and you can comment or just retweet. Listen to the show to learn what Joel thinks of the Twitter character limit. Twitter video Joel starts by talking about Vine. You can record a Vine video and it automatically goes to Twitter. In addition to doing a straight video, Vine allows you to do creative things. For example, you can hold down the recording button, let up with your thumb, then point in another direction and take some other video, until you've got your full segment. Joel finds native Twitter video more interesting,

Poland ME SEO | Efficient Marketing in Maine

by Martin Hosner @ Search Engine Marketing Company

WE ARE Poland SEO DOES YOUR Poland ME BASED BUSINESS NEED MORE LEADS? Fill Out Our Discovery Form We are a leading search engine optimization in Poland, Maine (ZIP: 4273). We have helped a lot of local businesses grow their revenue by ranking their website #1 in Google, Yahoo & Bing search engines. This is […]

Are free web sites a waste of time!

by veetoo @ Belfast based web site design company, Northern Ireland

Do free web sites really deliver? I received a message from a connection on Linkedin singing the praises of a free web site provider that allows you to automatically create a new web site from the content of your Linkedin profile. While, on the surface, this sounds great . . . I wonder if it really […]

The post Are free web sites a waste of time! appeared first on Belfast based web site design company, Northern Ireland.

3 Ways to Advertise on Twitter

3 Ways to Advertise on Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you thinking about running Twitter ads? Wondering what your options are? Twitter advertising isn't difficult to set up, and for a very small amount of money it can provide an additional stream of traffic, customers and revenue. In this article, you'll discover three cost-effective ways to advertise on Twitter. Determine Your Campaign Budget To control the cost of your campaign and minimize your risk, it's important to set a total and daily budget. This means you'll have to decide the value of a new follower, lead or click-through to your website. Listen to this article: When choosing the amount, you should pay less than the result is worth to you. Otherwise you'll lose money. Remember, though, to take into account the lifetime value of a new customer or lead, not just the initial value of that first action. When you're satisfied with the numbers, set aside the total amount of money you're prepared to spend; this is your total budget. Divide your total budget by the number of days you're going to run your campaign (say three or four days); this is your daily maximum budget. Adjust these figures as necessary, depending on your comfort level and the metrics that apply to your business. Remember, your first attempts at Twitter advertising should be viewed as an experiment. It's an investment in figuring out the winning formula for your business. When you have your budget figures ready, it's time to set up advertising for the three most effective objectives: increasing followers, traffic and leads. #1: Attract New Followers Follower campaign ads are designed to increase visibility and grow your followers. They appear as Promoted Tweets in the person's timeline, and as Promoted Accounts in the Who to Follow boxes on the Home, Profile, and Search results pages. To create a Promoted Account campaign, go to Twitter Ads. If this is your first time in Twitter Ads, you'll be prompted to enter your country, time zone and payment details. Next, choose Followers from the Select a Campaign Objective menu, and give your new campaign a name. Set the campaign dates and select the audience you want to target with your campaign. Next, enter the location, gender and language of the people you want to reach and the devices you want your ads to appear on. You can further target your audience by the people they follow, their interests, behaviors and demographics, the events they're interested in and even the pets they have. There's a wealth of options for targeting the audience for your ads, but you don't want to choose too many in one go. When you add more than one audience feature, your ads will be shown to people who fit any of the criteria, rather than all of them, thus broadening your audience instead of narrowing it. The more tightly targeted your audience is, the easier it is to see which ads are performing and which are not. If there's a number of things you want to target, it's better to split them into separate campaigns so you can measure the results more effectively. A sensible starting point for your first campaign might be simply to target people who follow a competitor, or people who have a particular interest that you can select from the list. You can also upload your own lists of people to target by their email address or Twitter ID, or retarget people who visited your website. Once you've defined your audience, choose an amount you're comfortable with to set your daily maximum budget and a total budget for the campaign. Click on Show Advanced Options to see your pricing options. I recommend you set either a target bid, or a maximum bid, depending on how much a new follower is worth to you. Next, create some tweets that will show in mobile and web timelines. In your tweets, include the words "Follow us" and tell people why they should follow you. I recommend that you don't include an image or any links,

SEO Wapiti WY

by @

SEO Wapiti WY

The post SEO Wapiti WY appeared first on .

Facebook Ad Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Ad Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you run Facebook ads? Are you familiar with the latest changes? To explore a number of recent changes to Facebook that will impact all advertisers, I interview Jon Loomer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jon Loomer, a marketing expert who specializes in Facebook advertising. Jon is host of the Social Media Pubcast and blogs at JonLoomer.com. Jon explores Facebook ad changes and what you need to know. You'll discover updates to the 20% text rule, custom audiences, and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Ad Changes The 20% text rule change Jon explains why the 20% rule was created and says that until recently, any Facebook ad image with more than 20% text would be rejected. The text ratio was measured by placing a grid over the image and if there was text in more than 5 out of the 25 boxes, it was considered over the 20% text limit. Since Facebook has abandoned the rule, advertisers can have as much text as they want in their image. However, the more text in the image, the less reach it will receive and the more it will cost to run such an ad. Now, when you upload an image to the Text Overlay tool, Facebook will rate the image as: OK, Low, Medium, and High. Facebook is general about the guidelines, Jon explains, but there is no longer a grid. Basically, zero text means it's OK, and 20% text is considered Low. However, if you compare Facebook's example for 20% to the actual 20% rule, it's actually a little bit more than 20%. Facebook says if you have been following the 20% rule until now, you probably won't see any changes. However, Jon thinks the system for detecting the text is a little buggy, although it's still early on. For instance, he talks about an image of nature that was flagged for having text. Jon says the best approach is to test it. Experiment with little or no text in your images, and compare the results. You'll need to determine what text you absolutely need. The logo is another potential issue since not all logos are created equal. Jon's logo has never been flagged. However, sometimes they detect it and sometimes they don't. Many advertisers and users love memes and big call-to-action text, and now they can boost them. Jon says you probably need to do a manual bid and bid really high to get that ad seen, but you never know. It may be extremely effective. Listen to the show to discover whether the text scale is at play on organic posts. Facebook custom audiences Jon is a big fan of Facebook custom audiences, which is creating audiences of people who have visited your website. It's powerful since these people already know who you are. However, Jon explains, there is a weakness in those audiences. All audiences aren't created equal. In an audience of people who have visited your site over the last 180 days, some visited once, others visited 50 times. Some people bounced after three seconds and don't even remember being there, while others have spent hours on your site. Until recently, you couldn't differentiate the two. With the new website custom audiences' advanced feature, you can create an audience based on frequency. For instance, base it on how many times someone has visited your website or performed one specific action, such as a purchase or a registration. Now, when Jon promotes his blog posts, instead of targeting all of his website visitors from the last 180 days, he focuses only on those who visited at least three times. The quality and the cost per website click have been much better.

Connecting With People: How to Be Human With Your Social Marketing

Connecting With People: How to Be Human With Your Social Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you struggle to connect with people on social media? Are you wondering how to be human with your social marketing? To learn why so many marketers struggle connecting with people via social media and what you can do to fix it, I interview Bryan Kramer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Bryan Kramer, a social business strategist, CEO of PureMatter and host of the From the Author's Point of View podcast. His new book is called Human to Human. Bryan shares what it takes for marketers to connect on a human level online. You'll discover the techniques that work best and examples you can use in your social marketing. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Connecting With People Why so many marketers struggle to connect with people via social media Bryan explains that marketers have always learned how to communicate, but never how to be social. Brands used to be able to push out one-way communication to their audience, and it was seen as acceptable. However, since social came about, human-to-human interaction has changed. Marketers now struggle to connect with people via social media because of fear. With the mass adoption of social media, it has enabled global and public conversations. Brands are now under a magnifying glass and are struggling to find their voice. Bryan expresses that there's still a lot of fear in the business community because of social. In his new book, Human to Human, he has divided the fears into three distinct categories. You'll hear an example for each category. Fear of not being on social media. Fear of saying the wrong thing. Fear of what engaging means for your company. Lady Gaga is a great example of someone who engages with fans in a more intimate setting, which is away from Facebook and Twitter. It's within this network that fans help her create content. This idea is perfect for brands that are afraid to dialogue with millions of people. They can instead measure it down to a group of people with whom they want to actually engage. For businesses to overcome their fears, they need to educate their audience and their employees. You need to help these people understand how to conduct a dialogue and how to be human online. Bryan explains that part of it is to understand the different senses, in the way you can interact with people and then teach it to them. With the sensory marketing that is available right now, there is something for everyone. Listen to the show to find out why it's important to start with one sense at a time. Explain what you mean by "In social, content is important, but context is HUGE." Bryan says that with the convergence of social, mobile and digital technology, it has changed the way we communicate with each other. It's become a floodgate of communication without context. This is where the problem lies. Over 90% of human communication is conveyed through video language queues. This means that if 90% of what you talk about in person has to be visual communication, then it leaves only 10% non-visual communication online. You'll hear what Matt Clark at Tweet Pages creates for prospects, and why it's a great example of human-to-human communication. This has led Matt to become a speaker for Social Media Marketing World 2014. It shows you how powerful the use of context is. Bryan shares why it's going the way it is now because of all of the social tools that are available to us.

4 Ways to Use Facebook and Twitter Analytics to Improve Your Marketing

4 Ways to Use Facebook and Twitter Analytics to Improve Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you overwhelmed by the amount of analytic data found on social media platforms? Want to know which metrics to follow? Knowing what to measure and how to apply the data makes it easier to modify your marketing for better reach, engagement, and visibility. In this article, you'll discover four ways social media insights can improve your marketing on Facebook and Twitter. Listen to this article: Measure What Matters Like any data set, social analytics have their share of vanity metrics that provide very little value. Paying attention to these vanity metrics can distract you from watching the metrics that help you take action and make decisions. For example, a sudden growth in likes or followers might make you feel great about your efforts, but by itself, it's a vanity metric that doesn't really tell you anything to help you adjust your marketing. Instead, focus on the analytics that are important to your strategy and goals, then review other data for trouble signs or trends that can impact your efforts. For example, if growing your engagement is a target goal in your strategy, then you need to zero in on per-post engagement levels to see what works and what doesn't. #1: Adjust Your Content Mix Twitter and Facebook both offer data on how well individual posts perform with your audience, including their reach and engagement. On Facebook, go to Insights > Posts > Post Types to review the engagement by the type of content you posted (post, link, image, video). On Twitter, you can see a snapshot of each post you've made by going to Settings > Analytics > Tweets. Pay close attention to this data, because it paints a clear picture about the type of content your audience is most interested in. You can review this data to see how your audience responds to the use of links, images, and video. For example, link shares might not do well overall by the numbers. Looking closer, you could discover that your audience may be less inclined to engage with curated links, but their heads turn when you post links to your own blog. Monitoring the data on engagement and reach vs. post type can help you tweak your approach to sharing content so that you're leveraging the types of content your audience prefers to digest and share. #2: Fine-tune Your Posting Schedule The majority of your audience may be up during the day, but that doesn't mean they're checking their social accounts at the same time. When they check, and on which days, can vary greatly from one audience to another. Your social metrics can tell you exactly when your audience is most likely to engage with your content. On Facebook, go to Insights > Posts > When Your Fans Are Online. For Twitter, you can use a tool such a Tweriod to find out when the bulk of your followers are online. This data is very important when you consider the limited real estate you get in social feeds. Getting the timing right on your content can make a huge difference. If you make a post early in the morning, but the bulk of your audience typically engages with your content in the afternoon, then that early morning post is likely to get buried, seen by only a small portion of your audience. Check your insights and analytics for peak engagement times. Experiment with different times and days to see when your audience is most likely to respond. Zeroing in on when they're most active will greatly improve your reach and engagement. #3: Inform Your Messaging Both Twitter and Facebook sit on a wealth of user data, including behavior, location, demographics, interests, lifestyle, employment, and more. Facebook arguably provides the most diverse data set, while Twitter also provides helpful audience information. Similar audience data is available in a variety of ways depending on the platform you're using. On Facebook, open the Ads Manager and go to Audience Insights. On Twitter, you can check your audience data by going to Settings > Twitter Ads > Analytics ...

8 Ways to Use Google+ Hangouts for Your Business

8 Ways to Use Google+ Hangouts for Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Google+ Hangouts? Interested in ways to use them for your business? Google+ Hangouts are a great way to hold group meetings, interact with customers, interview people and share your expertise. In this article you'll discover eight ways to use Google+ Hangouts for your business. Listen to this article: A Quick Introduction to Google+ Hangouts Before getting into ways to use Google+ Hangouts, here's a quick look at the types available. For public Google+ Hangouts, you'll want to choose Google+ Hangouts on Air. Google+ Hangouts on Air allow you to have up to 10 hosts in a live hangout that is publicly accessible on Google+, your YouTube channel and your website. You can record hangouts directly to your YouTube channel for future use. For private Google+ Hangouts, choose Google+ Video Hangouts, which allow you to have up to 10 participants in a video chat that is accessible only to the people invited. You can run Google+ Hangouts from your desktop browser or by using the recommended Google apps. Try running a private Google+ Hangout with yourself and a select group of people to start with, so you can install the proper browser software and test out the controls before you go live with a hangout. Google+ Hangout Controls & Apps At the top of a Google+ Hangout, you see controls that (from left to right) allow you to invite people to the hangout, mute your microphone, turn off your webcam, adjust your bandwidth settings, configure your video and sound settings and end the hangout. In the left sidebar you'll find apps that allow you to do specific things during the hangout, some of which are available only in hangouts on air, not in the video hangouts. These apps may also be ordered differently depending on which ones you choose to use or have used in the past. Starting at the top in the above image, you find the Group Chat app icon, which opens a chat box on the right side of your hangout. This is a great way to invite a person to interact during the hangout, even if he or she isn't one of the 10 people in the video with you. Next, you have the Screen Share app icon. This allows you to share your screen to show slides, live software demos and other information on your desktop. The Tag icon allows you to showcase links from websites of your choosing on the right side of the hangout. These can be links to your website, social profiles, landing pages and other items that your hangout attendees and viewers would need. The Q & A icon allows you to specifically start a Q&A in the hangout. The Camera icon enables you to take a screenshot of the hangout while it's live. You can use this feature at a specific point during the hangout to create a thumbnail image to use for your YouTube video preview. You can also use it anywhere you're planning to promote the hangout replay. The Video Camera icon allows you to control who is being shown during the hangout and how guests will appear when they join the hangout. Use the UberConference app icon to create a conference call number that people can use to call in to the hangout if they're unable to access the live video stream. The Control Room app icon allows you to quickly control which participants in the hangout are seen and heard. You can also use it to kick people out of the hangout if needed. The Hangout Toolbox app icon triggers a box of features you can use to further enhance your hangout. In the example below, you can see how to add a lower-third banner with your name tagline or a custom overlay image so every person on the hangout is identified when they're on video. The Effects app icon toggles special effects you can use on your video during the hangout. These are more for personal use than business use. Finally, there's a YouTube app icon that allows you to choose a YouTube video to stream live during your hangout.

Stoiximan Launches Affiliate Programme with Income Access

by The Income Access Team @ Income Access

New affiliate programme for Greek iGaming operator’s Stoiximan brand and Romania-facing Betano brand to be powered by Income Access platform […]

The post Stoiximan Launches Affiliate Programme with Income Access appeared first on Income Access.

How to Create LinkedIn Ads That Generate Results For Your Business

How to Create LinkedIn Ads That Generate Results For Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use LinkedIn to prospect for new business? Want to reach a highly targeted professional audience with your message? LinkedIn ads are an excellent way to increase visibility and generate leads. In this article I’ll explain the different types of LinkedIn ads and show you step by step how to set them up to reach the ideal audience for your business. Listen to this article: Why LinkedIn Ads? No matter what industry you're in, it's likely your business audience is on LinkedIn. The platform's 350+ million users are almost entirely businesspeople, so why not use ads to get in front of your ideal prospects? Ads increase your visibility, and therefore improve the "know, like and trust" factor. If your advertising budget equals or is more than $25,000 a quarter, you can get access to some amazing (and premium) advertising tools such as Lead Accelerator, display ads, sponsored InMails and sponsored groups. The alternative, which is perfect for small- to medium-sized businesses, is sponsored content (similar to Facebook news feed ads or sponsored tweets) and text ads (similar to PPC ads on Google, or Facebook ads). While LinkedIn ads tend to be more expensive than other platforms, they can be worth the money if you use their specific targeting options (companies, titles, education, etc.) and do micro-campaigns (instead of doing one big campaign that reaches 50,000 people, do 50 micro-campaigns that reach 1,000 people each). This reduces the cost, is easier to track and gives you more visibility. There are two ways to set up ads: cost per click (CPC) and pay per impression (mille) (PPM). When you do sponsored content, go with CPC, because people don't click through as much on sponsored updates. LinkedIn will keep showing your ad until they get their money, which is why micro-targeting is such a good idea. This is perfect if your strategy is to start getting recognition and visibility. When you do text ads, go with PPM. These ads are a good option for lead generation. For example, you can send a white paper or another incentive to get someone into your marketing funnel. Once folks feel like they know you because of your sponsored updates, they'll be more likely to click on the link, and then you'll have them in your funnel. #1: Get Started To use any ads on LinkedIn, you need to have a company page, which is easy to set up. Just click Interests and choose Companies from the drop-down menu. On the next page, click the Create button. Then input your company name and email address, and click Continue. Upload logos and content, and you're good to go. To set up an ad, go to the LinkedIn Ads page. Click Start Now to get started and then select the ad you want to set up. #2: Set Up a Sponsored Ad To set up a sponsored ad, click on Sponsor Content. First, type in a name for your campaign. Choose something specific that you can easily recognize and track. Then select your company. If you manage pages for a lot of companies, you'll get several options. Now, choose an update that you've already created or create direct sponsored content. The limitation of doing direct (new) sponsored content is that you get fewer characters to work with. To promote an update you've already created, you can use 600 characters plus an image. If you choose to promote new, direct sponsored content you'll have to limit your ad to 160 characters, and it won't show up on your company page. If you want to offer something that you don't want to show up on your company page, this is the route to go. Once you've selected the content, do your targeting. Choose your audience, and at the very least, you have to choose a location. Be as specific as possible. Then you can target by company or category (industry or company size). Focus on job title, job function or job seniority, as well as education. Another option is to target by group, because if you share a group,

Kickstarter: How Crowd Funding Is Changing Business

Kickstarter: How Crowd Funding Is Changing Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you considered crowd funding? Are you wondering how it can help your business grow? To learn about how Kickstarter has transformed the process of funding projects, I interview Richard Bliss for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Richard Bliss, host of the podcast Funding the Dream on Kickstarter. He's also a coach and consultant for crowd funding. Richard shares the do's and don'ts when it comes to creating a Kickstarter project. You'll learn the process in detail of how Kickstarter works for both the campaigner and the supporter. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Crowd Funding How would you describe Kickstarter? Richard believes that Kickstarter is a new phenomenon that most people are familiar with. He says the idea is similar to what happens in a church when they pass around a collection plate. The crowd helps fund an idea, a passion or something that they all would like to get more of. It's very public radio– and television–esque in its approach. Listen to the show to find out how Kickstarter has been around nearly 4 years and seems to have hit mainstream now.  Why entrepreneurs and marketers need to pay attention to Kickstarter Richard explains how Kickstarter is totally changing the rules of how we think about money. Traditionally it's the money that blocks us from fulfilling our dreams. However, what crowd funding and Kickstarter have done is made the money worry go away and that leaves us with "Now what do we do?" If you have an idea for a game or a project, for example, you can put it out there and Kickstarter allows you to go find like-minded people. These people want to see you succeed because they like what you are doing. We buy into people's passions. You'll hear an example of someone who wanted to do a tour through New Zealand taking video and photographs and how with help from Kickstarter, she achieved her goal. Kickstarter is not into causes, political campaigns, charities, funding businesses or equity. They are into one thing: If you have an idea for a project, which includes a beginning, an end and a deliverable, they will help you fund it. Richard describes what the deliverable can be and why it has to be clearly defined. You'll discover why the founders of Kickstarter built the platform and the reason it started with film and music. Listen to the show to find out how Richard picked the name for his podcast, Funding the Dream. Types of businesses that benefit from Kickstarter Richard explains how film is the largest category when it comes to sheer numbers. Sundance Film Festival has had 14 of their projects backed by Kickstarter. This year for the first time, an Academy Award was won by a Kickstarter project. Amanda Palmer made news when she raised more than $1 million to fund her new CD. Richard explains how Kickstarter has 13 different categories and 50 subcategories. One of the biggest categories that gets covered in the news is technology. Transformation is what is happening with Kickstarter and crowd funding. Every Kickstarter category that catches fire turns everything upside down. Richard gives an example of a project he has backed recently and how in the past you'd have to convince a bank to give you a business loan for your idea. But Kickstarter totally transforms the money. You'll hear the difference between reward-based and equity-based crowd funding. Richard tells the story of how his reputation led Kic...

How to Build Raving Fans in Unconventional Ways

How to Build Raving Fans in Unconventional Ways

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want enthusiastic fans? Looking for unique ways to engage your audience? To discover how he grew a large and thriving fan base, I interview Pat Flynn. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Pat Flynn, the founder of SmartPassiveIncome.com, a website dedicated to helping people start businesses. He's also host of the Smart Passive Income podcast and author of Will It Fly? Pat explores unconventional ways to build loyalty with your fans. You'll discover which forms of content are better than others for creating raving fans. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Build Raving Fans in Unconventional Ways The Beginning of Smart Passive Income Pat built the Smart Passive Income blog in the latter half of 2008 as a way to showcase how he was finding success with Green Exam Academy, a website with resources to help people pass the architecture exam. On the blog, Pat shared how he'd built his business, things he wished he would have done, and mistakes he made. In October 2008, he started including income reports (how many products he sold and how much money he made), not to show off but to provide inspiration. Pat believes that by keeping people in the loop of his activities and leading by example, others benefit from his knowledge. Over time, the Smart Passive Income blog became more about experimenting with new tactics, documenting, and sharing what Pat learned along the way. Pat says that's how he became known as the crash test dummy of online business. Back in 2008, if you had told Pat that he would be a leader in this space, he says he would have laughed. He didn't think that was what he wanted. Now Pat is owning the role, trying to lead by example and starting a movement of authentic entrepreneurship. Listen to the show to hear Pat explain more about crash test dummies. Nurturing Fans in the Early Days While Pat got a lot of encouragement via the comments on his blog for the first couple of years, he never thought of those commenters as fans. Then in July 2010, he started his podcast. Later that year, strangers came up to him at a conference and chatted like they were old friends. Nobody at the conference mentioned his blog. Pat thinks his fans connected more through the podcast rather than his blog because they viewed the podcast as more real. He explains that the written word gives you a feel for who a person is, but a podcast puts you in the ears of your listeners. For listeners, the feeling is similar to being part of a conversation. Pat says he's very much himself on air, and shares personal tidbits in each episode to help his audience relate to and connect with him. For example, at the beginning of every show, Pat's voiceover guy John Melley (who does our intros in a different accent) reads a random fun fact about Pat. For example, "Here's your host. He's a Sagittarius who loves long walks on the beach: Pat Flynn." or "Here's your host. He was an 11-pound, 12-ounce baby." Pat says he once met a woman at a conference who told him she loved his show and randomly added, "When I had my baby, he was also a giant." That small fact immediately connected them, because she could relate. When you share fun little facts about yourself, Pat notes, people can find something they have in common with you and decide to follow you. This isn't true only for podcasts; the same thing can happen on your blog or your video channel. Listen to the show to discover Pat's thoughts on using video versus a podcast to connect with people. Being Yourself

Building a Business on the Back of Interviews

Building a Business on the Back of Interviews

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you interview people for your blog or podcast? Want to discover different ways to repurpose those interviews? To explore how he built his business through expert interviews, I interview Nathan Chan. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Nathan Chan, the founder, CEO, and publisher of Foundr Magazine, a paid digital magazine that profiles well-known entrepreneurs. He's built a huge following of almost 1 million Instagram fans and 300,000 email subscribers. He's also launched a new book, Foundr V1.0: Everything you need to know about starting and building a successful business, from the world's most influential entrepreneurs. Nathan shares his interviewing process. You'll discover how Nathan used expert interviews to build his business. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Building a Business on the Back of Interviews The Start of Foundr In 2013, Nathan was working in IT support at a travel company. He loved the company culture, but the work wasn't a fit. As he searched for something more fulfilling to do, he noticed that the major business magazines, of which he was a fan, were difficult for him to relate to. His life wasn't like the lives of the people on a Forbes billionaire list. Nathan started his magazine with about $3,000 and a goal of filling the gap between major business magazine content and entrepreneurs like himself. He wanted to speak to aspiring young entrepreneurs (he was 26 years old at the time) and provide in-depth content about what it takes to build a successful business. Nathan says that podcasts inspired this vision for his magazine, too. Podcasts were becoming increasingly popular, featured stories about relatable people, and could cover a topic in depth. Four months into producing the magazine, Nathan and his startup magazine faced a major roadblock. A large business magazine sued Nathan's startup magazine for trademark infringement. Luckily, Nathan says, the rebranding of the magazine resulted in the name Foundr, which is a better fit. Listen to the show to learn more about how Nathan responded to the lawsuit by improving the magazine's branding. The Business Model Foundr has three main sources of revenue: magazine subscriptions, the membership site, and courses. The magazine subscription is $2.99/month or $21.99/year and is available through the iTunes and Google Play stores. Across monthly and yearly subscriptions, Foundr has 20,000 monthly readers. On the Foundr membership site, subscribers have access to premium content, an online community, and exclusive training. In addition to the main revenue sources, Foundr includes a bit of sponsorship and advertising. Listen to the show to discover the similarities between what Nathan and I do. Nathan's Interviewing Process Nathan has interviewed successful entrepreneurs including Richard Branson, founder of Virgin; Steve Case, founder of AOL; Arianna Huffington, founder of Huffington Post; Gary Vaynerchuk; Barbara Corcoran; Tim Ferriss; Robert Herjavec; Jessica Livingston, founder of Y Combinator; and others. Much of Nathan's interview preparation involves his day-to-day reading about and listening to the topics, brands, and people Foundr covers. He regularly looks at Facebook, reads what's happening in TechCrunch and Mashable, and follows podcasts to see what they're doing and whom they're interviewing. To help find guests, he looks for people who have books coming out or otherwise need press. By consuming a lot of content, Nathan is aware of what's happening in his space and how to guide the i...

Instagram Success: How a Marketer Grew a Loyal Following With Instagram

Instagram Success: How a Marketer Grew a Loyal Following With Instagram

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to grow your business using Instagram? Are you wondering how to build a loyal following? I interview Chalene Johnson for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast and explore how she amassed a following of 365,000 on Instagram. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Chalene Johnson. Chalene is author of the fitness book Push, a motivational speaker and her infomercials on fitness have sold millions of DVDs. She's found great success with Instagram and now teaches other small businesses how to do the same with her Instagram Impact course, and has a new podcast called Build Your Tribe. Chalene shares how she creatively used Instagram to grow her business. You'll discover how to take your Instagram marketing to the next level. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Instagram Success How and why Chalene started on social media Chalene says she started with YouTube in 2006 and Twitter in 2007 or 2008. In 2009, she got the idea for writing Push. When she told her agent she wanted to pitch a book about goal-setting and focus instead of a fitness book, he told her she didn't have the social media following or the credibility to write that type of book.  She got to work and spent a year using social media to build a platform with the intention of writing the book she wanted to pitch to publishers in New York. Listen to the show to hear how Chalene used social media when she first started. What Chalene built to support her book pitch Chalene shares that she had a ton of followers on YouTube and had just started a Facebook page when she decided to write Push. Even though she had millions of DVD customers, her agent had to remind her that publishers don't care who you know; publishers want to know if you have the ability to reach those people. To build her email list, Chalene created a 30-Day Challenge for her Facebook audience. She started with three quick videos to show how she uses her phone to organize her daily to-do list and included a simple email opt-in. Every day she delivered a 2-minute video to her email subscribers. The list grew to 100,000 in 9 months. Listen to the show to find out how Chalene collected emails from her subscribers. How Chalene got started with Instagram After successfully using Facebook to build her email list, Chalene says she was able to land the publishing deal she wanted and the book was released in December 2011. Then she noticed she wasn't getting any love on Facebook. She didn't want to learn about Facebook ads and shares that she kind of picked up her toys and stomped off the playground. That's when she began to realize her kids were all over Instagram but businesses weren't. In winter 2012, Chalene decided to become an early settler on Instagram. She started with life-casting, sharing personal images to show where she was and what she was doing during the day. Listen to the show to find out how following a favorite fashion icon drastically changed Chalene's Instagram strategy. How Instagram has changed Chalene's business Chalene shares that as a business owner and someone with a family, Instagram saves her time. She says instead of spending hours creating content, she can now spend literally 15 seconds and produce content to drive traffic to an opt-in for current or future offers. Unlike Facebook, Instagram allows her to put a call to action (CTA) in every post without affecting her engagement. Listen to the show to discover what Chalene track...

How to Create Social Media Videos on a Budget

How to Create Social Media Videos on a Budget

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to add video to your social media content mix? Looking for ways to keep production costs low? Creating a video doesn't have to cost you hundreds of thousands of dollars in high-end production tactics like live actors or 3-D renderings. In this article you'll discover how to create and promote social media video on a budget. Listen to this article: #1: Decide What to Feature in Your Video Here are four ways you can create great video content without breaking the bank. Repurpose User-Generated Content A great example of repurposing user-generated content for a video comes from Coca-Cola, which leveraged their "Share-a-Coke" campaign into big corporate success. To incorporate this strategy in your own marketing, encourage your audience to tell their own stories on social channels like YouTube and Facebook using your campaign hashtag (which was #ShareACoke in the Coca-Cola campaign). You can then aggregate memorable content and repurpose it into broadcast-worthy video spots. While Coke launched its campaign around the Share-A-Coke idea, the soft drink giant tracked and grew their global efforts through the aforementioned hashtags. As a marketer, you can leverage readily available user-generated content and create a winning campaign even without a Coca-Cola-sized budget. Collect Royalty-Free Content The first step is to determine whether there is enough free content about your subject available online (the definition of "free" is content with no royalties). Resources like Flickr and YouTube are great places to start this research. If you want to do a viral video about lamps, for example, do a keyword search on Flickr for "lamps" and see how many compelling images you can find about the topic. Create Your Own Content If you feel that you don't have enough content available, you may need to simply grab an iPhone and snap your own pictures or record short video snippets. Marketing consultant and social media coach Mark Schaefer spoke recently on how he worked with a small family-owned winery in France and struck gold with a simple video called "How to Open a Bottle of Wine Without a Corkscrew." The video, without any paid media behind it, generated over 10 million views and catapulted the winery to stardom. One fascinating postscript here is that this video was amazingly successful when 221 other videos posted didn't achieve quite the same notoriety. Persistence is key here. Record Others Taco Bell generated 150,000 views on YouTube by simply recognizing a trending hashtag called "Drawing My Life" and then filming an artist as he drew simple thoughts about the brand. While Taco Bell certainly has the budget and the creative chops to create its own spots, hashtags, and launch campaigns, it's staggering to note how easily the fast-food chain generated buzz just by riding the coattails of another trend. Regardless of the type of video content you choose, the trick is to keep it simple. The reality of user-generated content or even self-generated content is that you immediately cut out thousands, if not millions, of dollars in cost. Additionally, from a branding perspective, you add a degree of authenticity to your voice by placing a true image of your customer in front of other customers. #2: Create Your Video So Taco Bell pulled off a great video with very little cost. The question is: How can you do it? Creating content that people actually want to see doesn't have to be difficult. If you create compelling content, users will engage with it in the form of shares, likes, comments, and even direct lead creation. You don't need extensive video editing skills, but those always help. You can use affordable editing tools like Adobe Premiere Pro to edit and build complex storyboards. If you're just getting started and don't want to invest in anything, you can use YouTube's free and quick Creator Studio,

Measuring Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

Measuring Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you understand how to measure social media activities? Do you know how to gather the right data to help you achieve your business goals? To explore how you can measure social media activities, I interview Lutz Finger for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Lutz Finger, who is the director of data analytics at LinkedIn and co-author of the new book, Ask, Measure, Learn: Using Social Media Analytics to Understand and Influence Customer Behavior. Lutz shares why he's so interested in social analytics. You'll discover why Lutz believes social media analytics will have a bigger impact than the onset of the Internet did. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Measuring Social Media Why do so many businesses struggle with measuring social media activities? Lutz talks about the trial-and-error phase of social media measurement and how we've moved beyond that phase in some areas but are still learning in others. He says the promise of social media analytics has a lot of misconceptions around it. With easy access to data on trending content, followers, Klout scores, etc., businesses are trying to find a way to use the data. Lutz explains why this approach often leads to a negative outcome and why businesses should approach using data with a goal or question first. Lutz shares why it's important to understand how a metric is built and points to the Influencer metric as an example. He says that while there are at least 10 different Influencer metrics that have to do with reach, not every influencer can help fulfill every goal. He explains why he would consider Social Media Examiner an influencer if he wanted to put a new social tool in front of people who work with social media, but not if he wanted to sell clothing. Listen to the show to learn what influencer reach must be combined with to move people from awareness to intention. The difference between viral and contagious content Lutz says the term viral, when used to describe social media content, is wrong because something that's viral is equally infectious at every stage. For example, a story that is liked by 1 in 10 people the first time it's seen will be liked by 1 in 10 people in the future. He explains that when something is contagious, it gains weight as long as it travels. The more people who believe in it, the more trustworthy the story becomes, regardless of whether it's true. Listen to the show to find out how people convince an algorithm that something is contagious and how that's affected things like the New York Times Bestseller List. How social media data can empower a business Lutz states there isn't good or bad data, there's just useful and useless data. He explains that data is only useful when a business has the right question. He shares that many organizations start by asking what data they have and how they can measure it. Then they try to find something in the data to help their business. Lutz says you need to start with a question or goal, and then figure out how to capture the data that will help answer that question instead of using data to come up with a question you didn't have in the first place. He illustrates how a sales department can use data to answer the question, "How can we find new clients?" Listen to the show to discover why sentiment is an especially difficult metric to measure. How marketers can start measuring social media activities Once you have the question,

16 Writing Tools for Social Media Marketers

16 Writing Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you create copy for social media posts? Do you want some tools to help you improve the quality of your posts? Whether you work on your own or with a team, there are tools that make it more likely your social media posts will publish without errors and with correct word counts. In this article you'll discover 16 writing tools for social media marketers. Listen to this article: #1: WriteRack Do you frequently post tweets that are longer than the maximum 140 characters? If so, you'll need to send a "tweetstorm," or a series of tweets one right after the next. Doing this manually can be time-consuming. Instead of writing out each tweet, sign up for WriteRack and put your entire long tweet into the tool. It then divides it up, numbers it, and posts all of your tweets at once. Done and done! #2: Slick Write Slick Write is a user-friendly website that lets you copy and paste your social content directly into an analysis window. Slick Write analyzes your writing to find grammatical, spelling, and punctuation errors. Depending on the level of editing you want, settings can even be adjusted to catch mistakes like biased language and gender-specific pronouns. #3: Help.PlagTracker Originality is one of the most important components of any social media post. If you have a lot of competitors active on social media, you'll want to stand out as a unique brand. Run all of your posts through the Help.PlagTracker website before you publish them. This helps you to ensure originality and avoid the pitfalls of plagiarism. #4: Polish My Writing Polish My Writing (also known as After the Deadline) is a user-friendly grammar correction website that goes a step further. You can use it to get style suggestions for your content. The words to be corrected are simply underlined in red, blue, or green (depending on the correction), so the writing isn't cluttered or crowded as you edit. #5: Ulysses Ulysses is an app for anyone who does a lot of writing. The app lets you write no matter where you are, and will organize all of your writing in one place (including texts, new content, email, and writing projects). If you're in charge of managing a social media account, it can save you a lot of time by allowing you to access and organize your content at any time. The app costs $24.99. #6: Writefull Have you ever toggled back and forth between your word processor and Google trying to figure out if the phrases you want to use are correct or accurate? This works, but it's also intrusive and leads to distraction. Writefull is an app that integrates with your word processor to take over the role of Google. You can find out on the spot whether your phrases make sense. #7: Word Counter If you're planning to send out a lot of tweets about an upcoming product launch or a new promotion, you'll need to word them perfectly to make the most use of Twitter's 140-character limit. You can achieve this easily by using Word Counter. #8: Grammar Monster Grammar Monster won't correct your writing, but it will help prevent mistakes in the first place. Grammar Monster is an educational site where you'll find grammar and writing lessons, quizzes, grammar tips of the day, and a huge selection of grammar rules divided into categories. #9: Spellchecker Pretty much as you would expect, Spellchecker is a website that will quickly and accurately check your writing for spelling errors. #10: Grammar Check Grammar Check lets you copy and paste your content into its editing software. The site will then correct everything from dangling modifiers to unnecessary ellipses. #11: Papers Gear Editor Papers Gear is a professional custom writing service. You can hire an editing team to proofread and check grammar on your blog, articles, website copy, social media content, and any other important documents for your business. You can also get assistance with formatting your content. #12: Hemingway App

Blogging Success: How to Create Content People Love

Blogging Success: How to Create Content People Love

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to drive more traffic to your website? Would you like to create content that people would go crazy for? To learn the secrets of attention-grabbing blog posts that generate traffic, I interview Michael Hyatt for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Michael Hyatt, author of Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World, former CEO of Thomas Nelson Publishers, and the host of the This Is Your Life podcast. Michael shares his experiences as a successful blogger and content creator. You'll learn why headlines and photos are the most attention-grabbing aspects of your articles. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Creation Michael tells the story of when he first started blogging in 2004. He was the CEO at Thomas Nelson and saw blogging as a means to communicate with his own employees. It was a way to be innovative, rather than sending out standard email newsletters. It wasn't until someone suggested opening it up to the public that he thought it was a cool idea and maybe could become an archive for his best thinking. Listen to the show to hear about Michael's blogging schedule when he first started. What evergreen content brings to your website Michael's blog today averages around 300-400 blog comments a day. Michael explains that about half of his traffic comes from older posts. These include posts that he wrote 2-3 years ago that still get a huge amount of comments today. Michael shares how he promotes his older posts. One of the tactics he uses is to bulk upload and schedule tweets in SocialOomph for older articles such as this one: Our words carry enormous weight. More than we sometimes think. "How Our Words Impact Others." mhyatt.us/gIC8Vn — Michael Hyatt (@MichaelHyatt) November 18, 2012   Michael had the idea from when he was working in the book publishing world. Publishers have two types of books: new books (newly published or yet to be released) and a backlist (an archive of content). For large publishing companies such as Thomas Nelson, 50-60% of their revenue can come from their backlist. Most bloggers don't have a strategy for this. They write it, it disappears and then it's gone forever. Listen to the show to find out Michael's secret for keeping his older blog posts up to date and continuing to drive more traffic. How to write killer blog posts Over time Michael has written about 1,400 posts. You'll learn how he tries to start from the reader's perspective and frame everything in terms of his or her needs. Somebody once said, "People are tuned into WIIFM (Whats In It For Me)." You have to write from this particular viewpoint if you're going to be successful. Look at what other people's hopes, fears, frustrations and obstacles are. And don't assume that everybody knows what you know. Michael talks about how a lot of his how-to articles stem from what he needs to find out and then he documents the process for his readers. These articles bring him a ton of traffic every day. Listen to the show to learn why the how-to articles have been the most successful for Michael. Topics to write about Michael explains how he uses "intentional leadership" as a filter for content on his website. He shares how he might look at a current event and reframe it into a leadership lesson. You'll also learn how to decide what to publish on your site and how to stay focused on being good at what you do. Listen to the show to find out why giving away you...

Blog Comments: Should Your Blog Shut Down Comments?

Blog Comments: Should Your Blog Shut Down Comments?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you like to get comments on your blog? Have you ever wondered if you should allow comments or shut them down? To learn about why blog comments are valuable to your business, I interview Mark Schaefer and Tim McDonald for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mark Schaefer, who is a college educator and author of four books. His blog is called Grow and his latest book is Social Media Explained. Tim McDonald is the director of community at the Huffington Post, founder of My Community Manager and a member of the No Kid Hungry Social Council. Mark and Tim share what comments mean to their blogs, and some of the challenges they face with moderation. You'll discover the upside of blog comments, how you can use them to improve your business and moderation tactics for different-sized blogs. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog Comments A long time ago, Seth Godin shocked the industry when he decided to shut down comments on his blog. He didn't really care for comments—for him it was more about generating daily content. More recently, Brian Clark and his team at Copyblogger decided to shut down their blog comments. As a result of this, there has been a lot of interesting dialogue in this space. The upside of blog comments Mark explains how there are a lot of different business reasons behind blogs, and it's up to each individual business to make the decision whether to have comments on their blog. He says that there are probably some very good economic reasons why Copyblogger decided to remove comments, but Mark thinks that blog comments are the economic engine. The community that Mark has built on his blog has led to many different business benefits for him and his community. You can get to know people in the comment area, which can lead to collaborations, customers and suppliers. Mark feels that a lot of influence takes place in the blog communities, where you can develop strong relationships compared to the ones you make on Twitter or Facebook. You'll hear other great benefits that come from comments on your blog, and why Mark sees them as a gift every day. The Huffington Post has a little bit of a different viewpoint, just because of their sheer size. They face a bigger challenge because of the number of comments they get every day. It's hard for them to actually interact and engage with every single commenter. Tim explains at this point, it's a matter of them looking at some of the prolific commenters on their site and working with them. They've found that some commenters don't want to write for them, they are happy just commenting. Listen to the show to find out the cost of engagement, and why you can engage yourself broke. Some of the challenges the Huffington Post faces with blog comments Tim says that the biggest issue for them is to figure out how to allow people to share and express their thoughts on content, while appreciating that the standard for commenting is different from their editorial standards. They have to find ways to moderate this effectively with the different languages, countries and time zones. You can't replace a human when it comes comment moderation. You need to find a balance between using technology, combined with what people can do. You'll hear how the Huffington Post deals with heated dialogue and negative comments on their blogs. When it comes to dealing with spam, last year they made all commenters authenticate ...

Snapchat and Podcasting Growth: What the Research Reveals

Snapchat and Podcasting Growth: What the Research Reveals

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering if you should get into Snapchat? Is podcasting something you're considering? To discover more, I interview Tom Webster from Edison Research about his latest study on Snapchat and podcasting adoption. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Tom Webster, vice president of strategy and marketing at Edison Research and co-host of the Marketing Companion podcast. Tom is a specialist in consumer behavior and media consumption. Tom will explore his brand-new research from The Infinite Dial, focused on Snapchat and podcast adoption. You'll discover reasons to embrace Snapchat and podcasting for your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Snapchat Growth About the study Research from The Infinite Dial series dates back to 1998, according to Tom, and it's the longest-running study on digital habits, behaviors, and consumption. They have trending graphs for areas, such as Internet radio, that go back to 1998. Plus, they've measured all kinds of behaviors and patterns in relation to consumption of audio, video, social, and mobile. Tom has been involved with the study and has been the voice of the studies on webinars since 2004. When the series started in 1998, it was focused more on digital audio. While today's brands and streaming audio like Pandora and Spotify weren't around back then, there were plenty of others. For example there was Broadcast.com, which Mark Cuban sold to Yahoo, NetRadio, Spinner, AOL Radio, and lots of other fledgling brands, Tom explains. The survey was a means to track them and put them in their place in the universe. As behaviors started to migrate to various media (as opposed to the text-driven medium that it had been previously), The Infinite Dial started tracking that too. Over the years, they added podcasting, social media, and so on. Essentially, if people do it online, The Infinite Dial is interested in measuring how it's consumed. The Infinite Dial's goal was always to create the survey of record in the various fields covered, so they spend nearly six figures in hard costs on mobile and landline telephone sampling to make a study that's random, representative, and projectable to the United States population. Tom loves coming out with new facts every year that corroborate what he sees people do online. Listen to the show to learn more about the survey sampling and why they survey via telephone. Podcast growth One of the things Tom loves about doing survey research is that although it reflects the current state of America, it typically lags behind what the digerati think. It can lag by quite a bit, he says, but if it's a real thing, it eventually gets there. The Infinite Dial added podcast tracking back in 2007. Two years ago, before Serial popularized podcasting, research showed that 15% of Americans 12+ listened to a podcast in the past 12 months. While that's a huge number (tens and tens of millions of Americans), it had been growing steadily, but not exponentially. Podcasting inched up from 9% in 2008 to 11% to 2009. And to 12% in 2010. For a short time, podcasting plateaued before jumping to 15% in 2014. After Serial came out, there was enormous advertiser, brand, and insider interest in podcasting. Listenership went from 15% in 2014 to 17% in 2015. In 2016, podcast listening has surpassed 21% already. That's a 24% increase year over year in the percentage of Americans who listened to a podcast. The Serial effect didn't happen immediately, Tom continues, although it made people a lot more aware of the on-demand content out ther...

How to Optimize Your Facebook Posts With Facebook Audience Insights

How to Optimize Your Facebook Posts With Facebook Audience Insights

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to increase your Facebook engagement? Interested in discovering what content appeals to your audience? With Facebook Audience Insights, you can get the information you need to tailor content to your audience's preferences. In this article you'll find out how to use Audience Insights to optimize your Facebook posts. Why Facebook Audience Insights? Facebook Audience Insights is a social media marketer's dream come true. It was designed as a tool for targeting Facebook ads, but it also provides a treasure trove of data on your current audience, target market and competitors' customer bases. Listen to this article: Simply plug in your page or a heap of desired demographic data, including age, gender, location, interests, finances, employment, income, family structure, purchase behavior and more. Here are some ways to tap into this data to optimize Facebook posts for your audience, increasing organic reach and engagement without advertising. #1: Use Lifestyle Data to Create Personas The Lifestyle data in Audience Insights creates mini-personas based on demographic data, purchase behavior, brand affinity and interests. Though the personas are rather broad, they lay the foundation for a comprehensive picture of who your audience is. The Apple Pie Families lifestyle persona comprises 7% of the U.S. Facebook audience over age 18. Facebook defines this persona as "upper-middle class couples with school-age children . . . homeowners, often minivan drivers and avid radio listeners." From this snippet of information, you can picture the lives of this audience. You can envision parents driving their children to school in the morning, listening to the radio. After family dinners, the children retreat to their rooms to do their homework on weeknights. You can speculate these are parents who are highly present in their children's lives. They are involved, informed, and in some ways, defined by their status as parents. So how does this information translate into writing posts that will capture this audience's attention and motivate them to act? You do it on their terms. Consider what is likely on their minds right now, and how your brand can assist in quelling their anxieties and make their life better overall. When it comes to audience personas, it's all about framing. Say you're running a promotion. Could you adjust the timeframe and the scope of the promotion to frame it as a back-to-school campaign? Or more broadly, how could the campaign speak to the everyday joys and challenges of parenthood? For example, the largest Facebook audience segment for Kraft Foods is Apple Pie Families. In this August post the company includes a link to kid-friendly recipes. Understanding that at the time, a large segment of the audience was likely focused on sending the kids back to school, Kraft Foods adjusted their content not only to grab their audience's attention, but also to provide information people could put into action. #2: Gauge Interests and Affiliations With Page Likes You can learn a lot about an audience segment based on the Facebook pages they like. Think of this information less like a report on other businesses and more like a key interest breakdown. The Page Likes section of Facebook Audience Insights is comprised of the top pages liked in each category and the pages most likely to be relevant to your audience. This combined data helps you continue piecing together a comprehensive persona. Page Likes let you see insight into what your audience's political affiliations are, which media outlets they follow, where they shop, what organizations they support, what apps they use and more. From a macro perspective, study this data to get into the heads of your audience. Add to the picture you started to form from Lifestyle data. What do these people talk about with their friends? How do they spend their spare time? What issues do they care about?

Meerkat and Periscope: How Businesses Are Using Live Mobile Broadcasting

Meerkat and Periscope: How Businesses Are Using Live Mobile Broadcasting

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you interested in live mobile broadcasting? Have you tried Meerkat or Periscope? To learn about mobile broadcasting apps, I interview Brian Fanzo. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Brian Fanzo, partner and chief digital strategist at Broadsuite, a company that helps businesses succeed with social and mobile marketing. Brian is one of the leading authorities on Meerkat and Periscope. In this episode Brian Fanzo will explore the live mobile broadcasting apps Meerkat and Periscope and what they mean for your business. You'll discover the pros and cons of each platform, as well as how to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Meerkat and Periscope How Brian got started with mobile broadcasting Brian, who calls himself a change evangelist, has a technology background and a love of social media. He is always looking for ways people can leverage technology to be more productive and tell their story in unique ways. Brian likes to jump on every new app: it’ll either fail fast, and he’ll uninstall it or he'll run with it! Mobile broadcasting definitely falls into the later category. Brian shares how he was introduced to Meerkat. He was speaking at the Mobile World Congress in Barcelona, when he got a message from someone who worked at Twitter, telling him that Ashton Kutcher and Gary Vaynerchuck were on a new video app. About 35 seconds later, Brian had downloaded it and clicked the start button. Meerkat came out February 26, 2015, and Brian was on it March 2. Brian took to Meerkat immediately. He put his mobile device on his tripod, hit the stream button, put in the event hashtag and was live. He treated it like he does his regular YouTube videos: walking around, describing the event and sharing it with his audience. About three minutes in, someone commented, “I see the Samsung booth, can you turn to your right.” That’s when Brian realized he didn’t just bring the experience to his audience, he was letting his viewers be a part of it. People in the United States could dictate what they saw in Spain. "It felt interactive, like having a true conversation," he recalls. Since Brian was about to go to South by Southwest,  he put some strategy behind his Meerkating. Brian contacted a couple of brands that were holding different events, and asked for backstory, so he could be prepared to cover them. During SXSW, Brian did a Meerkat of all the sessions he went to, as well as a preview each morning and recap every evening. About 300-800 people watched each stream, no matter what he was talking about. Periscope was released into the Apple store during Social Media Marketing World (the last week of March 2015), and Brian recalls using Periscope for first time during the opening keynote. Listen to the show to hear where Brian was when he heard about Periscope at Social Media Marketing World. How live streaming apps work "Live streaming isn’t anything new," Brian explains. "It’s really just turning on a video and opening the portal to anyone who wants to use it." What's new is the fact that we’re able to download an app, sign in with a Twitter account or phone number, click stream and post the link. Then anybody in your Twitter community can click on that link and watch whatever you’re showing on your phone. The big piece is the mobile aspect. It’s as simple as a basic tweet and hitting the “stream” button. Listen to the show to learn how and where to watch a Meerkat or Periscope live stream. Businesses uses for live broadcasting

About adigi - Digital Agency | SEO Agency | Yorkshire | adigi

About adigi - Digital Agency | SEO Agency | Yorkshire | adigi


Digital agency | Branding | Yorkshire | adigi |

adigi are a full-service Digital Agency based in Harrogate, Yorkshire. Our highly skilled team specialise in Online Marketing, SEO, Website Design and Application Development.

wendy wintersteen

wendy wintersteen

by Ashley Siegner/Iowa State Daily @ www.iowastatedaily.com - RSS Results

Wendy Wintersteen, dean of the College of Agriculture and Life Sciences, spoke during her presidential open forum as one of the four finalists for the ISU presidency in the Great Hall of the Memorial Union on Oct. 12.

Crisis Management: What to Do When Your Business Makes a Public Mistake

Crisis Management: What to Do When Your Business Makes a Public Mistake

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business ready for a social media crisis? Are you wondering what you should do if you or a colleague makes an embarrassing public mistake? To learn how to handle a social media crisis, I interview Gini Dietrich for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Gini Dietrich, author of the brand-new book, Spin Sucks: Communication and Reputation Management in the Digital Age, and founder of the blog Spin Sucks. She runs Arment Dietrich, a PR agency. Gini shares common mistakes businesses make when facing a crisis, and the best ways to deal with these situations when they happen. You'll discover the first steps you need to take, how to handle the situation throughout and when to seek legal advice. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Crisis Management What happened with Applebee's and the challenges they faced Gini explains how approximately 2 years ago, a waitress at an Applebee's in St. Louis left a check at a table that included an automatic gratuity of 18%. When she returned to collect the check, the customer had crossed out the 18% and had written, "I give God 10%, why do you get 18%?" The customer left a 10% tip instead. One of the waitress' friends took a photo of the receipt, which included the customer's name, and posted it on Reddit. This led to it going viral and the whole world saw it. Applebee's response was that they were going to fire the waitress and her friend, because it was against their policy to show pictures or talk about customers. Especially when a name is included. What happened next on Applebee's Facebook page added fuel to the fire. Applebee's replied to every person's comment on Facebook with a canned PR response. You'll hear what the response included. People didn't take kindly to the way Applebee's handled the situation, and started to dig deep on the Internet. Pictures were discovered that had been posted with good customer feedback on their Facebook page. Although these pictures included the customer's name, nobody got fired for it. A Facebook page was then started to try to get the waitress' job back. You'll hear what Gini's gut instinct was on the person who was handling the corporate Facebook page for Applebee's, and why it contributed to the crisis. Gini advises you never to use a canned PR message on social media, because it's about being social. You need to engage, be transparent and remain human. This means you need to show sympathy and empathy toward what's happening. Always take time to think about the statement before you put it out there. Listen to the show to find out how the way you handle a social media crisis can affect your sales. The first thing you should do once you're aware of an issue Gini says that the first thing you should do is understand what has happened. This means communicating with both sides to get the bigger picture. In Applebee's case, they should have listened to the customer, the waitress and her friend before they did anything else—whether they had a policy in place or not. You have to remember that we live in a world of instant gratification, where people tend to react before they think the situation through. This is when trouble starts and the problem spirals out of control. As a company, you need to step back and figure out your plan of action and your strategy before you can move forward. You'll hear why it's important to acknowledge that you are aware of the situation,

Facebook Contests: How to Get Your Fans Excited

Facebook Contests: How to Get Your Fans Excited

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you ever run a Facebook contest? Are you wondering if you should use them for your business? To learn about Facebook contests, I interview Andrea Vahl for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Andrea Vahl, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies. She regularly writes about Facebook for Social Media Examiner (in fact she was our community manager for 2 years), and has an alter-ego known online as Grandma Mary. Andrea shares how a Facebook contest can work for your page and your business. You'll learn about the different contests available and what contest apps to use. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher.  Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Contests Why should businesses run contests on Facebook? When it comes to what contests can do for your Facebook page and your business, Andrea is a contest fan girl. There are many benefits of running a contest and Andrea's top three follow. You'll hear the benefits of each and the best types of prizes to give away. Help grow the likes on your page and your Facebook presence Grow your email list Help promote a product you're selling Listen to the show to find out how we did a photo contest called Help Me Launch. Examples of successful contests Andrea shares a few success stories with Facebook contests and what range of prizes can develop good success. Andrea helped set up a contest for a client on Facebook called Chocolate for Breakfast. It was a contest where the giveaway was a small box of premium chocolate truffles. The contest was run for one week. From this, the client got 700 new fans and 400 email addresses. At the time, the page was at the early stages with around 1200 fans. So for the cost of the premium box of chocolates, the client got a huge response. The contest was on the client's Facebook tab (like you're supposed to do), and it required people to like the page to enter. Discover how a contest on a tab works and what information people need to enter to participate. It was a sweepstakes contest where you didn't have to enter any photos, essay or video. It was a random-draw winner with anyone eligible to win. You'll hear how it was promoted and the frequency of the posts. Another client of Andrea's, Camp Bow Wow, did a contest called Bad to the Bone. They're a doggy daycare facility and also have home buddies dog training courses that they give away. This contest encouraged people to submit pictures of their bad dogs. People would then vote on who was the baddest dog. The winner would get a free year of dog training lessons, which was a great prize. Hear how this contest was run over a couple of stages and why it lasted about a year. It was a huge success, with over 15,000 new fans. Andrea encourages people to think about how you can piggyback on different techniques that have worked well. Create some fun around the contest and engage with your audience. A bigger brand that ran a contest was Eggo. They did a Waffle-Off, which encouraged people to submit recipes with Eggo waffles. People would submit recipes and show you the various ways to enjoy Eggo waffles. It was user-generated content and photos. People were very engaged with the contest. It was easy to set up and it took off for Eggo. You'll discover why there might be less participation if it involves the need to enter a photo or a movie. If you want to start your first contest, Andrea advises you to run a sweepstakes type of...

How to Optimize Your Facebook Ads: A Proven Approach

How to Optimize Your Facebook Ads: A Proven Approach

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to improve the performance of your Facebook campaigns? Wondering how to successfully test and fine-tune your Facebook ads? To explore his process for optimizing Facebook ads, I interview Azriel Ratz. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Azriel Ratz, author of the Facebook Pixel eBook and the Facebook Ads Mastery online course. He manages Facebook ads for clients across the globe. Azriel explains how he researches audiences and creates ad sets. You'll discover which metrics to consider when testing Facebook ad performance. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Optimize Your Facebook Ads Azriel's Story About five years ago, Azriel started working for a friend whose business had an email list of 1,000 subscribers at the time. Azriel's job was to post on Facebook, Pinterest, Instagram, and Twitter and figure out what posts worked or didn't work. When Azriel looked at the analytics and noticed that certain Facebook posts worked really well, his friend suggested scheduling posts at certain times and targeting the posts based on what was already working. For instance, they created yes-or-no poll questions on Facebook, which attracted a lot of reach and activity. The polls asked how people felt about the day's news. They also posted these questions on the website: A basic form asked a poll question and a reader had to give their email address to respond. With this approach, the email list grew to the tens of thousands, all without spending money on ads. Azriel's friend wanted to know what would happen if they started putting money behind these posts, so they started running serious tests on Facebook. Over the next three years, the list grew to about 150,000 email addresses and led to ecommerce sales and client work. Two years ago, Azriel started his own business, focusing solely on optimizing Facebook ads for clients. He discovers what audience and content work best and then uses Facebook ads to target each client's best potential audience with the best potential ads. As a result, clients get the best return on their ad spend. Listen to the show to discover what Azriel studied in college. The Value of Optimizing Ads Most people think that creating Facebook ads is a very basic process. They know who they want to talk to and what they want to say. Based on that knowledge, they create an ad, choose an audience (thinking Facebook will figure it out), and let the ad run. They believe the cost is what it is, and they can't do anything about it. However, Azriel explains, if a business talks to the same person a different way by creating slightly different ads, this change could possibly save the business money on the cost to reach that person. Over time, a savings of even one cent per click could potentially save a company hundreds of thousands of dollars, depending on the ad spend. Listen to the show to hear my thoughts on conversion rate optimization. Azriel's Process Azriel's process reflects the structure for creating ads in Ads Manager. However, before you begin creating ads in Ads Manager, you can use the specifics of Azriel's process to begin thinking about how to build your ads. Identify what business goal you want to achieve by running these ads: Do you want to get leads? Do you want people to attend your webinar? Do you want people to visit your store? Your business goal helps you choose which type of campaign will most likely get you the right results. If you choose a page likes campaign, don't expect to get webinar subscribers. A video view campaign isn't ideal for getting purchases on your website.

Facebook Professional Services: How Your Local Business Can Rank

Facebook Professional Services: How Your Local Business Can Rank

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have a local business page on Facebook? Want to reach more local customers? Facebook recently launched Professional Services, a directory that helps consumers find the best local businesses and services to fit their needs. In this article I'll share how to use the Facebook Professional Services feature to boost visibility with local customers. Listen to this article: What Is Facebook Professional Services? Facebook Professional Services is a directory inside Facebook for local businesses. The goal is to help customers find local businesses with the best Facebook reviews and ratings. Facebook expert Mari Smith doesn't see it as making "... a huge dent in Yelp... at first." But, she continues, "Over time, as more and more businesses become savvy with their Facebook marketing, and really promote their page activity, the Services Directory and Places could be more of a first choice for consumers." Customers can use the search box to find businesses in the area based on keywords specific to the products or services they need. They can also browse the top local business categories. Within search results or specific category selections, customers see basic details about local businesses, such as their description, address, phone number and ratings. One of the nice parts about Facebook Professional Services is that it's not limited to the United States. People can search for local businesses worldwide. While there are no specific guidelines as to how the Facebook algorithm determines which local businesses to show, after several searches, you can determine it's based on the following: Where the local business is located Matching keywords in the local business page's name, description and category The overall average star rating of the local business The number of ratings the local business has received The recency of the latest review The number of check-ins for the local business Previous interactions between the local business page and the customer Connections between customers and people who check in, rate and review the local business Mobile users can access Facebook Professional Services from their device's browser. The search works the same, but the categories presented are much more limited. Inside the Facebook app, Nearby Places is the best alternative. iPhone users will find this under the More menu. There, they can search for businesses based on location and category. Search results and category pages will show similar information as presented in Facebook Professional Services on the desktop. Based on Facebook's tendency to create individual apps for different features, one could assume that if Facebook Professional Services takes off, it will become a stand-alone app similar to what Yelp offers. But Facebook Professional Services is still in its earliest stages, so only time will tell. Now that you know what Facebook Professional Services is and a little bit about how it works, here are some tips to help you boost your local business's visibility in the new local directory. #1: Choose the Correct Category and Subcategories for Your Local Business Page To ensure that customers find your local business in search or a category listing page, be sure that you've selected the appropriate category and subcategories for your local business. To start, search for the keywords or categories that customers would use to find you and see what Facebook suggests. Then go to your local business Facebook page and enter them in Page Info on the About tab. #2: Enter Your Business Details All of these fields (found in Page Info on the About tab of your local business Facebook page) appear in search results on Facebook Professional Services. Hence, you'll want to be sure the short description, contact info and business hours fields are filled in on your local business Facebook page.

How to Retarget With Instagram Ads

How to Retarget With Instagram Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you retargeting people with Facebook ads? Want to know how to retarget Instagram users? Serving relevant Instagram ads to people who've visited your website helps increase sales and conversions. In this article you'll discover how to retarget your website visitors using Instagram ads. Listen to this article: #1: Install the Facebook Pixel on Your Website Before you can start using Instagram ads to retarget website visitors, you need to set up the Facebook pixel on your website. You can do this with Facebook Power Editor. First, open Google Chrome and then log into Power Editor. If you manage multiple accounts, make sure that you're logged into the Facebook ads account that corresponds with the website for which you want to implement Instagram ads retargeting. You can double-check which ads account you're logged into in the top-left corner of Power Editor. Next, click Tools and choose Pixels from the drop-down menu. If you haven't done so already, create your Facebook pixel by clicking the green Create a Pixel button. In the Create a Facebook Pixel dialog box, type in a name for the pixel and click Create Pixel. Next, you see a message that your Facebook pixel is ready. Click Install Pixel Now to see the pixel code. If you already have an active Facebook pixel, you can access it by clicking Actions and choosing View Pixel Code from the drop-down menu. Next, copy your Facebook pixel code and paste it between the head tags of your website code. For more detailed instructions for installing your pixel, check out this page. Now you need to make sure that your Facebook pixel is working. You can do that with the Facebook Pixel Helper, which is a free plugin for Google Chrome. Once you've successfully installed the Facebook pixel on your website, Facebook will automatically start tracking every person who visits your website. #2: Create a Custom Audience to Retarget Next, you need to create a custom website audience. To do this, go to the Facebook Pixel tab and click the Create Audience button. Now, create the custom audience you'd like to retarget. Select Website Traffic for the audience type. Then in the Create Audience dialog box, enter the details for your custom audience. The custom audience in the example below will retarget anyone who has visited my website in the last 30 days. Note that the domain option appears only if your Facebook pixel is installed on multiple domains. Keep in mind that it's a good idea to create audiences based on the action you want users to take when they see your ad, rather than broadly target every website visitor (as in this example). When you're finished creating the audience you want to retarget, click Create Audience. #3: Set Up Your Ad Campaign Now you're ready to create your ad campaign to retarget past website visitors. To do this, open Power Editor and click Create Campaign. Then enter a name for your new campaign and choose one of these objectives: Clicks to Website, Website Conversions, Mobile App Installs or Video Views. When you're finished filling in all of the details for your campaign, click Create. #4: Build Your Retargeting Ad Set Now you need to edit your ad set. First, set your budget and schedule. Then edit your audience so you're only targeting people who have previously visited your website. To do this, click the Edit Audience button. Then select the custom audience you created. Once you've done this, click Save. Next, select Instagram as your placement. Finally, confirm that the custom audience you selected and refined for Instagram actually has people in it. To do this, check that your potential audience (in the top-right corner of the Ad Set panel) has more than 20 people in it. If it doesn't, you may need to broaden your other targeting parameters. Alternatively, you can wait until your Facebook pixel has captured...

Product Evangelism: How to Evangelize and Create Advocates

Product Evangelism: How to Evangelize and Create Advocates

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to create an intensely loyal fan base for your product? Wondering how a product evangelist can help? To explore how product evangelism supports the sales process, I interview Guy Kawasaki. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers, business owners, and creators discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Guy Kawasaki, the chief evangelist at Canva, a brand ambassador for Mercedes, and formerly the evangelist for Apple Computer. He's written many books including The Art of the Start and Enchantment. His new course is called The Art of Evangelism: How to Promote Your Product, Service, Company, or Idea. Guy explains the benefits of evangelism. You'll discover the most powerful tool for an evangelist. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Product Evangelism Evangelizing for Apple Guy started working for Apple around 1983 or 1984, during the introduction of the Macintosh computer. As a software evangelist, his job was to convince developers to write Macintosh software and peripherals. Apple used the term evangelism because the company viewed Macintosh as not merely another personal computer platform, but as good news. "Evangelism" comes from Greek, meaning "bringing the good news," so Guy brought the good news of Macintosh to developers and explained how it would, in the words of Steve Jobs, "dent the universe." Initially, the response was enthusiastic because Macintosh was so different from the Apple II and the IBM PC. Macintosh offered a way for many developers to write the software they always wished they could use. The graphic user interface and color provided a brand-new palette. After the positive initial reaction, the honeymoon period wore off. Developers found writing Macintosh software difficult because they lacked tools and documentation. Anyone who was used to developing 80x24 column-based software had to work with MacPaint and MacWrite. Also, developing for a graphical user interface required a completely different mindset. Guy explains how his background in jewelry sales (an intensely personal business) helped him with evangelism for Macintosh. Because Macintosh was new technology, it required the suspension of disbelief. People needed to believe this new personal computer platform could succeed. Instilling developers with that belief is also a very personal interaction. Today, the concept of evangelism is similar to how it was back then, whether you're creating graphics with Canva or computing with Macintosh. The difference is a product evangelist has so many more tools now. There's social media, video conferencing, all kinds of things that break down distance, barriers, and costs. Listen to the show to learn what tools Guy had for evangelism back in the day. Benefits of Evangelism The difference between evangelism and sales is an evangelist typically has the other person's best interest at heart. It's not about fulfilling a sales quota and earning commission. When Guy worked for Apple and asked people to support Macintosh, he believed it would empower them and add a new line of revenue to their businesses. Today, as the evangelist for Canva, when Guy asks people to use it, he truly believes it will make them better graphic designers and enable them to create graphics that will increase their effectiveness as a communicator. If someone uses Canva, bought a Macintosh, or wrote Macintosh software, it was good for him, Guy adds. However, it was also good for the other party. That's the crucial difference between evangelism and sales. Guy also emphasizes that evangelism requires a great product. Today, social media makes product evangelism fast, free, and easy.

3 Psychology Principles That Boost Social Media Engagement

3 Psychology Principles That Boost Social Media Engagement

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your social media posts getting enough engagement? Do you want tips for connecting with your audience? Social media engagement is largely determined by how well your social posts trigger action from your target audience. In this article you'll discover how to boost social media engagement by incorporating psychological triggers in your posts. Listen to this article: #1: Focus on a Desire In Nobel Prize-winning psychologist Daniel Kahneman's book, Thinking, Fast and Slow, he shared this idea: "A general 'law of least effort' applies to cognitive as well as physical exertion. The law asserts that if there are several ways of achieving the same goal, people will eventually gravitate to the least demanding course of action." To apply this principle to your social content, you should keep it simple. In the GetResponse post below, they show that they recognize social media marketers want their email subscribers to feel as if they're having a real conversation with the brand. To do that, GetResponse suggests that marketers need to "use these strategies." The post also incorporates the word "want" ("if you want your subscribers to feel as if they're talking to a real person"). This word triggers a desire in readers' brains that convinces them that, yes, they can do this. Additionally, GetResponse captured the idea of simplicity in the article linked to in the post: 7 Strategies to Give Your Email Campaign a Human Touch. By presenting content in a simple, straightforward way, readers begin to believe that it's not as hard to connect with their audience through email as they might think and that they've found a solution to their problem. Key takeaway: You'll get more engagement with your content if you make your audience believe that they can do something. Walk readers through the hard stuff and break it down in easy-to-digest chunks of information so they can take action quickly and easily. #2: Appeal to Knowledge Seekers There is nothing people love more than an explanation. In fact, in the well-known Xerox study, Ellen Langer and her colleagues conducted a simple experiment to see how people reacted when someone tried to cut in line at the Xerox machine. Ellen discovered that she was allowed to cut the line more frequently when she explained to people why she needed to. The word "why" is one of the trigger words you can use in your own social media marketing. Use "why" to ignite readers’ brains to want to search for the answer to a question. Eric Enge from Stone Temple Consulting used this strategy to create the Here's Why video series for his target audience. In the Here's Why post below, Eric poses a question to reader: Why Is SEO So Hard? If you weren't thinking about that question before, you likely are now. Why is SEO so hard, anyway? Eric provides just enough information to grab the audience's attention. He tells them what they can expect and how they will benefit from watching the 5-minute video. Key takeaway: Communicate to your audience why they need something and how they're going to get it by reading your content, watching your video or using your product. #3: Tap Into the Fear of Missing Out It's human nature to be apprehensive about being left out. We want to be in the know and be where the action is happening. We want to be included. If we say no to an opportunity, we fear we'll miss out on something that could be of great benefit to us. For example, if there's an important conference in your industry, you may be compelled to attend because you fear you'll miss out on great opportunities that other people in your industry will be afforded. With a good industry conference, you can build your brand and business by networking with new and long-time colleagues. You can also attend sessions that help you improve your craft. The opportunity is so compelling that you're afraid if you don't attend, you'll read lots of enthusiastic posts about it in your ...

Facebook Reactions: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Reactions: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you seen the new Facebook reactions? Wondering how they'll affect your Facebook page? Facebook reactions let Facebook users go beyond liking a post by allowing them to choose from six emojis that show different emotions. In this article I'll explore how Facebook reactions work, and how your Facebook page can get the most from them. Listen to this article: Facebook Reactions for Fans The new Facebook reactions work pretty easily for users. When users hover over a post's Like button in the Facebook news feed, a personal profile timeline, or a Facebook page timeline, they will be able to choose from one of the new six Facebook reactions. Everyone can breathe a sigh of relief that Facebook reactions do not include a Dislike button. Hence, people cannot dislike your latest post (product, service, content, etc.). These reactions will simply allow expressions of like, love, laugh, wowed, saddened, or angered by your post. The feature will work similarly for mobile users, but users will hold down the Like button instead of hovering over it. Some mobile app users have noted that you must restart or update your app to get the new feature to work. Others have had to log out of their account and log back in again. Facebook Reactions for Pages From a Facebook page admin perspective, a few things will change. For starters, you'll see in your notifications that people are reacting to your posts instead of just liking them. On the posts themselves, you'll see an array of icons representing the different reactions that people have left on the post. On older posts, you'll see the new icon that represents likes, and on newer posts, you'll see all of the newer icons representing the different reactions that people have. People can also go back to older posts and add new reactions. You can click on the link to see the breakdown of which fans had specific reactions so you can see who likes, loves, and has other feelings about your post. Since page posts are public, it's important to understand that everyone can see the breakdowns of Facebook reactions, including people who are not admins and not even fans of the page. This means that you can go to other pages and see the breakdowns of reactions on their posts as well. This can be useful for competitor research as you can get a good feel for how people will react to specific types of content, status updates, and announcements – especially since you can get a quick summary of the reactions right at the top without having to scroll through the entire list. Note that only Facebook page admins will see the Liked / Invite buttons. If you are not a page admin, you only see Add Friend / Follow buttons next to people's names. So far, Facebook reactions only work on the Like button for the main posts themselves, but not on comments. So don't expect to react to comments anytime soon. In terms of your Facebook page's Insights, you can see the full breakdown of reactions for each of your posts by finding the post and clicking on it. There, you can see the full post details, including the new Facebook reactions counts. From an Insights perspective, Facebook reactions do not count as negative feedback. In other words, an angry reaction isn't categorized in the same area as a Hide Post, Report as Spam, Hide All Post, or Unlike Page. Hence, any reaction can be considered a good one. Now that you know how Facebook reactions work for your fans and for your page, here are some ways to get the most from them. #1: Encourage Fans to Use Reactions People love trying new things. Simply invite your fans to test out the new reactions on your page today. Not only will it teach your fans how to use this feature, but it will also boost your page's overall engagement and organic reach. For example, I initially planned to boost my post to test Facebook reactions, but I ended up canceling the promotion.

How to Connect With Local Customers via Social Media

How to Connect With Local Customers via Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to increase your visibility in your local market? Wondering how social media can help? When you understand which features on social media support local marketing, you can focus the power of Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, and Instagram to expand influence in your little corner of the world. In this article you'll discover how to connect with local customers on the top social media networks. Listen to this article: #1: Connect With Customers on Facebook There may be over 1.4 billion active users on Facebook, but only a fraction of them live near your business. Fortunately, there are ways you can overcome the low organic reach of Facebook pages to engage your local customers. Promote Facebook check-ins at your business. When people check in, they're giving you free visibility in the news feed. Whether you incentivize check-ins (free coffee) or simply display visual reminders for customers to check in, this is a great way to promote your business to a local audience. Boost your posts. Facebook has added some targeting tools to boosted posts, including the ability to target lists you've uploaded through Facebook Ads Manager. Target a segmented email list of local people to make sure they see your important posts. Post an update to your business page, and then share it as yourself. This allows you to reach a wider audience. By sharing it personally, you can decide whom to share the post with and focus on people in your local community. Don't go overboard with this tactic, however. Your family may not enjoy an endless series of updates about your free ebook. Promote Facebook events. Hosting local events such as social media breakfasts, lunch and learns, or business after hours increases your visibility both online and off. Create a Facebook event and share it with your fans and friends or promote it. Everyone invited to the event will continue to see it in their notifications and in upcoming events unless they decline the invite. Again, focus your invites on people who live and work near you. Target Facebook ads to a local audience. Use the tools in the Ads Manager and Power Editor to target people based on their location. You can also upload your segmented email list to target local people with your ads. Create a lookalike audience based on your list. (Remember to add a filter so that all of the resulting people are still local.) #2: Reach Out to Your Community on Twitter Twitter may not be the social media behemoth that Facebook is, but it can be valuable for marketing to a local audience. Both your Twitter profile and your business's profile provide many opportunities to connect with the local community. For example, you can include a recognizable landmark in your header photo, mention your home team allegiance in your bio, or list your city or state in the location field. It's also helpful to set up Twitter lists, which allow you to create segmented groups of interesting people and businesses around a certain topic. If you're not using lists, you're probably swimming in noise in your news feed. For instance, I have a Mainers list to keep tabs on what people are saying in my home state and an Influencers list to track industry trends. Use a tool like Hootsuite or TweetDeck to pull lists into columns and improve your signal-to-noise ratio on Twitter. Lists need to be created manually. Chances are high, though, that someone has already created a list of people near you, whether you live in Oatmeal, Texas or Sandwich, Massachusetts. Look at the lists of some of the more connected people near you, and if you see one that's interesting, subscribe to it. Use Twitter's Advanced Search as a good way to find leads for your local business. Suppose you own a knitting store and want to find local knitters on Twitter. Go to Advanced Search and search for "knitting" or "knitters" or "yarn" within 15 miles of your store. On the results page,

How to Use Social Media to Build Your Personal Brand

How to Use Social Media to Build Your Personal Brand

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to build a personal brand? Interested in ways to differentiate yourself from others? Social media is a great way to develop a personal identity, establish a reputation and stand out in your industry. In this article you'll discover how to use social media to build your personal brand. Why Personal Branding? To understand personal branding, start by doing a Google search for your name. Listen to this article: Chances are you'll see a list of your prominent social profiles (namely LinkedIn, Pinterest, Instagram, Twitter and Facebook) in your search results. Google gives high authority to all of the main social media platforms. Ultimately, the more active you are on a particular platform, the higher that profile is ranked. Your personal blog, website and images are probably ranked high too, as social media and content creation are fundamental parts of personal branding SEO. Remember that everything you do online is a representation of your personal brand. Here are some ways to start shaping your message and how you're perceived. #1: Define Your Objective What do you hope to achieve when people search for your name? What do you want them to see? If you want people to see your work experience and receive new opportunities in your area of expertise, concentrate on developing your LinkedIn profile first. If you want to promote your content to a wider audience, try increasing your Twitter followers. If you're trying to sell artwork, Pinterest is your best option. You get the idea. Here are some other possible goals: "I Want to Start My Own Business" If you're a budding entrepreneur, your personal brand could make the difference in whether your idea is successful. When people research you online, what they learn about you can be a deciding factor in whether they invest in your idea. "I Want to Differentiate Myself From Competitors" With a strong persona and unique branding proposition, you're almost guaranteed to stand out from the crowd. In a competitive marketplace, it's important to show what makes you different. "I Want to Sell More" This goes without saying: When your personal brand is strong and you make yourself appealing enough that people want to connect with you, chances are you'll sell more of your product or service. #2: Identify Up to Three Areas of Expertise What do you want to be known for? Whom do you want to connect with? The Internet is flooded with entrepreneurs and experts, so you need to determine what makes you unique. You might be more than just a social media marketer. Your interests could be as broad as Peruvian cooking or dolphin training, but don't choose more than three. Your areas of expertise define who you are and what you do. They're used for writing your social media profile descriptions and should include your main keywords. #3: Make a List of Profile Links Store links to all of your social media profiles in a spreadsheet. You might have 10 or even 30 profiles (the more, the better). If you have a large number of profiles, prepare to carve out time to be active on these channels. Review each of your social media profiles regularly and update them to ensure they contain your most current information, such as your work info, website URL, social links, etc. #4: Develop a Strong Positioning Statement A positioning statement is a brief summation of who you are, what you do and what you stand for. Typically, positioning statements are created for brands or products, but in this case you're developing one for you. When creating your statement, always keep your audience in mind. Although the statement is about you, it's not necessarily for you. It's for the people you're trying to connect with. Describe what differentiates you from other people in your area of expertise. If you're not quite sure what that is, take time to research some of the well-known people in your field. Take note of their tactics,

How to Track the ROI of Your Video Marketing

How to Track the ROI of Your Video Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to measure the ROI of your marketing videos? Looking for tools to help track sales from your videos? A simple framework and a few tools can reveal if your video campaigns are working for you. In this article you'll discover how to track and measure the ROI for your video marketing efforts. Listen to this article: #1: Outline Your Campaign Costs Take the time to do a complete breakdown of all of the projected costs of your video marketing campaign, including the marketing hours you'll spend promoting it. Include a buffer of at least 20% of your projected expenses if you manage the campaign on your own. This buffer will be used for unexpected costs, such as having to reshoot footage or invest more in editing. Keep in mind that there are video marketing companies that offer all-inclusive video marketing packages, and this can make doing a cost outline much easier and more effective. #2: Determine the Financial Tipping Point Think about how many sales you need to make from your video marketing campaign to break even. After you reach your break-even amount, everything else will be pure profit. But first you need to determine that amount. You can make this a very simple process. For example, if your video marketing campaign has a budget of $5,000 per month, you should expect to see your monthly sales go up by more than $5,000. If your average sale is $100, you already know that you'll need to make at least 50 sales to compensate for the cost of the video. You should track your sales (and other metrics) year-over-year in addition to month-by-month to make sure that you've adjusted for any seasonal changes. #3: Track Sales From Your Video Campaign That's all easy enough, but now you need to differentiate income from your video campaign from income from other marketing factors. To distinguish your video campaign from other marketing factors, you can always track people who flow from your video and go on to make a purchase. Do this by using web tools to embed links that are specific to your videos. Keep in mind that these won't track all of your sales. There will always be people who see your video and make a purchase later on or in a non-traditional way, so you'll need to inflate your sales slightly to get a true ROI. The benefit, naturally, is that you'll know that your video made you at least that amount of money. Use any one of these tools separately or combine them for more complete video marketing campaign analysis. Brandwatch makes it easy to quantify your company's brand awareness. Through this tool, you can identify brand sentiments to see if your campaign is working and whether you're building brand awareness in a positive, meaningful way. Clicky allows you to break down website visitors into marketing demographics and track their activity live. If you're hosting your own videos (rather than uploading them through a service), this is an ideal way to get a better picture of your audience. Audience demographics can be critical in determining not only your ROI and awareness, but also why a particular strategy may not be working (you're targeting the wrong demographic entirely, for example). Wistia offers one of the most advanced video analysis suites available. Not only does this tool provide demographic information, but it can also directly track engagement. You can see how long visitors watched and what actions they took when they finished watching. This includes any purchases that they may have made. Wistia can integrate into your sales funnel and give you critical information about optimizing your video marketing results. YouTube offers analytics such as YouTube Insights that will break down your viewership by demographic and track outgoing clicks. You can embed marketing prompts directly into your YouTube videos so you can funnel your viewers directly into a sales channel. #4: Improve Your Video Marketing Campaigns

June Dogs of the Month

by admin @ Dog Guard of Iowa

Nick and Steph Behne from Tipton just recently moved to a new home. Their previous house had a traditional fence for Ella, a nine year old Standard Poodle and Rory, a six-month-old Great Dane. Their new yard is 2 acres and they wanted to give the dogs as much room as possible. We installed their […]

How to Discover Social Media Insights About Your Competitors

How to Discover Social Media Insights About Your Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to raise the bar on your social media? Are you monitoring your competitors? Knowing what works for the competition helps improve your own social media marketing. In this article you'll discover six ways to reveal insights about your competitors' social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Analyze Your Competitor's Content Share Rates Ahrefs is a handy tool for SEO, but it has some excellent social metrics as well. If you want to look at more than just social sharing numbers, it has some stats that will give you a peek at how your competitors' content is performing socially. Open Ahrefs Content Explorer. Then type in your competitor's domain, and click Search. You'll see a spread of your competitor's content, along with a snapshot of share stats in table form. To drill down into the shares for specific pieces of content, click the down arrow located in the far-right cell. You can instantly see how the article is distributed on social media. This chart provides you with information about the sharing velocity of the content and the most popular platforms. You can access this information for every article ever published. This helps you understand how, why and when your competitor's content is getting distributed. Note: Ahrefs requires a trial sign-up or paid membership. #2: Find Out Who Shares Your Competitor's Content on Twitter It's crucial to know who loves your competition. If an audience loves your competitors, there's a good chance that they'll love you, too. Go to https://twitter.com/search-home and type in a competitor's Twitter handle and when you see the results, click Live to see Twitter users who are promoting your competitor's content. These people, for whatever reason, may follow your competitor on Twitter. They at least liked your competitor's content so much that they shared it. What should you do about it? You may want to reach out and follow these users yourself, share their content or favorite their tweets. Doing this will get you on their radar. #3: Identify Top Influencers Who Share Your Competitor's Content Every industry has those people who are actively sharing great content. Chances are, your competitors are benefitting from the social sharing of these individuals. How would you like to have these people sharing on your behalf? You can use BuzzSumo here, but if you don't have a paid account, you can carry this technique only so far. BuzzSumo imposes a daily limit on non-users, so you may have to wait a day to try this one out. (Or just buy an account; it's worth it.) Go ahead and enter a competitor's website so you can identify their top-shared content again. Now, click View Sharers. The list you'll see shows you who is sharing this content and why it's so popular. The information is roughly organized according to the top-ranked influencers. The people who are at the top are big on social media. They usually have lots of followers. If they have a website, you can also see that web address. One of the best features of this tool is the ability to filter results. Say you want to find only the social sharers who have a blog. No problem. Filter the results to show only bloggers. Now you can target the people who might be open to sharing your content on their blog, or who could be open to guest-posting opportunities. What should you do with this information on social influencers? Connect with them on their preferred social media network. Get to know them. Reach out to them and request retweets. Inquire about guest posting on their blog. #4: Discover Your Competitor's Most Popular Content What are the most popular articles your competitors are producing? What content has the most shares? Use a tool like BuzzSumo to find out. You don't need to sign up for an account to use the limited version. Enter the domain URL of the site your competitor uses to post content.

How to Generate Revenue With Your Content

How to Generate Revenue With Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to make money from your content? Wondering how a loyal audience can create business opportunities? To explore business models that help publishers generate revenue, I interview Joe Pulizzi. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers, business owners, and creators discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Joe Pulizzi, founder of the Content Marketing Institute and Content Marketing World. He's written five books including Epic Content Marketing and Content Inc. His newest book is called Killing Marketing: How Innovative Businesses Are Turning Marketing Cost Into Profit. Joe explains how high-quality content can transform marketing from a cost center into a profit center. You'll discover the different ways you can monetize your content. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Generate Revenue With Your Content Why Joe Wrote Killing Marketing Joe and co-author Robert Rose work mostly with large businesses. They've been seeing a trend where businesses are viewing marketing as a profit center rather than a cost center. Only a few companies are currently doing things this way. However, Joe believes that over the next 5 or 10 years, marketing as a profit center will be the rule, not the exception. The premise of the book (and the philosophy) is to create trusted relationships with your audience and monetize that relationship by doing more than selling products. You can monetize your business in 10 different ways. Joe says the biggest mistake people make with their marketing is they set up their marketing department wrong. They seek opportunities for the sales team and don't see all of the potential in what their companies can be and sell. Any business that has lasted 10 or 15 years has evolved over time. Yes, selling products is important but you can't lead product-first anymore. The only competitive advantage people have today is communication. Everything else can be duplicated. Marketers need to be refocusing on making markets and creating opportunities for organizations; however, many have lost sight of those objectives. When the focus is on people, not necessarily products, companies can sell all kinds of things they never thought about before. Listen to the show to discover how marketers typically view marketing. Companies Embracing This Premise BabyCenter.com, owned by Johnson & Johnson, is one of the largest sites dedicated to mothers. Eight out of 10 mothers use the site, which is a stellar resource for research and development. Johnson & Johnson monetizes the site directly and launches new products from it. Red Bull Media House is judged as a profit center and media company. Although they're the marketing arm of Red Bull (and want to sell more product), their revenue comes from advertising and content syndication. They package and sell their videos to companies like The New York Times and the Wall Street Journal. They also sell subscriptions (The Red Bulletin Magazine has two million subscribers). One of Joe's favorite examples is Arrow Electronics, which is the 118th company on the Fortune 500 list. They're like the Amazon.com for electronics equipment and they target electrical engineers. Two years ago, they went to Hearst and UBM (Content Marketing Institute's parent company) and bought 51 media properties, including EE Product News. Now, Arrow Electronics is the largest media company in the electronics industry. Although the media division is a marketing arm for the company, the media division is also extremely profitable. Plus, it helps the company sell more products and services. In most cases, marketers simply target customers or prospects with the goal of getting t...

StumbleUpon Marketing: How to Drive More Traffic to Your Content

StumbleUpon Marketing: How to Drive More Traffic to Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use StumbleUpon for your business? Are you wondering how you can use StumbleUpon to drive more traffic to your content? To learn how your business can benefit from StumbleUpon, I interview Nick Robinson for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Nick Robinson, co-author of StumbleUpon for Dummies. He's also the social media channel manager for SAP Americas. Nick shares how StumbleUpon works and why it's different from other platforms. You'll learn how to use StumbleUpon to discover shareable content and the type of content that works best. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: StumbleUpon Marketing  What makes StumbleUpon different from other social networks Nick explains how StumbleUpon is a content discovery engine. It's a search engine and bookmarking site all in one. It's great if you want to bring exposure to your online content, which can include your website, blog post, video or infographic. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=F8DtI9e4xZ8 Nick believes that the key differentiator with StumbleUpon is the Stumble button. It takes you directly to a piece of content on another website that you are interested in. You can tell StumbleUpon what your interests are in several ways. When you set up your profile, you can specify your interests, the interests of people you follow and what pieces of content you have given a thumbs-up to on that particular website. When you click the Thumbs-Up or Thumbs-Down button, it tells StumbleUpon's algorithm if it should or shouldn't serve that type of content to you in the future. Each person's StumbleUpon experience is personalized. It allows you to curate content, promote your content and connect with communities with all types of interests. Listen to the show to find out how you can create content that's relevant to an audience within an Interest category. StumbleUpon for B2B and B2C Nick believes that any business in B2B or B2C can use the platform. It all depends on the type of content you produce. The content needs to entertain, be informative and connect with your audience. To be successful, you need to test and measure, based on the changes you learn. StumbleUpon launched their new design and a new mobile app, which has increased its mobile stumbles by 25% over a one-year period. However, the majority of StumbleUpon activity is still primarily desktop, at over 60%. Since these changes were made, around 40% of their activity comes from mobile. In the next couple of years, Nick thinks it will easily overtake desktop. You'll discover as a marketer what you need to consider with these figures in mind. According to Alexa, StumbleUpon is one of the top 149 websites in the world and Quantcast estimated that 23.4 million people in the last month in the U.S. alone have used it. As of June 2013, when the StumbleUpon for Dummies book was published, StumbleUpon had 25 million registered users. They have indexed over 100 million–plus web pages. Listen to the show to find out how much the average user "stumbles" per month and the time spent on the platform. Companies who use StumbleUpon well  Nick says that two companies come to mind, which are both primarily content publishers. The first is Forbes. They do a great job, which is primarily attributable to their company page. They use it to acquire followers and as a content feed. Unfortunately StumbleUpon has closed off access to these pages to the general ...

How to Curate Your Social Content With Reddit

How to Curate Your Social Content With Reddit

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for new content to share to your fans and followers? Have you considered Reddit as a source for valuable content? Using Reddit will reveal unique and interesting content that helps you stand out from the crowd. In this post you'll discover how to use Reddit for content curation and inspiration. Listen to this article: #1: Find Subreddits in Your Niche Many marketers already know Reddit is useful for discovering content, but browsing its individual communities, called subreddits, can be time-consuming. Fortunately, you can make that task easier if you create a multireddit, which is a custom dashboard of content around a particular topic. First, you need to find subreddits you want to include in your multireddit, and compile a master list of subreddit names, organized by topic. Discover Relevant Subreddits There are thousands of active subreddits, so it's important to find those that share the best content in your niche. Here are some easy ways to search for relevant subreddits: The subreddit search box lets you search for all subreddits related to a keyword (for example, fitness). Use the Reddit site search to find site-wide mentions of your keyword, plus a list of subreddits where the term appears most frequently. You can use advanced search operators to focus your search. You can also combine advanced operators. For example, I did a search for posts with "paleo" in the title on the r/xxfitness subreddit. I then sorted the results by New to see the most recent posts. To perform granular searches, use the Boolean operators AND, OR and NOT (or the minus symbol). You can also group keywords with parentheses. Along with search features on Reddit, you can use metareddit to find subreddits. This third-party directory allows you to filter results by number of subscribers and last post, as in the example here. The results are displayed in a word cloud, where the size of the words correlates to the number of subscribers. Make a List of Subreddits To keep track of the subreddits you find, create a spreadsheet of subreddit names organized by topic. As you find subreddits you want to add to your multireddit, note the subreddit's name after the r/ in its URL (for example, http://www.reddit.com/r/HealthyFood). Here's a list you might create for health and fitness subreddits. #2: Create a Multireddit Once you've found a group of relevant subreddits, organize them as a multireddit. You can include all of the subreddits you found in one big multireddit or create a handful of more specific multireddits. After you log into the site, go to the Reddit front page, and click on the dotted line on the left side. Click the Create button, and type in a name for your multireddit. (Note that you can't use spaces or symbols in the multireddit name.) When you're finished, click Create again. Now that you've created your multireddit, you can begin adding subreddits to it in the upper-right corner of the screen. Type a subreddit name into the Add Subreddit box and click the plus sign (or press Enter) to add it to your multireddit. You can also add a description for the multireddit and choose whether it's public (other redditors can find it) or private (only you can view it). Open the sidebar from the front page to access any multireddits you've created. You can filter the content in your multireddit using the tabs at the top of the page: Hot: Posts that receive the highest engagement (upvotes/comments) New: The most recent posts Rising: Posts that are gaining popularity Controversial: Posts that receive an equal mix of upvotes and downvotes Top: The most popular posts of all time Gilded: Posts that received reddit gold Promoted: Sponsored content You can also search for keywords within your multireddit. For example, if you're looking for healthy recipes to share on your social channels,

Video Marketing in North Texas

by Max Juhasz @ Rebel Base SEO

Video Marketing Services in North Texas Why Video Marketing? Video marketing has many benefits over traditional marketing and other forms of online marketing.  There are many reasons for this. Videos have become a normal part of our lives.  What if Read more…

The post Video Marketing in North Texas appeared first on Rebel Base SEO.

9 Productivity Tools for Social Media Marketers

9 Productivity Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a busy social media marketer? Looking for tools that will save you time? Using the right tools to stay focused and work more efficiently will help you get more done in a day. In this article you'll discover nine productivity tools for busy marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Save Content Inspiration for Later Use Evernote to create a journal of content ideas and inspiration sources. With text, audio and image options, you can type, dictate or snap an image of whatever has caught your eye. Evernote syncs with all of your devices, so you'll have access to it wherever you are. Reach for it when you're feeling stuck for content ideas. #2: Block Distracting Websites Throughout the course of a day, we have distractions coming at us from a variety of directions. If you intend to spend just a few minutes on Pinterest, only to end up spending half a day looking at recipes, you need Cold Turkey. Use Cold Turkey to group distracting sites, such as social and news sites, and then block them off for certain time periods. Remember, if you're a social media manager who uses native websites to schedule your messages, this probably isn't the app for you. The app works great when you're putting off real work, like drafting your next blog post or newsletter or creating a report for your boss. Set it up for an hour or two and allow yourself some time to write distraction-free. #3: Create Canned Email Responses Do you get a lot of similar emails from customers, such as questions about your return policy or other support-related questions? Save yourself some time and effort with the Canned Responses add-on in Gmail. Rather than write a new response every time, you can save an email as a canned response and use it over and over again. What's great about this feature is that it's not a simple auto-responder that feels robotic and soulless. You can edit canned responses to personalize them for a particular recipient or tailor your answer to a question. To access it, go to your Gmail Inbox and click on the gear icon and select Settings. Then click on the Labs tab to find Canned Responses and select Enable. Now you can save or access your canned responses in the lower-right corner of the New Message window. #4: Secure Account Log In Credentials Do you keep a list of all of your passwords for emails, websites, social media platforms and third-party apps and tools? Is that document really safe? What if you're on the go and can't remember your password for a site? 1Password is the solution for protecting your passwords and giving you quick access to them. The app will store your passwords securely, and autofill them whenever you need them. It's available for Mac, Windows, iOS and Android and as a browser extension. #5: Automate Recurring Tasks Think about all of the repetitive and mechanical tasks you do in the course of a day. Then delegate those tasks to IFTTT and free up your time to focus on bigger things. You can choose from a huge list of social media recipes or create your own. Maybe you want to build a Twitter list for a specific hashtag or get an email notification when someone mentions your business in a tweet. #6: Find and Attribute Images Do you spend a lot of time looking for images online? Have you ever tried to hunt down one specific image? Whether you followed a dead end link or are looking for attribution information to credit an original source, TinEye can help. Use the TinEye browser extension to do a reverse image search and find the original source of any image. #7: Create Tasks From Emails We're all bombarded with emails asking us to do things and complete tasks. You're likely overwhelmed with the sheer volume of email you receive and the challenge of trying to stay on top of requests. If you're using Gmail, you can create to-do items right from your email messages. After you open a message,

SEO Conference in Boston - May 16th/17th 2011

SEO Conference in Boston - May 16th/17th 2011


Moz

We're bringing our conference series to the East Coast. You can now book tickets for Pro SEO Boston 2011 - on the 16th / 17th May.We've brought together the most advanced speakers we can find for two days of actionable, tips-based content and new stuff you've never seen before. You'll see Rand and me battle it out in another head-to-head as well as a load of brilliant speakers bringing their "A" games.

How to Ensure Your Social Media Content Meets FTC, FDA and Google Requirements

How to Ensure Your Social Media Content Meets FTC, FDA and Google Requirements

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you involved with influencer marketing campaigns? Do you know how to meet disclosure and compliance requirements? By following a few simple guidelines, you can maintain transparency while producing brand-sponsored content that engages consumers. In this article you'll discover how to make sure your content meets Federal Trade Commission (FTC), Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and Google requirements. What Compliance Means for You In September 2014 the FTC sent warning letters to more than 60 companies as part of what it called Operation Full Disclosure. While the warnings focused on print and broadcast advertisements, the move signaled that the commission may start regulating more companies on all media that it finds to be out of compliance with accepted standards and practices. Listen to this article: Take note of this positioning, especially when it comes to your digital advertising on social channels. The FTC issued updated guidance on .com Disclosures in March 2013, and gave its clearest direction yet in June 2015 for endorsement disclosures in its What People Are Asking FAQ page. Many see this as a necessary step of enforcement by the commission. While the FTC monitors compliance with truth-in-advertising laws, your company must also work to stay abreast of regulations from other agencies and organizations (such as the FDA and Google) when producing compensated content. Compliance with these regulations ultimately falls on the sponsor rather than the content producer. Consequently, if you're working with bloggers or YouTube video bloggers, you must have audit mechanisms in place to ensure those producing content on your behalf maintain compliance. Compliance, however, is not as difficult as it might seem. The following simple tips will help you keep your content compliant without making it stiff or unappealing to the consumer. #1: FTC: Disclose Clearly and Conspicuously The FTC really has only one guideline when it comes to disclosure: Disclose early, clearly and conspicuously. When you publish blog posts, you should include a simple, clear and easy-to-find disclosure near the top of the post right below the title, as seen in this Almost Supermom post. If you record or broadcast video content, it should at minimum have a clear and conspicuous disclosure right at the beginning. While not mandated, the FTC says disclosures that appear regularly throughout the video would be even better. While the FTC also does not mandate specific wording of disclosures, it still requires disclosures, even in the shortest form of media. On Twitter, for example, include #ad in a tweet or "Ad:" at the beginning of your tweet. It's the safest way to comply when using short-form content. While some companies worry that these disclosures will impact their content's authenticity, disclosure statements actually have the opposite effect. Used appropriately, disclosures note the influence that compensation may have on the person producing the content. However, savvy readers recognize that compensated content is an effective way for creators to fund the creation of content. And ethical bloggers will only accept compensation for content their readers want to consume in the first place. #2: Google: Use NoFollow Tags for Links in Sponsored Posts Google, the arbiter of all things search, has worked for years to keep compensated content from unduly affecting search rankings. To that end, you should ensure all of the links in a compensated blog post contain NoFollow tags. This designation tells Google's algorithm to ignore those links when calculating page rank for the links' target pages. You can insert this link manually by adding rel="nofollow" in the HTML code. The result looks like this: Many online publishing systems make this easier with plugins that manage the tagging process automatically. A search for "NoFollow" in the WordPress plugin library yielded 298 results.

Facebook Branded Content: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Branded Content: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to partner with influencers on Facebook? Have you heard of branded content on Facebook? Facebook's Branded Content feature allows media outlets, celebrities, and influencers to tag content that includes a third party, brand, or sponsor. In this post you'll discover how Facebook's Branded Content feature works for publishers and marketers. Listen to this article: Who Can Create Branded Content? Branded content is currently limited to media outlets, celebrities, and influencers with verified pages, indicated by the blue checkmark icon next to their name. For example, the interest result for "Cats" above is not a verified page, but the other three results are. Hence, to create branded content, be on the lookout for pages with the blue verified icon when you search for media, celebrities, and influencers. What Does Branded Content Look Like? Branded content can be a photo, video, link, text, instant article, or 360 video at launch. In a couple of weeks, live video will also be available to use as branded content. When a verified page shares branded content, it looks like this. The post itself looks normal. What makes it branded content is the "with" tag next to the name of the media outlet, celebrity, or influencer that posted about you. When people share an update you're tagged in, your name goes wherever the verified page owner's name goes. This gives you increased exposure, which could turn into new fans for your page. What's the Real Difference With Branded Content? The main benefit of branded content over page mentions is that your page and the verified page that published the post will get performance insights. In the following example, Social Media Examiner is the verified page and Kristi Hines is the page that has been tagged in a Branded Content post. First, if your page is tagged, you'll get a notification that a verified page has tagged your page in branded content. Look for these as you would for typical notifications. Also look for a notification within your page's Notifications section. Clicking on either of these will lead you to your page's insights, specifically for Branded Content posts. Here, you can monitor a post's organic or paid engagement. You'll get most of the same insights with branded content as you would your own posts, even though it wasn't made on your page. You can sort the post's analytics by organic versus paid and fans versus non-fans. You can also break down the types of engagement the post received. You can click on the link to see the full breakdown of analytics data for the post. You can also use the Share and Boost button to share the branded content to your page and boost it to your page's audience or an audience of your choosing. Now, you can know instantly how well a particular media outlet, celebrity, or influencer delivers exposure for you. If you have multiple media outlets, celebrities, and influencers promoting your campaign, you can see which ones are giving you the greatest visibility with a variety of Facebook metrics. How Do Verified Pages Brand Content? Media outlets, celebrities, and influencers can easily brand their content using the new Handshake icon. It's located in the status box when they begin a post for their page, and is accessible from their desktop browser, the main Facebook iOS app (excluding Business Manager), Power Editor, Ads Manager, the Marketing API, and the Mentions app on iOS. Android support is coming soon. On the desktop, when they click on the status box, it will look like this. When you click on the handshake icon, the verified page receives a notification about what you, the marketer, will see about the post. Note that verified pages can tag more than one third party, brand, or sponsor for each post. (In addition, note that none of the brands shown or mentioned have in any way asked for or paid for sponsorshi...

SEO Services Company in Basom NY

by Lunarned45 @ Local seo tips

Seo Optimization Services Prices Basom New York Conferences It fees a lot of money, but if it receives them to primary within the seek scores, they could then use that to affect prospective customers. What a few agencies do is to pressure ratings for some key phrases with a massive investment in ‘paid hyperlinks. Optimization… Continue reading SEO Services Company in Basom NY

Artykuł SEO Services Company in Basom NY pochodzi z serwisu Local seo tips.

Black Type Launches Affiliate Programme with Income Access

by The Income Access Team @ Income Access

Income Access technology will power new programme for UK online bookmaker that streamlines the sports-betting experience for players Montreal, QC. […]

The post Black Type Launches Affiliate Programme with Income Access appeared first on Income Access.

How to Build a Blogging Team

How to Build a Blogging Team

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to publish regularly to your blog? Have you thought about bringing in other writers? With a team of bloggers, you can share the workload and keep your blog updated with fresh content. In this article you'll discover how to set up and support a blogging team for your business. Listen to this article: Why a Team? Posting regularly to your blog is not only a way to carry out your content strategy, but it's also the key to driving relevant traffic and awareness for your business. So if you're struggling to update your blog consistently, consider bringing in some help. Creating a team of bloggers can facilitate regular blog contributions. By sharing responsibility, you can provide fresh content on a regular basis and ensure that no single person bears the burden for the blog's success. But setting up a successful team is about more than just selecting a few people and assigning topics. And, no matter how many people you put on your team, keeping them inspired to create engaging content will require time and attention. Here's how to set up a team that's passionate and engaged, and most importantly, that follows through. #1: Assemble the Team The most important element of creating a blogging team is to choose people who really want to write and have a passion for blogging or the industry. You're asking people for an extra commitment, so you need team members who are excited to participate. Consider asking potential members to fill out a short application for entry to the team. And then launch the team with a formal announcement and an in-person kickoff meeting. Nothing creates a sense of enthusiasm and purpose quite like some team bonding time. This meeting can serve a few different purposes (some discussed below), but the main point is to get everyone on the same page with their roles and responsibilities, and to feel confident in their ability to contribute regularly. It's also a great way to foster team camaraderie, which again is essential when you're requesting work above and beyond a colleague's regular job duties. Every team member should also agree on what his or her specific role is, and then document it, sign it and make copies. There's something about signing an official document that reinforces the importance of a commitment. #2: Manage Workflow and Facilitate Communication The team is a team because each member is important. This mentality helps create a sense of accountability and responsibility among team members. It also allows people to volunteer for specific blog posts, pick up the slack when necessary and ensure that there's a reason (other than just the company's prerogative) to show up regularly to team meetings and write new blog posts. A great way to manage workflow is to use a tool like the Edit Flow WordPress plugin. It provides a monthly calendar, allows the team to collaborate on blog posts and sends out notifications so everyone stays on track with their assignments. Other apps like Slack and Facebook groups also allow teams to communicate and share documents without needing to be in the same physical location. #3: Create a Brand Identity and Team Mission During the formal launch, schedule time to discuss the blog's identity and the team's mission. And this isn't about an obvious mission like "Increase our brand's SEO, site traffic and overall position as a thought leader." It's about a mission for the team itself, something like: "Encourage our peers to actively participate in writing, reading and sharing our blogs and dare to create content that's informative and cutting-edge." Make this something the team creates together and that everyone can buy into. What are the adjectives you want to use to describe your team? Hardworking, passionate, upbeat, focused? Choose a few and make this your team's mantra, something you go back to often to encourage participation. Creating a team mission as a group creates a sen...

Mobile Marketing: How to Get Started

Mobile Marketing: How to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use mobile marketing for business? Are you wondering how to get started? To learn how mobile marketing and social connect, I interview Jamie Turner for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jamie Turner, co-author of the book Go Mobile. His blog, the 60 Second Marketer is ranked as one of the top 10 marketing blogs by Social Media Examiner. He also runs a social media and mobile marketing agency called 60 Second Communications. Jamie shares how to start with mobile marketing and why you should pay more attention to mobile customers. You'll learn what tools to use and the difference between mobile websites and mobile apps. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobile Marketing Why marketers should pay more attention to mobile customers Jamie states that 15-50% of the people who visit your website come in from a mobile device and this number will continue to grow. When consumers visit your website from a mobile device, you need to be there to meet them, understand mobile marketing and know how to connect with customers on mobile. You'll have to learn how to use mobile, as it's a way to build a bridge between you and your customer. You'll discover how more people check prices on their mobile devices while shopping and what you need to provide them to make sure they buy from you. And you'll hear that when people buy a product on mobile devices, particularly tablet computers, their total ticket price is typically higher than it is via a desktop computer. It's important to be mobile-ready—not only for B2C but for B2B too. Listen to the show to find out how many people bought a virtual ticket on a smartphone while attending Social Media Marketing World. Is there a social media connection when it comes to mobile marketing? Jamie sees email as a social media tool. Sixty-seven percent of all "C-level" executives check their emails from their mobile devices. The better-known tools being LinkedIn, Facebook, Twitter and YouTube. We all need mobile websites. Remember when consumers visit your site, one of the prominent things you want to do is give them the ability to connect with you on social media platforms from their mobile device. You'll hear Jamie give a great example of how you can use LinkedIn on a mobile device in a business environment. Photography is easy on a smartphone. Look at how well Twitter and Facebook have integrated photos into their mobile apps. It's a great opportunity to grab customers. You'll find out how Ramon De Leon, a regional Domino's pizza guy in Chicago, evangelizes his business with the use of Twitter. Jamie explains what mobile websites mean and the difference between a mobile website and a mobile app. You'll discover what you need to do to make your website mobile and why the WPtouch plugin for WordPress is an awesome tool to have. Listen to the show to find out why social is mobile. The most common types of marketing when dealing with mobile users Jamie lists 7 things businesses have to think about when it comes to mobile marketing. Mobile websites SMS Mobile display ads/banner ads Mobile paid search Location-based marketing Apps QR codes These are the primary tools out there. Jamie's advice is to make sure you always start with a mobile website and then move into paid search or QR codes. You'll hear Jamie give an example of how a restaurant can use SMS to drive more foot traffic to their business.

Twitter Marketing: How to Succeed on Twitter

Twitter Marketing: How to Succeed on Twitter

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for your business? Are you wondering how to get more out of your Twitter marketing? To learn how to successfully market your business using Twitter, I interview Mark Schaefer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Mark Schaefer, the author of The Tao of Twitter, Return on Influence and co-author of Born to Blog. He's a college educator, blogger, consultant and speaker. This is his third appearance on this show! Mark explores what you need to know about using Twitter for your business. You'll discover the path to Twitter success, how to utilize everything Twitter has to offer to market your business, and manage your followers and lists. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Marketing How Mark got started with Twitter  Mark believes that you really need to immerse yourself in the social web in order to truly understand it, or be successful as a consultant or teacher. Mark immersed himself in Twitter 7 years ago, when he started his own consulting business and started to teach. Mark admits that he was not an early fan of Twitter. It took him months to figure out that this platform was more than just the advertising, technology, mentions or hashtags. Once he understood the powerful human aspect behind Twitter, it changed his life and he wanted others to understand it too. Mark calls Twitter the greatest networking tool ever created. Many of the connections he's made around the world would not have been possible without Twitter and his blog. Listen to the show to discover more about Twitter's powerful ability to connect you with potential clients and opportunities.  The three elements of the Tao of Twitter Mark identifies tao as the Chinese word meaning path. He explains that there is a certain path to success. Behind every Twitter success story, perhaps behind every social media success story, there are 3 essential elements to this path: meaningful content, a targeted audience, and authentic helpfulness. You'll hear Mark discuss each of these three elements in detail and how they work to create meaningful connections for your business when you use Twitter. According to Mark, there is no better way across any social media platform to create an audience than Twitter. It offers so many ways to find the right people for your business. Listen to the show to discover how these three elements work together to lead to success on Twitter.  How businesses can use Twitter  In The Tao of Twitter, there is a chapter called "25 Ideas to Toast Your Competition". Mark offers a few examples of this in the show. He thinks that Twitter is under utilized by businesses today, yet it has the power to transform your business. For instance, Twitter search can be the most powerful source of marketing research available to you. It offers users the ability to target an audience down to a specific zip code, sentiment, or keyword. Twitter's Advanced Search allows you to find potential clients, conduct competitive research, track trends, or provide customer service, all in real-time. Mark explores the benefits of paid promotions and ads on Twitter. According to Mark, this is a great time to try Twitter advertising. The inventory is high and the cost is relatively inexpensive at the moment, but Mark projects that this may not be case for long, as more people learn to leverage this opportunity. Listen to the show to discover a little known trick that makes Twitter advertising especially attractive to marketers.  Broadcast content versus being helpful

How to Repurpose Your Facebook Live Videos

How to Repurpose Your Facebook Live Videos

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook Live? Do you want more mileage out of your broadcasts? Reusing your Facebook Live video can help improve your impact and visibility. In this article, you'll discover how to download and repurpose your Facebook Live videos on other social media platforms. Listen to this article: #1: Download From Your Facebook Profile Facebook Live lets you broadcast a live-stream video from your phone. If you've live-streamed a great video you'd like to keep, follow these steps to download the video file from your Facebook: First, log into Facebook.com and go to your profile. Next, locate the Videos tab below your profile's cover photo (along the bottom of the image or in the More drop-down). Now, click on Videos to see a list of videos you've posted to your profile. Next, click on the thumbnail of the Facebook Live video. After the video opens, click on Options (along the bottom of the video) to reveal the menu to download it. Once you click the Download option, your stand-alone video will open. Right-click on the video and select Save Video As to save the video as an MP4 file to your computer. #2: Download From Your Facebook Page If your Facebook page is lively, the steps below are your best route to download your Facebook Live video from your page. Note: You must be an authorized manager on the page to access the options below. Let's get started! Once you complete a Facebook Live video from your page, you have a few optimization options to increase the reach and purpose of your post. (The options below are presently only available for Facebook Live videos streamed from a Facebook page.) First, log into the Facebook page you used for your Facebook Live post. Next, click on the Publishing Tools tab along the top. In the left-hand column of tabs, click on Videos to see a list of your page's posted videos. Find and click on the Facebook Live video you wish to download. Look for the Video Details pop-up window. Along the bottom, you'll see any posts related to your video. Click on the post link to uncover additional optimization and download options for your video. In the bottom-right corner of the Post Details pop-up window, find and click on the Edit Post button. To optimize your Facebook Live video from the Basic tab, add titles, tags, and custom thumbnail images. From the Advanced Tab, you can also choose to allow or prevent your video from being embedded in an external website. In addition, you can upload a Closed Captioning file to your video for access by the hearing-impaired. Next, look for the gear icon above the top-right corner of your video's image. Click the gear icon and select which version you want to download. If you just went live from your page in the last day or two, there's a slightly faster way to find the download option. This brief video will show you how to quickly download your most recent live video. #3: Repurpose Your Facebook Live Videos The show doesn't stop once you click Finish and Post in your Facebook Live broadcast. While your video post can reach far and wide on Facebook, you can push that reach even further after the video has wrapped up. Upload Your Live Video to YouTube or Vimeo Once you've downloaded your Facebook Live video, you can upload your video to other video hosting sites or channels to reach a wider audience. If you upload it to YouTube, you can even use YouTube's simple video editing tools to trim your video down to the moment(s) you want to keep and share. Don't forget to use YouTube's features to add a branded watermark, action cards, a description, and tags. Share Your Live Video With Newsletter Subscribers If your email newsletter could use a shot in the arm, add your Facebook Live video into your next issue. Personify Leadership shot partner interviews at an international conference and later used the Facebook Live videos to inform newsletter subscribers.

20+ Social Media Hacks and Tips From the Pros

20+ Social Media Hacks and Tips From the Pros

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for the newest social media tips and techniques? Want to know how the experts are staying ahead of the social media marketing curve? We asked top social media pros to share their favorite tips for getting the most out of social media. In this article you'll discover 25 ways to improve your marketing and save time. Listen to this article: #1: Get Around the 140-Character Limit on Twitter Yes, there are tools that save long-winded tweeters, but they really just add a link that takes the reader to a website, out of the stream. Here's a hack that lets you run long, while keeping your readers right there on Twitter. I learned this one from SMMW speaker Amy Schmittauer. First, send a tweet as you normally would ... but end it with an ellipsis or a cliffhanger of some kind. Next, reply to your own tweet! You can do this from your own stream. There's no need to leave the @mention of yourself in there. Remove it so you don't look like you're talking to yourself. Now, visitors who see the first tweet (or either of them) in your stream can see the full length of the super-long tweet by clicking the View Conversation link. Here's what it will look like: Voila! You've broken out of the 140-character jail. It's definitely a hack in the truest sense, but it works! Andy Crestodina is co-founder of Orbit Media. #2: See Restricted LinkedIn Profile Search Results Ever look for people on LinkedIn, but the search results you see are restricted based on your membership level? Because the majority of profiles are indexed on Google, you can use the search engine to do a more comprehensive search. For example, if you find that you can't access the full profile information of someone on LinkedIn, go to Google and type: site:linkedin.com "name of person" If you're looking for marketing managers who mention Dublin in their profile, you can type the following into Google: site:linkedin.com//pub "marketing manager" Dublin Now you can see much of the information LinkedIn's barriers hide from you. Ian Cleary is the founder of RazorSocial. #3: Accelerate Social Media Follower Growth S4S (also known as Share for Share or Shoutout for Shoutout) is a tactic in which you form mutually beneficial partnerships with other influencers in your niche/market. Basically you post each other's content with a reference or tag to each person on an agreed-upon social media platform. We used this social media hack and have gone from 0 to 400,000+ followers on Instagram in under a year. It's great because the hack works on any social media platform: Twitter, LinkedIn, Facebook, Instagram, Pinterest, Periscope, you name it! Nathan Chan is the publisher and editor of Foundr Magazine. #4: Reduce Inflammatory Facebook Fan Posts and Comments Because our Facebook page community can be rowdy, I add words commonly used to attack another fan or our Facebook page to a list of words in the Page Moderation section of Page Settings. When a banned word is used in a comment, the comment is hidden from the general public, but appears to the person who left it and their friends. I ban words like "unlike," "unliking," and "clickbait" as well as things like "!!," "!!!," and "!!!!" because I've found that no one ever uses multiple exclamation points to tell you how much they love you. Holly Homer runs Kids Activities Blog and Quirky Momma Facebook page, and is the founder of Business 2 Blogger. #5: Verify the Effectiveness of an Influencer This is a very difficult time to be in marketing. Ad blockers are diminishing returns and overwhelming information density makes it hard for our message to be heard on Facebook, Twitter, and other channels. This is one reason influence marketing is so important today. Even small companies and agencies need to tune into people who can effectively carry a message online to an engaged audience. But how do you know if an influencer is influen...

SEO Wheatland WY

by @

SEO Wheatland WY

The post SEO Wheatland WY appeared first on .

How to Drive Traffic to Your Blog Posts: A Game Plan for the Top Social Networks

How to Drive Traffic to Your Blog Posts: A Game Plan for the Top Social Networks

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to drive more traffic to your blog? Looking for ways to use social media to promote it? Understanding how to best share your blog posts on many social networks will maximize your visibility and reach. In this article you'll discover how to promote your blog articles on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Instagram and Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Spread the Word on Facebook There are multiple ways to share your blog articles on your Facebook personal and business pages. Update Your Status With a Link When you first post about your blog on social media, the easiest thing to do is to share a link. But rather than simply restate the title in the update, lead into it with a question, a statistic or a bit of interesting information to tease what's in the article so people will want to read it. Create and Share Photos Image posts stand out on social channels. Facebook allows you to share one or multiple photos with a status update to your business page. (You can only share a photo or a photo album on your personal page.) Start with an engaging photo that's representative of your article, with or without the post's title. If there are multiple photos in your article or if it's a how-to or tour of your products, upload the photos as an album, or even better, a photo carousel. For clarity, it's better to upload larger photos rather than smaller ones, especially given how many people view social media via mobile. Facebook will resize the photos to fit. Here's a comprehensive list of social media image sizes. Remember to include the article link and a headline when you post photo updates. Upload a Video If you have a video embedded in your blog post, upload a snippet as native Facebook video to promote the post. The more active and engaging the video clip, the more attention it will draw in the news feed. Include an update and the article title, as well as the Watch More call to action. Then add your article link, which will show up at the end of the video. If you're feeling adventurous and you don't have a clip to share, create a short video telling people what they'll find when they read your article. Write a Note Facebook notes stand out in the news feed and will draw attention to your article. Notes recently got a makeover, and now look similar to blog posts. But rather than repost your article in its entirety, upload an image and write an intro to the article. Then add a clickable link to the end of your note calling readers to read more. #2: Tell Your Followers on Twitter Adding media to your tweets helps you stand out on Twitter. Tweet a Link As with a Facebook status update, it's easy to share a link to your article on Twitter. The tweet doesn't need to be the title, but it can be, since links don't populate unless the user clicks View Summary. Be sure to add appropriate hashtags and @mention the guest author if appropriate. Again, get creative with your tweets so people will want to read more. Share an Image Upload an image when you tweet your article. The image can have the title in a text overlay, be representative of the content or both. Remember to add the link to the article at the end of your tweet. A link takes up 23 of your 140 characters, and an image takes up 24 characters. Upload a Video (or GIF) to Your Tweet Upload a short video or GIF to call attention to your article in the Twitter feed. The maximum length of a Twitter video is 30 seconds so if your video is a little longer than that, you can shorten it after you upload it to Twitter. Remember to add the link to the article at the end of your video or GIF tweet. #3: Let Your LinkedIn Networks Know There are three ways to share articles on LinkedIn: with an update, a photo or a LinkedIn Publisher post. Update Your Status With a Link Include your article's link in your status update.

Video Blogging: How to Create Consistent YouTube Content

Video Blogging: How to Create Consistent YouTube Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos to promote your business? Have you considered starting a regular video blog? To explore vlogging, I interview Amy Schmittauer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Amy Schmittauer, an online video expert. She founded Vlog Boss Studios and regularly produces awesome content for her YouTube channel, Savvy Sexy Social. She's also the author of the brand-new book, Vlog Like a Boss: How to Kill It Online with Video Blogging. Amy explores how video blogging can help your business. You'll discover what you need to start your own video blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Vlog Like a Boss What Is Vlogging? The term vlog builds off the word blog, and a vlog is simply a blog in video form. In a vlog, you can share anything you might do in a blog post, such as a tutorial or a story from your life. Consistency is best for vlogging. If you post a vlog here and there, you won't gain much traction. Amy says most vlogs that do well have a regular schedule. I ask Amy about how using YouTube for vlogging is different from the other ways people use YouTube. Amy says the purpose of a vlog is to help people discover you. Videos that may be suitable for YouTube but that don't help people discover you, such as a product commercial or an introduction to your company, don't make great vlog posts. To be discovered, think of the users who are searching for a concern, a specialty, or the answer to a question. Think about what a potential customer or audience member might want to know, create a video about the topic, and upload it to YouTube. Listen to the show to discover Amy's thoughts about vlogging on mobile apps like Snapchat and Instagram, which have video and social. Amy's Vlog When Amy launched Savvy Sexy Social, she was just getting started as a social media marketer. She thought teaching people the best way to do things on social media would to attract an audience and potential clients. She wanted her vlog to be informative and fun. She didn't want social media to feel like a chore. To juggle her content marketing with her client work, Amy says she scheduled her vlog posts to appear three days a week but she created the week's videos all in one day. She would pick three topics (which could be an app, a product, or a general social media tip), record the videos sitting in front of her bookshelf, and then edit and schedule them for the rest of the week. Amy emphasizes that people didn't have to know who she was to find her videos via search. They just needed to have a question about a topic in her videos. For instance, Amy created a video about a hack to make tweets a little longer. She thought the topic was something new that people didn't know much about, and the video became one of her popular vlog posts. The video's headline focused on the Twitter tip but the video also introduced viewers to Amy. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OJRp22IXqXY Amy shares the simple vlog format she used for a long time. She introduced her topic, delivered information about the topic that her viewers would value, and gave an actionable item that would give them results right away. Then she wrapped up with, "By the way, I'm Amy. Hope you can subscribe and stay tuned." In the last year, Amy says she's been having fun with her format so her community could get to know her a little more personally. For instance, throughout January, she documented the journey of launching a book. This approach was more of a lifecasting vlog, but her audience was learning through Amy's experience.

Social Customer Service: How to Care for Customers With Social Media

Social Customer Service: How to Care for Customers With Social Media

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business have a social customer service plan? Want to step up your customer service on social media? To discover how to improve your social customer care, I interview Dan Gingiss. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Dan Gingiss, former head of digital customer experience for Discover Card, co-host of the Focus on Customer Service podcast and head of digital marketing for Humana. Dan will explore how to better serve your customers with social media. You'll discover what your business needs to respond to on social media. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Customer Service Dan's story Dan, who has been in marketing or product development most of his career, says he has always been in a service business in some way. Dan talks about the impact of his first job out of school. He was a marketer at a direct-response company that sold high-end collectibles. One year around Christmas, he got a phone call that should have gone to customer service. A woman was upset because a gift she ordered for Christmas had not yet arrived. Dan shares how he made sure Christmas wasn't going to be ruined on his watch. Dan says taking an extra moment to think about something from the customer's point of view usually will make you a much better marketer. He talks about his roles at Discover and winning the JD Power Award for best customer experience, taking it away from AmEx. Listen to the show to hear how Dan got started in social media. How customer service fits into social media marketing Studies from Gartner say that as soon as next year, more than 85% of companies will have to compete on customer experience. It's getting too expensive for industries to compete on price, so they need to differentiate themselves by customer experience. Dan says when you interact with customers on a one-to-one basis on social media, it makes them more loyal. Loyal customers spend more with you, stay with you longer and tell their friends about you. All of these elements result in improved KPIs (key performance indicators), which is what marketers care about. Forrester's Customer Service Index is a pretty good indicator of how well large companies are doing, Dan explains. Over the course of many years, Forrester looked at the stock prices of the top- and bottom-performing public companies. The top-performing companies do well in customer experience, while the poor performers in customer experience are at the bottom. There’s a direct link between customer experience and profitability. Dan shares what happened at Discover when they looked at engagement rates on customer service responses (what happened after they responded to a customer and resolved his or her issue). Listen to the show to discover the biggest challenge of one-to-one marketing. Businesses doing customer service well On Dan's podcast they interview large brands such as Whole Foods, Jet Blue, Chipotle and Hertz, as well as lesser-known companies like Telstra. Telstra is the largest telecom company in Australia. Unlike most of the telecoms in the United States, they've decided to differentiate based on service. They've managed to connect all of their systems, including social, into a single CRM, so any customers contacting them on any channel can have the same agent help them, as long as that agent is working. Another recent podcast interview was with Scotty's Brewhouse, an upscale sports bar that has 13 locations in Indiana. Dan shares what business Scott Wise, the founder, president and CEO of Scotty's,

5 Twitter Tools to Boost Your Productivity

5 Twitter Tools to Boost Your Productivity

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you struggle to keep up with your Twitter activities? Interested in tools to improve productivity? Managing your Twitter account doesn't have to consume all your time. There are tools that can make the work easier. In this article you'll discover five Twitter tools to boost your productivity. Listen to this article: #1: Schedule Content via Tweet Jukebox Tweet Jukebox is a free scheduling tool that allows you to load a "jukebox" with content, schedule when you want tweets to go out and then sit back and let it do the job for you. You can create more than one jukebox, load it with thousands of tweets and then send out as many as 100 tweets per day. Your account comes preloaded with two jukeboxes, one with photo content and one with quotes, to get you started. You have the option to tweet jukebox content once, regularly or until a specific date. Tweet Jukebox allows you to set schedules for different times on different days of the week. When it runs out of content, it automatically starts tweeting again from the beginning. The scheduling engine is very flexible. Set a scheduled tweet once a year on a specific date (think holidays and annual events), or choose to tweet by frequency. You can also set a time for each tweet to go out, depending on user engagement. Tweet Jukebox also lets you track who has mentioned you. This can be visualized by the tweets themselves, or shown in a graph format. Choose from mentions in the last 7 days, 30 days, month or previous month. The Jukebox Store allows you to download preloaded jukeboxes with content from other high-profile users. Another handy feature is the ability to thank up to 50 users every Friday. #2: Create Text Overlay for Images Using Spruce Spruce is a free, easy-to-use tool that allows you to quickly create images with custom text for Twitter (and Facebook). Choose an image from the library, add your text, preview your post and publish it. It's as simple as that. Spruce allows you to upload your own images and download completed images for later use. You can check the post and add text before publishing it. Keep in mind that you don't have to tweet using the service, so you can create and add them to your scheduler, too. #3: Manage Followers With ManageFlitter ManageFlitter is a highly useful tool for managing your followers and posts. The functionality of the free account is pretty good. Or you can choose from two levels of paid accounts to get more features, including analytics. In the left column of the main dashboard, find out more about your followers by exploring different views, such as Not Following Back, No Profile Image, Inactive, Fake (Spam), Influence and Muted Users. This allows you to easily unfollow accounts that don't offer any benefit, identify spam followers and more. For example, suppose you want to find people you're following but who aren't following you back. Choose the Not Following Back option to see a list of users to check out and unfollow if necessary. Hover over a user's name to bring up details about that person, including his or her bio, location, language and average number of tweets per day. You can use ManageFlitter to post using the PowerPost feature, which tells you the best times to post based on users' activity. Additionally, you can post suggested content that's based on your niche, add an RSS feed to find further content (although you can't post it directly to Twitter) and view your queued content so you know what's scheduled. You can also connect your Google+ account so that it posts straight to Twitter for you. #4: Manage Relationships Using Commun.it Commun.it is a Twitter relationship management tool. There are three paid plans to choose from, depending on the features you need. You can also access and use the free account, with limited functionality. The dashboard is full of useful information.

Vine: Short Videos and What Marketers Need to Know

Vine: Short Videos and What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to know more about Vine video? Are you wondering how brands and businesses can successfully market with Vine video? To explore how to use Vine short video on Twitter, I interview Zach King for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Twitter Vine personality and host of KingFilmSchool.com Zach King. Known as FinalCutKing on YouTube and Twitter, Zach has more than 1.6 million followers on Vine and creates short special effects videos that have been watched millions of times. Zach shares how he got started with film and online video. You'll discover tips for shooting your own Vine video. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Success on Vine How Zach got started with Vine Zach's curiosity was piqued in September 2013 when friends started showing him Vines. He shares that he decided to try the platform for 30 days. During that time, he made a Vine a day based around silly ideas he and his roommate came up with. Each 7-second Vine featured a special effect and in 30 days, Zach says he accumulated 200,000 followers. He was hooked by the growth rate. Zach talks about why the challenge of using Vine to tell stories excites him. Listen to the show to find out how Vine works. What Zach's most popular Vines have in common Zach believes his Vines are successful because they include circumstances everyone can relate to. For example, almost everyone has locked the keys in the car or wanted a special souvenir from a vacation. Listen to the show to hear about more of Zach's successful videos. How making Vine videos has changed things for Zach Zach shares that as he was working his way through film school by teaching FinalCut, he was introduced to posting on YouTube. As he added Vine and Instagram to the mix, his exposure grew. Zach says that Vine exposure has brought him bigger clients, like Coca-Cola and McDonald's, with bigger budgets. Listen to the show to discover why Zach believes platforms like Vine are changing the commercial branding world. Vine's culture Zach states that Vine is very secretive about their analytics. The only metrics available are likes, ReVines and the released loops. He shares that he estimates the average Vine user to be between 13 and 25 years of age—otherwise known as Millennials. He explains that Vine has a diverse collection of categories including a DIY category where you learn how to do a project in 7 seconds and a Comedy category, which Zach believes is the number-one reason people are on Vine. Zach says you don't need any film experience to be successful on Vine. He points out that a lot of Viners who have 7 or 8 million followers simply grabbed a camera and started recording. Listen to the show to hear how personality and style lead to follower growth. How Vines can be viewed or shared Zach shares you need the Vine app to view videos on Vine, but that they can also be embedded on websites. He says embedding is what led to Vine's increased popularity and that Vines perform best outside of the app. Listen to the show to find out how a third-party YouTube compilation of Zach's Vines contributed to his success. How bigger businesses are using Vine While it attracts bigger brands like Coca-Cola and Virgin Mobile, Zach explains that marketing on Vine is different than on platforms like Facebook because Vine hasn't monetized. He says that because brands can't pay to have their Vines put in front of someone,

How to Use Facebook Ad Bidding

How to Use Facebook Ad Bidding

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Facebook ads? Have you tried ad bidding? Understanding how to use Facebook ad bidding will help you reach your campaign goals for less money. In this article you'll discover how to use Facebook ad bidding with your Facebook ad campaigns. Listen to this article: Facebook Ad Bidding The bidding options for Facebook ads have changed slightly. Facebook has updated automatic bidding to be more beneficial. Although the options are different for each type of ad, Facebook set bidding up to reflect the way people should bid to get the most return on their advertising investment. You can control your bidding and budget three ways: what you're optimizing your ads for, how you're being charged, and whether you're using automatic or manual bidding. If you're just starting out with Facebook ads, you may want to go with the default selection (which, again, is different for each type of ad). However, if you have a specific goal in mind, are troubleshooting or testing an ad, or want more control over your budget, you'll want to adjust your bidding accordingly. Here's how to set up bidding for your ad campaign. #1: Choose a Goal Before you launch any type of ad campaign, you need to choose your objective. Objectives range from boosts and promoted posts to website clicks, conversions, video views, and more. Select your campaign objective and then click Set Audience & Budget to continue. #2: Define Your Audience As with any ad campaign, you need to decide what audience you want to reach. You can use a saved audience or create a new one. You can either go broad or get specific with your audience. Keep in mind that the narrower the targeting, the more likely you are to reach the right people, even if the audience size is smaller. #3: Determine Your Budget Before you set the bidding, decide how much money you want to spend for your campaign and how you want to spend it. You can bid a certain amount per day or choose a lifetime budget, which is the total amount you're willing to spend. For instance, if you choose a lifetime budget of $100 and the ad will run for 10 days, you'll probably spend about $10/day. If you choose a daily budget, that will run for the duration of the campaign. Before you go with a large ad spend, split test your ads to see which ones resonate with your audience. Try out different images, text, and offers. For example, I did an ad for a client with a webinar as the offer, but it had very little conversion. When I changed the offer to an ebook with the same title, it was substantially more successful. When you're in the testing phase, test at $25 to $50 per ad to see how each ad performs and then compare ads against one other. After you figure out your budget, move forward with your ad campaign. #4: Optimize Your Ad Delivery When you get to the Optimize section, Facebook defaults to the goal you selected for the ad campaign, such as Link Clicks to Your Website, Video Views, Impressions, or Daily Unique Reach. When Facebook optimizes your ad, it shows the ad to the people who are most likely to take that particular action. For instance, if you have a pixel set up to track when people convert from your website, Facebook will serve your ad to people who are more likely to click. Facebook will also serve video and subscribe ads to those most likely to watch or sign up. If you change the way you optimize your bidding, your estimated daily reach may change, too. If you want to change the bidding optimization (for example, views of the ad rather than clicks), select your new bid optimization method from the Optimization for Ad Delivery drop-down list. Note: oCPM (optimized CPM, or cost per thousand impressions) used to be the default bidding model, but it's no longer available. The current equivalent is to optimize an ad for link clicks and get charged per impression, but this is not always the best choice.

Twitter Analytics: How to Know if Your Twitter Marketing Works

Twitter Analytics: How to Know if Your Twitter Marketing Works

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you review your Twitter Analytics? Want to use them to improve your Twitter marketing? Ian Cleary is with us to explore what you can learn from the data provided in Twitter Analytics. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Ian Cleary, a social tech expert. His blog, RazorSocial.com, placed in our Top 10 Social Media Blogs four years in a row. He also founded the RazorBlazers Club, a community for marketers who want to monetize with social media. Ian explores how you can use Twitter Analytics to take your Twitter marketing to the next level. You'll discover great third-party analytics tools. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Analytics Core Twitter Analytics on the Home Tab Ian explains that once your account is 14 days old, you can access the free analytics provided by Twitter by going to Analytics.Twitter.com on your desktop. You'll start off with an overview on the Home tab, from which you can drill down to view data on tweets, audiences, video analytics, and more. On the Overview screen, you'll see the total number of impressions for all of your tweets. Impressions are the actual number of people who saw your tweets on their Twitter timeline, by visiting your profile, or in a search. For instance, they may have clicked on a hashtag and your tweet was listed. Ian wonders whether Twitter is able to access all of the information for tweets displayed in third-party tools (Hootsuite, Sprout Social, etc.). He goes on to say that even though the data is never going to be 100% accurate, it will give you a gauge to see if your impressions are going up or down each month. Profile Visits is the total number of people who visited your profile on mobile and desktop combined. This number is important, Ian explains, because when you pin a really good tweet to the top of your Twitter profile, you have an idea of how many people have seen it. For example, if Ian's profile shows 17,000 visits, that means 17,000 people have seen his pinned tweet, which is an opt-in to download a lead generation guide. He uses this tweet to build email subscribers from people visiting his Twitter profile. It's a simple thing, but it's the equivalent of having a big opt-in at the top of your website. Mentions show how often your Twitter username is mentioned on other people's profiles. For example, the number of people who shared your content and mentioned your Twitter name will show up there. While they're not clickable, the mountain graphs you see under each data label give you an idea of whether that data set is increasing or decreasing at a glance. For example, you can see if your impressions are going up or down over the course of the month. Or you can check the Followers graph to see if your audience is growing or diminishing. The Top Tweet section of the Overview screen shows you your best tweet over the last 28 days and the number of impressions and retweets on it. Ian explains that you want to see what your most popular tweets are, so you can turn them into evergreen tweets to share regularly. There's no point in retweeting content that's not resonating with your audience. The Top Mention section shows you when someone else shared a piece of your content and mentioned your name, and it did really well. The Top Follower is your follower who is followed by the most people. If someone with a large following has followed you, and he or she is relevant to your audience, pay attention to and start interacting with that person, Ian suggests.

4 Ways to Use Dark Facebook Posts for Business

4 Ways to Use Dark Facebook Posts for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to target a segment of your Facebook audience? Have you considered dark Facebook posts? Dark (unpublished) posts are a great way to tailor different messages to various audiences without posting multiple messages to your page timeline. In this article you'll discover four ways to use dark Facebook posts for your business. Why Dark Posts Before getting into how to use dark Facebook posts, it's important to understand what dark posts really are, and just as importantly, what they are not. Dark posts (also known as unpublished posts) are not the same thing as targeted posts, but they do have much in common. They both allow you to promote posts to specific fans of your page. However, there are two main differences. Listen to this article: First, targeted posts allow you to target an audience based only on parameters such as gender, relationship status, educational status and so on. With targeted posts, you can base your targeting on a variety of parameters. Dark posts, on the other hand, allow you to use keywords (for example, specific job titles) for targeting. The second, and biggest, differentiator is that while both types of posts will show up in the targeted fans' news feeds, dark posts publish without showing up on your page's wall itself. How to Create Dark Posts in Power Editor 1. Log in to Power Editor, and choose Manage Pages from the drop-down menu in the top-left corner. 2. In the left column, select the page for which you're creating the post. 3. In the main area of Power Editor, click the Create Post button. Next, you'll see the Create Unpublished Page Post dialog box. 4. In the top right of the dialog box, choose the post type (Link, Photo, Video, Status or Offer), and then fill in the details for your post. Make sure to select This Post Will Only Be Used as an Ad (in the lower-left corner) so the post won't appear on your Facebook page. 5. Next, choose interest categories and/or add keywords for specific interests. Then click Create Post. The post is saved to your list of posts, and a half-moon symbol appears to the left of the saved post, indicating it hasn't been published yet. 6. When you're ready to publish your post, select it from the list and click Create Post. The key point to remember with dark posts is that you can target specific fans, but you aren't crowding your wall with multiple posts. Hence, these posts are "dark." Now that you understand what dark posts are and how to create them, here are some tips for making the most of them. #1: Reach Fan Segments by Targeting Interests There are distinct interest groups that your community members will fall into and with which they will identify. If you target these groups using text that highlights their interests, your community members will feel like you're speaking directly to them. Suppose that you manage a pizza parlor and you plan to introduce a brand-new pizza next month. Different aspects of that new pizza (for example, the price, the gluten-free crust, Thai seasonings, etc.) will appeal to different segments of your audience. In this case you might create several variations of a post to target different attributes. Because you don't want a bunch of similar posts showing up on your wall, your best option is to use dark posts to target segments of fans. Once the posts are out there, you're able to gather data on engagement rates. Use the data to decide which particular post is worth sharing. You can then promote it on your wall for all of your fans to see. #2: Run Micro-Campaigns A solid social strategy requires big-picture thinking and thoughtful adherence to the core values you want associated with your brand. But this strategy can sometimes be too restrictive if you want to promote specific products to targeted segments. Suppose that you own an online shoe store. You have four new product lines to launch that appeal to four different segments: women...

Sinai SD SEO | Search Engine Marketing in South Dakota

by Martin Hosner @ Search Engine Marketing Company

WE ARE Sinai SEO DOES YOUR Sinai SD BASED BUSINESS NEED MORE LEADS? Fill Out Our Discovery Form We are a leading search engine optimization in Sinai, South Dakota (ZIP: 57061). We have helped a lot of local businesses grow their revenue by ranking their website #1 in Google, Yahoo & Bing search engines. This […]

5 Instagram Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

5 Instagram Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you up to date with the latest Instagram changes? Want to know what the changes mean for marketers? In addition to a brand-new logo, Instagram has rolled out updates to its ad products, video features, and news feed algorithm. In this article, you'll discover how the most recent Instagram changes can affect your marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Video Length Increased Ready to share longer videos on Instagram? In case you haven't heard, Instagram rolled out an increased time limit for videos from 15 to 60 seconds in April. Most users should have this capability with the latest version of the app. You can shoot video directly from the Instagram app or use your photo library. Features allow you to add filters, turn off the sound, and choose the cover photo. With these changes, you can share more video content, especially if you like to repurpose content from other networks, such as downloading your Snapchat story video to Instagram. #2: Videos Show Views and Viewers Now you can find out how many people are viewing your videos on Instagram. Simply look at the view count below each of your videos. When you click on your number of views, you'll get to see the number of likes, along with the option to follow those who liked your video. This may give you an idea of the amount of reach you're getting versus engagement. So if you see that hundreds of people viewed a video, but only a handful liked it, you can assume that it didn't resonate well with your audience. If you have hundreds of views and hundreds of likes, however, you have a winning video. #3: A Tap on Photo Ads Reveals the Call to Action When someone taps once on your ad photo, it brings up your call to action. You can let users click through to your website or app, depending on what you configured when setting up your Instagram ad. Note that this isn't the case with ad videos on Instagram. If you do a single tap on an ad video, it will turn on the sound. A second single tap will turn off the sound. Do a double tap to like the video, just as doing a double tap on an ad image will like the image. This is something worth noting when choosing between image and video. #4: Profile Click-throughs From Ads Include the Call to Action If you link your Instagram profile to your Instagram ad, when someone taps on your Instagram profile, it will place your ad's call to action at the top of your profile. Note that this only happens if users go to your profile by tapping on it above your ad. If they were to access it anywhere else, the call to action would no longer be there. Linking is something to keep in mind when choosing your call-to-action button text. When someone taps through to your Instagram profile from your ad, you'll want to display a call to action and profile bio text that align with your campaign. Would you want Apply Now, Book Now, Contact Us, Donate Now, Download, Learn More, Shop Now, Sign Up, or Watch More at the top of your profile? And what bio text and link would you want below that? Keep this in mind for every Instagram ad campaign. #5: News Feed Visibility Shifts With Algorithm While most people are focused on the logo change, the biggest change is the rollout of the enhanced Instagram algorithm. If you take a close look at your own Instagram news feed, you may notice that it's no longer in chronological order of newest posts first. Instead, you'll see posts in the order that Instagram deems the most important to you. It's not overall engagement or recency that wins the news feed, but rather how much Instagram thinks you care about that particular Instagram user. For example, a photo with 9 likes and no comments from three hours ago from someone you occasionally engage with is several posts ahead of a photo with 180k likes and 640 comments from an hour ago from a celebrity with a verified profile whom you rarely engage with. As an individual,

Marketing Day: Snapchat Context Cards, Facebook and iOS 11, Social Video Myths

by Michelle Robbins @ Marketing Day – Marketing Land

Here's our recap of what happened in online marketing today, as reported on Marketing Land and other places across the web.

10 Ways to Use Snapchat for Business

10 Ways to Use Snapchat for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wondering how to use Snapchat for your business? Want to create deeper connections with your followers? Snapchat can help you build an engaged following, increase loyalty, and boost your brand visibility. In this article, you'll discover 10 ways to use Snapchat for business. Listen to this article: #1: Stage an Influencer Reveal Global fast-food giant McDonald's (username: mcdonalds) isn't just about a famous redheaded clown selling toys with a meal. Professional athletes like LeBron James gave users a behind-the-scenes look at the rollout of the new bacon clubhouse sandwich. Although McDonald's didn't share the results of the promotion, it went well enough to continue. The promotion was pushed to Twitter where users were asked to follow back. To date, McDonald's has over 3 million followers on Twitter. Takeaway: You can apply this same philosophy with Snapchat to give your customers a look at what goes on behind the scenes at your company. Even if your marketing budget is only a fraction of what McDonald's is, buyers still like feeling as if they know the story behind your company. #2: Support an Account Takeover The popular young women's clothing retailer Wet Seal (username: wetseal) launched a Snapchat campaign, which was quickly taken over by a Snapchatter named MsMeghanMakeup. Meghan has over 300,000 followers and her influence was quickly felt as a halo effect over Wet Seal's campaign. The boost propelled the clothier to 9,000 connections in two weeks and over 250,000 views of the holiday "story." Wet Seal was named winner of the 6th Annual Shorty Awards, which honors the best in social media. Takeaway: To get your message seen, you can let an influential Snapchat user take over your account. You may not have connections with 300K+ followers, but even local authorities with hundreds or thousands of fans can improve your Snapchat reach. #3: Share Promo Codes Frozen yogurt chain 16 Handles (username: love16handles) used Snapchat's instant photo feature to amass followers and promote their frozen treats. They were also among the first brands to use Snapchat for coupon offers. The yogurt company earned new customers by promoting specific store locations and times, and when people snapped photos of themselves or their friends eating 16 Handles yogurt, they instantly received a coupon code for between 16% and 100% off. The catch: They only had 10 seconds to show the cashier. Takeaway: You can get your followers involved with Snapchat-exclusive coupon codes or other exclusive promos. Make it fun and your brand's reach is sure to grow! #4: Give VIP Access In the past, it took several weeks for photos from New York Fashion Week to trickle down from photographers to magazines, and then from newsstands to consumers. Now, with Snapchat, followers can watch the fashions unfold almost instantly. Lucky Magazine's editor-in-chief, fashion brand Refinery 29, and many others shared snaps of models strutting down the catwalk, allowing them to deliver images of the iconic fashion show to people in ways never dreamed of before. Takeaway: You can use Snapchat to give your followers a VIP look at your events and promotions that they'll likely never have a chance to attend in person. It's a fun, easy way to bring new life to established events. #5: Feature Your Followers Mobile and online food ordering brand GrubHub (username: grubhub) launched its first Snapchat campaign in 2013, becoming a finalist in the 7th Annual Shorty Awards. They featured their own weekly content, stories gathered from user-generated content, giveaways, and promotions. The results included a 20% increase in followers after the launch of the Snapchat giveaway. The campaign was one of many factors that contributed to its Wall Street debut in a public offering. Takeaway: Don't let your Snapchat feed become too self-serving. Make your feed about your followers, offer them value,

3 Ways to Improve Your Twitter Ad Performance

3 Ways to Improve Your Twitter Ad Performance

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want a better return on your Twitter ads? Looking for cost-effective ways to reach relevant prospects? By adjusting your ad bidding and targeting, you can deliver affordable and appealing ads on Twitter. In this article, you'll discover three ways to improve your Twitter ad performance. Listen to this article: #1: Reduce Ad Costs With Bidding Options Automatic bidding is the default choice for Twitter ads, but other bid types can increase exposure among audience members who are more likely to click or follow. To change your bid type when creating a new ad, scroll to the Set Your Budget section and click Show Advanced Options. This reveals a drop-down menu, allowing you to select a bid. You'll see options for maximum and target bidding. Next, make a maximum bid to set how much a lead, click, or engagement is worth to you. You may actually spend less than you offer. Once you win an auction, your offer will be reset to only a penny more than the second-place bid. This method is beneficial for boosting ad performance, because you can end up earning more clicks, leads, and engagement than you thought your budget would allow. Or you can make a target bid to enter as many auctions as possible, potentially advertising to more users while controlling how much you spend. Set the average amount you want to spend per lead or link click. Twitter automatically stays within 20% of what you enter for auctions each day. For example, suppose you bid $3 per click. Twitter will win you auctions at $2.40 per click and others at $3.60, averaging out to your bid price. Compared to maximum bids, target bids can give you access to a larger audience. That's because Twitter won't shy away from auctions that exceed your set price, potentially earning more space on users' feeds. Compared to automatic bids, target bids can win you more auctions. That's because Twitter won't enter you with the lowest bid possible. On a case-by-case basis, making a maximum or target bid can improve your ad performance while saving some of your budget for future campaigns. #2: Refine Targeting With Audience Insights Twitter's built-in analytics suite can help not only when targeting specific audiences, but also when creating ads that appeal to them. To start, open Twitter Analytics and click the Audiences tab at the top of the page. From here, you can toggle between groups of users, ranging from your followers to profiles you've reached organically. You can also navigate the sub-tabs to see information about audience interests, languages, buying habits, and more. This data is valuable when setting the targeting criteria for your ads. For example, say the bulk of users who have engaged with your content are women, and they're mostly from the United States. You now know to target this demographic, which should generate clicks and other interactions. However, there's still the hurdle of crafting ad copy, images, and attention-grabbing calls to action. Referencing Twitter Analytics can help with this challenge, too. As you cycle through tabs that contain different audience metrics, you'll likely come up with different ways to frame your ads. User net worth and household income are factors that appeal to advertisers. Imagine your products or services have price tiers from $30 to $1,000 per month, while a noticeable group of your audience members have annual incomes greater than $250,000. You can glean two insights from this data. First, targeting an affluent demographic is a viable option. Second, advertising your highest price tier should yield some success. When crafting the creative aspects of the ad, you can use the Interests bar graph, which is located under the Overview and Lifestyle tabs. It ranks popular topics based on audience interest. Suppose you want to promote an apparel business and your audience is largely interested in sports. The ad can use an image of an athlete wearing y...

Facebook Ads: Creative Ways to Attract Prospects and Customers

Facebook Ads: Creative Ways to Attract Prospects and Customers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you advertise on Facebook? Are your ads converting? To explore how to better use Facebook ads to reach leads and customers, I interview Zach Spuckler. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Zach Spuckler, a Facebook ads expert and host of the Heart, Soul & Hustle podcast, a show about generating more leads, sales, and conversions. His course is called Rock Your FB Ads. Zach shares his framework for building leads with Facebook ads. You'll discover mistakes many marketers make with Facebook ads. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Ads Zach's Story Over the last 10 years, Zach has dabbled in most forms of online marketing, including affiliate marketing, direct sales, website flipping, consulting, and Facebook ads. About two and a half years ago, Zach was running a successful vegan food blog called The No Fuss Vegan as a hobby while working a job and studying for a master's degree. As the blog grew, the hours of work that Zach put into developing recipes, and styling and shooting photos for his blog left him feeling burnt out. He liked what he was doing but he didn't love it. Zach took three months off to explore what work made him happy and realized it was marketing. He loved testing his ads, and messaging and building his list. That's when he launched Heart, Soul & Hustle. When Zach started this business, he was committed to a foundational principle: Instead of teaching people theories that worked, his teaching would be grounded in what he had learned through experience. His first digital course came out a few months later. He had been doing one-on-one Facebook ad management using Periscope for promotion. Zach did a Periscope at Starbucks, saying, "I can't really teach you how to make a million dollars. I'm not a six-figure coach. But I have gotten my income up to about $1,000 a week on Periscope. Is that something you want to learn about?" He set up a PayPal button in real time and did about $1,200 in sales. That's when everything started to come together. Zach realized he could own his expertise without faking it. He could be fully transparent and show people what he was doing at his current level, and that approach would resonate with people. Zach's passion has always been ads, and his intention when he started the company was to create a Facebook ads course. However, everybody wanted to learn about live streaming, so he tabled the ads program in response to his market. However, he still launched the program a year later and has had a blast testing everything with Facebook ads such as Messenger, retargeting, and Facebook Live. About a year ago, Zach realized he had become a total workaholic and could use Facebook advertising to help him do the heavy lifting. He scaled up his ad spend and hired an ads manager. Although Zach emphasizes that ads don't do all of the work, his ads nevertheless work for him whether or not he can show up on a particular day. Today, hundreds of people take Zach's courses. His company does launches with thousands of people, they have incredible affiliates, and they've been affiliates. Investing in advertising has opened so many doors that he can't help but get excited about it. Listen to the show to hear about Zach's earliest experience working online. Facebook Ad Mistakes The market has been evolving but marketers aren't all keeping pace. A few years ago, you could run a Facebook ad to a sales page and make money. You could even run ads directly to a checkout page. But back then, most Facebook users didn't realize that a sponsored post in the news feed was an advertisement. Today,

6 Tools for Selling Products on Instagram

6 Tools for Selling Products on Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to sell your products using Instagram? Looking for tools to make it easier for customers to buy from you? The right Instagram tools help you maximize your revenue. In this article you'll discover six tools to help you sell products on Instagram. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Shoppable Content With a Hashtag Hashtags are a big part of how you connect with users on Instagram, and Inselly makes good use of them. Like other platforms on this list, Inselly lets you use the profile-link-to-storefront method of selling. It comes with the added bonus of the Inselly hashtag. Add the hashtag #inselly to your description, as well as any other relevant tags that might put you in front of your target audience. Not only does this hashtag make it easier for users to search for buyable content, but it also flags your content as being buyable if users stumble across it somewhere else. Sellers can process purchases through PayPal, and buyers can contact sellers through a message either on the app or the Inselly website. Buyers need to have Inselly installed and integrated with Instagram, but it's free for them to do so. It's also free for sellers to use, with no commissions or fees, although you can choose to purchase "coins" (the international currency Inselly utilizes) to promote your content. [Editor's note: Inselly recently updated. Buyers don't need to install or integrate the software with Instagram, and it's free for them to use.] #2: Sync Inventory Across Your Online Stores Shopseen is a multichannel listing interface that allows you to upload and list your products and have them automatically uploaded to a variety of ecommerce stores like Shopify, Etsy, eBay and Woo. Shopseen will then update your inventory, continually and automatically, across all of these sales channels. They also have a straightforward Instagram selling tool that's easy to use for both ecommerce businesses and customers. Shopseen will create a storefront using your profile link, similar to other services you'll see in this article. Once you've linked your Instagram to Shopseen, upload images of your products to Instagram, and add a price to the description. Shopsheen will then upload the product to your Shopseen page (which is off of Instagram). Ask followers to click to your store through your profile link and you can collect payment from a credit card. They don't have to set up their own Shopseen account, which is a strong benefit. This is particularly helpful for ecommerce businesses that feature their products on a wide variety of storefronts. Pricing is based on the amount of sales you make per month and the number of stores you have. You start with a free plan that allows you to have one store and Shopseen takes a 10% fee on Instagram sales. #3: Sell Through Comments Soldsie allows users to purchase directly from a seller's Instagram news feed without ever leaving the app. As an added bonus, this selling tool works for Facebook, too. Both buyers and sellers have to install and integrate the software with Instagram after registering with Soldsie, which uses "comment selling" as its method of making sales. Upload your products through your selling dashboard to turn the product images into shoppable Instagram posts. Then you include specific buying information and product details, such as "100% cotton, comes in blue and white" on each Instagram product post. Ask your buyers to make purchases by commenting "sold" directly on the post and including any necessary size/color/selection information. Once buyers comment with this information, Soldsie emails them an invoice so you can collect payment via PayPal or credit card. Soldsie has a variety of pricing plans based on the needs of your store, starting with a basic plan that costs $49 per month, with a 5.9% commission fee on all sales. #4: Connect To a Shoppable Storefront Have2Have.

Search Engine Marketing in North Texas

by Max Juhasz @ Rebel Base SEO

Search Engine Marketing in North Texas Search Engine Marketing VS Traditional Marketing We all know about traditional marketing and advertising platforms for small businesses.  We see and hear them everyday.  Just open a magazine or a newspaper, and depending on Read more…

The post Search Engine Marketing in North Texas appeared first on Rebel Base SEO.

How to Drive Website Traffic With Instagram

How to Drive Website Traffic With Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram to market your business? Want to direct followers to your website? With a few simple tactics, you can generate quality website traffic from Instagram. In this article you'll discover how to use Instagram to drive traffic to your website. Listen to this article: #1: Add a Website Link to Your Bio The most common way to lead Instagram followers to your website is to use the "link in bio" tactic. Instagram lets you include one clickable link in your bio, so make sure you use it effectively. To add a link, go to Edit Profile and type it in the Website text box. In Birchbox's Instagram bio below, their link directs followers to a customer appreciation day promotion on the company's website. With the tool Have2Have.it, you can use your bio link to direct followers to a page with the same look and feel as your Instagram feed, where they can click images to purchase your products or read your content. The New York Times has a Have2Have.it link in their Instagram bio. When followers click the link, they're taken to a curated page with the top stories of the day. Users can click on an image to see the story behind it. With an analytics dashboard, you can gain key insights to see what content performs best. Focus on high-performing posts to form a content strategy. By tracking clicks on Instagram, you can increase revenue and subscribers to online content (such as blog posts), newsletters or email campaigns. Of course, you'll want to track your click-through rate, so use a shortened Bitly link or vanity URL to know where your clicks are coming from. Overall, you can use this tactic for any links including an ecommerce website, YouTube channel or company blog. To take it a step further, create an Instagram landing page that captures email addresses through downloadable content like an ebook. The landing page design should mirror the look of your Instagram feed so there's a visual connection for the user. #2: Place a Call to Action on Images Design Instagram photos that convert. You can layer a call to action and your website URL directly onto an aesthetically pleasing photo. In Canva's post below, the image has a call to action asking followers to enter a contest for a year of free access. The photo caption then directs users to click the link in Canva's bio. This technique is beneficial for Instagram contests where you ask your followers to enter their email information on your website. Now, you have a strong piece of shareable branded content that drives followers to your contest. #3: Include a URL in Videos Instagram video brings digital storytelling to life. In fact, videos on Instagram generate three times more inbound links than image posts, so it's definitely worthwhile to invest in a 15-second narrative. Brands like Dollar Shave Club use video in innovative ways to spice up their Instagram feed. Their videos work similarly to a television commercial. Dollar Shave Club's videos include the URL in a text overlay and a voiceover ("Shave with a fresh blade anytime; try Dollar Shave Club.com") that further drives Instagram followers to their website. The videos are quick, fun and engaging, making viewers want to learn more. #4: Invest in Instagram Ads Instagram recently announced it was opening its API to all companies and brands. By investing in the platform, you can target the right audience demographic through people's interests. With an ad spend alongside your Instagram strategy, you're likely to see an increase in website visits and ecommerce conversions. Clickable links in Instagram ads give you an opportunity not only to be creative, but also let your followers learn more about your digital campaigns or attribute direct revenue from Instagram. There are three types of sponsored Instagram ads: image, video and carousel. Image ads are single photos that tell a story with their imagery.

5 Creative Ways to Grow Your Email List

5 Creative Ways to Grow Your Email List

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to grow your email list? Got a blog? New tools and placement options have made it easier than ever to create an offer that compels blog visitors to share their email address with you. In this article you'll discover five unique ways to grow your email list from your blog readers. Listen to this article: #1: Put Your Best Offer on Your Homepage To encourage email signups, show the value of being an email subscriber on the homepage of your blog. The main focus should be on your opt-in box. Place the links to other areas of your site below the fold, so readers won't see them unless they scroll down the page. Bluewire Media collects email addresses directly from their main page. Below, they offer visitors free marketing templates in addition to news and updates delivered to their inbox. #2: Use a Feature Box to Present Lead Magnets If you don't have a custom homepage or don't have the resources to redesign your current homepage, a feature box might be a good option for you. A well-designed feature box exchanges your lead magnet for new email addresses. You typically place the feature box above the fold of your page so it's immediately visible to users. Unlike entry pop-ups, feature boxes don't interrupt visitors from scrolling down the page and browsing your blog content. They can either take your bonus or scroll down the page. The feature box at DIYthemes increased the blog's subscription rate by 51.7%. Feature boxes convert well even if they're subscription-only and don't offer a lead magnet. Choose a good opt-in offer, such as a free email course. The Enchanting Marketing blog offers readers a free writing course in their feature box. If you're looking for a tool to create opt-in feature boxes, try the WordPress plugins PlugMatter Optin Feature Box or Thrive Leads. Don't forget that your homepage is one of the most visited pages on your blog, so it deserves special treatment. Think about changing your homepage design to include an engaging sign-up box as the next step after a feature box. #3: Add Content Upgrades to Blog Posts Content upgrades are another way to grow your email list. The principle behind them is the same as for any opt-in form: You give away free material (a lead magnet) and get your visitors' email addresses in return. Place a link to your bonus content with a call to action in your article and wrap it with an eye-catching box. When readers click the link, a pop-up box appears, asking for their email address to get the bonus material. Michael Hyatt offers readers a list of literary agents as a bonus in the following article, which is valuable material for his readers and relevant to the topic of the article. When readers click your download link, open a pop-up box asking for their email address. After readers complete the form, redirect them to a page with the bonus. You can use a variety of different materials in your content upgrades. Here are a few examples: A PDF version of your article A checklist An instructional video A template A list of tools or resources An infographic Remember that you need to choose bonus content that is highly relevant to the topic of your article. That's why content upgrades are often called "content-specific bonuses." To implement content upgrades on your blog, try a tool like LeadBoxes or the Content Upgrades PRO plugin for WordPress. #4: Display a Scroll-Triggered Box Another effective and unobtrusive way to turn readers into email subscribers is to use scroll-triggered opt-in boxes. Unlike pop-ups, scroll-triggered boxes don't interrupt the visitor's reading and don't cover up any content. Place a scroll-triggered box at the corner of the page when readers scroll down to a certain part of your article. By the time the box appears in front of readers, they've already read most or all of your article. They've formed an impression of you,

Becoming Recommended: How to Build a Business Others Love Recommending

Becoming Recommended: How to Build a Business Others Love Recommending

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you rely on word of mouth to promote your business? Are you wondering how to get more people to recommend your product or service? To learn how to build a business that's highly recommended, I interview Paul Rand. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Paul Rand, the CEO of Zócalo Group, an agency that specializes in digital, social and word-of-mouth marketing. He's also the chief digital officer at Ketchum and former president of the Word of Mouth Marketing Association. Paul authored the book, Highly Recommended: Harnessing the Power of Social Media and Word of Mouth to Build Your Brand and Your Business. Paul explores how your business can become highly recommended. You'll discover what motivates recommendations, the importance of targeting the right influencers online and the six steps to getting more positive recommendations for your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Build a Highly Recommended Business Know why your customers would recommend your business  Paul tells a story in his book about his first encounter with a popular East Coast grocery chain, Stew Leonard's. He learned about the company over dinner from clients who not only gushed about this beloved retailer, but also insisted on picking him up the next morning to take him to Stew Leonard's so he could marvel at it in person. What an incredible word-of-mouth recommendation! Paul discovered that Stew Leonard's does a great job connecting with people and that they built sociability into their business from the very beginning. He felt like he was truly part of a special experience when he was in the store. There are some fairly consistent things, particularly in the age of social media, that companies should do to take advantage of this level of brand affinity. People love to share. When people discover something that they think might help someone else, they really want to share it. If you can figure out why your customers would recommend your brand, you have great ability to help them to do it. Listen to the show to discover what businesses should consistently do to become highly recommended.  The power of online recommendations Online recommendations have a dramatic influence and a bigger reach than face-to-face recommendations. Word-of-mouth recommendations have always been the Holy Grail for marketers. Social media basically puts that power on steroids. Now when someone says something positive about your brand, that endorsement has the potential for reaching millions of people. Paul describes two types of recommendations: implied or explicit. An explicit recommendation is told directly in person, through a post or from an online review that something is great. An implied recommendation can be as subtle as liking a Facebook page or sharing a post, yet it can be just as powerful and influential, depending on the source. Listen to the show to find out how recommendations, even from complete strangers, can drive people to your product or brand.  What drives recommendations There are many reasons people are eager to accept and offer recommendations. Very simply, we humans take our cues from other humans. If someone tells us a product, brand or service is good and we notice them benefiting from it, we assume it will benefit us as well. However, it's all a matter of influence. Most people have a certain degree of knowledge or passion for a specific topic or interest and tend to make recommendations around it. They often become the go-to person to ask about that particular topic.

Being Useful: New Marketing Techniques That Work

Being Useful: New Marketing Techniques That Work

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering how your business can be more useful? Do you provide youtility? To learn about youtility and a new way of thinking when it comes to marketing, I interview Jay Baer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jay Baer, the founder of the award-winning blog Convince & Convert and co-author of The Now Revolution. His brand-new book is called Youtility: Why Smart Marketing Is About Help Not Hype. Jay shares the many different ways companies are already providing youtility to their customers. You'll learn the three categories of being useful and how to implement them into your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: New Marketing Techniques What's changing marketing that everybody needs to understand? Jay believes that marketing is harder than ever. With the incredible growth in the number of media outlets, it makes it very difficult to achieve top of mind awareness in the ways that we used to be able to do. Blogs and podcasts didn't exist before, but today they have huge audiences. Companies now have to compete for attention—not just against other companies, but against everybody and everything. Jay explains that if you take a look at your Facebook news feed, Twitter account or email inbox, you'll find a combination of both personal and professional relationships. Companies are competing for attention with consumers' friends and family members and are forced to use the same technologies to get on their radar. Since 1994, Jay has worked online and remembers how people freaked out when they bought advertising on the web for the first time. He says at the end of the day, all these things are almost free, but somebody has got to pay the free. The guys who pay the free are businesses. Listen to the show to find out what you need to do to succeed against everyone and everything. The story about @HiltonSuggests and what the take-home message is for marketers Jay talks about certain people who are an exception to the rule when it comes to being amazing. But he feels that most of us aren't amazing. So the best approach for us all is to be useful. You need to create youtility. Jay defines youtility in his book as marketing that is so useful, people would want to pay for it. Jay shares the story of Hilton Hotels' program called Hilton Suggests on Twitter and how the program came about. You'll hear a great example of how they helped a guy on Twitter who was looking for a vet in the area. They helped him when he needed it most, and this will probably lead to him booking a Hilton hotel in the future. Jay says the difference between helping and selling is just two letters, but in modern business those two letters make all the difference. At a recent conference, Jay heard Gary Vaynerchuk say, "Everybody wants to be a hunter, but nobody wants to be a farmer." Youtility is about long-term play. If you sell something, you make a customer today. But if you help someone, you can create a customer for life. You need to start to think about marketing, customer acquisition, loyalty and retention over a longer time horizon. You'll hear why Jay wishes that more businesses were less self-serving and more useful. Listen to the show to hear how Columbia Sportswear uses indirect marketing and provides youtility to their customers. What youtility is and what marketers need to understand Jay says you wouldn't necessarily charge for youtility because it's marketing...

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage at least one Facebook business page? Are you using all the admin features? Facebook pages include many tools to help marketers and business owners get the most out of their business presence. In this article I'll share how to use Facebook's features, tools and settings to manage your business page effectively. Listen to this article: #1: Access Your Facebook Pages There are a few ways to access your Facebook pages. To see all of the pages you are linked to as an administrator, editor, moderator, advertiser or analyst, go to your Pages bookmarks. From there, click on the link to the page you want. To use your Facebook page to like other Facebook pages or comment on posts, click to log in as your page. Plus, select the settings wheel icon to add specific pages to your favorites in the left sidebar of your Facebook screen. Alternatively, access your pages using the drop-down arrow in the menu at the top of your Facebook screen. #2: Navigate Your Page Menu At the top of your Facebook page, there's a menu to direct you to the main features of your page. You should see this menu when logged in as your personal profile or as your page. The first item in the menu, Page, will take you back to your Facebook page from your Messages, Notifications, Insights, Publishing Tools and Settings. Here are the rest of the features. Engage With Users Privately Through Messages If you'd like, enable Messages in your General page settings. This will allow Facebook users to send private messages to your page. Note: You can only reply to messages your page has received. You cannot send messages (as your page) to people who have not messaged you. A great feature in Messages is saved replies. Create a template for common responses you can easily personalize to send through your page's private messaging. Click on any of your messages create a new reply. Check Notifications for Recent Engagement Notifications give you a quick summary of people who have engaged with your page, as well as their interaction. If someone asks for your contact information using a prompt on your Facebook page, like the one shown below, you'll find it in Requests under the Notifications section. See a full timeline of activity related to your page, including when other people or pages mention your page and when others share your page's posts, under the Notifications section in Activity. Review Your Analytics With Insights Insights are your Facebook page's analytics. This is where you'll learn more about your fan page audience growth and engagement. Insights show you which page posts get the most engagement, and whether your fans match your ideal customer base (age ranges, gender and location). Plus, learn how people discover your page by clicking the Visits tab. Schedule and Publish Posts Through Publishing Tools The Publishing Tools feature lets you create Facebook updates to be published immediately, schedule posts to be published at a future time and draft posts to save for later. To publish a status, photo, video, offer, event or milestone immediately, go to the Published Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. To schedule a status, photo or video post, go to the Scheduled Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. Use the drop-down next to the Publish button to get schedule, backdate or draft options. Be sure to review your analytics on the Published Posts tab as well. Search by keyword for specific updates to see their statistics. In addition to reach, it includes the name of the application used to publish the post to your page. Use this data to see which posts have the most engagement, and determine if posts shared through your page have more reach than those shared through third-party tools. #3: Configure Page Settings Your page's settings allow you to control everything from visibi...

How to Use Twitter Analytics to Improve Your Engagement

How to Use Twitter Analytics to Improve Your Engagement

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you need better results from your Twitter marketing? Want to use Twitter Analytics to guide your efforts? The data in Twitter Analytics reports can help you identify the content that resonates with your audience, so you can build a more active following. In this article you'll discover four ways to use Twitter Analytics reports to boost replies, retweets, and other engagement metrics. Listen to this article: #1: Tailor Your Content to Audience Interests Tweeting content that appeals to your audience's interests can draw people to your feed and encourage them to click and share your content. To get to know your audience, go to your Twitter Analytics and click the Audiences tab at the top of the page. By default, you'll see charts tracking follower growth and demographics. There are five tabs that you can click to see data about your audience, such as what devices and wireless carriers they use. The Interests bar graph, which is available on the Overview and Lifestyle tabs, ranks popular topics and indicates what percentage of your audience is interested in those topics. You can find out the interests of users who took part in your campaigns, viewed or interacted with your tweets, and converted on your website. You can also see this data for different personas, such as parents, Millennials, and users with annual incomes greater than $100,000. Once you understand more about your audience's interests, you can create and curate content that will appeal to them. For example, suppose you're a digital marketer for a social analytics company. When you look at your Twitter analytics, you discover your audience has an affinity for cars. With this information, you create content that breaks down the social profiles of different car brands to identify the best industry practices. You'll also want to retweet influencers, share articles from niche publications, and develop multimedia posts that relate to topics your audience enjoys. Regularly tweeting content your audience is interested in will not only boost engagement, but also help you grab your followers' attention when they're scrolling the news feed. #2: Schedule Tweets Based on Your Audience's Location You can increase clicks, retweets, and comments if you schedule your posts when your target audiences are online and most active. To find out the best times to tweet, click the Demographics tab in the Audiences section of your Twitter analytics. The Demographics report gives you a snapshot of your audience's gender, location, net worth, and more. You'll want to focus on your followers' Country and Region stats. You can also examine this data for audiences you want to pursue. Have you ever earned higher-than-normal engagement by tweeting in the early morning or late at night? Your location data may reveal you were tweeting during a foreign audience's peak hours. Using this information, you can adjust your schedule to better reach those followers and prospects based on a time zone. For example, suppose the chart below shows the countries where your followers live. You can see a significant portion of them (18%) live in Egypt, so you may decide to post more often during the country's workday and in the evenings to better connect with that audience. Experiment with sharing relevant news from a particular region and articles from a region's influencers. If one of your content pieces starts earning a high number of clicks and shares, schedule it throughout the day to reach users in other countries. Scheduling content based on user location can help you increase engagement numbers and potentially connect with an audience you never knew about. #3: Tweet Around Events Share content that relates to holidays, conferences, and anticipated trends to add variety to your Twitter feed. Click the Events tab at the top of your analytics dashboard to see an expanding list of events. The sheer volume of events on Twitter may seem ...

How to Manage a Podcast: Tools and a Checklist for Marketers

How to Manage a Podcast: Tools and a Checklist for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you interested in starting a podcast? Want tips to manage and promote your podcast effectively? Creating a successful podcast doesn't have to be a time-consuming process. Today, tools can help streamline activities such as finding guests, publishing audio, and promoting episodes. In this article you'll discover how to manage your podcast from start to finish. Listen to this article: Why a Podcast? The key to generating a goldmine of compelling and engaging content is to leverage the expertise of others and interview them on your own podcast. A podcast is a win-win platform for your content strategy, because it provides an opportunity for both you and your guest to share your knowledge, feature your respective companies, and build a quality relationship with listeners. Inviting people with knowledge and experience in your industry to share their insights frees you from relying solely on your own knowledge. It also allows you to build a collection of quality content from a network of experts. Here's how to get started with your own podcast. #1: Find Potential Guests The first step is finding potential guests for your podcast. Are you groaning at the thought? Never fear, use a tool like LeadFuze to do the work for you. It's traditionally used by sales teams for B2B lead generation, but it also works well for identifying podcast guests. LeadFuze finds prospective guests by searching LinkedIn for categories such as industry, title, role, and location. It then aggregates all of the prospects' contact information, social media accounts, and domains into a list for you. By automating the prospecting process, LeadFuze saves you the hours of research typically needed to find good guests. #2: Send Out Email Invites Once you have the names and email addresses for guests you want to feature on your show, it's time to send out cold emails. In these emails you make your initial request asking the recipient to be a guest on your podcast. Send the Initial Email There are a number of mass emailing tools out there (such as MailChimp, Infusionsoft, and AWeber), but that's not what you need at this stage in the game. You'll want to send a more personal request with a tool like QuickMail.io. QuickMail.io is unique because it lets you automatically send one-to-one emails at scale through your Gmail account. It sends emails so that they arrive in the recipient's inbox as a personal email. This increases the chances of your emails being opened and not being filtered into a spam folder. QuickMail.io also lets you set up unlimited follow-up emails, which will automatically shut off once the recipient responds. Follow Up With Interested Guests Use FollowUpThen to stay in touch with prospective guests who responded to your initial emails, but haven't yet booked a day/time for your podcast interview. With this tool, you can add a simple email address to the BCC field on any email to remind you to follow up at a later date. You include your desired time frame within the FollowUpThen email address, and the email will then boomerang back into your inbox at that date and time. Once it's back to your inbox, it's up to you to decide if you need to follow up again. #3: Plan the Podcast Once you've lined up guests for your podcast, the next step is to choose a topic and set up a time for the interview. The secret to never running out of creative and compelling content ideas is to allow your guests to choose the topic for their episode. When guests ask you about the topic, say something like this: "We encourage guests to choose the topic for their episode based on their background and experience. Is there a certain topic you'd like to discuss on the show?" Next you need to work out a time for your interview. Unfortunately, we've all experienced the email scheduling dance: "Hi, are you free on Wednesday at 1pm?" "I can't do Wednesday. How does Thursday between 2 and 5pm?"

How to Measure Your LinkedIn Activities

How to Measure Your LinkedIn Activities

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is social selling part of your LinkedIn marketing strategy? Do you know how to measure and track your efforts? LinkedIn gives businesses a number of metrics for tracking the effectiveness of their marketing throughout the selling process. In this article, you'll discover how to measure and track the effectiveness of your social selling on LinkedIn. Listen to this article: What Is Social Selling? Social selling is the process of developing and building relationships via social networks by providing valuable content to your target audience. Ideally, this occurs at each stage of the buyer's journey, which are specific points buyers go through to make a purchasing decision. Those three stages are awareness, consideration, and decision-making. Here's how you can measure your success at reaching prospects at each of these stages. #1: Monitor Awareness Metrics With LinkedIn, you can monitor several short-term results of your social selling efforts, such as an increase in your number of personal connections, content shares and likes, and follower engagement with your company page and showcase pages. These indicate increased awareness and visibility of your business. A great strategy is to include employees in your social selling process, which will increase the likelihood that potential customers will learn about you and eventually follow your LinkedIn company and showcase pages. Number of Connections It's easy to track the number of LinkedIn connections you and your employees have, which provides a meaningful data point for your long-term social selling efforts. Why does this data point matter? Let's say that 30 of your employees are part of your LinkedIn employee engagement program, and they actively share and promote company-related content and information. Assuming that each employee has an average of 200 connections, this means you could potentially have 6,000 people viewing and engaging with content related to your company. If you can get your employees to share content authentically, it'll have a bigger impact because humans want to connect with humans within their trusted networks. By leveraging this human network, you can harness the ripple effect. Content Shares and Likes Implementing a sophisticated content marketing plan is a huge component of your social selling strategy. You need to develop a focused content roadmap around your target audience. A great way to get started is to do a content gap analysis to see what pieces are currently missing from your existing content. Develop a team-based content calendar to ensure that your team shares high-quality content on a regular basis, either by publishing articles or sharing status updates. Eventually, that content gets served to their personal connections. In return, your employees' connections may end up following your LinkedIn company and showcase pages. You can then monitor and track the number of times people share, like, or comment on company-related status updates. This will give you a clear picture of which content resonates with them. As an administrator of your company's LinkedIn page, you can access your page's analytics to see which topics people gravitate towards and what topics you can phase out. In the example below, the last status update reached 529 people. Five people clicked on the post and also interacted with it, resulting in an overall engagement level of 1.89%. To boost your inbound marketing efforts, feed this information back into your search engine optimization strategy. Number of Followers Who Find and Engage With Your LinkedIn Company and Showcase Pages One of the goals of having your employees share company-related content via their personal LinkedIn profiles is to grow the follower base of your LinkedIn company page and showcase pages. This strategy boosts the visibility of your digital assets, and you'll be able to reach entirely new audiences you didn't have access to a...

Social Media Tools: How to Simplify Your Social Media Marketing

Social Media Tools: How to Simplify Your Social Media Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you looking for a better way to manage your social activities? Are you wondering what tools can help your social media marketing? To discover free or low-cost tools to simplify your social media marketing, I interview Ian Cleary for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ian Cleary, the founder of Razor Social—a blog dedicated to social media tools. He's also the social media tools writer for Social Media Examiner. Ian shares why as a marketer you should look beyond Google Analytics and Facebook Insights data. You'll learn the services available to keep up to date with relevant content and the tools to use to monitor your overall activities across all social channels. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Tools How did you become interested in social media tools? Ian explains how his history working for software companies and his very strong technology background led him to social media. When he started to look at all of the key influencers around social media, he soon realized the social media tools niche was perfect because nobody owned that space. Listen to the show to hear how Ian is amazed by the number of tools in development. Why you should look beyond Google Analytics and Facebook Insights data Ian states that although Google Analytics is useful, it doesn't track things such as what's happening on social media related to Twitter or LinkedIn. And the Facebook analytics tool is a little too complicated for many people. One free tool that Ian recommends is LikeAlyzer, which is a very simple Facebook analytics tool. It evaluates your Facebook Page and will give you a score out of 100. You'll then receive some basic recommendations on what to improve. Listen to the show to find out what other amazing recommendations it will reveal. Tools to help marketers keep up with news and content they may want to share Ian explains why there is a lot of activity in this area. The two tools that Ian likes to use on a day-to-day basis are Feedly and Scoop.it. Feedly is a website that allows you to read a selection of posts from any blogs you subscribe to. When you log in, you will see the latest posts. It has a really nice user interface. You can access the content through the web and your mobile device. It also integrates with Buffer app. You'll discover how this can help you with your social media workflow. Another advantage of Feedly is you can group the sites you subscribe to. You'll hear Ian explain the benefits of this and how he groups his. The integration of Feedly and Buffer saves marketers a lot of time. Another tool to help you discover content is Scoop.it. You can follow people on Scoop.it to find relevant content. You can then add this content to one of your boards. It's not only a great way to find content, but also for others to help create it for you. Scoop.it is similar to Feedly in terms of the collection of content, except it's based around people who pick the content for you. You'll discover how to find the right people to follow and the most popular boards around your niche. Ian shares what replacement he uses for Digg and why it's a good source of content. Ian uses a tool within Facebook called Post Planner. It shows you trending content and what's been shared the most. You can then select content and add it to your Facebook Page. Listen to the show to hear about how LinkedIn has invited authorities to bl...

LinkedIn Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

LinkedIn Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you advertise on LinkedIn? Have you considered LinkedIn advertising and want to learn more? To discover everything there is to know about LinkedIn ads, I interview AJ Wilcox. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview AJ Wilcox, a LinkedIn ad expert. His agency, B2Linked, specializes in business-to-business advertising and lead generation on LinkedIn. In addition to managing accounts, AJ also specializes in LinkedIn ads training. AJ explores the different types of ads available on LinkedIn. You'll discover what B2B marketers need to know about advertising on LinkedIn. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How AJ Got Into LinkedIn Ads AJ is a long-time digital marketer who started out doing search engine optimization (SEO) and Google AdWords. About four years ago, a company in Utah recruited AJ. On his first day, he laid out his plans for SEO, pay per click, and social media to the CMO. She gave him the go-ahead and also informed him that the company had started a pilot program with LinkedIn ads. "See what you can do with it," she said. AJ replied, "absolutely," and then turned around and started laughing to himself. He felt like a veteran at digital marketing, yet had never heard of LinkedIn ads. He jumped into the platform to learn about it to try to keep the egg off his face. Within about two weeks, one of the salespeople approached AJ, telling him how much they loved the leads they'd been getting. When AJ discovered through Salesforce that the leads were all sourced from LinkedIn, he realized there was something to it. Listen to the show to hear how AJ started his business, B2Linked. Why Consider LinkedIn Ads? AJ explains that while Facebook's and LinkedIn's ad platforms are very different, they share the same principles. That means that if you have something nailed on Facebook, it will probably work well on LinkedIn and vice versa. While AJ doesn't run Facebook ads for his clients, when he's compared similar campaigns from Facebook to LinkedIn, he's found his conversion rate on LinkedIn to be about double that of Facebook. Plus, the sales teams have told him the LinkedIn leads are much higher quality than the ones from Facebook. LinkedIn is by far the best for B2B targeting, he continues. You can target by job title, seniority, company, skills, specific group membership, geography, and years in business; information people aren't putting on Facebook. AJ shares what he believes are the two best uses of LinkedIn ads. Number one is recruitment and the other is promoting B2B products and services such as an SaaS company (software as a service). Those businesses charge a substantial ongoing rate ($6,000 to $7,000 per month) for access to their software and have a lifetime value of more than $15,000. If you have a lifetime value of under $15,000, AJ cautions, make sure your funnel and your processes are really ironed out on Facebook first, because LinkedIn's cost per click (CPC) is much higher than Facebook's. Listen to the show to discover how to calculate lifetime value. The Ad Types When you go to LinkedIn.com/ads and start a self-service account, you'll have access to two different ad units. AJ explains the first type is text ads. These ads appear in the right sidebar of the LinkedIn homepage (on desktop) and you'll often see three ads there. According to AJ, text ads have a low click-through rate because most people are banner-blind to them. If four people click on them out of every 10,000 times they're viewed, you're doing great, he says.

Wolfe City TX SEO | Efficient Marketing in Texas

by Martin Hosner @ Search Engine Marketing Company

WE ARE Wolfe City SEO DOES YOUR Wolfe City TX BASED BUSINESS NEED MORE LEADS? Fill Out Our Discovery Form We are a leading search engine optimization in Wolfe City, Texas (ZIP: 75496). We have helped a lot of local businesses grow their revenue by ranking their website #1 in Google, Yahoo & Bing search […]

DHS chief shifting agency resources, hoping to hire more social workers

by Bob Fisher @ AM-1300 KGLO — Your Hometown News Station

DES MOINES — The director of the largest agency in state government says he’s trying to streamline office functions to free up money he could use to hire more social workers. Jerry Foxhoven has been director of the Iowa Department of Human Services since mid-June. He says many of the agency’s current social workers lack

7 Ways to Track Your Social Media Marketing Activities

7 Ways to Track Your Social Media Marketing Activities

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you tracking your social media marketing results? Do you know where to find metrics to help you improve? Tracking social activity helps you attract a higher-quality following, communicate more effectively and provide content that resonates with your audience. In this article you’ll discover seven ways to track metrics and improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Discover Optimal Times to Post Use a tool like SumAll to track metrics such as what times of the day you get the most engagement and which content types work best for your social posts. As you gather these insights, start scheduling your posts at optimal times. Make other changes as well, such as a different content type or voice, to connect with and grow your audience. #2: Examine the Reach of a Keyword on Twitter To track the reach of a specific keyword or hashtag on Twitter, use a tool like TweetReach. For example, if you're running a campaign with an associated hashtag, you can determine how far your hashtag traveled over a given time frame. TweetReach's free service will look at 1,500 tweets for a given keyword. For example, below are the results for a search for the hashtag #MondayBlogs. The results show that the term had a reach of nearly 211,000 accounts. TweetReach also shows you the most influential accounts that help spread your message and makes it easy for you to engage with them. With the premium service, you can track a hashtag over weeks or months to see how your campaign is spreading on Twitter. #3: Research Your Competition If you want to know where your competitors excel and where they're falling short on social, use a tool like Rival IQ to find out. Why is this good to know? If your competitors are tanking on Snapchat, for example, chances are you will too. Or if your competitors aren't on Snapchat, it might be worth a look to see why. Maybe they were on the platform previously and it didn't work out, or perhaps it's just a venue they haven't explored yet. A recent blog post from Rival IQ reveals engagement rates for Shopify and their competitors, complete with detailed graphics showing where each company has a social presence and where they get the most interaction. You may find some of the results surprising. For example, Shopify gets the most engagement on Instagram. That's probably not the first place you'd think people would go for an ecommerce solution, but Shopify is connecting well there. #4: Identify Industry Influencers Use a tool like BuzzSumo to identify who the influencers are in your field and what they're talking about. Then connect with those people, talk to them and make sure you're responding to them when they tweet you. Beyond that, you can use BuzzSumo to find out which posts are getting the most action, discover relevant keywords you may have been unaware of and find new Twitter chats to participate in. You can also see who shared the best content so you can target your following habits in the hope that they'll follow you back. Filter your results if you want to see what video is performing best or for details on infographics, for example. You can go back for a year, which is particularly useful if you have season-specific content. All in all, BuzzSumo gives you insights on how to word your posts and whom to engage with for growth on which social platform. It's a great tool for fine-tuning how you present your content on social media. Check out how your own posts rank to make sure that you're improving over time. #5: Determine Website Traffic Sources With a customized landing page, you can measure many metrics, the most basic of which is just where website traffic is coming from. Say you're spending 10 hours a week crafting Twitter posts because you're certain that your audience is there. If you then discover that your Facebook landing page is driving more traffic, you can streamline your efforts either by reducing the...

SEO Services in Hermiston OR

by JAROSLAW CHROBOT @ Small Business Marketing

As a small business owner, building a web site is just part of the process of getting your business noticed online. SEOin Hermiston OR 97838is undoubtedly a key part of the puzzle, and websites that get the best rankings from search engines, naturally tend to get the most organic traffic as well. Often however, small […]

The post SEO Services in Hermiston OR appeared first on Small Business Marketing.

Facebook Instant Articles: How to Get Started

Facebook Instant Articles: How to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you seen Facebook Instant Articles? Are you curious about how to publish them? To discover how to get started using Facebook Instant Articles, I interview Leslie Samuel. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Leslie Samuel, a blogging expert who runs BecomeABlogger.com. He's also the host of the Learning With Leslie podcast and the head of training for the Social Media Marketing Society. Leslie explores the benefits and challenges of Facebook Instant Articles. You'll discover what you need to know to get started with this new feature. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Instant Articles What Are Instant Articles? A relatively new feature, Facebook Instant Articles offers publishers content-hosting directly on Facebook, so users get a better mobile experience. If you're on the Facebook mobile app and you see an article with a lightning bolt at the top right of the open graph image, it's the Facebook Instant Articles version. When you click through to read that content, it loads very quickly because you're not leaving Facebook to go to another website. Listen to the show to learn about some special features you can add to Facebook's Instant Articles. Benefits for Bloggers Facebook has more than 1.65 billion users. Chances are, if you're trying to reach someone, they're on Facebook. One problem Facebook solves with Instant Articles is eliminating slow page-load times. According to a study by Kissmetrics, if a website takes longer than 3 seconds to load, more than 40% of those users will abandon it. Instant Articles makes content available very quickly. Other benefits include great user experience. Leslie adds that some of the interactive elements help the articles really stand out. Since Facebook seems to reward those producers whose content keeps people on Facebook longer, such as live broadcasting, I ask Leslie about Facebook's monetary benefits for those who choose to advertise. Leslie explains that if you use Facebook's Audience Network, you can do a revenue share. You keep 70% of the revenue generated from ad clicks. It's kind of like AdSense within your instant articles. Leslie doesn't see it as a huge benefit, because you can do that on your website with AdSense or other networks. However, Facebook makes it easy to use ads within your instant articles. According to Facebook, as of right now, they're not giving instant articles preferential treatment. However, the Facebook algorithm strives to show people the best content quickly. So, if more people click through to instant articles, Leslie can see the algorithm naturally giving preferential treatment to this content. Plus, Facebook will show content that gets a lot of engagement to more of the people who like your page. Facebook's desire to get users to spend more time on their platform gives content creators a unique opportunity. Leslie says that in the past, if people put up engaging images or videos and others shared them like crazy, they would get additional reach. With this control over content, ads, and links, a business could use that reach to benefit their brand and business, grow an email list, promote products, and more. For instance, put a link to an email opt-in form at the end of an instant article. Leslie believes that smart marketers using Facebook as a primary marketing platform will figure out how to take advantage of the benefits of instant articles to get users into their system. Leslie discusses the difference between Facebook Notes and Instant Articles,

Pinterest Marketing: How to Succeed on Pinterest

Pinterest Marketing: How to Succeed on Pinterest

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Pinterest for your business? Want to know what works on Pinterest? To learn how to improve your Pinterest marketing, I interview Jeff Sieh. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jeff Sieh, the is founder of ManlyPinterestTips.com, a site designed to help guys understand the marketing power of Pinterest. He also hosts the Manly Pinterest podcast where he explores the latest in Pinterest marketing. Jeff will explore marketing with Pinterest. You'll discover why your Pinterest following matters, as well as Pinterest posting tips. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest Marketing Jeff's backstory Jeff has a digital marketing agency in Longview, Texas, where he builds websites and does video marketing. A couple years ago, he decided it was time to take the plunge into social media. Driving home from a long road trip, Jeff was listening to the Social Media Marketing Podcast episode with Cynthia Sanchez, and got intrigued by Pinterest. Once he started playing on the platform, Jeff noticed it was driving a lot of traffic to his relatively new blog. After Jeff's Google+ post, called Manly Pinterest Tip #1, about sharing a secret board with his daughter, did really well, he wrote Manly Pinterest Tips #2-5.  Jeff explains that his concept for Pinterest was a play on the fact that everyone thinks Pinterest is for women. His "manly" version really took off. Jeff did an initial version of his podcast with four other guys. They did seven episodes before switching formats. At the beginning of the year, Jeff brought back the Manly Pinterest Tips podcast as a solo, weekly show, and has interviewed Pinterest experts, like Peg Fitzpatrick, Rebekah Radice and Cynthia Sanchez. He's done about 30 episodes. Since the Manly Pinterest Tips podcast did well, Jeff embarked on an experiment in branding. He figured it took a year to grow a good, manly beard. So he decided he would launch the website and build the brand for a year. "If it doesn't work, I can shave the beard off, it'll be fine," he says. "Well, it worked." Jeff explains the concept of secret and group boards. A secret board is something that only you or you and other people you designate can see. They are a great way to gather info for yourself or for collaboration. You can also create public group boards. Jeff has a board with Peg Fitzpatrick about bacon and an Instant Instagram Tips. Listen to the show to hear more about Jeff’s secret boards. Men & Pinterest Contrary to popular belief, there is tons of stuff for guys on Pinterest. Jeff explains that men are the fastest growing demographic on Pinterest. In 2014 the number of men on Pinterest doubled. In fact more men use Pinterest in the United States every month than read Sports Illustrated and GQ combined. To make his point about good content for men on Pinterest, Jeff calls out boards from the National Hockey League, the National Football League and Major League Baseball. Jeff also mentions his popular woodworking board, DIY boards (from Lowe's and Home Depot, for example) and more. All of this content appeals to men. Listen to the show to discover why Jeff finds the stereotype about men and Pinterest funny. Buyable pins Buyable pins are a way for people to purchase products through Pinterest. It's rolling out this summer, starting mostly with major brands like Macy's, Neiman Marcus and Nordstrom, and ecommerce platforms Shopify and Demandware. Buyable pins will be huge for business,

Facebook Video Retargeting for Live Video and Beyond

Facebook Video Retargeting for Live Video and Beyond

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you post videos on Facebook? Have you tried retargeting your live and uploaded videos? To explore techniques for retargeting your videos, I interview Amanda Bond. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Amanda Bond, who's known as the "Ad Strategist" specializing in Facebook ads. Amanda also advises top social pros and has taught the ADdicted Facebook Ads course. Online, she's known simply as Bond. Amanda explores Facebook video ads and retargeting. You'll discover how to use Amanda's technique to warm up your Facebook followers. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Video Retargeting for Live Video and Beyond Amanda's Story Before Amanda started working in social media marketing, she worked with big brands such as Pepsi and Labatt. As a salesperson for Pepsi, she went door to door to compete with Coke. After she sent two truckloads of Pepsi to a store for a large sale, Coke sent three. Looking over 110 pallets of pop, Amanda realized that the impact she was having in her sales role wasn't aligned with where she wanted to show up in the world. To move forward, Amanda decided to give back through her local Rotary service club. As the club's youngest member, she was encouraged to become their social media manager. When Amanda started working with her Rotary club in 2013, social media marketing felt like magic. Talking to people on the Internet seemed to create relationships out of thin air. However, Amanda quickly learned the impact of social when she used social media marketing for a live local Rotary event. To promote the event, the Rotary club used traditional marketing such as ads in the newspaper, and Amanda used everything she'd been learning about social media marketing. Throughout the weekend, the club expected 4,000 people to attend, but 23,000 people actually came, largely due to social media. That was Amanda's impetus to change direction in her career and she became a social media manager. As she became more versed in Facebook ads, she found that being an ad strategist was a great niche for her as a math and data nerd. Amanda now teaches and helps other businesses behind the scenes. She loves doing the deep dives into the data, helping people see the story the numbers are telling. Listen to the show to hear about Social Media Examiner's role in Amanda's early social media marketing efforts. What Retargeting Means The words retargeting and remarketing are interchangeable. Most people know about retargeting through the Facebook pixel, which is a tiny code snippet you add to your website. When someone lands on a page with this code, the Facebook pixel sends a message back to Facebook, saying something important is happening. Facebook has opened up new ways to retarget people (or show them content or ads based on prior actions), including video retargeting. Because Facebook has been emphasizing live video and video in the news feed, Amanda is especially excited about these video retargeting features. Anytime somebody sees at least three seconds of a video (recorded or live), Facebook takes note of who they are and puts them into a retargeting custom audience that you can use to retarget them again and again. I ask why you would want to retarget someone who watched a Facebook video. Amanda says it's part of getting people to know, like, and trust your brand. You want to start nurturing conversations that may lead to a sales transaction. As the Ad Strategist, she calls this framework "Connect, Convert, Close." In that connection phase, your audience may be cold (they may not know or have heard of you),

5 Ways to Get More LinkedIn Leads

5 Ways to Get More LinkedIn Leads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to build a pipeline of quality leads? Wondering how LinkedIn can help? With the right forms of targeting, pitching, and engagement, you can use your LinkedIn profile to secure warm leads for your business. In this article, you'll discover how to create an effective lead generation process with your LinkedIn profile. Listen to this article: #1: Use LinkedIn Search to Identify Prospects While getting more likes and followers for your company page is important, it doesn't necessarily generate leads. For lead generation, you need to connect with the right audience. Start by narrowing down the job roles you want to target; focus on the people who are most likely to understand the technical benefits of your product and have the authority to make a buying decision. You should consider talking to CMOs, CEOs, CTOs, COOs, or other heads of departments your product or service fits into. For example, if your product is a social listening tool that helps companies with brand mentions, crisis prevention, and other monitoring opportunities on the web, you would search for and connect with heads of marketing or digital marketing. After you connect with relevant people, pitch them with a soft sell. Introduce yourself and your company in a soft tone. Instead of trying to tell your new connection how amazing your company is with 500 words, ask to schedule a 10-minute call. It's also important to follow up on your pitch if you don't hear back. Follow up after a week and again after two weeks. Use Google Sheets and a good CRM to maintain the flow of leads and track each lead's stage in terms of conversion. #2: Connect With Website Visitors on LinkedIn When you add the following code to your website, you can see everyone who visits your website in the Who's Viewed Your Profile section on LinkedIn: These people are validated warm leads because they've shown some level of interest in your company. As you find people who fit your ideal lead, you can follow up with them via a LinkedIn InMail or an email from your personal business account. For example, your message could read something like this: Hi NAME, Hope you are doing well. My name is NAME and I am the DESIGNATION at COMPANY NAME. I just took a deeper look at your website and understand that your company might be looking for PRODUCT FEATURES OR SERVICE. At YOUR COMPANY NAME, we are SHORT DESCRIPTION OF YOUR PRODUCT FEATURES OR SERVICE. FEATURE 1/SERVICE OF YOUR COMPANY FEATURE 2/SERVICE OF YOUR COMPANY The companies that have been working with us for a long time include CLIENT 1 and CLIENT 2. I was wondering if we could schedule a call sometime this week to discuss this further? Regards, YOUR NAME DESIGNATION PHONE COMPANY NAME #3: Make Your LinkedIn Profile a Resource If you follow the lead generation process thoroughly, you'll form a significant number of connections over a short period of time. You'll need to engage your growing audience by sharing educational material that can help them. For example, if your product is solving problems in the hospitality industry and your leads are upper management of hotels, it's best to share content from your profile that talks about that topic. You should also consider publishing similar content on Pulse. The point here is to share valuable content that will help you build credibility with your target leads. To streamline this process, you can use tools like Hootsuite or Buffer to schedule content from your LinkedIn profile. #4: Share Advice in LinkedIn Groups One of the best ways to gain credibility, and by extension the notice of prospects, is to share your knowledge and insight with the very people you want to work with. LinkedIn groups offer a way for you to find these people and warm them up. If, for example, your company sells products or services related to the human resources industry,

Networking on LinkedIn: How to Build a Powerful Network Using LinkedIn

Networking on LinkedIn: How to Build a Powerful Network Using LinkedIn

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you active on LinkedIn? Want to use it to connect with potential partners and prospects? To discover how to network on LinkedIn, I interview Stephanie Sammons. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Stephanie Sammons, a social media strategist who specializes in LinkedIn. She's written extensively for Social Media Examiner about LinkedIn. She's also author of the new book, Linked to Influence. Stephanie will explore how to build a network and prospect using LinkedIn. You'll discover how to curate and share content on LinkedIn. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Networking on LinkedIn Stephanie's background Stephanie spent 15 years as a wealth manager at big financial firms. After the financial meltdown in 2008-2009, she ended up taking a package and starting over. Stephanie decided to launch her own business. Initially, she stayed within the financial industry, but then went into the digital marketing space, doing web development and design. For the last five years or so, Stephanie has been writing and speaking about LinkedIn. When she couldn't find a comprehensive resource on LinkedIn, she decided to write one. There were books about your LinkedIn profile and about how to network on LinkedIn, but she wanted one that covered all the bases. Stephanie's book, Linked to Influence, provides a framework for building your own personal brand on LinkedIn, and includes networking and other opportunities as well. Listen to the show to hear why Stephanie says LinkedIn saved her life. Why people use LinkedIn There are almost 400 million members on LinkedIn, 30% are from the United States and 70% are international. Over 60% of LinkedIn members make more than $75,000 a year and 40% of LinkedIn members make $100,000 or more. The users are affluent, well-educated and come to LinkedIn to really connect with others. They want to find or share information, news and knowledge, but also want to build a network, connect with others and make things happen for their businesses. Stephanie likes how LinkedIn does content aggregation. LinkedIn's Pulse app curates news, based on your network. The smarter your network, the more relevant the content and information you see on Pulse. It includes articles from major media outlets, as well as stories from people you're connected to who are publishing content on LinkedIn's platform. The interface on the Pulse app is fantastic, Stephanie says. You can zip through it, save articles, share them and comment. Listen to the show to learn most people's perception of LinkedIn. Benefits of a good network Stephanie refers to cultivating the right LinkedIn community as building a smart network. The smarter your network, the more relevant people and opportunities you attract. Have a valid reason for bringing someone into your network. A smart network has market opportunities unique to you. Everyone's situation is different, Stephanie explains. Look at people in your home and work locations, current and previous industries, your organizations and associations, referral sources, potential business partners, suppliers in your industry, journalists and more. Take a 360-degree view of the people you know and decide who are the most important. Connect with high-quality people and get to know them better. Listen to the show to discover the myth of a large network. How to build your network Stephanie is very strategic about who is in her network. She does not connect with every journalist or every person she meets at an event. However, she says,

Interview in Digital Marketing Magazine

by Drew @ London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies

Me (and my ‘tache) made it into Digital Marketing Magazine.

The post Interview in Digital Marketing Magazine appeared first on London Freelance SEO Consultant – Drew Davies.

Snapchat or Instagram? Deciding Which Platform Is Ideal for Your Visual Content

Snapchat or Instagram? Deciding Which Platform Is Ideal for Your Visual Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is visual content part of your social media marketing? Are you trying to decide whether to use Instagram or Snapchat? Snapchat and Instagram share the same basic purpose. While many businesses want to know which is better for marketing, the truth is both have value. In this article you'll find insights to help you decide whether your visual content campaigns should be on Snapchat or Instagram. Snapchat and Instagram Stats Instagram and Snapchat have more similarities than just being photo sharing platforms. They also have some commonality in how they both appeal to younger age groups, are mobile-driven and have large portions of their audience use the apps daily. Listen to this article: When determining which platform to use for your next campaign (or even in general), learn the important metrics for each to make an informed decision. Snapchat Metrics Snapchat launched in 2011, though it's only recently that businesses and brands started to use it as a marketing tool. Snapchat has 100 million daily active users, and there are 400 million snaps per day. More than 60% of Snapchat users in the United States are 13 to 34 years old, and 37% are between 18 and 24 years old. The platform is particularly popular among college students; 77% of them use it daily. Engagement on Snapchat, if any, is private. Snapchat's images (which do not have to be high-quality) are only temporary, and only 2% of marketers are currently using Snapchat.   Instagram Metrics Instagram was launched in 2010, and quickly picked up steam, especially since Facebook purchased Instagram as their new sister company. Instagram has more than 400 million monthly users, and there are more than 80 million photos posted daily. The platform also skews young: 53% of Instagram users are 18 to 29 years old; 25% are 30 to 49 years old, and 11% are 50 to 64 years old. Engagement on Instagram is public, and comes in the form of hearts, comments and shares. Instagram now offers ads, partnered with Facebook Ads. Instagram heavily utilizes hashtags, has a wide international reach and incredible click-through rates. Instagram allows cross-posting to Facebook, Flickr and Twitter. #1: Snapchat Marketing Snapchat allows users to either send snaps (photos and videos) to specific individuals or share them with all contacts through "stories." These images and videos aren't professional; they're "snapped" with a phone's camera. You can edit snaps with the platform's basic features, which include the ability to add text. When you share a snap individually, it disappears quickly; an image lasts 10 seconds and a video only for its duration. Since only 1% of businesses currently use Snapchat as a marketing tool, there's a lot of room for businesses to grab hold of their audience without worrying about the looming competition. If you aim to target college students, Snapchat can be incredibly valuable. With Snapchat, it's all about the timing. Businesses that have done well on Snapchat understand how to harness good timing and urgency in promotions. Businesses Using Snapchat Taco Bell, GrubHub and 16 Handles are examples of businesses and brands that have done well on Snapchat. Taco Bell, which knows their target audience well, followed users to Snapchat. They successfully take advantage of the timely feel of Snapchat: snaps and stories are temporary and the audience doesn't linger. Taco Bell has been known to send out stories late at night, when nothing else is open and college students have the munchies. Considering there's a Taco Bell on or close to most college campuses, and almost no one sleeps normal hours at major universities, this is near genius. It has brought them success. GrubHub also takes advantage of the urgency of Snapchat. They'll send out coupon codes, updates and deals, which are sometimes hinted about on Twitter, but require Snapchat to obtain. The codes are temporary,

How to Use Facebook Business Manager to Share Account Access

How to Use Facebook Business Manager to Share Account Access

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have multiple business pages and ad accounts on Facebook? Looking for a secure way to share access to them? Facebook's Business Manager makes it easy to give people access to your Facebook presence without sharing your password. In this article, you'll discover how to add your Facebook accounts to Business Manager. Listen to this article: #1: Set Up Business Manager To get started with Business Manager, first you need to create an account. Go to https://business.facebook.com/ and click the Create Account button. Log in with whatever credentials you currently use on Facebook. In a minute, you'll be able to designate a business email address, which will be the one that appears on and communicates with the Business Manager tool. Next, enter your business name and click Continue. Now type in your name and the business email address that you want Business Manager to communicate with. Even though you use your personal credentials to log in, everyone else you interact with through the tool will see your business address. When you're done, click Finish. Now that you've set up your account, here's how to use it to manage your Facebook business pages and ad accounts. #2: Connect With Business Pages Facebook's Business Manager lets you manage multiple Facebook pages, get an overview of analytics when you log in, and jump from one page to another within the tool. Here's how to add your page, request access to a page, or create a new one. Claim an Existing Page To claim an existing Facebook page that your business owns, click on Claim Assets and select Page. Then type in either the page name (which should begin to auto-populate) or the page's URL. The auto-populate feature is hit or miss, so it's a good idea to have the page URL in hand. When you're finished, click Claim Page. Request Access If another admin is managing the Facebook page, click Request Access and select Page. Then type in the Facebook page name or URL for which you want to request access and click Request Access. Create a New Facebook Page If you don't yet have a Facebook page, or want to create an additional one, click Add New and select Page. Next, select the category for your new page and then follow the prompts to finish setting up your page. Manage Your Pages Once your Facebook page is set up, you can easily manage it from within Business Manager. To do this, simply click the name of the page that you want to manage on the overview page of Business Manager. To quickly jump back and forth between the tool and your pages, click the Menu button to display or hide the Business Manager menu whenever you're on your Facebook page. #3: Assign Access to Pages Managing who has access to your Facebook pages is an important and welcome function of the Business Manager tool. To add new people, click Add New and select People. As you can see below, Facebook clearly defines what level of access admins have versus employees. Type in the email address of the person you want to add. Next, select which of your pages you want this person to be able to access, and which role he or she will be assigned. For more information about roles, select Learn About Roles from the Default Role menu, which will help you further decide what level of access to grant the new person. Next, select any ad accounts to which your employee will have access. Finally, you can assign your employee to a product catalog if you have one set up. If not, click Skip. You should now see a confirmation that your invitation has been sent. It will be delivered to the email address that you entered in Step 1, and you'll receive notification when that person has accepted his or her new role. If at any time you need to change an admin's or employee's role, click Business Settings and then select People. #4: Add Ad Accounts There are three ways you can add Facebook ad accounts to B...

4 Successful Influencer Campaigns You Can Model

4 Successful Influencer Campaigns You Can Model

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to improve awareness for your business? Have you considered collaborating with influencers? Working with influencers to promote your product or service to their audience is an effective way to meet your marketing objectives. In this article, you'll find four influencer marketing examples and ways to connect with influencers. Listen to this article: #1: Boost Sales To encourage people to purchase your product, work with an influencer to promote a discount code to their audience. Swedish watchmaker Daniel Wellington collaborated with thousands of influencers on Instagram to post images along with a caption that included a discount code for 15% off Daniel Wellington watches. The watches are positioned in a setting that's natural for the influencer, as you can see in the image above from artist David Ambarzumjan, and below in the image posted by blogger Adriana Gastélum. This campaign helped Daniel Wellington evolve from a $150,000 startup into a brand that's worth $220 million in less than five years, and increase profits by 214% between 2014 and 2015. #2: Build Brand and Product Awareness If you want to build awareness for your brand or a new product, consider reaching out to engaged and dedicated audiences through influencers. To make the most of that outreach, ask your influencers to use a branded hashtag when they post. Top fashion brand Chanel made full use of branded hashtags to build anticipation and awareness for their new perfume Chanel No. 5 L'Eau. They invited influential Instagrammers like Jessica Mercedes Kirschner to their production facilities and flower fields located in Grasse, France, for an inside look at how Chanel makes their iconic perfumes. As each influencer shared interesting images from the tour with their audience, they included two branded hashtags: #newchanel5 and #chanelgrasse. Chanel even worked with top bloggers like Julie Sariñana from Sincerely Jules, whose original post generated more than 40,000 likes on Instagram. Within one month, the campaign generated more than 1,600 unique contents with the hashtag #newchanel5, garnering almost 1 million likes, and exposing the upcoming product to more than 9 million social media users. #3: Increase Foot Traffic People can easily see through fabricated content. That's why authenticity is key when you want to make a compelling case for people to experience what you have to offer. When you work with influencers to promote a destination, genuine reactions are more likely to encourage people to take action, rather than a post that's too heavy on scripted endorsement. The Hawaiian Tourism Authority focused on authenticity when they chose to work with top travel Instagrammers to showcase Hawaiian experiences that made people feel they could have the same experience. They collaborated with several top Instagrammers including Jordan Hershel, who's known for visiting some of the most scenic locations across the globe. He posted beautiful images that communicated an alluring picture of Hawaii, reinforcing the islands' reputation of being a traveler's paradise. Each image was accompanied by the hashtag #LetHawaiiHappen. The campaign generated almost 100,000 posts using the hashtag, and the Hawaiian Tourism Department managed to reach 54% of travelers across the U.S. using social media marketing and paid advertising. What's more, 65% of users who saw the campaign intend to visit Hawaii within the next two years. #4: Improve ROI Marketing can be expensive. Especially if you're a startup or small businesses, it's important to look for cost-effective methods to market your business and products. To launch an effective influencer marketing campaign without exceeding your marketing budget, you can partner with mid-level influencers. Try The World wanted to raise awareness for their range of food subscription boxes. Instead of hiring a top-tier celebrity,

Facebook Video for Marketers: Strategy for Future Success

Facebook Video for Marketers: Strategy for Future Success

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos for your business? Wondering how to best leverage your videos on Facebook? To explore Facebook video strategy, I interview Jay Baer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jay Baer, a digital marketing and social media strategist. He authored Hug Your Haters, a book about social care, and also hosts the Social Pros Podcast and the Jay Today show. Jay discusses the differences between video on Facebook and YouTube. You'll discover the tech and tools Jay uses to produce his own videos. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Video for Marketers Facebook Versus YouTube Jay says a lot of people do very well with YouTube videos, and just as many do well with Facebook videos. However, not too many people do equally well with both because each platform has a specific use case. People watch YouTube as a replacement for television entertainment or they're searching for how-to videos. On Facebook, videos appear in the news feed and can interrupt people while they're on the platform. At Convince & Convert, Jay says they advise clients to think about what the video is and under what circumstances people will want to watch it. Based on that assessment, choose one of the platforms as the primary home for the video. I mention how views of The Last Jedi trailer on Facebook far surpassed views on YouTube within the first 30 minutes of its release. Jay responds by noting a few factors that might have contributed to that difference at that particular point in time. One is that Facebook allows users to share content with others easily. Also, Facebook defines a "view" differently than YouTube. Although we both suspect most viewers of The Last Jedi are watching the whole trailer, marketers should remember that Facebook counts 3 seconds as a view, whereas YouTube requires 30 seconds. Also, a video on Facebook may receive substantially more views immediately after it's posted but the YouTube video may receive more views in the long run, especially on a strong YouTube channel. To clarify how The Last Jedi example pertains to the everyday marketer, Jay stresses that Facebook drives exposure based on engagement. So if you put a video on Facebook and a disproportionate number of people like, comment, and share, then a disproportionate number of people will see the video in their feed. This visibility gives even more Facebook users an opportunity to share the video with somebody else, and the cycle continues. Jay sees this ripple effect every time he posts a video on Facebook. If he gets immediate engagement, then more people see it. If he doesn't, users' engagement with the video will plateau. Next we talk about streaming live video to Facebook versus YouTube. For vlogging, Jay says that you could use both Facebook and YouTube. Jay does something like this with his Jay Today show. He streams the live video first on his personal Facebook profile and posts the video file elsewhere afterward. Jay explains that Facebook's API prevents you from live-streaming anywhere else while you're streaming to Facebook Live. To stream to Facebook Live, Periscope, and YouTube Live simultaneously, you would need multiple phones or computers. That limitation is one reason Jay goes to Facebook Live first; he can't be anywhere else. He also notes that on YouTube (for now at least), you need to have 1,000 or more subscribers to stream live video from a mobile device. So YouTube's live video feature isn't as widely accessible as Facebook's. Listen to the show to hear Jay discuss his approach t...

Mobile Local Marketing: Reaching the Mobile Customer

Mobile Local Marketing: Reaching the Mobile Customer

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a local business? Want an effective way to market to people who are near you? To explore how to reach your customers with mobile marketing, I interview Rich Brooks. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Rich Brooks, author of The Lead Machine: The Small Business Guide to Digital Marketing. He's also host of The Agents of Change podcast and The Agents of Change Digital Marketing Conference. Rich explores how local businesses can use mobile marketing to deliver relevant messaging to their customers. You'll discover how to combine mobile marketing with social media. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobile Local Marketing The Importance of Mobile In 2017, every business should focus on mobile, Rich says, especially businesses with physical locations and a local audience. Mobile is important because people always have their devices by their side. For example, when Rich takes his daughter to volleyball practices in different towns, he uses Waze on his phone to get directions. Then after dropping her off, he goes to Yelp to find a coffeehouse or asks Google or Siri to find the nearest supermarket so he can go shopping. While he waits in line, Rich explores Facebook, Twitter, or Instagram; plays a game; or reads a news article. Because people are always on their phones, local businesses can attract customers who are looking for information on the go and making immediate decisions. If those people are in your area, you can capture their business with a strong mobile presence. Listen to the show for more about how potential customers use mobile. Mobile Offers and SMS Messages To engage people on mobile, Rich says you can create mobile offers, which are being redeemed at 10 times the rate of old print coupons. Mobile offers take many forms. You can run a Facebook campaign on mobile, promote an offer that's available on a mobile device, or tell people they can download a deal onto their phones and show it at the counter. Another option is SMS text messaging. Rich explains that SMS offers work a lot like email marketing. For example, a pizzeria can send people discounts. A massage therapist near Rich gives customers who opt into SMS text messages first dibs on appointment times that open up due to last-minute cancellations. To send SMS marketing messages, you start by finding an SMS marketing vendor in your area. These vendors work similarly to email marketing vendors, such as MailChimp, Constant Contact, AWeber, and smaller local players. Your vendor assigns you a short code and customers opt into your SMS messages by texting that code and confirming they want to receive your messages. Rich says a pizza restaurant might tell customers, "Text Pizza to 004400." After you're set up to send messages, you can start building your SMS marketing list. Rich emphasizes that people will sign up to receive messages only if you offer an incentive for signing up. For a pizza business, that incentive might be a dollar off, a free topping, or free delivery. Rich suggests promoting your SMS list on your social media profiles, website, flyers, and product packaging (such as pizza boxes). Rich says you can expect a smaller but more engaged audience for your SMS messages. Fewer people will opt in, but right now those who do are much more likely to look at their text messages immediately. Rich predicts that engagement with SMS messages may drop off if people become overwhelmed with text messages, but says that currently SMS is still fairly new and can be a boon to a local business.

Influencer Marketing: What You Need to Know to Get Started

Influencer Marketing: What You Need to Know to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your company work with influencers? Want to incorporate influencers into your marketing? To discover what you need to know about influencer marketing, I interview Lee Odden. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Lee Odden, an influencer marketing expert. He's the author of Optimize, the CEO of TopRank Marketing, and his company produces TopRankBlog.com. Lee explores influencer marketing and what you need to know to do it well. You'll discover how to work with influencers. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Influencer Marketing What is influencer marketing? Lee says the roots of influencer marketing are in advocacy and public relations organizations. You're essentially working with people who are really famous in an industry. The idea is to create an affinity for the brand for however that celebrity is known, and to reach the audience that celebrity has been able to attract. Lee adds that people still have the idea that if they convince famous people to talk about their company, then they'll be famous too. The reality is that, today, especially in the world of social media, people are empowered to follow their passions to create, curate, connect with others, and attract a following. This allows people to create their own influence. Everyone is influential about something, Lee says. Not just famous people can be part of your influencer marketing program. An influencer can be an employee like "Ted in engineering," who has a blog with 5,000 subscribers. Or, it could be that person with a million followers. It could even be customers who are advocating for you every chance they get. When you work with people who have subject matter expertise and an active network, you can advance your brand goals in some really powerful ways. On platforms like YouTube, Instagram, and Snapchat, there's a whole category of people called creators. They have various levels of celebrity, influence, or network size, and have anointed themselves as experts. There are marketplaces where brands can go and literally shop for a tweet, an Instagram image, product placement in a YouTube video, etc. For companies in the business of paying to play, it's a good fit. There are also brands that want to develop relationships with people who are truly thought leaders in their industry, or up-and-comers. They want to develop relationships, because they have an affinity for each other and have things their common audiences care about. There's no right or wrong, but it's important when setting expectations to know what you're going to get out of it. What is the distinction between a celebrity and a thought leader? Lee brought up an expression he borrowed from Scott Monty, "brandividual." This is someone truly invested in developing his or her own brand, except they're an individual. These professional influencers write books, give keynotes, and do all sorts of amazing things. Lee adds it's an important distinction to make between someone who is exclusively focused on being well-known and someone who is a true thought leader. He's not saying a brandividual can't be a thought leader. A thought leader is someone expressing original thought. They're creating content based on intelligence, experimentation, and observations. Brian Solis is a great example of a thought leader, Lee says. In addition to being really good at promoting himself, Brian is constantly experimenting. He does research. He interviews. And then collects, analyzes, and interprets the data. His experiments and experiences help form the thought leader con...